Professional Documents
Culture Documents
USERS GUIDE
\
)
=
=
1
2
1
1
Q
a
=total demand at node a
q =total demand at node b
Q
a
total lunknown
=total real demand minus total known demand
n =nnumber of pipes in network
m =number of pipes connected to o node a or b
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-440 WaterCAD Users Manual
The steps for using the unit line method are as follows:
1. Select Loading'Unit Line Method'Create K Factor Attribute from the Water-
GEMS menu. This will show the Select WaterGEMS Model dialog. Navigate to
the model you wish to modify. Once selected you should see the following
message.
Note: Adding the K Factor attribute to the model only needs to be
performed once, for any individual model. The process simply
creates a user defined attribute for pipes, that is then used to
record K factors for use in the unit line method calculations.
In order to create the K Factor attribute, you must first close any
other open applications that have the model database open (e.g.,
WaterGEMS, MS Access etc). You will be prompted if this is
necessary.
At this point you will need to define the various input data required for the unit
line method. Specifically the required steps are:
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-441
Define K values for all necessary pipes. This data can be entered on the User
Data tab for pipes as pictured below, or by using FlexTables.
Create selection sets that define the areas in the model that relate to your
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-442 WaterCAD Users Manual
unknown demand values.
2. Select Loading'Unit Line Method'Unit Line Method from the WaterGEMS
menu.
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-443
3. Select the [] button on the dialog that is displayed.
4. Clicking on the [] button will show the Select WaterGEMS Model dialog. Navi-
gate to the model you wish to modify.
Note: You can select either *.wcd or *.mdb files, by toggling the 'Files
of type:' field in the Select WaterGEMS Model dialog.
5. Once you have selected the model that you wish to work on the scenario becomes
selectable, and the demands and calculation tabs are also selectable.
6. Select the scenario to which you want to apply the demands.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-444 WaterCAD Users Manual
7. Click the Demands Tab. This is where you associate unknown demands with the
area (selection set) in the model.
8. Click Add to create a new unaccounted for demand.
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-445
9. Select the appropriate selection set and enter its demand value, then click OK.
Repeat until you have defined all demands.
Click on the Calculation Tab and you will see several options that are explained
below:
Apply demands to junctions. This specifies that unaccounted for demands are
to be applied to junctions (the default).
Apply demand to tanks. This specifies that unaccounted for demands are to be
applied to tanks.
Note: If both of the above options are selected, both junctions and
tanks will receive demands according to the above formulae. If
neither is selected, a message will be displayed advising that the
calculation cannot proceed.
Preview Results in Excel. Allows you to see the calculation results in Excel
instead of applying them to the model.
Destination worksheet. Relates to the previous option.
Apply results to model. Sets the calculation results to be applied to the model.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-446 WaterCAD Users Manual
Append to existing alternative. This option results in the demands being
appended to the specified existing demand alternative.
Create new alternative. Allows the creation of a new demand alternative to
accept demands.
10. When satisfied with your selections, click Calculate. If previewing the results in
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-447
Excel, each selection set will be displayed and will look like the following.
Even Distribution By Pipe
The even distribution by pipe method is virtually the same as the unit line method
including the same data requirements, however, the calculation performed is such that
all pipes receive an even share of the demand, which is the distributed to the end
nodes.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-448 WaterCAD Users Manual
Even Distribution By Node
The even distribution by node method is virtually the same as the unit line method and
even distribution by pipe method, including the same data requirements, however, the
calculation performed is such that all nodes receive an even share of the demand.
Unit Loads
The unit load feature brings SewerCAD like unit loads to WaterGEMS. The feature
consists of a Unit Load Library where you can define your unit loads, and the ability
to create and update unit load worksheets that can be used to create demands that
satisfy the format requirements for the demand synchronization feature, thus allowing
demands developed in Excel to be applied to the WaterGEMS model.
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-449
The steps for using the unit loading feature are as follows:
1. Select Loading'Unit Loads'Unit Load Library from the WaterGEMS menu.
This will show the following dialog.
Note: Unit loads are stored in a file called wdmUnitLoad.hlb in your
WaterGEMS installation directory. The first time you open the
unit load library it will be empty so you will need to populate it
with demands that make sense for your application. If someone
else has already defined unit loads you may import theirs using
the Import button. The import feature will identify and import any
unique loads.
2. Define any new unit loads, or edit any existing ones as required, using the Unit
Load Editor. The unit load editor has the following components:
Label. The name of the unit sanitary load as it will appear in the unit load
worksheet choice lists.
Loading Unit Type. Type of the unit load: population-based, area-based,
discharge-based, or used defined count-based. Loading Unit Type is selected
upon creation of a new unit load, and therefore this field is not editable.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-450 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: Loading Unit Type serves only to define the available unit load
units. For user defined units use user defined count based.
Unit Load Units. The base unit used to define the unit load.
Unit Load. The amount of flow contributed per unit load unit.
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-451
3. Select Loading'Unit Loads'New Unit Load Worksheet from the WaterGEMS
menu. This will show the following dialog.
4. Select the [] button on the dialog that is displayed.
5. Clicking on the [] button will show the Select WaterGEMS Model dialog. Navi-
gate to the model you wish to use as the basis for defining unit loads. Junction and
pattern drop down lists will be populated using the contents of the model (and
scenario) that you specify.
6. When you have selected your model, the rest of the dialog becomes editable.
Select the scenario you wish to apply your unit loads to and the flow units that you
wish to work in. Specify a new work sheet name for the worksheet (a new Excel
worksheet will be created) and the number of rows in the worksheet that you
expect to need for assigning unit loads.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-452 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: If you don't choose enough rows right now, you can update the
number later.
The units that you select for the unit loads do not affect the units
used in the model, so you are free to work in whichever units
you need.
7. Click on OK when you are ready to create you new unit load worksheet. A new
worksheet will be created in Excel. You can use that worksheet to define your unit
loads as shown.
8. If after starting work on your unit load worksheet you wish to add more rows, or if
you modify your unit load library and want the worksheet to reflect the changes
you can automatically update the worksheet by selecting Loading'Unit
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-453
Loads'Update Unit Load Worksheet from the WaterGEMS menu. This will
display the same dialog as used to create the unit load worksheet, except that you
cannot type a new name for the worksheet; you will only be able to select from
existing unit load worksheets.
9. When you wish to apply the unit loads to your model, you will note that the first
three columns of the unit load worksheet match the columns used in the demand
synchronize feature. Thus to apply demands to your model, simply follow the
steps described in the demand synchronization section, to sync in your demands to
Excel, then copy and paste demands into the synchronization worksheet, and sync
them back to your model.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-454 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: Since unit loads are calculated by a formula, you will need to use
Excel's Paste Special feature to paste values in lieu of formulae.
Patterns
The patterns feature provides the ability to define weekly and yearly patterns using
daily and monthly multipliers. The feature can only be applied to hydraulic demand
patterns.
Weekly/Yearly Patterns
The steps for using the weekly/yearly patterns feature is as follows:
1. Select Patterns'Weekly/Yearly Patterns from the WaterGEMS menu.
2. Select the [] button on the dialog that is displayed.
3. Clicking on the [] button will show the Select WaterGEMS Model dialog. Navi-
gate to the model you wish to modify.
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-455
Note: You can select either *.wcd or *.mdb files, by toggling the 'Files
of type:' field in the Select WaterGEMS Model dialog.
4. Once you have selected the model that you wish to work on the rest of the dialog
becomes editable.
5. Select the action you wish to perform. Either create a new or modify an existing
weekly or yearly pattern.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-456 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: Note the target pattern must conform to the action requirements.
For example, in order to create a new yearly pattern, you must
begin with either a daily pattern (0 to 24 hours) or a weekly one
(0 to 168 hours). You need not worry about selecting the correct
pattern type, however, since the list of available patterns is
filtered for you. Only patterns valid for the action you select will
be displayed in the drop down list. For this reason some action
types may not show any valid patterns in the drop down list.
6. Click on the Multipliers Tab. Depending on the type of pattern you have chosen to
create, the tab will look slightly different. The appearance of the tab fro creating a
weekly pattern is shown below.
7. Enter the multipliers you require and click on Create to create the pattern.
8. When prompted for a pattern label, enter one and click OK.
9. Your pattern will be created in the model. You can view the result in WaterGEMS
or in Excel using the Pattern Editor under the Tools menu.
Note: To create a pattern that includes both daily and monthly
variations, first create a weekly pattern from a daily one, then
create a yearly one from the weekly one you just created.
Reduce Points
Since yearly patterns can contain many points, especially if starting from a detailed
daily pattern, a simple tool has been added to allow patterns to have their number of
points reduced.
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-457
The steps for using the pattern point reduction feature is as follows:
1. Select Patterns > Reduce Points from the WaterGEMS menu.
2. Select the [] button on the dialog that is displayed.
3. Clicking on the [] button will show the Select WaterGEMS Model dialog. Navi-
gate to the model you wish to modify.
Note: You can select either *.wcd or *.mdb files, by toggling the 'Files
of type:' field in the Select WaterGEMS Model dialog.
4. Once you have selected the model that you wish to work on the rest of the dialog
becomes editable.
5. Select the pattern you wish to remove points from, and specify the percentage of
the points you wish to remove. When ready, click Reduce to remove the points
from the pattern.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-458 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: Pattern points are reduced evenly, however, without any regard
to the time of the points. For a pattern with evenly spaced times,
the result will be an even reduction, however, for patterns with
points clustered in detailed regions of the pattern, the result will
not necessarily be even.
Tools
The tools menu provides access to three WaterGEMS dialogs that are useful in the
context of the tools provided the WaterGEMS Demand Management Tool.
Demand Editor
This menu option displays the WaterGEMS Demand Editor. Selecting the option
requires the selection of the model whose demands you wish to edit, and selection of
the scenario to edit. Further help on this tool can be found in the relevant section in the
WaterGEMS manual or by clicking Help on the dialog.
Pattern Editor
This menu option displays the WaterGEMS Pattern Editor. Selecting the option
requires the selection of the model whose patterns you wish to edit. Further help on
this tool can be found in the relevant section in the WaterGEMS manual or by clicking
Help on the dialog.
Selection Sets Editor
This menu option displays the WaterGEMS Selection Set Editor. Selecting the option
requires the selection of the model whose selection sets you wish to edit. Further help
on this tool can be found in the relevant section in the WaterGEMS manual or by
clicking Help on the dialog.
Show WaterGEMS
This feature allows you to display WaterGEMS directly from Excel. If WaterGEMS is
not loaded, you will be prompted to specify a model to open, or you can just open
WaterGEMS without selecting a model. If WaterGEMS is already open then selecting
this menu option will simply switch to the WaterGEMS application. Useful for
viewing the results of demand/pattern edit operations.
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-459
Default Water Model
All the feature in the WaterGEMS Demand Management Tool require a WaterGEMS
model upon which to operate. If working with the same model and using a number of
the feature it may become tedious to specify the model each and very time. The
default water model feature allows you to browse for a specify a default water model.
When a default water model is defined, none of the other features in the WaterGEMS
Demand Management tool will ask for a model, and the ones that employ a []
button to browse for the model will be filled out in advance.
Note: Specifying a default water model does no preclude you from
using another if you wish.
The default water model is only remembered so long as you
have Excel open.
About
This dialog displays information about the WaterGEMS Demand Management Tool. It
also serves as the entry point for running test cases. If you intend to extend or modify
the WaterGEMS Demand Management Tool be sure to see the Test Cases section.
9.16.4 Water Objects
For the budding programmers out there, or others wishing to create custom Water-
GEMS extensions using WaterObjects, the WaterGEMS Demand Editor has been
deliberately left "open" to allow anyone to view (and modify) the source code. A
sample of the source code (Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications code) is shown
below.
Method returns the demand collection for the specified
junction.
Public Function GetDemandCollection(ByRef ademand-
Alternative As _
IHAlternative, ByVal anodeID As HmID) As IHEnumDe-
mands
Dim ademandRecord As IHDemandRecord
Dim aactiveElementRecord As IHActiveElementRecord
Set ademandRecord = ademandAlternative.Alterna-
tiveRecord(wtrJunction)
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-460 WaterCAD Users Manual
If ademandRecord.HasDemands(anodeID) Then
Set GetDemandCollection = ademand-
Record.Demands(anodeID)
Exit Function
End If
Set GetDemandCollection = Nothing
End Function
The Demand Management Tool has been written as an Excel Add-In (*.xla), however,
it is possible to program against WaterObjects using any number of programming
languages such as:
Any environment that supports Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications. (Word,
Powerpoint, Outlook, Access, Microstation, AutoCAD etc).
Visual Basic 6
C++
Java
Microsoft.Net (C++/C#/VB.Net/J#)
Any COM compliant language.
Generic code in the Demand Management Tool should be directly usable in any of the
applications listed at #1 above, in Visual Basic 6 (potential minor modification
required) and certain pieces of the logic can likely be ported to the other languages
listed. In this way the WaterGEMS Demand Management Tool serves as a useful
WaterObjects object model sample.
Test Cases
As part of our general philosophy of quality software development at Bentley Systems
we employ what is known in the software development community as unit testing. In
essence unit testing is code that is written to test that other code does what it is
supposed to. The following section describes the components of the WaterGEMS
Demand Management Tool, including the parts of the application that exist purely to
allow unit testing to occur. Unit testing is performed on a large part of the Water-
GEMS Demand Management Tool, but not all of it. (User interface elements are
generally hard to test in this manner). If you modify the code in the WaterGEMS
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-461
Demand Management Tool, be sure to run the test cases to make sure that they all
succeed. This is your check that you haven't introduced any bugs, at least for the parts
of the application that the unit tests cover. You can run the unit tests by showing the
About form (WaterGEMS ' About) and double-clicking three times on the Haestad
graphic. A 'Run Tests' button will then become visible. Click on it to run the tests.
Note: The tests can take several minutes and cannot be canceled.
If you add or modify functionality in the Demand Management Tool we encourage
you to add your own test cases.
Code Classes and Modules
A general description of the code classes and modules in the WaterGEMS Demand
Editor follows. It is not intended to be read per se, but to be used as a reference for
those interested in how to program WaterObjects and create their own customized
extensions to WaterGEMS.
Microsoft Excel Objects
DemandWorkbook
The DemandWorkbook is the Microsoft Excel Workbook object. It is by default called
"ThisWorkbook". Its name has been changed so as not to conflict with other Excel
Add-Ins you may have installed.
Forms
A form in Visual Basic for Application is a user interface element that allows the user
to interact with the software in order to enter or manipulate data and/or view results.
AboutForm
A form that shows information about the WaterGEMS Demand Application Tool.
Also serves as an entry point for running test cases.
ConfigureLibraryObjectForm
A form that allows the user to select the type of unit load to add to the unit load library.
DemandLoadingForm
A form that the user can use to configure settings for the Unit Line Loading, and even
distribution loading methods.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-462 WaterCAD Users Manual
DemandSynchronizeForm
A form that the user can use to configure the demand synchronization feature.
ErrorReportForm
A form used to display error messages for synchronization options to the user.
NewLabelForm
A form that allows the user to enter a new name for an object.
PatternSynchronizeForm
A form that the user can use to configure the pattern synchronization feature.
ReducePointsForm
A form that the user can use to configure settings for the pattern point reduction
feature.
ScenarioChooserForm
A form that allows the user to select a WaterGEMS scenario.
SelectionSetDemandEditorForm
A form that allows the user to specify a demand value to be associated with a selection
set. Used in defining unaccounted for demands in the demand loading features.
TestCaseForm [Testing Only]
A form that the user never sees, but is used to test some user interface aspects when
running the test suite. The test suite is a series of programmed tests that validate that
the Demand Management Tool code is performing correctly. See "Test Cases" above.
TestProgressForm [Testing Only]
A form used for indicating the progress of test cases to the user.
TestResultsForm [Testing Only]
A form used to display the results of test cases to the user.
UnitLoadEditorForm
A form that can be used to edit/define unit loads.
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-463
UnitLoadLibraryForm
A form that can be used to manage unit loads.
UnitLoadWorksheetForm
A form that can be used to configure settings for creating unit load worksheets.
WeeklyYearlyForm
A form that can be used to configure settings for weekly and yearly pattern creation.
Modules
A module in Visual Basic Applications is used to write code that is shared between
other parts of the application. For those familiar with Object Oriented programming
(OO) a code module is analogous to a class that exposes a number of static methods. A
code module can store globally accessible state in instance variables, although not a
recommended practice for design reasons.
ApplicationShared
This module serves as the location for all code that is shared within the WaterGEMS
Demand Management Tool, but that is not generic or widely usable enough to be
placed into either of the two following classes.
GemsSupport
This module contains generic code that acts against WaterObjects (sometimes called
the GEMS Object Model). This code should be usable in other custom written applica-
tions and we encourage you to make use of it.
GenericSupport
This module contains generic code that has no WaterObjects dependencies, although it
might have dependencies on Excel or Visual Basic for Applications objects. Code in
this module will be able to be used, unmodified, in other Excel Visual Basic for Appli-
cations projects.
TestBench [Testing Only]
This module acts as the entry point for executing unit tests.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-464 WaterCAD Users Manual
WindowsApiShared
This module contains all shared Windows API imported function definitions. These
can be used in other Visual basic for Applications projects and will also port directly
to Visual Basic 6.
Class Modules
A class module in Visual Basic Applications is used to define objects that have prop-
erties, methods and that can contain state. For programmers with Object Oriented
development experience a class module is in essence the same as an object oriented
class, however, Visual Basic for Applications class modules do not support class
inheritance which is a key requirement of an object oriented language.
Note: Any class module with the suffix "TestCase" or "Test" is used to test the class
module of the same name without the "TestCase" or "Test" suffix, and hence is not
listed or described below.
Demand
Implements IComparableObject. An class that defines a simple demand.
DemandLoadingModule
Implements ICalculationModule. The calculation engine for demand loading methods
including unit line loading.
DemandLoadingSheetValidater
Implements IWorksheetValidater. Validates that an Excel worksheet is valid for use
with the DemandLoadingModule.
DemandNode
Implements IComparableObject. A node class that knows about its original demand,
and its new demand assigned by the DemandLoadingModule, and that can apply its
demands back to the WaterGEMS model.
DemandSynchronizeModule
Implements ICalculationModule. The calculation engine for demand synchronization.
HmIDMap
An extension (wrapper) of the Visual Basic for Applications collection object, to
provide additional functionality for managing collections of HmIDs.
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-465
ICalculationForm
An interface that defines the contract for forms that work with ICalculationModules.
ICalculationModule
An interface that defines the contract for calculation modules.
IComparableObject
An interface that defines the contract for objects that can self evaluate equality with
respect to another object. Used by the ObjectManager class.
ILabelValidater
An interface that defines the contract for an object that can validate the label (e.g., for
uniqueness) of something.
ISynchronizeForm
An interface that defines the contract for forms that are used to provide the user with
synchronize in and out functionality. Used for demands and patterns.
ITestCase [Testing Only]
An interface that defines the contract for an object that executes unit tests.
IWorksheetValidater
An interface that defines the contract for an object that validates whether calculation
output can be output to an Excel worksheet.
ObjectManager
An extension (wrapper) of the Visual Basic for Applications collection object, to
provide additional functionality for managing collections of objects.
PatternEditModule
Implements ICalculationModule, ILabelValidater. The calculation engine for editing
and creating weekly and yearly patterns.
PatternSynchronizeModule
Implements ICalculationModule. The calculation engine for pattern synchronization.
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-466 WaterCAD Users Manual
PatternWrapper
Implements IComparableObject. A wrapper class for a WaterObjects HPattern class
that provides extended custom properties of the pattern and provides methods that can
manipulate the pattern. Used by the PatternEditModule.
RegistryHelper
A generic system registry manipulation class that can read/write string values to the
system registry. A potentially useful generic class.
SelectionSetDemand
Implements IComparableObject. A class that extends (wrappers) a Demand object to
include information about the selection set it is associated with. Is able to persist and
retrieve its state to/from a binary file.
SynchronizeSheetValidater
Implements IWorksheetValidater. Determines whether synchronization operations can
target specified Excel Worksheets.
TestManager [Testing Only]
The class responsible for managing unit test classes, running them, and showing test
progress.
TestResult [Testing Only]
Implements IComparableObject. A class that maintains information about the result of
an individual unit test.
TestResultManager [Testing Only]
A class that manages TestResult objects and that can answer up collections of passed
and/or failed test results.
UnitLoad
Implements IComparableObject. An class that defines a unit load. Is able to persist
and retrieve its state to/from a binary file.
UnitLoadLibrary
A class that manages UnitLoad objects and that can persist/retrieve its entire state to/
from a binary file.
Modeling Capabilities
WaterCAD Users Manual 9-467
UnitLoadSheetValidater
Implements IWorksheetValidater. Determines whether specified Excel worksheets can
be used for unit load worksheets.
UnitLoadWorksheetModule
Implements ICalculationModule. The calculation engine fro building unit load work-
sheets.
ValueManager
An extension (wrapper) of the Visual Basic for Applications collection object, to
provide additional functionality for managing collections of value types.
9.16.5 Known Issues (Excel 2000)
The WaterGEMS Demand Management Tool uses Excel Visual Basic for Applica-
tions (VBA) to execute code against WaterObjects, thus providing the tool's function-
ality. In order for the Demand Management Tool to appear as a menu in Excel it runs
VBA code when Excel is opened and also when Excel is closed. There is a known
issue with Excel 2000 that prevents the code that should run when closing Excel from
doing so. This can result in numerous WaterGEMS menus appearing in the Excel
menu, equal to the number of times Excel has been opened after installing the Demand
Editor.
This is a bug in Excel 2000 and has been confirmed by Microsoft and fixed in the SR-
1/SR-1a service release for Office 2000. Details of the bug can be found here:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;248172
The SR-1/SR-1a update for Office 2000 can be found here:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;245025
WaterCAD Demand Management Tool
9-468 WaterCAD Users Manual
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-469
10
Chapter
GA Optimization and
Calibration
The WaterCAD Darwin Calibrator provides a history of your calibration attempts, lets
you use a manual approach to calibration, supports multiple field data sets, brings the
speed and efficiency of genetic algorithms to calibrating your water system, and
presents several calibration candidates for you to consider, rather than just one solu-
tion. Darwin Calibrator lets you set up a series of Base Calibrations, which can have
numerous Child Calibrations that inherit settings from their parent Base Calibrations.
Note: Inheritance is not persistent. If you change the Base Calibration,
the change does not ripple down to the Child Calibrations.
Use Base and Child Calibrations to establish a history of your calibration trials to help
you derive a list of optimized solutions for your water system.
To use calibration manager, click Analysis > Darwin Calibrator.
1. Enter field data. Click the Field Data button to view, add, edit, and delete sets of
field data that you use to calibrate your water model.
2. Create groups that define what attributes of your model you want to adjust. Click
Groups.
3. Choose the options that define how you are evaluating your model. Click
Options.
4. Right-click in the calibrations area to add a Base Calibration, or click New Base
Calibration.
10.1 Darwin Calibrator
Darwin Calibrator lets you adjust your model to better match the actual behavior of
your water distribution system. This feature lets you make manual adjustments on the
model as well as adjustments using genetic algorithm optimization. Before you can
run the Darwin Calibrator, you must set up your calibration parameters.
The Darwin Calibrator dialog box has three distinct components:
Darwin Calibrator
10-470 WaterCAD Users Manual
The Calibrations area, which contains the list of base and child calibrations you
have tried.
The Calibration Groups area, which contains tabs containing the groups you set
up, including Roughness, Demand, Status, and Field data tabs.
The Calibration Solutions area, which contains the solutions calculated by your
Manual or Optimized calibrations.
Darwin Calibrator includes:
New Calibration on page 10-470
Optimized Calibration on page 10-471
Manual Calibration on page 10-473
Calibrations on page 10-474
Calibration Solutions on page 10-474
Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog Box on page 10-475
GA-Optimized Calibration Tips on page 10-476
Calibration Results Statistics on page 10-477
10.1.1 New Calibration
To start a new calibration trial, click the New or New Base buttons. If a Base Calibra-
tion already exists, you can also choose to add a new Child Calibration.
Base/Child Calibration: Base and child calibrations record a history of the
calibrations you try. The base and child relationship
work to help you remember the workflow or route
you have used to test your calibrations.
Optimized Calibration: Use a GA (Genetic Algorithm) optimized calibration
if you want WaterCAD to efficiently process and
evaluate numerous trial calibrations of your water
system. You can set the optimized calibration to
deliver several solutions for you to review.
Manual Calibration: Use a Manual Calibration if you want to test fitness
by adjusting roughness, demand, or status manually.
If you have specific solutions in mind, Manual
Calibration might let you quickly narrow-down or
refine the number and measure of adjustments before
you use the genetic algorithm.
Label: Enter a label for the calibration you are setting up.
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-471
OK/Cancel: Click OK to add the new calibration or Cancel to
exit without adding the new Calibration.
10.1.2 Optimized Calibration
Genetic-Algorithm Optimized Calibration provides the following tabs:
Roughness/Demand on page 10-471
Status on page 10-471
Field Data on page 10-471
Options on page 10-472
Notes on page 10-472
Roughness/Demand
The Roughness, Demand, and Status tabs display the groups you added when setting
up your Calibration Adjustment Groups (for more information, see Calibration
Adjustment Groups Dialog Box on page 10-486). If a tab is empty, then you did not
create a group for the condition represented by that tab.
Group: Displays the name of the group.
Operation: From, the drop-down list, select the operation you
want the calibration to perform.
Note: Try to choose an increment that gives the least number of
possible alternatives. You may need to decrease the range
between your upper and lower limits to do this.
Min/Max/Increment: Enter the minimum and maximum values that you
want the genetic algorithm to use as boundaries when
calculating fitness solutions. Set the increment as the
intervals at which you want the GA to test.
Status
Use the Status tab to see the initial status of the elements listed, whether pipes are
open or closed.
Field Data
The Field Data tab displays all the field data sets you have entered for the calibration.
Select the check box next to the name of the field data sets you want to use for the
calibration trial. Field data sets that have unchecked boxes next to them will not be
used to test fitness when you click Go or Compute.
Darwin Calibrator
10-472 WaterCAD Users Manual
Options
Use the Options tab to refine how WaterCAD applies the genetic algorithm (GA) to
your optimized calibration trials.
Note: Larger values for maximum trials and non-improvement
generations will make the optimization run longer. You may want
to start with fairly low numbers and then gradually increase the
numbers in subsequent runs as you want to ensure better
solutions. If a run seems to be taking long time, you may click
the Stop button to stop the optimization.
Reset: Click Reset to restore the software default values for
the Darwin Calibration Options.
Advanced: Click Advanced to access more Optimized
Calibration options (see GA Parameters Advanced
Options on page 10-490).
Fitness Tolerance: Set the precision with which you want the optimized
calibration to calculate fitness. As with many of these
settings, you should determine a tolerance that
balances accuracy and speed for your water models.
Fitness Tolerance works in conjunction with Non-
Improvement Generations.
Maximum Trials: Set the maximum number of calibration trials you
want the Optimized Calibration to process before
stopping.
Non-Improve Generations: Set the number of maximum number of non-
improvement generations you want the GA to
process without calculating an improved fitness. If
the Optimized Calibration makes this number of
calculations without finding an improvement in
fitness that is better than the defined Fitness
Tolerance, the calibration will stop. Non-
Improvement Generations works in conjunction with
Fitness Tolerance.
Solutions to Keep: Set the number of fitness solutions that you want to
keep. Rather than presenting you with only one
solution, WaterCAD presents you with a
customizable number of solutions, so you can review
them manually.
Notes
Type any notes that you want associated with the calibration.
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-473
10.1.3 Manual Calibration
Manual Calibration provides the following tabs:
Roughness/Demand on page 10-473
Field Data on page 10-473
Notes on page 10-473
Roughness/Demand
The Roughness and Demand tabs display the groups you added when setting up your
Calibration Adjustment Groups (Calibration Adjustment Groups dialog box). If a tab
is empty, then you did not create a group for the condition represented by that tab.
Group: Displays the name of the group.
Operation: From, the drop-down list, select the operation you
want the calibration to perform.
Value: Enter the value you want to use with the operation
you select for the Group.
Status
Use the Status tab to see the initial status of the elements listed, whether pipes are
open or closed, and whether the pipes status has been changed during the manual cali-
bration.
Field Data
The Field Data tab displays all the field data sets you have entered for the calibration.
Select the check box next to the name of the field data sets you want to use for the
calibration trial. Field data sets that have unchecked boxes next to them will not be
used to test fitness when you click Go or Compute.
Notes
Type any notes that you want associated with the calibration.
Darwin Calibrator
10-474 WaterCAD Users Manual
10.1.4 Calibrations
Note: After you make changes to a calibration, you need to click Go or
right-click and select Compute to recalculate the fitness.
If you change any calibration options, the fitness values will be
different and should not be directly compared to calibration runs
that used different options.
The calibrations data window shows all the base and child calibrations you have tried.
The Name of the calibration displays along with the fitness calculated for that calibra-
tion. 0 is an ideal, perfect fitness and lower numbers indicate fitnesses that rank better
than higher numbers.
10.1.5 Calibration Solutions
Note: A green square displays next to solutions created with the
current Calibration Options. You can compare the results for
solutions marked with green squares. If you change the
Calibration Options, previously calculated solutions display with
a gray square. Solutions with a gray square cannot be directly
compared to solutions with a green square.
The solutions data window shows solutions for the optimized or manual calibration
you select in the Calibrations data window.
Solution Drop-down ListFor manual optimizations, this drop-down list
contains one solution based on your Calibration. For Darwin Calibrations, the
solution drop-down list displays the most favorable number of solutions, based on
fitness, for the selected calibration. The number of solutions that display here
depends on what you set in the Solutions to Keep field of the Options tab (for
more information, see Optimized Calibration on page 10-471). Select the solu-
tion you want to see from the drop-down list and it displays in the data window.
Note: Any settings you made in the solution tree-view remain when
you switch solutions, which better enables you to compare
solutions.
Roughness/Demand/Status: Expand the tree-view to display the adjustments for
any roughness or demand groups, or the status of any
pipes you set up in your Adjustment Groups (for
more information, see Calibration Adjustment
Groups Dialog Box on page 10-486). Original
values and values adjusted by the manual or
optimized calibration are displayed.
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-475
HGL/Flow Observations: Expand the tree-view to display the simulated HGL/
flow against the observations you recorded in your
field data, and the difference between the observed
and simulated values.
Export to Scenario: Click the Export to Scenario button to export the
currently selected Calibration to the water flow
model. This opens the Export Calibration to Scenario
dialog box (for more information, see Calibration
Export to Scenario Dialog Box on page 10-475).
Copy to Clipboard: Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the
contents of the Solutions data window to the
clipboard. From the Windows Clipboard, you can
paste the solution data into other Windows programs,
like a word processor or text editor.
Report: Click the Report button to display a print preview of
the solutions data window.
Plot: Click Plot button to see a graph of your observed
data sets versus the HGL correlation between the
Simulated and Observed HGL.
10.1.6 Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog Box
Use the Calibration Export to Scenario dialog box to apply the results of your Opti-
mized Calibration or Manual Calibration to your water model.
OK/Cancel: Click OK to export your calibration or Cancel to
close the dialog box without exporting your
calibration.
Export Check Boxes: Select those check boxes next to those items you
want to export. Clear any check boxes you do not
want to export.
Export Scenario: When you Export to Scenario, the calibration can be
applied to your model by selecting it from the
Scenario drop-down list. You can rename the
scenario by typing over the default name.
Export Alternatives: Choose which items to export to your Alternatives.
You can rename Alternatives by typing over the
default name.
Darwin Calibrator
10-476 WaterCAD Users Manual
10.1.7 GA-Optimized Calibration Tips
Darwin Calibrator employs a powerful competent genetic algorithm search method
based on the principles of natural evolution and biological reproduction. This kind of
search algorithm is well suited to optimization of problems of a non-convex and
multiple local-optimal solution nature. Calibration of a hydraulic model falls into this
problem category and, as a result, a GA-optimization based search tool, such as
Darwin Calibrator, is a sound choice for hydraulic model calibration.
Despite all the good features of GA there are, however, some issues to consider:
A solution is fitter only in relation to other known solutions and, consequently, a
GA has no test for true optimality. As a GA only knows the best solution relative
to others, a GA has no precise rule for when to stop. This means that heuristic
methods must be used to determine whether to stop a GA run. In Darwin Cali-
brator you can set a GA run to stop either by:
Clicking Stop
Setting a maximum number of trial solutions
Setting a maximum number of non-improvement generations, whereby if the
fitness of the best solution does not improve by more than a specified toler-
ance in a set number of generations, then the GA stops
A GA is a non-deterministic method that relies to a certain extent on its initial
random population (starting locations in the solution space). Thus, each GA run
performed may produce different solutions. (If you keep all GA parameters and
fitness settings the same, the method is deterministic and will produce identical
solutions every time.) Given the fact that a GA has no true test for optimality, after
stopping a GA and producing a particular result, there is always the possibility
that if you run the GA again you may find a better solution. In fact, it is good prac-
tice to run a GA a number of times, each time modifying something about the GA
run (e.g., GA parameters, fitness weightings, or adjustment group settings), in
order to produce another set of potentially better results. At a minimum, the
random number seed should be changed for each individual run so that the GA
search initiates differently and therefore concludes differently.
The GA calculates fitness of each trial solution according to the defined objectives
for the optimization problem. GA only uses objective means to decide what
constitutes a fit solution, and what constitutes a less fit solution. The GA has no
way of subjectively assessing a solution other than the methods (weightings) built
into the definition of the fitness calculation. The best solution found by a GA
shouldnt be blindly accepted as being correct. To any single optimization
problem there are likely to be many solutions that closely match the required
objectives. Due to the fact that the GA has no concept of what constitutes a fit
solution, other than its performance against the defined objectives, the GA may
produce solutions that are impractical. That is, the GA cannot think for the engi-
neer, it can only search the combination of choices that are presented to it. If the
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-477
engineer doesnt provide the GA with high quality data and enough or sufficiently
flexible options to consider, then the GA may not be able to find a satisfactory
solution. Conversely if the GA is presented with too many possibilities to try (e.g.,
in Darwin Calibrator, if you define an excessively large adjustment group ranges
combined with a small adjustment increments and a large number of adjustment
groups), then the efficiency of the GA search is reduced, and the likelihood that
the GA will find the correct answer is also greatly reduced. GA is a highly sophis-
ticated search technique, but despite all of its great features, GA still must be used
with a degree of engineering judgment and skill. Only then can the engineer
expect the GA to find solutions that are not only fit, but are practical and likely to
represent the real life situation as accurately as possible.
Uncertainty in field observations should be assessed before these observations are
used in an optimization. It is not uncommon for errors in measurement of head
loss to be on the same order of magnitude or larger that the actual head loss
(Walski, 2000). Such values should not be used in calibration because the calibra-
tion algorithm will dutifully try to match the field observations even if they are
erroneous. To ensure that head loss is adequate to exceed measurement error, it is
helpful to collect data when velocities in pipes are appreciable. In some systems
sized for fire protection, demands (and velocities and head losses) are so low most
of the time that head loss measurements are meaningless other that to check pres-
sure gage elevations. Another problem that occurs when calibrating a model is
that some of the parameters determined are fixed and knowable at the time the
data were taken (roughness, valve status), while others are merely a random
observation from a stochastic process (water use). If a C-factor is determined as
90, then that value will be true in the not to distant future. If water use during a
pressure observation is determined to be 100 gpm (6.3 l/s), is that value the
demand that should be used in modeling, given that it is only one observation
from a distribution? The actual water determined from calibration may not be the
best value to use for representing the current year status of the system. You need
to decide if the water use observed during calibration is the water use that should
be used as a basis for future modeling.
10.1.8 Calibration Results Statistics
After a Calibration has been calculated, a dialog box displays a summary of the Cali-
bration Statistics. The information displayed includes the Fitness Rating, the number
of Generations, and number of trials. It also reports the status of the calibration calcu-
lations.
10.2 Field Data Sets
Field data sets includes:
Field Data Set Dialog Box on page 10-478
Field Data Sets
10-478 WaterCAD Users Manual
Field Data Sets Dialog Box on page 10-480
New Field Data Set on page 10-481
Field Data Observation Dialog Box on page 10-481
Entering Fire Flow Test Results on page 10-482
Select Element on page 10-483
Field Data Import on page 10-483
10.2.1 Field Data Set Dialog Box
Use the Field Data Set dialog box to define the field data you have collected. This
dialog box comprises three tabs:
Observations on page 10-478
Demand Adjustments on page 10-479
Notes on page 10-480
Observations
Date: Set the date of the observations and field tests.
Note: The time is important because it is used within any patterns or
diurnal curves you are using to track your water demand. The
time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand
multipliers (from hydraulic patterns), which are used to calculate
the junction demands that will be simulated in (GA) Optimized
Calibration.
Time: Set the time of the observations and field tests.
Note: You must enter a time. You cannot leave the Observations tab or
click OK until you set a time.
Time from Start: Displays the time difference from the time you set for
the field data set to the time defined as the start of the
scenario.
Observations: Click Insert to add observed data. Click Delete to
remove the selected row of observed data.
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-479
Note: Valve and pump flows are used as calibration targets, not
boundary conditions. Valve and pump flows are calculated by
using the valve setting and pump speed, which are used as
boundary conditions if observed. Tanks levels are also used as
boundary conditions.
Element Type: From the drop-down list, select the type of element
for which you want to enter data.
Note: Using the two buttons next to the Element drop-down list, you
can use the Select Element dialog box or select your element
directly from your drawing.
Element: Select the element for which you want to enter
observed data.
Attribute: Select the attribute for which you have observed
data. Different attributes are available for each
element, including: Hydraulic Grade, Pressure,
Discharge, and Status. Enter the observed value for
the attribute.
Value: Select a value from the drop-down list or type in a
value.
Import: This allows you to Import field data from a tab-
delimited ASCII text file. For more information, see
Field Data Import on page 10-483.
Demand Adjustments
Note: The Demand Adjustments all relate to the particular field data set
you are editing. Demand multiplier adjustments and additional
junction demands (e.g., fire flow tests) are in addition to, not in
lieu of, junction demands already calculated from pattern
multipliers.
Use the Demand Adjustments tab to adjust demand for the element. Select the element
for which you want to add an additional demand, such as flow from a hydrant, and
enter the value of that demand.
Override Scenario Demand AlternativeCheck this box to override the
displayed Demand Alternative and to use the Demand Multiplier. Clear this check
box if you do not want to use the Demand Multiplier.
Demand AlternativeDisplays the Demand Alternative associated with the
selected set of observations.
Demand MultiplierSet a demand multiplier that is applied to your water
model. For example, if you have knowledge that your demand is higher or lower
by a specific percentage, you can set that value here.
Field Data Sets
10-480 WaterCAD Users Manual
JunctionSelect the Junction to which you want to apply Demand Adjustments.
You can select a junction from a drop-down list, Select Element dialog box, or by
clicking the junction to select it from the drawing.
Additional DemandSet the additional demand at the selected junction.
Notes
Use the Notes tab to enter any comments you want saved with the adjustments.
10.2.2 Field Data Sets Dialog Box
Note: Field data taken at times of peak usage, in high-flow pipes, and/
or where there is significant head loss, will be more useful when
calibrating your model than data taken in low-usage, low-flow
areas, where there is little head loss.
The Field Data Sets dialog box lets you enter a variety of test data against which you
will calibrate your water model. WaterCAD lets you use more than one field data set
in your calculations.
Note: When entering fire flow test results, consider: Entering Fire Flow
Test Results. For more information, see Entering Fire Flow Test
Results on page 10-482.
Representative Scenario: Select the Scenario you want to use for the
calibration. For more information, see Scenarios
on page 8-358.
Note: Since Field Data Sets are linked to specific scenarios, a scenario
that is referenced by a field data set cannot be deleted unless all
field data sets that reference it are deleted beforehand.
Field Data Set: Displays the field data sets.
Note: The time is important because it is used within any patterns or
diurnal curves you are using to track your water demand.
The time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers (from
hydraulic patterns), which are used to calculate the junction demands that will be
simulated in (GA) Optimized Calibration.
(The demand at a junction during a GA Calibration run is the product of its baseline
demands and the demand factors at the time specified for the field data set.)
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-481
Pump settings and control settings, etc., are also determined from the time setting you
specify. Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire
flow tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from
pattern multipliers.
Also, a steady state run in WaterCAD will run with only junction baseline demands
applied, whereas an Optimized Calibration run based on a steady state scenario that
uses pattern multipliers for the specified time.
Date/Time: Displays the date and time that was entered for the
field data set. The date field is purely a label that can
be used to record when field measurements were
taken.
Add: Click Add to add a new field data set.
Edit: Click Edit to modify the selected field data set.
Duplicate: Click Duplicate to copy the selected field data set.
This can save you some time in entering new field
data as a new set, but make sure all entered data is
correct.
Delete: Click Delete to delete the selected field data set.
Rename: Click Rename to rename the selected field data set.
10.2.3 New Field Data Set
Enter the name of the field data set, or use the default name, and click OK.
10.2.4 Field Data Observation Dialog Box
Note: Using the two buttons next to the Element drop-down list, you
can use the Select Element dialog box or select your element
directly from your drawing.
The Observation dialog box lets you select elements in your model and enter observed
data regarding those elements, such as observed pressures, discharges, statuses, or
hydraulic grade.
Element: Select the element for which you want to enter
observed data.
Field Data Sets
10-482 WaterCAD Users Manual
Attribute: Select the attribute for which you have observed
data. Different attributes are available for each
element, including: Hydraulic Grade, Pressure,
Discharge, and Status. Enter the observed value for
the attribute.
10.2.5 Entering Fire Flow Test Results
When entering fire flows, there are two issues to consider:
How to enter the fire flows.
How to adjust demands at other nodes during fire flow test.
To enter a fire flow test:
1. In Darwin Calibrator, select Field Data > Add.
2. Name that Data Set (something like Fire flow at J-129).
3. Enter the observations as you would for any other condition (for more informa-
tion, see Field Data Set Dialog Box on page 10-478).
4. To enter the fire flow, select the Demand Adjustments tab.
5. Enter the Junction label where the fire flow occurred.
6. Enter and the additional fire flow as Additional Demand.
7. The additional flow is added to the normal demand at that node.
There are several ways to adjust the flows at the non-fire flow node. Only use one of
them:
If you want to use your EPS demand patterns, specify the correct time for the fire
flow test and the demand will be adjusted with the multipliers.
If you dont have EPS demand patterns or dont want to use them, set the first
flow time to the some time when the demand multiplier is one (or any time, if
there are no demand patterns). Then you have two ways to adjust background
demands.
You can specify a Demand Multiplier to use.
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-483
Note: Do not pick a demand alternative with fire flows because the fire
flows will be counted twice.
Or, you can specify some alternative demand other than the one corresponding to
the Representative Scenario.
You can let the Darwin Calibrator identify the demand multiplier. To do that, use a
time corresponding to a multiplier of 1, dont override the Scenario Demand
Alternative from the Representative Scenario, and let the Demand Multiplier be
one. In this way, the Calibrator will pick the demand multiplier.
10.2.6 Select Element
Use the Select Element dialog box to select an element from your model.
ElementsUse the Elements drop-down list to display all elements of one type,
from which you can select the element you want. From the drop-down list, select
<all> if you want WaterCAD to display all element types.
Select From DrawingClick Select From Drawing if you want to select the
element by clicking on it in your model.
10.2.7 Field Data Import
You can import Field Data from a tab-delimited ASCII text file. The text file to be
imported must be in the following format: Element Type, Element Label, Attribute
Value.
Press the Tab key once between each column. One attribute and value can be entered
per line, so to import multiple attributes and values for a single element, multiple lines
must be entered. There is no limit to the number of individual Field Data input items
that can be imported from a single text file, although all items contained in the text file
will be imported to the same Field Data Set. Imported data is appended to any input
data that has already been entered. In other words, importing field data information
will not overwrite existing input data, even when data for a particular element is
already present.
The types of data and the corresponding values that can be imported for each element
type are as follows:
Field Data Sets
10-484 WaterCAD Users Manual
* Whether this value represents Hydraulic Grade or Pressure is determined by the Global
Project Option Input Mode (see Input Modes on page 4-236).
EXAMPLE:
Pressure
Junction
J-1 Hydraulic Grade 65.3
Pressure Pipe P-1 Status Open
Pressure Pipe P-1 Discharge 100
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-485
To import field data from a tab-delimited text file in the format shown above, click
the Analysis menu and select Darwin Calibrator. Click the Field Data button, and
then click the Add button in the Field Data Sets window. Name the new field data
set and then click the Import button on the Observations tab of the Field Data Set
dialog box.
10.3 Adjustment Groups
Adjustment groups are available from the Groups button. They include:
New Adjustment Group Dialog Box on page 10-485
Rename Adjustment Group Dialog Box on page 10-485
Calibration Groups on page 10-486
Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog Box on page 10-486
Selection Set Dialog Box on page 10-487
10.3.1 New Adjustment Group Dialog Box
Type the name of your Adjustment Group, or accept the default name, and click OK.
10.3.2 Rename Adjustment Group Dialog Box
Type the name of your Adjustment Group, and click OK.
Pump PMP-1
Hydraulic Grade
Out
125
Pump PMP-1
Hydraulic Grade
In
37
Pump PMP-1 Status On
Tank T-1 Level 12
Adjustment Groups
10-486 WaterCAD Users Manual
10.3.3 Calibration Groups
The calibration groups data window displays a series of tabs that let you adjust the
conditions for the calibration trial. The tabs and options that are available depend on
whether you selected Manual or Optimized Calibration.
10.3.4 Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog Box
Note: Generally, you should not use one element per group but to do a
pipe-by-pipe calibration, or something similar, you must create a
group for each pipe.
Adjustment groups are used in the calibration process. You can create Adjustment
Groups for Roughness, Demand, and Status. Select the kind of group you want to
create and click Add to add elements to it. Or, select an existing group and Edit,
Delete, or Rename it.
Note: Adjustment Groups are a key component of the calibration. You
must be careful to group similar elements and not dissimilar
ones. You can adjust the properties for a group as a whole but
not for individual members of the group.
A good practice is to decide on your Adjustment Groups first
and then collect the Field Data to support the number or groups,
rather than letting available data determine how many
Adjustment Groups you have.
Roughness: Click Roughness to view any existing Roughness
Adjustment Groups and to add, edit, delete, or rename
such groups. Each roughness group should comprise
elements that have similar attributes, such as pipes in a
location of a similar material and age.
Demand: Click Demand to view any existing Demand Adjustment
Groups and to add, edit, delete, or rename such groups.
Adding Demand Calibration Adjustment Groups
introduces more unknowns into a calibration problem. If
available, you should enter more accurate demand data
into your WaterCAD model, rather than adding Demand
Adjustment Groups. Consider creating Demand Groups
based on usage patterns.
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-487
Status: Click Status to view any existing Status Adjustment
Groups and to add, edit, delete, or rename such groups.
Status indicates whether a pipe is open or closed. If you
set up Status groups, GA-optimized calibration will test
each pipe in each group for open and closed status. We
recommend that Status Groups comprise at most only a
few pipes, or one pipe.
Label: Displays the names of the adjustment groups you have
created.
Elements: Lists the number of elements in the groups you have
created.
10.3.5 Selection Set Dialog Box
The Selection Set dialog box lets you add or edit items in your Roughness, Demand,
or Status group. The Selection Set dialog box comprises two data windows: Available
Items and Selected Items. The items listed are those that appear in your water model.
Select: Click the Select button to select items by Filter,
Element, Selection Set, or by clicking the items you
want from your drawing. After selecting the items
you want from the drawing, right-click and select
Done.
Filter: Filter lets you select members of your group by
similar properties (for more information, see
Filtering Tables on page 7-333).
Element: Element lets you select members of your group that
are like elements, for example, pressure pipes.
Selection Set: Selection Set lets you choose pre-defined selection
sets to include in the group (for more information,
see Selection Sets on page 5-255).
From Drawing: From Drawing lets you select the elements you want
in your group by clicking them in the drawing. Right-
click and select Done after you finish selecting
elements by clicking.
Select/Invert Selection: Use Invert Selection to de-select all highlighted items
and select all items that are not currently selected.
Select/Clear Selection: Use Clear Selection to de-select all highlighted
items.
Calibration Options
10-488 WaterCAD Users Manual
Add: To include items in your group, click, ctrl-click, or
shift-click them and use the single-arrow Add button
to move the selected files to the Selected Items data
window. Instead, you can move all items by clicking
the double-arrow Add button.
Remove: To remove items from your group, click, Ctrl+click,
or Shift+click them and use the single-arrow Remove
button to move the selected files to the Available
Items data window. Instead, you can move all items
by clicking the double-arrow Remove button.
OK/Cancel: Click OK to accept the items you have included in
your group or click Cancel to exit the Selection Set
dialog box without making any changes or additions
to the group. A Selection Set must have at least one
Selected Item when you click OK.
10.4 Calibration Options
Note: If you change the Calibration Options, any fitness values you get
are not comparable to fitness values obtained using different
Calibration Options settings.
Use the Calibration Options dialog box to set up how the calibrations are evaluated.
The options you specify are applied to every calibration trial.
Fitness Type: Select the Fitness Type you want to use from the
drop-down list. In general, regardless of the fitness
type you select, a lower fitness indicates better
calibration. Fitness Types include: Minimize
Difference Squares, Minimize Difference Absolute
Values, and Minimize Maximum Difference. For
more information, see Calibration Options
Formulae on page 10-492.
Minimize Difference Squares: Uses a calibration designed to minimize the sum of
squares of the discrepancy between the observed data
and the model simulated values. (Model simulated
values include hydraulic grades and pipe discharges.)
This calibration favors solutions that minimize the
overall sum of the squares of discrepancies between
observed and simulated data.
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-489
Min. Diff. Absolute Values: Uses a calibration designed to minimize the sum of
absolute discrepancy between the observed data and
the model simulated values. This calibration favors
solutions that minimize the overall sum of
discrepancies between observed and simulated data.
Note: The Minimize Maximum Difference Fitness Type is more
sensitive to the accuracy of your data than other Fitness Types.
Minimize Max. Difference: Uses a calibration designed to minimize the
maximum of all the discrepancies between the
observed data and the model simulated values. This
calibration favors solutions that minimize the worst
single discrepancy between observed and simulated
data.
Note: You can give higher importance to Head or Flow by setting a
smaller number for its Per Fitness Point Value.
Head/Flow per Fitness Point: Head and Flow per Fitness Type provide a way for
you to weigh the importance of head and flow in your
calibration. Set these values such that the head and
flow have unit equivalence.
Flow Weight Type: Select the type of weight used: None, Linear, Square,
Square Root, and Log. The weighting type you use
can provide a greater or lesser fitness penalty.
In general, measurements with larger flow carry more weight in the optimization cali-
brations than those with less flow. You can exaggerate or reduce the effect larger
measurements have on your calibration by selecting different weight types. For
example, using no weighting (None) provides no penalty for measurements with
lesser flow versus those with greater flow. Using log and square root reduces the
fitness penalty for measurements with lesser flow, and using linear or square increases
the fitness penalty for measurements with less flow.
OK/Cancel: Click OK to accept the changes you made and apply
them to all future calibrations. Click Cancel to close
the dialog box without making or saving any
changes.
Reset: Click Reset to restore the software default values for
the Calibration Options.
Calibration Options includes:
GA Parameters Advanced Options on page 10-490
Calibration Options Formulae on page 10-492
Calibration Options
10-490 WaterCAD Users Manual
10.4.1 GA Parameters Advanced Options
The GA Parameters Advanced Options let you customize how the genetic algorithm
(GA) performs. Since genetic-algorithm optimization is a randomly guided search
algorithm, different parameter values may yield a slightly different set of solutions,
which can used for a sensitivity study of your model calibration.
Note: All values must be positive, not negative. Recommended values
are based on maximizing speed and efficiency.
Reset: Click Reset to restore the software default values for
the options.
Maximum Era Number: Lets you controls the number of outer loops the
genetic algorithm (GA) uses. Each outer loop runs
over the number of generations with the same
population size. A large value for maximum era
number will make the optimization run longer than a
smaller number would. You might want to start with
a low number and increase the number in subsequent
runs.
The allowable range for values is greater than or
equal to 1. If you use 0 or less, the Optimized The
GAuses values based on what is set for Maximum
Trials and Non-Improvement Generations (for more
information, see Optimized Calibration on
page 10-471 and Stopping Criteria on page 12-
545).
Era Generation Number: Sets the number of generations of each inner loop the
GA uses.
The allowable range for values is greater than or
equal to 1. If you use 0 or less, the Optimized The
GA uses values based on what is set for Maximum
Trials and Non-improvement Generations (for more
information, see Optimized Calibration on
page 10-471 and Stopping Criteria on page 12-
545).
Population Size: Sets the number of GA solutions in each generation.
Increasing Population Size results in a longer time
for each generation and more solutions to be
evaluated.
The allowable range for values is from 50 to 500. We
recommend you use a range of 50 to 150.
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-491
Cut Probability: Sets the probability that a GA solution will be split
into two pieces. Setting this value closer to 100%
increases the number of cuts made and reduces the
average string (chromosome) length. Increasing Cut
Probability causes solutions to vary more widely
from one generation to the next, whereas decreasing
this results in more marginal changes.
The allowable range for values is between 0% and
100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a value
less than 10%.
Note: Setting the Splice probability closer to 100% increases the
demand on system RAM. If you are getting out-of-memory errors
when using GA Optimization, try reducing the Splice Probability
closer to 0% and try increasing the Cut Probability away from
0%.
Splice Probability: Sets the probability that two GA solutions will be
joined together. A Splice Probability set close to
100% results in long solution strings, which
increases the mixing of alleles (genes) and improves
the variety of solutions.
The allowable range for values is between 0% and
100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a range
from 50% to 90%.
Mutation Probability: Sets the probability that a GA solution is randomly
altered. A value closer to 100% causes the solutions
to contain more randomization than values closer to
0%.
The allowable range for values is between 0% and
100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a value
less than 10%.
Random Seed: Lets you set the random number generator to a new
point. Changing this value and leaving all other
parameters as-is will yield a different solution set.
The allowable range for values is from 0 to 1,
inclusive.
Penalty Factor: In Darwin Designer, use a penalty factor to help find
the solution. A high penalty factor causes the GA to
focus on feasible solutions, which do not violate
boundaries of pressure and flow. A low penalty
factor (50,000 or so) permits the GA to consider
solutions that are on the boundary between feasible
and infeasible solutions, possibly violating pressure
Calibration Options
10-492 WaterCAD Users Manual
or flow boundaries by a small amount. Because the
optimal solution often resides in the boundary
between feasible and infeasible solutions, a high
penalty factor causes the GA to find a feasible
solution quickly but is less likely to find the optimal
solution.
From a practical standpoint, you might consider
starting with a high penalty factor and working
towards a lower penalty factor as you pursue an
optimal solution.
(For more information, see Local Options Tab on
page 12-545.)
10.4.2 Calibration Options Formulae
The following formulae are used for Minimize Difference Squares, Minimize Differ-
ence Absolute Values, and Minimize Maximum Difference.
Figure 10-1: Minimize Difference Squares:
Figure 10-2: Minimize Difference Absolute Values
Figure 10-3: Minimize Maximum Difference
where W
nh
and W
nf
represent a normalized weighting factor for observed hydraulic
grades and flows respectively. They are given as:
NF NH
Fpnt
Fobs Fsim
w
Hpnt
Hobs Hsim
w
NF
nf
nf nf
nf
NH
np
nh nh
nh
+
!
!
"
#
$
$
%
&
+
!
!
"
#
$
$
%
&
' '
= = 1
2
1
2
NF NH
Fpnt
Fobs Fsim
w
Hpnt
Hobs Hsim
w
NF
nf
nf nf
nf
NH
np
nh nh
nh
+
' '
= = 1 1
(
)
(
*
+
(
,
(
-
.
= =
Fpnt
Fobs Fsim
w
Hpnt
Hobs Hsim
w
nf nf
nf
NF
nf
nh nh
nh
NH
nh 1 1
max , max max
GA Optimization and Calibration
WaterCAD Users Manual 10-493
The weighting factors may also take many other forms, such as no weight (equal to 1),
linear, square, square root and log functions. Other variables include:
Hobs
nh
designates the nh-th observed hydraulic grade.
Hsim
nh
is the nh-th model simulated hydraulic grade.
Fobs
nf
is the observed flow.
Fsim
nf
is the model simulated flow.
Hp
nt
notes the hydraulic head per fitness point.
Fp
nt
is the flow per fitness point.
NH is the number of observed hydraulic grades.
NF is the number of observed pipe discharges.
'
=
nh
nh
nh
Hobs
Hobs
W
'
=
nf
nf
nf
Fobs
Fobs
W
Calibration Options
10-494 WaterCAD Users Manual
WaterCAD Users Manual 11-495
11
Chapter
Cost Estimating
The Capital Cost Manager lets you calculate a planning level estimate of the capital
costs associated with an entire system or any portion of a system. This makes it easy to
compare the costs associated with various scenarios and help ensure that the most
cost-effective design is chosen.
The costs associated with a particular element are broken down into two categories:
construction costs (see Construction Costs on page 6-309) and non-construction
costs (see Non-Construction Costs on page 6-308). The total cost for each element
is the sum of the total construction and non-construction costs. The total cost for a
scenario is computed by summing the total cost for every element selected to be
included in the cost analysis, and then applying any global cost adjustments that you
have defined.
Each construction cost item is expressed as a combination of a quantity, unit, and unit
cost. The total cost associated with a single construction cost item is the quantity
multiplied by the unit cost. The unit cost for each construction cost item can either be
entered directly by you, or if the element is a pipe or gravity structure (e.g., inlet,
manhole, junction, junction chamber) it can be calculated based on a Unit Cost Func-
tion (for more information, see Unit Cost Functions on page 11-505). A Unit Cost
Function is a way to relate a property of the element, such as the diameter of a pipe, to
the unit cost. This makes it easy to assign a Unit Cost Function to an element. The cost
of the element is then automatically updated when you modify the physical character-
istics of the system.
The other type of cost is non-construction. Non-construction cost items are specified
either as a lump sum or as a percentage of the total construction costs. This type of
cost can be useful when trying to explicitly account for items like omissions and
contingencies.
Capital Cost Manager
11-496 WaterCAD Users Manual
Tip: You do not need to have a hydraulically valid network to perform
a cost analysis. You can quickly calculate the cost associated
with a system at any time through the Capital Cost Manager.
In addition to specifying the costs for each element in the system, you can also make
adjustments on a system level to the total cost of all the elements included in the cost
analysis. This makes it easy to account automatically for contingencies and adjust-
ments on a scenario level.
11.1 Capital Cost Manager
The Capital Cost Manager allows you to quickly compute and compare the costs asso-
ciated with your different scenarios. (for more information, see Scenarios on
page 8-358). This dialog box provides you with a convenient place to view, edit, and
calculate project level cost data. This dialog box is divided into three sections that are
described below:
Button SectionThis column of buttons provides access to the key pieces of data
involved in a cost analysis. For more information, see Capital Cost Manager
Button Section on page 11-497.
Center PaneThis pane displays an explorer view of the cost information for
various scenarios. For more information, see Capital Cost ManagerCenter
Pane on page 11-498.
Right PaneThis pane displays the contents of the item selected in the center
pane. For more information, see Capital Cost ManagerLeft Pane on page 11-
498.
Capital Cost Manager includes:
Capital Cost ManagerButton Section on page 11-497
Capital Cost ManagerCenter Pane on page 11-498
Capital Cost ManagerLeft Pane on page 11-498
System Cost Adjustments Table on page 11-498
Active Cost Scenarios on page 11-499
Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual 11-497
11.1.1 Capital Cost ManagerButton Section
On the left side of the Capital Cost Manager is a column of buttons that provide access
to the key pieces of data involved in a cost analysis. Each of these buttons is described
as follows:
Unit Cost FunctionsOpens the Unit Cost Function Manager, which is the place
to add new or edit existing functions describing the relationship between a model
attribute and the unit price for the element. For pipes, this might be a table of data
relating the pipe material to the cost per unit length. For more information, see
Unit Cost Functions on page 11-505.
Cost AlternativesOpens the Capital Cost Alternatives Manager where you can
quickly create different cost alternatives. For example, you may wish to compare
the cost associated with different cost functions, or to separately calculate the cost
of different phases of construction. For more information, see Capital Cost Alter-
natives Manager on page 11-505.
Cost AdjustmentsOpens the System Cost Adjustments Table for the selected
scenario. This is the location where you enter adjustments that you wish to make
on a scenario level. For more information, see System Cost Adjustments Table
on page 11-498.
Active ScenariosOpens the Active Cost Scenarios dialog box where you can
select which scenarios will appear in the Capital Cost Manager. For more infor-
mation, see Active Cost Scenarios on page 11-499.
Cost ReportsOpens a menu that provides access to one of the predefined cost
reports detailing the costs associated with a particular scenario. The reports that
can be opened through this button include: Project Detailed Cost Report on
page 11-511, Project Element Summary Cost Report on page 11-511, Project
Summary Cost Report on page 11-511, Pipe Costs Report on page 11-512, and
Cost Warnings Report on page 11-512.
Capital Cost Manager
11-498 WaterCAD Users Manual
11.1.2 Capital Cost ManagerCenter Pane
When you open the Capital Cost Manager (see Capital Cost Manager on page 11-
496), this pane will contain an explorer view of all the scenarios in the file. The total
cost of each scenario is displayed to the right of the scenario label. If cost data was
specified for a scenario, you will see a small + symbol to the left of the folder icon.
You can click this symbol to get an expanded view of the costs associated with a
scenario.
In the first level of the expanded view, you will see the subtotal for each type of
element included in the cost analysis, as well as the total cost adjustments made to the
scenario. If you expand any of these items, you will get a view of the costs of each
individual element. If you expand the view, one more level you will be able to see the
construction and non-construction costs associated with an element. The contents of
any component that is selected will be displayed in the table on the pane to the right of
this one.
Just above the right side of this pane is a row of three buttons, which access the
following functionality:
PropertiesOpens the System Cost Adjustments Table for the currently
selected scenario. For more information, see System Cost Adjustments
Table on page 11-498.
GraphOpens a pie chart of the items comprising the total cost of the
scenario.
ReportOpens a tabular report on any component selected in this pane.
11.1.3 Capital Cost ManagerLeft Pane
This pane on the right side of the Capital Cost Manager (see Capital Cost Manager
on page 11-496) is used to display an expanded view of the contents of the item
selected in the center pane.
11.1.4 System Cost Adjustments Table
The System Cost Adjustments Table allows you to make adjustments to the total cost
calculated for all the elements included in the cost analysis. This may include items
such as omissions and contingencies that might be represented as a percentage of the
total construction costs, or land acquisition costs that are represented as a lump sum.
Each cost adjustment consists of the following items:
LabelA unique name that identifies each cost adjustment.
Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual 11-499
OperationThe mathematical operation that should be used with the factor to
compute the cost adjustment.
FactorA numeric value that is used with the operation and the total scenario
cost to compute the cost adjustment.
The types of operations that are supported are described below:
% of ConstructionComputes the cost of the adjustment as a percentage of the
total construction costs for the scenario. For example, if the total construction cost
for a scenario is $100000 and the numeric value in the factor field is 10, the cost
adjustment is $10000.
% of Total CostComputes the cost of the adjustment as a percentage of the
total construction and non-construction costs for a scenario. For example, if the
total cost for all the elements in a scenario is $200000 and the numeric value of
the factor is 15, the cost adjustment is $30000.
AddAdds the numeric value that you set to the other costs computed for a
scenario.
Lump SumThe numeric value specified is a lump sum that is added to the other
costs for the scenario.
MultiplyMultiplies the numeric value in the factor field by the total construc-
tion and non-construction costs for a scenario.
SubtractSubtracts the numeric value in the factor field from the other costs
computed for the scenario.
11.1.5 Active Cost Scenarios
The active scenarios dialog box allows you to select, which scenarios you would like
to appear in the Capital Cost Manager. If there is check in the box to the left of the
scenario name then that scenario will appear in the Capital Cost Manager.
11.2 Energy Cost Manager
Energy Cost Manager includes:
Energy Cost Analysis on page 11-500
Energy Cost Manager on page 11-500
Energy Pricing Manager on page 11-503
Energy Pricing Editor on page 11-504
Energy Cost Manager
11-500 WaterCAD Users Manual
11.2.1 Energy Cost Analysis
The WaterCAD Energy Cost Analysis feature lets you estimate the cost of operating
pumps during an extended period simulation (EPS).
This cost analysis not only calculates the cost of the energy being used by the pump, it
also adjusts the reported daily cost based on the effects of storage within the network.
To illustrate this, lets say you have a tank in the network that has an initial level of 10
ft., and during the course of the extended period simulation this level falls to 5 ft.
Realistically, this translates to an energy loss because at some point the pump will
have to expend energy to fill the tank back up to its original level. Conversely, if the
water level in the tank at the end of the simulation is greater than the initial level, the
cost associated with the additional energy expenditure will be subtracted from the
final daily cost.
The effect of this additional consideration in the cost analysis is that the estimate
provided by WaterCAD will be much more realistic than an estimate based solely on
the cost of running the pump. For instance, if you ran an extended period simulation in
which the tank was able to meet the demands of the network for a 24-hour period
without requiring additional water, and ran a cost analysis without accounting for
storage gains/losses for this 24-hour period, the program would calculate that the daily
energy cost for this network is zerothe pumps did not run, so no energy was
consumed. This is obviously incorrect, as energy will be required to fill the tank again
to recoup the losses of the previous day.
11.2.2 Energy Cost Manager
The Energy Cost Manager is separated into three sections:
Button SectionThis section contains three buttons:
PricesOpens the Energy Pricing Manager (for more information, see
Energy Pricing Manager on page 11-503).
CloseExits the Energy Cost Manager.
HelpOpens the online help.
Analysis Control PaneThis section of the dialog box consists of a menu which
allows you to select the scenario to be calculated, a GO button which begins the
calculation, and a pane that allows you to control what results will be displayed in
the Detailed Results Pane. Highlighting one of the calculation components will
cause the detailed results of the cost calculation to be displayed in the Detailed
Results Pane. This section also displays a breakdown of the calculated costs asso-
ciated with the various components of the energy cost analysis.
Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual 11-501
Detailed Results PaneThis section of the dialog box is comprised of three tabs
and a tabular report pane. This pane displays the detailed results associated with
the currently highlighted item in the Analysis Control pane. The available tabs
change depending on which row is selected in the Analysis Control Pane.
When the green folder representing the scenario to be calculated is highlighted, the
following tabs are available:
PumpDisplays a three column table listing all of the pumps in the current
scenario. The three columns are Label, Include In Cost Calculation?, and Energy
Pricing. To exclude pumps from the analysis, clear the check box in the Include In
Cost Calculation? column for the corresponding pumps. The Energy Pricing
column allows you to choose which energy pricing definition is to be used when
calculating the corresponding pump, or to create a new one. Click the Ellipsis (...)
button to open the Energy Pricing Manager (for more information, see Energy
Pricing Manager on page 11-503).
SummaryDisplays a summary of the calculated results for the cost analysis.
TankDisplays a two column table listing all of the tanks in the current scenario.
The two columns are Label and Include in Cost Calculation?. To exclude tanks
from the analysis, clear the check box in the Include In Cost Calculation? column
for the corresponding tanks.
Click GO to compute the energy costs. Costs are calculated for the elements in your
model.
Energy Cost Manager
11-502 WaterCAD Users Manual
From the calculated costs, when you highlight Pump Usage, a Results tab is available.
ResultsThe Results tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and
the results pane. The drop-down list allows you to choose whether the Daily
Energy Usage or the Total Energy Usage results are displayed. The Copy button
copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a report
containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and opens
the Print Preview dialog box (for more information, see Print Preview Window
on page 13-621).
From the calculated costs, when you highlight Time Detail, the following tabs are
available:
Click GO to calculate
energy costs and
populate the left pane
In the left pane, from the
calculated costs, highlight
the element about which
you want information
Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual 11-503
ResultsThe Results tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and
the results pane. The drop-down list for this tab has only a single option, Time
Details. The Copy button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report
button generates a report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the
results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog box (for more information, see
Print Preview Window on page 13-621).
GraphThe Graph tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and
the plot pane. The drop-down list for this tab allows you to choose which attribute
is to be graphed. The Copy button copies the plot to the clipboard, and the Report
button opens the Print Preview dialog box containing the graph as displayed in the
plot pane. To change the graph options, right-click in the graph display pane and
select Options.
From the calculated costs, when you highlight Storage, only a Results tab is available:
ResultsThe Results tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and
the results pane. The drop-down list allows you to choose whether the Daily or the
Storage results are displayed. The Copy button copies the results table to the clip-
board, and the Report button generates a report containing the calculated results
that are displayed in the results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog box (for
more information, see Print Preview Window on page 13-621).
From the calculated costs, when you highlight Peak Demands, only a Results tab is
available:
ResultsThe Results tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and
the results pane. The drop-down list allows you to choose whether the Peak
Demand Daily Summary or the Peak Demand results are displayed. The Copy
button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a
report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and
opens the Print Preview dialog box (for more information, see Print Preview
Window on page 13-621).
11.2.3 Energy Pricing Manager
The Energy Pricing Manager allows you to create, edit, and manage the electricity
cost definitions that are used for the energy cost calculations. The following options
are available in this dialog box:
AddPrompts for a name, then opens the Energy Pricing Editor (for more infor-
mation, see Energy Pricing Editor on page 11-504).
EditOpens the Energy Pricing Editor for the currently highlighted definition.
DuplicatePrompts for a name, then opens the Energy Pricing Editor, which is
pre-set with the input data from the currently highlighted definition.
Energy Cost Manager
11-504 WaterCAD Users Manual
DeleteVerifies the action, then deletes the highlighted definition.
RenameAllows you to rename the currently highlighted definition.
11.2.4 Energy Pricing Editor
The Energy Price Editor allows you to create the cost definitions that will be used in
the Energy Cost Analysis. The three tabs that make up the Energy Pricing Editor are:
Energy PricingThis tab is divided into two sections. The upper section
contains a required input box:
Start TimeA value between 0 and 24 that specifies the first time step point
in the definition.
The lower part of the dialog box is comprised of a two column table and three
buttons. The columns in the table are as follows:
Time From StartThe time at which the value entered into the corre-
sponding Energy Price field will take effect.
Energy PriceThe Energy Price at the time specified in the corresponding
Time From Start field.
The buttons to the right of the table include:
InsertCreates a new row in the definition table.
DuplicateDuplicates the highlighted row in the definition table.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted row in the definition table. You will be prompted
to confirm this action.
In addition, in the upper right-hand side of the dialog box, there is a Plot button.
PlotCreates a price-vs.-time graph for the current pricing definition.
Peak Demand ChargeThis tab consists of the following fields:
Include Peak Demand Charge?This check box activates and deactivates the
input fields. When the box is checked, a Peak Demand Charge will be applied as
determined by the Peak Demand Charge and Billing Period input fields.
Peak Demand ChargeThe charge applied per kW at the time of greatest power
usage.
Billing PeriodThe Billing Period is the length of time over which the peak
demand is considered. An equivalent daily cost is found by dividing the peak cost
by this period of time.
NotesAllows you to enter descriptive text concerning the pricing definition
being created.
Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual 11-505
11.3 Capital Cost Alternatives Manager
The Capital Cost Alternatives Manager lets you edit, create, and manage your capital
cost alternatives. It also gives you more advanced capabilities, such as merging alter-
natives and creating child alternatives.
On the right side of the dialog box are a number of buttons that provide functions for
managing the alternatives. These buttons are identical to the buttons found in the
Alternatives Manager (for more information, see Alternatives Manager on page 8-
341).
11.4 Unit Cost Functions
A Unit Cost Function is a description of the relationship between an element attribute
and the unit cost for that element. For example, it might describe the relationship
between pipe diameter and the cost-per-unit-length, or it could relate the depth of a
gravity structure to the unit cost for that structure. You can specify the relationship
between the unit cost and the value of the attribute as either tabular data or as a
formula.
Tabular Unit Cost FunctionRelates attribute values to unit costs as a series of data
points. This is the only way to enter unit cost data for non-numeric attributes, such as
material. If the attribute for which you are supplying the cost data is numeric, then
values between the data points that you enter will be linearly interpolated. If the unit
cost is requested for an attribute value that falls outside of the range of data that you
supplied in the table, the model will assume that the unit cost is equal to the unit cost
at the most extreme point closest to the value that was requested. For example, if the
following points had been entered (8 in, 30$/ft.) and (12 in, 40$/ft.) and the unit cost
was requested for a 16-in. diameter pipe, the value returned would be 40$/ft. The
warnings report available from the cost manager will list the elements and construc-
tion cost items for which this is true. For more information, see Tabular Unit Cost
Function on page 11-507.
Note: For certain values, such as when x is less than c, and b is not an
integer, this equation will be invalid. Under these conditions, the
unit cost returned by the function will be zero.
Formula Unit Cost FunctionRepresents the unit cost as a function of the selected
numeric attribute of the following form: (for more information, see Formula Unit
Cost Function on page 11-508)
Cost d a x c ( )
b
+ =
Unit Cost Functions
11-506 WaterCAD Users Manual
Unit Cost Functions includes:
Unit Cost Functions Manager on page 11-506
New Unit Cost Functions Dialog Box on page 11-506
Unit Cost Function Notes on page 11-507
Tabular Unit Cost Function on page 11-507
Formula Unit Cost Function on page 11-508
11.4.1 Unit Cost Functions Manager
You can add, delete, and edit the Unit Cost Functions (see Unit Cost Functions on
page 11-505) for your project through this manager. You will be able to assign the cost
functions defined here to one or more of the elements of the appropriate type in your
system. For example, if you define a cost function for pipes, you will be able to select
this cost function from the choice list on the Cost tab of the Pipe Element Editor.
Use the Save command to save the Unit Cost Functions listed in the Unit Cost Func-
tions Manager. You can then import them into another project using the Import
command. The Save and Import commands are accessed from the File button in this
dialog box.
11.4.2 New Unit Cost Functions Dialog Box
When you add a new Unit Cost Function, you will be prompted with this dialog box
containing two fields, Unit Cost Function Type and Unit Cost Function Attribute. This
is the information that is needed to initialize the new Unit Cost Function that you are
about to create.
The Unit Cost Function Type field allows you to select whether you would like to
enter your cost function data in tabular or formula format. We recommend that you
quickly familiarize yourself with both formats to see which is most convenient for
you. If you wish to base your unit cost on an attribute that is not numeric, such as
material, you must choose a tabular format.
Where:
Cost = Linear cost of the pipe (local currency/m,
local currency/ft.)
x = Selected attribute (unit depends on the
type of attribute)
a, b, c, d = Parameters you specify (units depend on
local currency and the type of attribute)
Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual 11-507
The Unit Cost Function Attribute field is for selecting the attribute for which your unit
costs are functions. For example, the unit cost of a pipe might be based upon its diam-
eter or its material. Attributes that are not numeric can only be selected if the Unit
Cost Function type is tabular.
11.4.3 Unit Cost Function Notes
In this section, you can enter optional notes related to the Unit Cost Function.
11.4.4 Tabular Unit Cost Function
This tab contains the data for Unit Cost Functions defined with tabular data. The infor-
mation is defined in the following fields:
GeneralContains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function. For
more information, see General Section on page 11-507.
Attribute Value RangeDisplays the range of the selected attribute in the
current scenario. This information can be useful for specifying cost data for the
entire range of values in the model. For more information, see Attribute Value
Range Section on page 11-508.
Unit Cost DataSpecifies the tabular data relating unit cost to the value of the
selected attribute. For more information, see Attribute Value Range Section on
page 11-508.
Note: If the attribute you have selected to define the Unit Cost
Function is outside the defined range for some elements in your
network, the unit cost used will be the cost of the minimum or
maximum value of the attribute you defined in the table.
In order to help you enter and visualize the function, use one of the following buttons
at the bottom of the dialog box:
PlotPlots the tabular data relating cost to the value of the selected attribute.
Initialize RangeInitializes the minimum and maximum values in the Attribute
Value Range section, based on all the elements present in your project for the
current scenario.
General Section
This section contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function, as
follows:
LabelUnique name that identifies your Unit Cost Function.
Unit Cost Functions
11-508 WaterCAD Users Manual
Element TypeDisplays the type of element to which the function applies,
which is always pressure pipe in WaterCAD, but could also be gravity pipe, junc-
tion, inlet, manhole, or junction chamber in SewerCAD or StormCAD.
Attribute LabelElement attribute that controls the unit cost, such as pipe diam-
eter. This attribute is selected when you add a new function in the Unit Cost Func-
tion Manager.
Attribute Value Range Section
This section displays the minimum and maximum values for the attribute that controls
the unit cost in your current network. Click the Initialize Range button to have these
values calculated.
Unit Cost Data Table
This allows you to define the Unit Cost Function in a tabular format, preferably
defining the costs associated with the entire range of values present in your network.
To display the current range of values in your model, initialize the Attribute Value
Range section by clicking the Initialize Range button.
11.4.5 Formula Unit Cost Function
The data defining formula-based Unit Cost Functions is grouped as follows:
GeneralGeneral information identifying the Unit Cost Function. For more
information, see General Section on page 11-509.
Valid Cost Data RangeThe range for which the function is valid for the
attribute used to define the Unit Cost Function. For more information, see Valid
Cost Data Range Section on page 11-509.
CoefficientsCoefficients defining the formula relating the unit cost to the
attribute value. For more information, see Coefficients Section on page 11-509.
Note: If the function is invalid for any interval within the Valid Cost
Data Range, it is set to 0.0 in that interval. Click the Plot button to
see if there are any problems with the function.
If the attribute you have selected to define the Unit Cost
Function is outside the Valid Cost Data Range for any element in
the network, the formula will still be applied to calculate that
element unit cost. However, an error message for that element
will be reported when computing the cost for the system.
In order to help you enter and visualize the function, use one of the following buttons
at the bottom of the dialog box:
Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual 11-509
PlotA graph of the Unit Cost Function.
Initialize RangeThe minimum and maximum values of the attribute used to
define the Unit Cost Function based on all the elements in your project.
General Section
This section contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function, as
follows:
LabelUnique name that identifies your Unit Cost Function.
Element TypeDisplays the type of element to which the function applies,
which is always pressure pipe in WaterCAD, but could also be gravity pipe, junc-
tion, inlet, manhole, or junction chamber in SewerCAD or StormCAD.
Attribute LabelElement attribute that controls the unit cost, such as pipe diam-
eter. This attribute is selected when you add a new function in the Unit Cost Func-
tion Manager.
Local UnitUnit of the attribute that controls the unit cost. This unit is used for
defining the formula coefficients.
Valid Cost Data Range Section
This section specifies the range of values for which the function is valid for the
attribute used to define the Unit Cost Function. Clicking the Initialize Range button
accesses the two values based on the range of values present in your current network.
Coefficients Section
In this section, you can enter the coefficients defining the Unit Cost Function. The x-
parameter, which represents the value of the attribute on which the Unit Cost Function
is based, is expressed by the unit specified in the Local Unit field on this tab.
11.5 Cost Reports
In addition to the standard reporting capabilities, the cost analysis feature provides a
number of specialized reports for presenting results. These reports include:
Element Detailed Cost ReportPresents a detailed view of all the cost informa-
tion entered for a single element. For more information, see Element Detailed
Cost Report on page 11-510.
Project Detailed Cost ReportProvides a detailed view of calculated cost data
for every element included in the cost analysis. For more information, see Project
Detailed Cost Report on page 11-511.
Cost Reports
11-510 WaterCAD Users Manual
Project Element Summary Cost ReportReturns a summary of the costs for
every element included in the cost report. For more information, see Project
Element Summary Cost Report on page 11-511.
Project Summary Cost ReportProvides an overview of all the costs in the
system. For more information, see Project Summary Cost Report on page 11-
511.
Pipe Costs ReportProvides an overview of the costs associated with the pipes
in the project, grouping them by material and section size. For more information,
see Pipe Costs Report on page 11-512.
Cost Warnings ReportProvides a list of warnings for a particular Cost
Scenario. For more information, see Cost Warnings Report on page 11-512.
Each of these tabular reports can be sent directly to the printer, or copied and pasted
into a spreadsheet program for further refinement.
11.5.1 Element Detailed Cost Report
This tabular report contains a detailed view of all the cost information entered for a
single element. It includes an itemized list of all the construction and non-construction
costs for an element, as well as the subtotals and total cost of the element. This report
is only available for elements that have been selected for inclusion in the cost calcula-
tion.
For more information, see Tabular Report Window on page 13-569.
To access the field Element Detailed Cost Report:
Stand-Alone: Double-click the element for which you wish to see
the report, or right-click the element and select Edit
from the drop-down menu. In the dialog box that
appears, click the Report button and select Cost
Report.
AutoCAD 2000/2002: Pick the Select tool and click the element you wish to
edit, or select the element and choose Edit from the
drop-down menu. In the dialog box that appears,
click the Report button and select Cost Report.
AutoCAD 2000i: Double-click the element for which you wish to see
the report, or right-click the element and select Edit
from the drop-down menu. In the dialog box that
appears, click the Report button and select Cost
Report.
Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual 11-511
11.5.2 Project Detailed Cost Report
This tabular report contains a detailed view of all the cost information entered for
every element included in the cost analysis. It includes an itemized list of all the
construction and non-construction costs for each element, as well as the cost adjust-
ments made to the total cost of the project. This report is only available after the costs
have been computed for the scenario.
For more information, see Tabular Report Window on page 13-569.
11.5.3 Project Element Summary Cost Report
This tabular report provides a summary view of all the cost information entered for
each element selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. It contains an overview of the
costs assigned to each element, and an itemized list of the cost adjustments. This
report is only available after the costs have been computed for the scenario.
For more information, see Tabular Report Window on page 13-569.
11.5.4 Project Summary Cost Report
This tabular report provides a summary view of all the cost information entered for the
elements selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. This report contains an overview
of the costs assigned to each element type and an itemized list of the cost adjustments.
This report is only available after the costs have been computed for the scenario.
For more information, see Tabular Report Window on page 13-569.
Cost Reports
11-512 WaterCAD Users Manual
11.5.5 Pipe Costs Report
This printed report provides a summary of the cost of all the pipes included in the cost
analysis. The pipes are grouped by material and section size. The total length of pipe
for each size and material are reported along with the total cost associated with that
group of pipes.
11.5.6 Cost Warnings Report
This report provides a list of all the cost warnings for the selected scenario. You will
receive warnings when you have assigned a Unit Cost Function to a particular element
but the attribute value for that element lies outside of the valid range of data you set
for the Unit Cost Function. You need to check these elements and make sure that the
cost data supplied to these elements is applicable.
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-513
12
Chapter
Using Darwin Designer
Darwin Designer lets you design new pipe layouts or pipe rehabilitation for existing
pipes. A genetic-algorithm based approach lets you avoid a manual trial and error
approach to finding the most efficient design. Solutions and costs calculated using
Darwin Designer can be exported back to any scenario.
To open Darwin Designer:
1. Start WaterCAD.
2. Click the Darwin Designer button.
3. Or, click Analysis > Darwin Designer.
4. If the Schema Augmentation dialog box opens, click Augment Schema. (For
more information, see Schema Augmentation on page 12-555.)
5. The Darwin Designer dialog box opens. Begin by creating a new design study.
(For more information, see Lesson 8: Using Darwin Designer on page 3-173
and Darwin Designer Methodology on page B-819.)
12.1 Overview: How to Use Darwin Designer
Design studies comprise:
Design events
Flows (demand adjustmentssee Demand Adjustments Tab on page 12-
534)
Constraints (pressure and flowsee Pressure Constraints Tab on page 12-
536 and Flow Constraints Tab on page 12-537)
Boundary conditions (see Boundary Conditions Tab on page 12-538)
Design group specifications (see Local Design Groups Tab on page 12-542)
Rehab group specifications (see Local Rehab Groups Tab on page 12-544)
Design Study
12-514 WaterCAD Users Manual
Cost data (see Option Groups Tab on page 12-522)
Design study options (type of optimizationsee Demand Adjustments Tab on
page 12-534)
A Design Run is created by picking which of the following are to be used for a given
run:
Design events
Design groups
Rehab groups
Run specific options
The particular events and groups are specified by making them active. You may create
many design runs within a design study.
12.2 Design Study
A design study is a top-level grouping of the pipe design and rehabilitation you want
to do for one complete design project. A design study should be used to represent a
real project unit, such as a system expansion, main replacement, system augmentation,
etc. For a different or unrelated projectssuch as a main replacement project and a
project to design a new service areayou should use different, new design studies.
To start using Darwin Designer, you must first create a design study. All Darwin
Designer data exists within design studies. A design study comprises the following
elements:
1. A description of the events that serve as the basis for design
2. A set of pipes being sized or rehabilitated
3. Constraints you must meet, which are defined in a design event
4. A range of design sizes or rehabilitation options (as part of option groups)
5. Cost data on for use in the optimization (as part of option groups)
6. Genetic algorithm options
7. A number of design runs of to test the design (see Design Run on page 12-540)
8. The results of design runs (see Results Pane on page 12-546)
It is readily apparent that one or more of these items will be different between
different design studies, hence the ability to create as many design studies as you need.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-515
You can create more than one design study. Each design study can comprise one or
more design runs. Each design run is manual or GA optimized. (For more information,
see Design Run on page 12-540.)
In the design study, create the groups of pipes for design and rehabilitation, define the
design/rehab options (costs and sizes etc), and define constraints and parameters for
your designs. These items get used in the design runs and the computations that
produce your design results.
Right-click the design study in the tree-view to access some options.
Add New Design Study: You can add more than one design study. Design
studies are not related.
Add New Design Run: You can add manual and optimized design
runs to each design study. Optimized design
runs uses a genetic algorithm whereas the
manual design lets you apply specific solution
alternatives for trial-and-error calculations.
Darwin Designer does not run a design study; it uses
a design run. There can be multiple design runs in a
design study.
Duplicate: Click Duplicate to create a copy of the
selected design study. This can be an efficient
way to create a new design study that has
many of the attributes of an existing study.
Design Study
12-516 WaterCAD Users Manual
Rename: Click Rename to change the name of the
selected design study.
Delete: Click Delete to delete the selected design
study.
Close Button: Click Close to exit Darwin Designer.
Help Button: Click Help to open the context-sensitive online help.
For more information, see Using the Online Help
on page 2-58.
12.2.1 Design Events Tab
Note: A design event represents a single time step hydraulic analysis
that will be analyzed by Darwin Designer.
The way that you decide to use an event or a constraint is to
make it active by selecting a check box under a design run. You
must have at least one active design event and one active
design or rehab group to make up a design run.
In producing a system design, the design must typically achieve some objective or
objectives. Generally, a design must supply some specified demands, while concur-
rently meeting specified performance criteria, subject to specific boundary conditions,
such as tank levels, or emergency conditions.
Design events are used to define the requirements of your designs. Design events
include information about the demand conditions a design must satisfy, the perfor-
mance requirements or constraints a design must meet (in the form of pressure and
flow constraints), and also the boundary conditions under which the design must
achieve the previous two goals.
In order to create a design using Darwin Designer you need at least one design event,
however, in many cases you will use more than that.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-517
New: Click New to add a new design event. For
more information, see Adding a Design
Event on page 12-519.
Edit: Click Edit to modify an existing design
event. For more information, see Design
Event Editor on page 12-533.
Duplicate: Click Duplicate to create a copy of the
selected design event. This can be an efficient
way to create a new design event that has
many of the attributes of an existing set.
Rename: Click Rename to change the name of an
existing design event. When the dialog box
opens, type the new name and click OK or
click Cancel to exit without renaming anything.
Delete: Click Delete to permanently remove the
selected design event.
Representative Scenario: From the drop-down list, select the scenario you
want Darwin Designer to use for the design and
calculations. The list displays those scenarios defined
in your WaterCAD file (for more information, see
Scenarios on page 8-358).
This scenario is the starting point for Darwin
Designer calculations.
Buttons used
by the tabs
Design Study
12-518 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: You can drag the vertical column dividers in the headings to
change the column widths.
Design Event Name: The Design Event Name column lists the designs you
have created. Click the column heading to rank these
in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
Notes: The Notes field displays any notes that are in the
Design Event Editors Note tab (see Design Event
Editor on page 12-533).
Representative Scenarios
The representative scenario is the scenario upon which Darwin Designer will base its
designs. The representative scenario must, therefore, contain any and all data that will
be considered for design purposes. The types of data that this includes is:
Topological data, such as the locations of existing and possible new facilities.
Note that, for pipes that do not currently exist (Designer will be used to size
them), we recommended you model them as open pipes with small diameters
(e.g., 0.01 inches or 0.01 mm). It is also good practice to adopt some kind of
obvious naming convention, such as FP-1, FP-2 (Future Pipe) or GA-P-1, GA-P-
2, etc. It is also possible to consider the inclusion/exclusion of other facilities
using topological data. For more information, see Advanced Darwin Designer
Tips on page A-770.
Physical data, such as pipe diameters, lengths, tank diameters, elevations, etc.
Initial Settings data, such as tank levels, control valve statuses, etc.
Demand data, such as loading patterns, nodal demands, fire flows (as nodal
demands).
Note: The representative scenario must either be a steady state or EPS
scenario. Water Quality and/or Fire Flow options are ignored.
After you choose an appropriate representative scenario, it is possible within Darwin
Designer to set up multiple design events (see Design Events Tab on page 12-542)
that specify differences over and above the representative scenario. Specifically, it is
possible to specify additional demands (see Demand Adjustments Tab on page 12-
534), a completely different demand alternative (by overriding), and also different
boundary conditions. In this way, you can set up a suite of design events that capture
the design requirements of the project. As an example, the representative scenario
might reference peak hour demands. In this case, you could set up a design event that
uses the representative scenario unchanged to ensure the design meets peak hour
flows, and then you could add in additional design events that specify fire flows (addi-
tional demands) or emergency conditions, such as pipe breaks (boundary conditions).
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-519
Adding a Design Event
The first component of a design study is the design event that is being analyzed. It is in
the design event that you describe the flows that must be delivered and the constraints
that must be met. To add a new design event:
1. Select the Representative Scenario on which you want to base your design.
2. Click New.
3. Type the name of the design group you are creating and click OK.
4. The Design Event Editor opens. Enter your data to define the design event. For
more information, see Design Event Editor on page 12-533.
12.2.2 Design Groups Tab
For an overview of design groups, see Design and Rehab Groups Overview on
page 12-521.
New Design Group: Click New to add a new design option group.
For more information, see Adding a New
Group on page 12-520.
Edit Design Group: Click Edit to modify an existing design
option group. For more information, see
Editing a Group on page 12-520.
Rename Design Group: Click Rename to change the name of an
existing design option group. When the
dialog box opens, type the new name and
click OK or click Cancel to exit without renaming
anything.
Delete Design Group: Click Delete to permanently remove the
selected design option group. Note that the
elements in that group are unaffected.
New Multiple Design Groups: Click this button to create several design
groups at once, from all the elements or
selection sets (see Selection Sets on page 5-
255). This can be an efficient way to quickly create
several one-pipe design groups, rather than creating
the groups one at a time.
Design Study
12-520 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: You can drag the vertical column dividers in the headings to
change the column widths.
Design Group Name: The Design Group Name column lists the design
groups. Click the column heading to rank these in
ascending or descending alphabetical order.
Pipe Count: Pipe Count tells you how many pipes in the group.
To change this value, edit the group. (For more
information, see Editing a Group on page 12-520.)
Adding a New Group
Pipes can only exist in one group. For example, the same pipe cannot be in multiple
design groups nor in a design and a rehab group.
To add a new design or rehabilitation group:
1. Click New.
2. Type the name of the design group you are creating and click OK.
3. In the Element Selector dialog box, click those pipes you want to include in your
group.
Use the drop-down list to filter the elements from which you can select.
Shift+click and ctrl+click to select ranges and more than one pipe.
4. After you have selected the elements, click OK to create the group. Or, click
Cancel to exit the dialog box without creating a new group.
Editing a Group
To edit a design or rehabilitation group:
1. Click Edit.
2. In the Element Selector dialog box, click those pipes and/or junctions you
want to include in your group.
Use the drop-down list to filter the elements from which you can select: pipes,
junctions, or both.
Shift+click and ctrl+click to select ranges and more than one pipe.
3. After you have selected the elements, click OK to apply your changes to the
group. Or, click Cancel to exit the dialog box without making any changes.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-521
Design and Rehab Groups Overview
Darwin Designer determines the size or rehab action for pipes. It is unlikely, however,
that a large pipeline will change diameter every block along its route. Plus, if fewer
pipes being sized, optimization will happen faster than if a larger number of pipes
were sized. Therefore, Darwin Designer uses the idea of a pipe group or rehab group
to group pipes that will attract the same design decision. At the end of a run, all of the
pipes in the same design group are given the same diameter, and all of the pipes in the
same rehab group receive the same rehab action. This is both logical and more effi-
cient from a computational standpoint.
For a pipe to be considered a candidate for design or rehab, it must be placed in a
group. This is done on the Design Groups or Rehab Groups tab when the Design
Study is highlighted. (When the Design Run is highlighted, you choose which groups
are to be considered during that run.)
You must insert at least one pipe in each design group (see Editing a Group on
page 12-520). There is no absolute rule for deciding which pipes belong in a given
group. Usually it is the set of pipes that will be laid with the same diameter and at the
same time, but it can also be smaller groups than that, and in the case of smaller design
problems or academic exercises, it may be only 1 pipe per group, which is easily expe-
dited with the Create Multiple Design Groups selection (see New Multiple Design
Groups on page 12-519). The down side of adding every pipe to its own group,
however, is that this can be computationally inefficient and potentially leads to a pipe-
line that is say 12 in. for one block, 8 in. for the next, 6 in. the next, etc., which may be
a theoretically least-cost design but is not a solution that is likely to be installed. Ulti-
mately the choice comes down to a trade-off between number of pipe groups (and size
of the optimization problem) versus constructability of the design through the poten-
tial for different pipe sizes adopted for each group.
For more information, see Advanced Darwin Designer Tips on page A-770.
12.2.3 Rehab Groups Tab
For an overview of rehab groups, see Design and Rehab Groups Overview on
page 12-521.
New Rehabilitation Group: Click New to add a new rehabilitation group.
For more information, see Adding a New
Group on page 12-520.
Edit Rehabilitation Group: Click Edit to modify an existing
rehabilitation group. For more information,
see Editing a Group on page 12-520.
Design Study
12-522 WaterCAD Users Manual
Rename Rehabilitation Group: Click Rename to change the name of an
existing rehabilitation group. When the
dialog box opens, type the new name and
click OK or click Cancel to exit without renaming
anything.
Delete Rehabilitation Group: Click Delete to permanently remove the
selected rehabilitation group. Note that the
elements in that group are unaffected.
Note: You can drag the vertical column dividers in the headings to
change the column widths.
Rehabilitation Group Name: The Rehabilitation Group Name column lists the
rehabilitation groups. Click the column heading to
rank these in ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
Pipe Count: Pipe Count tells you how many pipes in the group.
To change this value, edit the group. (For more
information, see Editing a Group on page 12-520.)
12.2.4 Option Groups Tab
Note: The option groups table is dimmed until you click the table in the
tree-view, to select it.
To see the option groups, click the + sign next to Design Option
Groups and Rehab Option Groups. If there is no + sign, there is
no table and you must create a table by clicking the New button.
Option groups are used by Darwin Designer to determine the hydraulic effect of and
calculate the capital cost of the solutions it generates. Option groups come in two
types: Design Option Groups (new pipes) and Rehab Option Groups (rehabilitation
actions). Design options (new pipe sizes and associated roughness, material type and
unit cost) are defined by adding design option groups. Rehab Options (rehab actions
and associated post action functions) are defined by adding rehab option groups. Each
option group contains a set of options that the Darwin Designer can select from in
order to create its hydraulic solutions. Design Option Groups are used where you are
designing a new system or part of a system and brand new pipes need to be installed.
Rehab Option Groups are used when you are examining the effect of rehabilitating
(cleaning, lining etc) existing pipes.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-523
Design Option Groups: Select this item in the tree-view to create and edit
new pipe option groups. For more information, see
Adding and Editing Design Option Groups on
page 12-523.
Rehab Option Groups: Select this item in the tree-view to create and edit
rehabilitation option groups. For more information,
see Adding and Editing Rehabilitation Option
Groups on page 12-526.
Adding and Editing Design Option Groups
Note: The order of pipe diameters is not important, but it makes easier
viewing if you enter pipe diameters in increasing size.
Design Option Groups are used to define a selection of pipes that can be used in your
design. You may choose to use as much or as little detail as you wish. For example, for
a rough cut design, you may simply wish to use nominal diameters and estimated unit
rates, but for a detailed design you may wish to use internal pipe diameters and even
distinguish between different materials. The new pipe option group is set up to allow
you to adopt either approach.
In setting up option groups, you can set up as many groups as needed to describe the
different cost situations in your project. For example, you may decide that you have
three different cost types that need to be considered: Residential, Greenfields and
Commercial. In this case, you can set up three different option groups to reflect the
different in-ground costs for each of the three different cost types. For example,
Use this tree-view with the
Option Groups tab
Design Study
12-524 WaterCAD Users Manual
Greenfields would be cheaper than Residential, where the additional costs of breaking
the road and resurfacing need to be included. Not all groups need to include the same
pipe sizes either, so you may choose to use different option groups as a way of limiting
certain pipe groups to being able to attain only certain sizes. For example, there is not
much point allowing a transmission main to be sized as a 6-in. pipe, where a consumer
connection pipe might be acceptable as a 6-in. pipe.
Darwin Designer has the ability to not only size new pipes from a range of possible
available pipe sizes, but it can also determine whether a particular pipe needs to be
constructed at all. To get Designer to determine whether a pipe needs to be constructed
at all, simply add a zero diameter option to the pipe option group. The zero diameter
option should also attract a cost of zero (in this case, roughness is redundant). The
zero size option can be used to size parallel pipes and it can also be used to determine
the optimal design layout, whereby more pipes are being sized than are necessary to
service all demands.
For pipes that are essential for service and that must be sized, define and use a pipe-
option group that contains no zero diameter option.
For more information, see Lesson 9: Darwin Designer Overview on page 3-191.
To define an option group for design options (new pipe sizing), first select the Design
Option Groups tree-view item.
You can right-click
in the tree-view,
as well as using
the buttons
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-525
New Design Option Group: Right-click the Design Option Groups tree-
view item and select Add New Design
Option Group or click the New button to add
a new design option group. Enter the name of the
table and click OK to create a new blank table, or
click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating
a new table.
Duplicate Design Option Group:Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Duplicate or click the Duplicate
button to make a copy of the selected design
option group. This can be an efficient way to create a
new table that shares many values with an existing
table.
Rename Design Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Rename or click the Rename button to
enter a new name for the selected design
option group.
Delete Design Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Delete or click the Delete button.
Add/Delete Design Options: Click the Insert and Delete buttons to
add or remove selected rows from the
pipe table.
Material: Click on a table cell and select
the pipe material from the
drop-down list or click the Ellipsis button to open the
Material Manager. (For more information, see
Material Editor on page 12-526.)
You can type the first letter of the material to select it
and use the arrow.
Diameter: Type a diameter for the pipe.
Roughness: Type the roughness value for the pipe (figure shows
Hazen-Williams value).
Unit Cost: Type the unit cost value for the pipe.
Design Study
12-526 WaterCAD Users Manual
Material Editor
Use the Material Editor to add or edit pipe material. Type the name of the pipe mate-
rial and enter a roughness value for the material. Click OK to apply your changes or
Cancel to close the dialog box without making changes.
Adding and Editing Rehabilitation Option Groups
1. Rehab option groups define the selection of rehab actions that can be used in the
design.
2. As much or as little detail as user wishes.
3. As many groups as needed for different cost types.
4. Not all groups need include the same rehab options.
Rehab Option Groups are used to define the selection of rehab actions that can be used
in the design. You may choose to use as much or as little detail as you want. You can
set up as many groups as you need for different cost types, and not all groups need to
include the same rehabilitation options.
In setting up option groups, you can set up as many groups as needed to describe the
different cost situations in your project
To define a rehabilitation option group:
1. Right-click the Rehab Option Groups tree-view item.
2. Select New Rehabilitation Option Group.
3. Name the table and click OK.
4. Type the name of for an Action you want to add.
5. Select the three functions that describe the pre- and post-rehabilitation conditions.
You must select one of each type of function for a rehabilitation action; none of
the functions are optional.
a. Click the arrow to select an existing function from the
drop-down list.
b. Click the Ellipsis () button to create a new function (see Function Editor
on page 12-531).
6. As needed, click Insert or Delete to add and remove rows.
7. Create as many rehabilitation actions as needed.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-527
New Rehab Option Group: Right-click the Rehab Option Groups tree-
view item and select New Rehabilitation
Option Group or click the New button to add
a new option group. Enter the name of the table and
click OK to create a new blank table, or click Cancel
to close the dialog box without creating a new table.
Duplicate Rehab Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Duplicate or click the Duplicate
button to make a copy of the selected option
group. This can be an efficient way to create a new
table that shares many values with an existing table.
Rename Rehab Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Rename or click the Rename button to
enter a new name for the selected option
group.
Delete Rehab Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and
select Delete or click the Delete button.
Add/Delete Table Rows: Click the Insert and Delete buttons to
add or remove selected rows from the
table.
Action: Type the name of the rehabilitation action you are
creating.
You can right-click
in the tree-view,
as well as using
the buttons
Design Study
12-528 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: Select from the list to use an existing rehabilitation function.
Click the Ellipses () button to open Function Manager to create
a new function (see Function Manager on page 12-529).
Pre versus Post Diameter: Select or create the function you want to use for the
rehabilitation action you are creating. This function
describes the pre- and post-rehabilitation pipe
diameters.
You must create at least one function for pre-
rehabilitation diameter versus post-rehabilitation
diameter.
Note: Ideally, you want to include in all functions you create each of
the pipe sizes that are present in your rehabilitation groups. This
ensures that Darwin Designer does not need to extrapolate or
interpolate values for unspecified pipe diameters, possibly
resulting in undesirable cost, roughness, or post-rehabilitation
diameters.
Pre-Rehab Diameter vs. Cost: Select or create the function you want to use for the
rehabilitation action you are creating. This function
describes the cost of the action per length for pipe of
a given pre-rehabilitation diameter.
You must create at least one function for diameter
versus cost.
Diameter versus Roughness: Select or create the function you want to use for the
rehabilitation action you are creating. This function
describes the pre-rehabilitation diameter versus the
post-rehabilitation pipe roughness.
You must create at least one function for diameter
versus roughness.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-529
Function Manager
Use the Function Manager to create a rehabilitation function. To create a rehabilitation
function, from a rehab table in the Option Groups tab:
1. Click in a cell, other than an Action cell, in the Rehab Option Group grid.
2. Click the Ellipses () button. The Function Manager opens.
In the Rehab Option Group grid, in addition to the Action column,
there are three columns: pre- versus post-rehab diameters, pre-rehab diameter
versus unit costs, and pre-rehab diameter versus post-rehab roughness. At a
minimum, you must create one cost function for each of these columns.
Create one
function for each
of these column
headings
Design Study
12-530 WaterCAD Users Manual
New: Click New to add a rehab cost function.
Edit: Click Edit to change the definition of an
existing function.
Duplicate: Click Duplicate to make a copy of the
selected function. This can be an efficient
way to create a new function that shares many
values with an existing function.
Rename: Click Rename to change the name of an
existing function. When the dialog box opens,
type the new name and click OK or click
Cancel to exit without renaming anything.
Delete: Click Delete to permanently remove the
selected function.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-531
Function Editor
To create or edit a function:
Note: Ideally, you want to include in all functions you create each of
the pipe sizes that are present in your rehabilitation groups. This
ensures that Darwin Designer does not need to extrapolate or
interpolate values for unspecified pipe diameters, possibly
resulting in undesirable cost, roughness, or post-rehabilitation
diameters.
1. Click New and select one of the types of functions to create. Name the
new function and click OK.
2. Or, select a function and click Edit.
The Function Editor opens.
3. Click Insert to add a new row or Delete to remove a selected row.
4. Add data to the table that describes the relationship you want. For
example, enter a pre-rehabilitation and post-rehabilitation diameter for the pipe.
New Option Group
Enter the name you want to use for the option group. Click OK to apply the name to a
new table or Cancel to close the dialog box without creating a new table.
12.2.5 Design Type Tab
The Design Type tab lets you design and weight benefits so the genetic algorithm
knows better what your design priorities are.
For more information, see Darwin Designer Methodology on page B-819.
Design Objectives: Set the Objective Type. This is the overall priority of
the design. For each design type except Minimize
Budget, you need to enter an Available Budget.
Design Study
12-532 WaterCAD Users Manual
Minimize Cost sets price as your primary
concern and the genetic algorithm will consider
costs most heavily.
Maximize Benefit sets the performance of the
system as the highest priority. The system
performance is measured by the pressures at
specified junctions using pressure benefits.
Multi-Objective Trade-off lets the genetic
algorithm consider where the best compromise
lies between cost and pressure benefit.
Note: Multi-objective trade-off has higher computational requirements
than the other design types. Therefore, when using multi-
objective trade-off, you might want to use larger values for
maximum number of trials and non-improvement generation
than you would for other design types. If this design type does
not give you a solution, increase both the maximum number of
trials and non-improvement generation values before trying
again.
You must include a value for Available Budget when you select
either Maximize Benefit or Multi-Objective Trade-off as the
Objective Type. For design runs using Multi-Objective Trade-off,
the Available Budget value should be significantly higher than
you would expect to prevent good solutions from being
eliminated based on budget. As you perform more runs, you can
reduce the Available Budget value.
Benefit Type: Select a Dimensionless or Unitized benefit for
Maximized Benefit or Multi-Objective Trade-off.
If you are looking for a specific pressure
improvement from your system, consider using
unitized benefit. Unitized benefit considers the
average pressure increase for selected junctions.
If pressure improvement is not a primary concern,
consider using dimensionless benefit. Dimensionless
benefit considers the ratio of pressure improvement
to minimum pressure for selected junctions.
Pressure Benefit: Set the Pressure Benefit Coefficient and the
Pressure Benefit Exponent. These increase the
weighted value of pressure in your network. The
Pressure Benefit Exponent has a larger effect on the
weighted value than the same number for the
coefficient.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-533
12.2.6 Notes Tab
Use the Notes tab to type comments about your project and read things like log entries
and dates.
12.3 Design Event Editor
Note: A design event represents a single time step hydraulic analysis
that will be analyzed by Darwin Designer.
Use the Design Event Editor to create or edit design events used as parameters for
your designs or rehabilitation of systems. For more information, see Design Study
on page 12-514.
The Design Event Editor comprises these tabs:
Demand Adjustments Tab on page 12-534
Pressure Constraints Tab on page 12-536
Flow Constraints Tab on page 12-537
Boundary Conditions Tab on page 12-538
Notes Tab on page 12-540
Design Event Editor
12-534 WaterCAD Users Manual
12.3.1 Demand Adjustments Tab
The sizing of pipes in designer is driven by demands. By default, the demands used
will be those associated with the representative scenario. However, you may want to
use different demands, such as fire flows or peaks. There are several different ways to
modify or overwrite the demands in the representative scenario.
Override Scenario Demand AlternativeThis option lets you select a new
demand alternative to use in lieu of the demand alternative referenced by the
representative scenario. In this way, you can set up all of your different demand
cases in WaterCAD before starting Darwin Designer, and then reference them by
selecting Override Scenario Demand Alternative and selecting the appropriate
demand alternative. Using this option eliminates the need for the following
options, but does not preclude their use.
Adjust demands with a fixed multiplierIn some cases, the demands for the
representative scenario might be for an average day and you would like to adjust
them for a peak hour. To do so, enter a demand multiplier to adjust it. Note that the
multiplier you should enter is the value needed to adjust the demands at the speci-
fied time to the desired value. Assuming that the time from start was already 7
hours, which equated to 7 a.m. in a particular model, and you want to adjust
demands up to the 9 p.m. peak, rather than enter the 9 p.m. peak multiplier, you
should enter the ratio of the 7 a.m. multiplier and the 9 p.m. multiplier. For
example, if the 7 a.m. multiplier is 1.3 and the 9 p.m. multiplier is 1.6, then 1.23
should be used as the demand multiplier. This is illustrated as follows:
1.3 x 1.23 = 1.6
Thus it is true to say that the demand for any single junction is calculated by:
Qc = Qb * DMt * DM
Additional DemandsFire flows or other special cases can be achieved by adding
demand adjustments to individual junctions: by selecting the junction and speci-
fying the additional demand. If necessary, demands can also be subtracted by
specifying a negative number. Be sure to enter demands in the correct flow units.
Design Time: Scenario start time plus time from start. This is the
clock time that the Time From Start value represents.
Where: Qc = calculated flow
Qb = base flow
DMt = demand multiplier at time t (Time from start) determined for
demand patterns
DM = specified demand multiplier (default is 1.0)
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-535
Scenario Start Time: The time at which the scenario is set to begin. This is
the clock time for the start of the hydraulic
simulation defined as part of the representative
scenario calculation properties.
Time from Start: Only adjustable when the representative scenario is
set for EPS, the time from start specifies the time to
use as the basis of design. That is, for a model with a
scenario start time of 12:00:00AM, a time from start
value of 7 equates to 7:00:00AM. The result is that
Darwin Designer will, for the current design event,
simulate demands as the base demands multiplied by
their respective pattern multipliers at 7:00:00AM. In
short, the demands at 7 a.m. are used.
It is easy to see that you can set up multiple design
events that consider demands at different times in the
day, simply by adjusting the Time From Start value.
Override Scenario Dmnd Alt. Select this check box to override the displayed
Demand Alternative and to use the Demand
Multiplier. Clear this check box if you do not want to
use the Demand Multiplier.
Demand Alternative: Displays the Demand Alternative associated with the
selected set of observations.
Demand Multiplier: Set a demand multiplier that is applied to your water
model at that time from start. For example, if you
have knowledge that your demand is higher or lower
by a specific percentage, you can set that value here.
Insert/Delete: Click Insert or Delete to add or remove
a row in the Demand Adjustments
table.
Junction: Select a junction at which to set a demand
adjustment.
To access the drop-down and other selection buttons,
click in the Junction cell. Click the drop-down list to
select a junction from the list, click the Ellipses
button.
Demand Adjustments: Type the demand adjustment that you want applied to
the selected junction.
OK/Cancel/Help Buttons: Click OK to accept and apply the changes you made.
Or, click Cancel to exit the current function without
making or applying changes. Click Help to display
the help topic that describes the feature you are
using.
Design Event Editor
12-536 WaterCAD Users Manual
12.3.2 Pressure Constraints Tab
Use this tab to define pressure constraints for all junctions or a set of junctions.
Selection Set: From the drop-down list, select the junctions to
which you want to apply the constraints. To select
junctions, click the Ellipsis () button and use the
Element Selector (see Element Selector on
page 12-550).
Minimum Pressure: Set a minimum pressure that you require for the
selected set of junctions. Violations of this boundary
are displayed when you calculate your network.
Maximum Pressure: Set a maximum pressure that you require for the
selected set of junctions. This value cannot be lower
than the minimum pressure you set. You can set this
to an unusually high value if you are unconcerned
with maximum pressure. Violations of this boundary
are displayed when you calculate your network.
Consider Pressure Benefit: If you set the Design Parameters Design Type to
Minimize Cost (for more information, see Design
Objectives on page 12-531), then pressure benefit is
not considered in the solution, but the benefit is
computed.
This check box is available to Maximize Benefit and
Multi-Objective Trade-off design parameters.
Select this check box if you want the genetic
algorithm to consider the benefits provided your
design by higher system pressures.
Pressure Constraints Table: For more information, see Pressure Constraints
Table on page 12-536.
OK/Cancel/Help: Click OK to accept and apply the changes you made.
Or, click Cancel to exit the current function without
making or applying changes. Click Help to display
the help topic that describes the feature you are
using.
Pressure Constraints Table
Note: Click a column heading to sort the column in ascending or
descending order, or right-click the column heading and select
Sort.
Junction: Displays the list of junctions for which you have set
up pressure constraints.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-537
Override Defaults: Select this check box if you want to override the
default maximum and/or minimum pressure
constraints, or you wish to override whether to use
the selected junction in pressure benefit calculations.
After you select this check box, click in the field you
want to change and type the new value for the
constraint, or click the Consider Pressure Benefit
check box.
Minimum/Maximum Pressure: Displays the pressure minimum and maximum that
are set.
Consider Pressure Benefit: If you set the Design Parameters Design Type to
Minimize Cost (for more information, see Design
Objectives on page 12-531), then pressure benefit is
not considered in the solution, but the benefit is
computed.
This check box is available to Maximize Benefit and
Multi-Objective Trade-off design parameters.
Select this check box if you want the genetic
algorithm to consider the benefits provided your
design by higher system pressures.
If you check Consider Pressure Benefit but your
Design Type option is set to Minimize Cost, then
benefit is computed and the benefit value will show
up at run time as well as in report.
12.3.3 Flow Constraints Tab
Use this tab to define flow boundary conditions for a junction or set of junctions.
Selection Set: From the drop-down list, select the pipes to which
you want to apply the constraints. To select pipes,
click the Ellipsis button and use the Element
Selector.
Minimum Velocity: Set a minimum velocity that you require for the
selected set of pipes. Violations of this boundary are
displayed when you calculate your network.
Maximum Velocity: Set a maximum velocity that you require for the
selected set of pipes. You can set this to an unusually
high value if needed. Violations of this boundary are
displayed when you calculate your network.
Flow Constraints Table: For more information, see Flow Constraints Table
on page 12-538.
Design Event Editor
12-538 WaterCAD Users Manual
OK/Cancel/Help: Click OK to accept and apply the changes you made.
Or, click Cancel to exit the current function without
making or applying changes. Click Help to display
the help topic that describes the feature you are
using.
Flow Constraints Table
Note: Click a column heading to sort the column in ascending or
descending order, or right-click the column heading and select
Sort.
Pipe: Displays the list of pipes for which you have set up
flow constraints.
Override Defaults: Select this check box if you want to override the
default maximum and/or minimum flow (velocity)
constraints for selected pipes. After you select this
check box, click in the field you want to change and
type the new value for the constraint.
Minimum/Maximum Velocity: Displays the velocity minimum and maximum that
are set.
12.3.4 Boundary Conditions Tab
Boundary conditions are explicitly specified for each design event and used for evalu-
ating a trial design solution for a design event.
Boundary conditions can be used to override initial settings from the design represen-
tative scenario for a design event. For example, if you want to simulate a pipe break,
you can set the status of a pipe to closed for a pipe-outage design event. Similarly,
valve settings can be applied, tank levels, and so on. Without a specified boundary
condition for a design event, Darwin Designer will apply the initial sittings from the
representative scenario when evaluating the corresponding design event.
Note: When calculating an EPS model to get boundary conditions,
Darwin Designer uses the sizes, demands, etc., that are present
in the representative scenario. If the representative scenario
includes lots of unsized pipes, then you will need to override the
appropriate boundary conditions (such as, a tank in a new part
of the model). If you do not specify a time step on the Demand
Adjustments tab, the initial conditions at time 0 will be used.
Use the boundary conditions tab to set up certain pre-rehabilitation, pre-design bound-
aries for tanks, pumps, pipes, and valves.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-539
Tip: You only need to explicitly state a boundary condition if you
wish to change it from the default. Do not try to look at boundary
conditions by selecting All Pipes or All Pumps because this sets
all pipes to Closed or all pumps to Off.
Element Type: From the list of elements, select the kind of element
for which you want to set a boundary condition:
pump, tank, pipe, or valve.
Selection Set: The Selection Set drop-down list reflects your
selection of an element type. Click the Ellipsis ()
button to choose the particular element you want, or
to select multiple or all elements of a particular type.
After you select a series of elements, you can set the
boundary conditions for the selected elements.
Load from Model: After you choose a selection, use Load from Model
to load settings and conditions for your elements at a
time from start that you specify. For example, if your
peak time is 6 pm, you can load the settings for your
elements from the model at that time. For more
information, see Load Boundary Conditions Dialog
Box on page 12-540.
Status: Pipe and pump status have two values: open and
closed or on and off. Valves can be closed, active or
inactive, except for GPVs which can be closed or
active only.
Speed: Pumps have a relative speed setting that you can
define.
Level: Tanks have a level setting that you can define.
Flow Setting: Flow-control valves have a flow setting you can
define.
Pressure Setting: PBVs, PSVs, and PRVs have pressure settings that
you can define.
Coefficient: TCVs have a coefficient that you can define.
OK/Cancel/Help: Click OK to accept and apply the changes you made.
Or, click Cancel to exit the current function without
making or applying changes. Click Help to display
the help topic that describes the feature you are
using.
Design Run
12-540 WaterCAD Users Manual
Load Boundary Conditions Dialog Box
Note: When calculating an EPS model to get boundary conditions,
Darwin Designer uses the sizes, demands, etc., that are present
in the representative scenario. If the representative scenario
includes lots of unsized pipes, then you will need to override the
appropriate boundary conditions (such as, a tank in a new part
of the model). If you do not specify a time step on the Demand
Adjustments tab, the initial conditions at time 0 will be used.
Time from Start : Specify the time in the EPS that should be used to
source element boundary conditions from. E.g., for a
model where time 7 = 7 a.m., this setting defines
boundary conditions for elements to the states that
exist at 7am in your model.
Since your model may not yet have the design
improvements included (the reason you are using
Darwin Designer), boundary conditions may need to
be adjusted to set up conditions to the correct levels
of conservatism for your design. E.g., the assumed
level for a new tank might only be 75% full at peak
hour.
Perform calculation: Specify whether to calculate the hydraulic model to
determine boundary conditions. This option is
available so you can save time by not recalculating
the model unnecessarily.
12.3.5 Notes Tab
Use the Notes tab to type comments about your project and read things like log entries
and dates. Notes you enter here also display in the Design Events tab, Notes column,
of the Darwin Designer main dialog box.
12.4 Design Run
Note: The way that you decide to use an event or a constraint is to
make it active by checking a box. You must have at least one
active design event and one active design or rehab group to
make up a design run.
As part of any design study, you will want to make numerous design runs. A design
run is a single, complete solution of the problem consisting of the design events,
groups, and other options plus the results of the design run.
To create a design run, right-click the design study that the run is to be part of. Then,
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-541
Add a new optimized design run
or
Add a new manual design run.
or
Select an existing design and duplicate it.
Each time you want to run an optimization, you can create a new run or edit an
existing run.
Note: Manual runs do not use genetic-algorithm optimization.
Design runs can either be GA optimized or manual runs. A GA optimized design run
uses genetic-algorithm optimization to optimize the selected objective (e.g., minimize
cost) for your design. A manual design run lets you make a single selection of pipe
sizes and/or rehabilitation actions in order to evaluate the specified design against the
same criterion as a GA optimized design. The difference between the two kinds of run
is that a manual run executes a single solution evaluation only, using the pipe sizes and
rehabilitation options that you selected.
Click the design run to
see the tabs
Design Run
12-542 WaterCAD Users Manual
12.4.1 Design Events Tab
The Design Events tab displays a list of the events you have set up. (For more infor-
mation, see Design Events Tab on page 12-516.) Select the check boxes to set as
Active those criteria that you want to be used in the calculation of your design run.
Your design run must have at least one active design event in order to be calculated
without error.
Event Name: Lists the design event.
Active: Select the check boxes for those design events that
you want to be considered in the current design run.
You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to
row and press the spacebar to select and deselect a
check box.
12.4.2 Local Design Groups Tab
Note: You must have at least one active design or rehab group set to a
valid design or rehab option group.
Local means pertaining to the specific design run and not
global.
Design Group: Tells you the names of the design groups.
Active: Select the check boxes for those design groups that
you want to be considered in the current design run.
You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to
row and press the spacebar to select and deselect a
check box.
Design Option Group: For each design group, you must select the design
option group (set of possible pipe sizes) you want to
use. for more information, see Option Groups Tab
on page 12-522.
You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to
row and type the first letter of a design group name to
select that design group.
Manual Selection: Lets you force the use of a specific pipe size for the
group. This column is only available for manual
design and rehabilitation runs, not for optimized
ones. For more information, see Manual Design
Runs on page 12-543.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-543
Manual Design Runs
Manual selections are used to force Darwin Designer to use specific designs in calcu-
lating costs of a network. For example, you might use an manual design to test some
hand calculations you have made or to reproduce an optimized design to which you
want to force manual overrides.
For example, you could create a manual design run in which you force the groups
of pipes to specific sizes.
You might create a rehabilitation design that forces groups to use specific actions.
The difference between a manual design run and an optimized design run is the
Manual Selection column in the Design Groups and Rehab Groups tab for the run.
After you select a table to use for a group, you then must set that group to use a
specific pipe size or specific rehabilitation action.
Set the groups to use
specific pipe sizes
Design Run
12-544 WaterCAD Users Manual
12.4.3 Local Rehab Groups Tab
Note: You must have at least one active design or rehab group set to a
valid design or rehab option group.
Rehabilitation Group Name: Tells you the names of the rehabilitation groups.
Active: Select the check boxes for those rehabilitation groups
that you want to be considered in the current design
run.
You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to
row and press the spacebar to select and deselect a
check box.
Rehab Option Group: For each rehabilitation group, you must select the
option group you want to use. For more information,
see Option Groups Tab on page 12-522.
You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to
row and type the first letter of a design group name to
select that design group.
Set the groups to use
specific rehab actions
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-545
Manual Selection: Lets you force a particular action for the selected
group. For more information, see Manual Design
Runs on page 12-543.
12.4.4 Local Options Tab
Note: Use these settings to fine-tune the way the GA finds results. If
adjusting a particular GA control gives you better results,
pursue the approach to maximize your design.
Local options relate to optimized design runs only and therefore
are not available for manual design runs.
The Options tab lets you define the parameters for the genetic algorithm.
GA Parameters Advanced Options on page 10-490
Stopping Criteria on page 12-545
Top Solutions on page 12-546
Stopping Criteria
Maximum Trials: Set the maximum number of calibration trials you
want the GA to process before stopping.
Non-Improvement Generations: Set the number of maximum number of non-
improvement generations you want the GA to
process without calculating an improved fitness. If
the GA makes this number of calculations without
Computing the Design Run
12-546 WaterCAD Users Manual
finding an improvement that is better than the
defined Fitness Tolerance, the GA will stop. Non-
Improvement Generations works in conjunction with
Fitness Tolerance.
Top Solutions
Solutions to Keep: Select the number of solutions you want to keep.
For a design type of Minimize Cost or Maximize
Benefit, Darwin Designer retains the top feasible
solutions according to the value of the objective
function. If the user-specified number of top
solutions is greater than the number of feasible
solutions found, Darwin Designer reports all the
feasible solutions found.
12.4.5 Notes Tab
Use the Notes tab to type comments about your project and read things like log entries
and dates.
12.5 Computing the Design Run
After you set up your design run (see Design Run on page 12-540), click the
GO button to compute the results of your design.
12.6 Results Pane
After you have computed your design run (see Computing the Design Run on
page 12-546), the results area becomes available for you. Use the results area to
review and use your results.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-547
Note: In all results panes, you can sort columns by right-clicking and
selecting Sort or by clicking on the column headers. This is
especially useful for quickly indentifying which junctions and/or
pipes have violations. Also, sorting is preserved in reports, so if
you sort something it will be sorted the same way in the report
view.
Show/Hide Results: Click Show Results or Hide Results to display or
hide the results area.
Solution: Use the drop-down list to select the solution you
want to see or report on.
Export to Scenario: Click Export to Scenario to export your
results as an alternative to your WaterCAD or
WaterGEMS scenario. Export creates a new
scenario and lets you export the following data to
alternatives:
Physical Alternative data: diameter, roughness,
and material.
Active Topology Alternative: If the pipe
diameter is 0, the pipe is made inactive in the
active topology alternative.
Capital Cost Alternative: capital costs and unit
length costs for pipes.
In WaterCAD or WaterGEMS, to see the changes
brought about by your export, choose the scenario
from the Scenarios drop-down list or review cost
information. For more information, see Scenario
Selection on page 8-359 and Active Cost
Scenarios on page 11-499.)
Results Pane
12-548 WaterCAD Users Manual
Copy to Clipboard: Click Copy to Clipboard to copy the results
from the currently-displayed (active) tab to
the Windows clipboard. From the clipboard,
you can paste (Ctrl+V) this data into other software,
such as Microsoft Excel, for example.
Report: Click Report to present your data in Report
Viewer. For more information, see Report
Viewer on page 12-551.
Plot: This displays a graph of your results. For
more information, see Graph Dialog Box
on page 12-551.
Resize to Fit: Click Resize to Fit to fit all result columns in the
report-area display.
Tabs: Design Groups Tab on page 12-548
Rehab Groups Tab on page 12-549
Pressure Constraints Tab on page 12-549
Flow Constraints Tab on page 12-549
Fitness: Fitness is the overall score given a solution by
Darwin Designer. For Minimize Cost solutions, a
lower fitness is best. Otherwise, higher fitness
indicates the best solution. For more information, see
Competent Genetic Algorithms on page B-828.
Total Benefit: This only has a value for Maximize Benefit and
Multi-Objective Trade-off calculations. This is a
score of the calculated benefits, with a higher value
indicating more benefit in terms of improved
network pressure.
Total Cost: Total Cost displays the sum of rehabilitation and
design costs.
12.6.1 Design Groups Tab
The Design Groups tab in the results area displays:
Design group name (see Design Groups Tab on page 12-519)
Pipe label
Pipe material
Pipe roughness
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-549
Pipe inside diameter
Cost of each pipe
12.6.2 Rehab Groups Tab
The Rehab Groups tab in the results area displays:
Rehabilitation group name (see Rehab Groups Tab on page 12-521)
Pipe label
Rehabilitation action taken
Cost of rehabilitation for each pipe
12.6.3 Pressure Constraints Tab
The Pressure Constraints tab in the results area displays information about junction
pressures:
Design event set name (see Design Event Editor on page 12-533)
Junction label
Simulated pressure at the junction
Required minimum pressure at the junction
Required maximum pressure at the junction
Any calculated pressures that fall below the minimum or above the maximum (as
a negative number if below the minimum, as a positive one if above the
maximum)
12.6.4 Flow Constraints Tab
The Flow Constraints tab in the results area displays information about junction pres-
sures:
Design event name (see Design Event Editor on page 12-533)
Junction label
Simulated velocity at the junction
Required minimum velocity at the pipe
Element Selector
12-550 WaterCAD Users Manual
Required maximum velocity at the pipe
Any calculated velocities that fall below the minimum or above the maximum (as
a negative number if below the minimum, as a positive one if above the
maximum)
12.7 Element Selector
The Element Selector dialog box lets you choose the elements for which you want to
optimize rehabilitation or design.
Note: To use selection sets in Darwin Designer, you must first set them
up in WaterGEMS or WaterCAD. For more information, see
Selection Sets on page 5-255.
If you are creating new pipes in WaterGEMS or WaterCAD
specifically for use in Darwin Designer, you should use a naming
convention that stands out and lets you more easily select them.
Selection Set: If you have a selection set defined that you want to
use, select it from the drop-down list. Otherwise, you
can select:
All AvailableSelect All Available to select
and highlight all items in the Elements list.
CurrentSelect Current to undo any changes
you have made to selections since you opened
Element Selector. Current restores those items
that were selected when you first opened the
dialog box.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-551
NoneSelect None to deselect all items in the
Elements list.
Elements: Click, shift+click, and/or ctrl+click elements you
want to include in your design group. Whatever
elements are highlighted when you press OK will
become part of the group.
OK/Cancel: Click OK to save the selection set (items that are
selected) and close the dialog box or click Cancel to
close the dialog box without making any changes.
12.8 Report Viewer
Report Viewer lets you view, print, and search reports you create about your optimiza-
tion.
Print: Lets you print your report to an installed printer.
Find: Lets you search for text in your report. Report
Viewer highlights the text as it finds it.
Single/Multiple Page: Lets you display one of your report pages or several
pages at once.
Zoom: Lets you magnify or reduce the display of your report
for better viewing.
Previous/Next Page: Lets you page through your report. You can also use
the Page Up/Down keys on your keyboard.
Forward/Backward: Lets you navigate between pages you have just
viewed.
12.9 Graph Dialog Box
You can create two graphs from your Darwin Designer calculations:
Pareto Optimal PlotShows Benefit versus Cost for your calculations, provided
you have used Maximum Benefit or Multi-Objective Trade-off Design Parameters
(see Design Type Tab on page 12-531 and About Pareto Optimal Plots on
page 12-552).
Pipe Size Usage PlotShows the total length of pipe of a certain diameter used
by the solution.
To create a graph of your solution, with the Design Run highlighted, and
after calculating the network, in the results area, click the Plot button and
choose the kind of plot you want.
Graph Dialog Box
12-552 WaterCAD Users Manual
The graph dialog box has three buttons:
EditLets you edit your graphing parameters, axes, etc.
Copy to ClipboardCopies the current graph as a raster (bitmap) image to the
clipboard.
Print PreviewShows you how the graph will print to your default printer.
12.9.1 About Pareto Optimal Plots
When there is more than one objective in a design, it is seldom possible to say that one
solution is clearly the best of all because it may be better than another solution with
regard to one objective measure but worse on another objective. (Although, there are
many solutions that are clearly inferior. That is there are other solutions that are better
than an inferior with regard to all objectives.)
For instance, as illustrated in Figure Figure 12-1: Non-Inferior Solutions vs. Inferior
Solutionson page 12-552, solution 1, 4, and 5 give lower cost and greater benefit than
solution 2 and 3, thus solution 1, 4, and 5 are better (not worse) than both solution 2
and 3. Solution 1, 4, and 5 are often referred as non-inferior or non-dominated solu-
tions, while solution 2 and 3 are called inferior or dominated solutions.
Figure 12-1: Non-Inferior Solutions vs. Inferior Solutions
M
a
x
i
m
i
z
e
B
e
n
e
f
i
t
Minimize Cost
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
0 5 10 15 20
1
2
3
4
5
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-553
When you choose to do cost-benefit trade-off design, Darwin Designer minimizes the
cost and maximizes the benefit. Both objectives conflict, because minimizing the cost
of a design diminishes the benefit instead of improving it. Darwin Designer searches
for non-inferior solutions. Non-inferior, or Pareto optimal (after Pareto, an Italian
economist), solutions are the set of solutions for which no solution can give a better
value of one objective without having a worse value for another objective, as shown in
Figure 12-2: A Plot Of Pareto Optimal Fronton page 12-553.
Figure 12-2: A Plot Of Pareto Optimal Front
For example, one solution may cost $5 million and have a pressure benefit of 2 (high
is good), while another may cost $6 million and have a pressure benefit of 2.2. Neither
is clearly superior but neither is clearly inferior; they are both non-inferior to one
another.
When working with multiple objectives, there is not likely to be a single solution that
is superior for all objectives. Therefore, when multiple objectives are involved, you
must chose between a number of non-inferior solutions.
Darwin eliminates the thousands of inferior solutions and provides two ways to
compare non-inferior solutions:
1. Solution comparison table
2. Pareto optimal plot.
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
50 150 250 350 450
Non-Inferior
Solutions
Inferior Solutions
Cost (1000$)
B
e
n
e
f
i
t
(
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
i
m
p
r
o
v
e
m
e
n
t
)
Graph Dialog Box
12-554 WaterCAD Users Manual
12.9.2 Export Design to Scenario Dialog Box
Note: If you export a Designer solution to the scenario manager, the
extra demand adjustments (see Demand Adjustments Tab on
page 12-534) and boundary (initial) conditions (see Boundary
Conditions Tab on page 12-538) arent exported (only physical
properties, active topology, and capital cost alternatives can be
exported). Given this, to recreate simulation runs that are
equivalent to each Design Event (see Design Events Tab on
page 12-542), it is necessary for you to build a corresponding
demand and initial alternative that reflects the additional
demand adjustments (if any) and any boundary conditions (if
any).
Use Export to Scenario to pass your results and optimized network back for use in
WaterCAD. (For more information, see Scenario Selection on page 8-359 and
Active Cost Scenarios on page 11-499.)
1. Click Export to Scenario.
2. The Export Design to Scenario dialog box opens. Select the check boxes
for those items you want to export.
3. By default, WaterCAD uses the name of the design run as the name for the
scenario and alternatives you export. If you want, you can manually type a
different name for these.
4. If you want to rename the scenarios and alternatives using the same name but to
something other than the design run name, select the Use Scenario Name for
Alternatives check box and type in the Export to Scenario Name field; the text
boxes for the alternatives will match what you type.
5. Click OK to export the scenarios and any alternatives you chose. Click OK when
prompted to accept a confirmation message about the export.
6. To see what you have exported:
a. Close Darwin Designer.
b. Use the Scenario drop-down list to select the scenario you exported.
c. Use the Scenario Manager button to review the alternatives you
exported.
Using Darwin Designer
WaterCAD Users Manual 12-555
12.10 Schema Augmentation
The Schema Augmentation dialog box opens if the WaterCAD file does not contain
the Darwin Designer schema.
A schema is the series of tables and table cells that contain your data. A schema
change typically means a table or table cells have been added, usually by an update to
the software.
When you use Schema Augmentation, WaterCAD adds any missing tables to the
schema of the file you are using. Updating a schema should not damage your data but
we do recommend you create a backup. Select the Create backup: *.bak check box
to create a backup of your existing database. It will be saved in its current directory
but will have .BAK appended to the filename.
To restore the backup, delete or move your current .MDB file and then rename your
backup file by deleting the .BAK extension, so the extension becomes only .MDB.
Backup file
Existing database
Set Field Options
12-556 WaterCAD Users Manual
12.11 Set Field Options
Right-click any units in any dialog box and select the properties to use the Set Field
Options dialog box. This lets you set the units, precision, and format for the data:
Scientific: Scientific numbers use the form, 1.111 E+111.
Fixed Point: Fixed point numbers use the form 111.111.
General: General format uses the most compact of either
fixed-point or scientific notation
Number: Numbers use the form 1,111,111.111, where number
separators are used.
12.12 Verification Summary
If you try to calculate a network using invalid Darwin Designer settings, the Designer
Data Verification Summary displays. This dialog box means that there are some
invalid settings in your run that prevent Darwin Designer from calculating your solu-
tion.
Here are some things to consider:
Do your groups reference elements that are inactive in your Representative
Scenario? Check the scenario you are using. For more information, see Design
Events Tab on page 12-516. Make sure your scenario uses only active pipes.
Does your design run have an Active Design Event? It should. For more informa-
tion, see Design Events Tab on page 12-542.
Do you have active design groups that are assigned to valid design option tables?
You need at least one active design group that corresponds to a design option
table. For more information, see Local Design Groups Tab on page 12-542.
Is it possible that elements have been deleted from the model from another client
application? If so, close down Darwin Designer and re-open it. Darwin Designer
will then update itself based on the latest GEMS model, deleting any references to
deleted elements.
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-557
13
Chapter
Presenting your
Results
This section covers the various methods that are provided for viewing, annotating,
graphing, and reporting your data. It also presents the tools available for generating
contours, generating profiles, and color coding elements based on any attribute.
13.1 Element Annotation
Element annotations allow you to display detailed information such as pipe lengths or
node ground elevations, as well as calculated values such as velocity, in your drawing.
You can add one or more annotations for any type of element in the system. Annota-
tions update automatically. For example, annotations will display newly calculated
values and will be refreshed as you change scenarios.
Note: The annotations and their format are defined by using the
Annotation Wizard (for more information, see The Annotation
Wizard on page 13-558). In Stand-Alone mode, the annotation
format can also be easily modified in the Attribute Annotation
dialog box, (see Annotation WizardSpecify Annotation on
page 13-559) which opens when you double-click the handle of
the annotation text in the drawing, or if you right-click the
annotation and select Edit <Attribute> from the shortcut menu.
Pipe annotations can be aligned with the pipes or displayed
horizontally, depending on the Pipe Text alignment setting
specified in the Drawing Options dialog box.
You can flip the text from one side of the pipe to the other (reading in the opposite
direction) to maintain readability when the pipe direction on a plot is nearly vertical.
By default, the text flips direction when the pipe direction is 1.5 degrees measured
counter-clockwise from the vertical. You can modify this value by inserting a TextFli-
pAngle variable in the HAESTAD.INI file, located in the Haestad directory. The angle
is measured in degrees, counter-clockwise from the vertical.
For instance, if you want the text to flip when the pipe direction is vertical, you should
add the following line to the HAESTAD.INI file:
Element Annotation
13-558 WaterCAD Users Manual
TextFlipAngle=0.0
Reasonable values fall in the range from 15.0 degrees to -15.0 degrees. The TextFli-
pAngle is only applicable to annotations on the plan view.
Element annotation includes:
Attribute Annotation Dialog Box on page 13-558
The Annotation Wizard on page 13-558
13.1.1 Attribute Annotation Dialog Box
To access the Attribute Annotation dialog box, right-click the annotation and select
<Attribute Name> Annotation. Alternatively, in the main view in Stand-Alone mode,
double-click the handle of the annotation text to display the corresponding Attribute
Annotation dialog box. Here you can easily modify the format of that attribute annota-
tion without going through the Annotation Wizard (see The Annotation Wizard on
page 13-558) again. The replaceable parameters %v and %u represent the attributes
value and unit respectively.
13.1.2 The Annotation Wizard
You can use the Annotation Wizard to add annotations to the drawing, as well as to
remove or modify existing annotations in the drawing. You can annotate all elements
or any subset of elements.
The wizard is divided into three steps:
Select ElementsSelect the types of elements to annotate. For more information,
see Annotation WizardSelect Elements on page 13-559.
Specify AnnotationsSpecify the set of elements to annotate, the attributes you
would like to annotate, and the format of your notations. For more information,
see Annotation WizardSpecify Annotation on page 13-559.
SummarySummary of the selected annotation settings. For more information,
see Annotation WizardSummary on page 13-560.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-559
Annotation WizardSelect Elements
Tip: If you decide to turn off the annotations for a particular element
type, your annotation settings will be retained, allowing you to
easily toggle annotation back on.
This step allows you to specify the types of elements you wish to annotate by
checking the appropriate boxes. You may annotate more than one type of element at a
time by checking all the desired element types. If you have already annotated your
drawing, you can remove annotations for a particular type of element by clearing the
corresponding check box.
Annotation WizardSpecify Annotation
The next steps allows you to specify the subset of elements and the attributes you wish
to annotate for each element type. For each element type, you will be presented with a
table where you can specify the attributes you wish to annotate, and the mask for each
attribute.
Specify the Set of ElementsChoose All Elements from the choice list for anno-
tation to be applied to all elements in the network, or choose a selection set. Click
the Ellipsis (...) button to access the Selection Set Manager to edit or add selection
sets.
AttributesSelect from a list of all available attributes for the current element
type including calculated values. Click this field, and choose the attributes you
wish to annotate by selecting from the list that appears. Clicking the sideways
triangle button will open the categorized Quick Attribute Selector (for more infor-
mation, see Quick Attribute Selector on page 2-40).
MaskCustomize the way the annotation is displayed. The replaceable parame-
ters %v and %u represent the attributes value and unit respectively. By default,
the mask is set up as follows: <attribute name>: %v %u.
Tip: When annotating, for example, pipe diameters, the default mask
is Diameter: %v %u. The default annotation for a 150 millimeter
pipe would be Diameter: 150 mm. By changing the mask to %v
%u, the resulting annotation would be 150 mm.
Initial Placement This field indicates where the annotation will be located
initially. It will always be set to <defualt>.
Element Annotation
13-560 WaterCAD Users Manual
Annotation WizardSummary
Tip: You can turn annotation visibility on or off by editing the
Drawing Options. Your annotation settings will be retained. If the
Drawing Options are set so that element annotations will not be
displayed, clicking the Finished button in the Annotation Wizard
will automatically turn annotations on.
In Stand-Alone mode, you can double-click an annotation
element in the drawing to edit the associated mask.
The Annotation Text Height can be adjusted from the Drawing
tab of the Options dialog box, accessed by selecting Tools >
Options.
The last step of annotating your drawing is reviewing the choices you have made. If
you would like to make changes at this time, click the Back button to return to
previous windows in the wizard. When you are satisfied, click the Finished button to
apply the annotations to the drawing.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-561
13.2 Color Coding
Color Coding allows you to assign colors to elements in the drawing based on a
variety of input and output attributes. For any attribute, you can supply a color scheme
or have the application generate one for you. For example, you can supply a color
scheme to display all pipes sizes between 2 in. and 8 in. in green, those between 10 in.
and 24 in. in blue, and those between 27 in. and 48 in. in red.
13.2.1 Color Coding Dialog Box
At the top of the Color Coding dialog box are two tabs, Link and Node. You can set up
color coding for both links and nodes, or just one of the two. The following fields are
available:
Note: Color coding legends can be added to any location in the
drawing by clicking the Legend button on the Tool
Palette.
Color coding will automatically update as input or results
change. For example, after performing a calculation, colors will
update to reflect the newly calculated values.
If the results for the selected attribute are not available, or if all
values for that attribute are the same, automatic range
initialization will not be performed. You can enter your own
custom range in this case.
A schematic can have any number of color assignments.
AttributeSelect the attribute by which you would like to color code, or select
<None> to turn color coding off. By clicking the sideways triangle button, you
can access the categorized Quick Attribute Selector (for more information, see
Quick Attribute Selector on page 2-40).
Selection SetChoose All Elements from the list to apply color coding to be
applied to all elements in the network, or choose a selection set to apply color
coding to a subset. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to access the Selection Set
Manager to edit or add selection sets.
Calculate RangeAutomatically determine the minimum and maximum for the
specified attribute and selection set.
Minimum/MaximumDisplays the calculated minimum and maximum values
for the specified attribute in the selection set.
Reports
13-562 WaterCAD Users Manual
InitializeAutomatically calculate a default color coding range for the specified
attribute, based on the values in your project.
RampAutomatically generate a gradient range between two colors that you
specify. Pick the color for the first and last values in the list and the program will
select colors for the other values. For instance, picking red as the first color and
blue as the last color will produce varying shades of purple for the other values.
Tip: The Quick View window can be used to display a summary of the
active link or node color coding parameters.
Use the Initialize and/or the Insert buttons to define your color coding map. Then click
OK to apply the specified colors to the appropriate elements.
13.3 Reports
Reports includes:
Predefined Reports on page 13-563
Element Details Report on page 13-563
Element Results Report on page 13-564
Tabular Reports on page 13-565
Scenario Summary Report on page 13-565
Project Inventory Report on page 13-565
Calculation Results Table on page 13-565
Plan View Report on page 13-566
Calculation/Problem Summary Report on page 13-566
Contour Plan View on page 13-568
Totalizing Flow Meters on page 13-568
Tabular Report Window on page 13-569
System Head Curve Dialog Box on page 13-569
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-563
13.3.1 Predefined Reports
This application provides several predefined reports that can be used in your projects.
This feature makes report generation a simple point-and-click exercise. Select the
elements for which you want a report and send them to your printer.
Note: Detailed reports can be copied to the Windows clipboard in RTF
format for use in your favorite word processing program.
The following types of Predefined Reports are available:
Element Details Report on page 13-563
Element Results Report on page 13-564
Tabular Reports on page 13-565
Scenario Summary Report on page 13-565
Project Inventory Report on page 13-565
Plan View Report on page 13-566
13.3.2 Element Details Report
The Detailed Reports dialog box allows you to print detailed reports for all elements
or any subset of elements in the system.
In Stand-Alone mode, from the Detailed Reports dialog box, select multiple elements
to be printed by Shift+clicking or Control+clicking. Holding down the Shift key will
provide group selection. Alternatively, use the Select button to open the Selection Set
dialog box (for more information, see Selection Sets on page 5-255). This provides
more powerful selection functions. When you are satisfied, click the Print button to
output the selected reports.
Reports
13-564 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: You can graphically select elements that you would like to print
before opening the Detailed Reports dialog box. This is done by
holding down the Shift key and selecting elements, or by
dragging a window around the area of interest. The selected
elements will be highlighted in the list of elements to print when
you open the dialog box.
You can print a detailed report for a single element without using
the Detailed Reports dialog box. Open the element editor for the
desired element and click the Report button.
In AutoCAD mode, to activate the Detailed Reports dialog box, select Report >
Element Details. The cursor will change to a pick box, signaling you to choose the
elements for which you would like to view reports. Select elements as you normally
would in AutoCAD. Press the Enter key, and the dialog box will appear. While all of
the elements in the project are listed, the ones you have selected are highlighted. You
can use the Select button to further edit this list. Click the Print button to output the
selected reports when you are satisfied.
13.3.3 Element Results Report
Note: You can graphically select elements that you would like to print
before opening the Element Results dialog box. This is done by
holding down the Shift key and selecting multiple elements, or
by dragging a window around the area of interest. The selected
elements will be highlighted in the list of elements to print when
you open the dialog box.
When working with large systems, the preview option can
require a great deal of system resources. You can reduce
resource requirements by selecting a small subset of elements
with which to work. The print option has lower system resource
requirements than the preview option.
The Element Results dialog box allows you to print or preview a single report
containing the results for any number of elements in the system.
From the Element Results dialog box, you can select elements to be printed by
Shift+clicking or Ctrl+clicking. Holding down the Shift key will provide group selec-
tion behavior. Alternatively, use the Select button to open the Selection Set dialog box
(for more information, see Selection Sets on page 5-255). This provides more
powerful selection functions. When you are satisfied, click the Preview button to view
the selected reports, or click the Print button to print the selected reports.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-565
13.3.4 Tabular Reports
Note: The predefined tables may need to be modified in certain
situations to have them properly display the desired data. For
instance, if you set up a project and choose the Mannings
friction method, the default Pipe Report will still display a Hazen-
Williams C column, which will contain no data. The proper
column must be added by Editing the table.
All tabular data in this program can be copied to the Windows
Clipboard by right-clicking the desired table and selecting Copy
from the shortcut menu. You can then paste this data into your
favorite spreadsheet or word processor to generate custom
reports and graphs.
Using the powerful FlexTables feature (see FlexTables on page 7-323), you can
very quickly generate a tabular report containing any attribute and any network
element.
13.3.5 Scenario Summary Report
The Scenario Summary provides a detailed report of the active scenario (see
Scenarios on page 8-358), including alternatives (see Alternatives on page 8-
339), and a brief summary of the calculation options.
13.3.6 Project Inventory Report
The Project Inventory report provides a detailed report that includes a summary of the
active scenario (see Scenarios on page 8-358), a network inventory, and a detailed
pipe inventory (grouped by pipe section).
13.3.7 Calculation Results Table
The calculation results for each element in a network can be viewed in a table format.
This table is predefined and you cannot change it. It displays the set of the most
commonly desired output attributes for the type of element for each reporting time
step in the hydraulic analysis. The contents of the table can be copied to the Windows
clipboard to transfer the data to another application such as a spreadsheet or word
processing document.
Reports
13-566 WaterCAD Users Manual
Tip: You can change the reporting time step increment on the
Analysis Toolbar (for more information, see Analysis Toolbar on
page 2-67).
To copy the data to the Windows clipboard, right-click the table and select Copy from
the context menu.
13.3.8 Plan View Report
Generate reports for the plan view of the network, for either the current drawing
display (Current View) or the entire drawing extents (Full View).
13.3.9 Calculation/Problem Summary Report
After running hydraulic calculations, the Results tab of the Scenario Editor is
displayed. This tab contains a summary of the calculation results. To view any prob-
lems or warnings encountered during the simulation, click the Element Messages
button.
Tip: Tip:Holding the mouse cursor over a message in the Element
Calculation Message Browser report will open up a shortcut
message box that displays further information on the message.
The report consists of a series of folders that represent different stages of the calcula-
tion process. Double-click a folder or click the + sign to view information related to
the folders caption. The color of the folder will indicate if any problems occurred
during that portion of the analysis.
The colors indicate the following:
Green LightCalculations were run successfully, without any warning or error
messages being generated.
Yellow LightCalculations were run successfully, without error messages being
generated. However, there are one or more warning messages. Warnings are
displayed in the results summary in this tab.
Red LightCalculations were not run successfully and error messages were
generated, as shown in the results summary of this tab.
This report can be previewed before being printed or copied to the clipboard by
clicking the Printer button on the Results tab. It can also be exported to a text file by
clicking the Save button on the Results tab. Only the exposed text will be exported,
copied or printed.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-567
13.3.10 Customize Header and Footer Dialog
This dialog allows you to define the header and footer settings for pre-formatted
reports. It is divided into two tabs, one for the report Header, which is placed along the
top of each report page, and one for the report Footer, which is placed along the
bottom of each report page.
A row in the table represents a line of text in the header or footer. The columns repre-
sent the left/center/right justification on the page. Clicking a cell in the table opens a
drop-down list of available dynamic variables. You can also enter text in the cell, and
the text will appear as it is typed in each report.
The Insert button will add a new row to the table. The Duplicate button copies the
currently highlighted row. The Delete button removes the currently highlighted row.
If the Save As Default button is checked when you click OK to exit the dialog, the
current settings will be saved to your Haestad.ini file, and will then be used as the
report format for every WaterCAD project.
The following dynamic attributes are available for use in pre-formatted reports:
Table 13-1: Dynamic Variables for Preformatted Reports
Variable Name
Corresponding
data
Example of
Output
%(Company)
Company name,
retrieved from
registration info
Bentley Systems
%(DateTime)
Date and time,
retrieved from system
clock
11/22/04 12:30:42
PM
%(HaestadInfo)
Bentley Systems
copyright, address,
and phone number
N/A
%(Pagination)
Page number of
report
Page 1 of 1
%(ProductInfo)
Product name,
version number, and
build number
WaterGEMS v3.0
(07.00.022.00)
%(ProjDirectory)
Directory path where
project files are
saved
c:/program files/
haestad/wtrg
Reports
13-568 WaterCAD Users Manual
13.3.11 Contour Plan View
A preview of the Contour Plan View Report, showing all contours as displayed in the
Contour Plot window, can be obtained by clicking the Print Preview button in the
Contour Plot window (for more information, see Contour Plot on page 13-601).
13.3.12 Totalizing Flow Meters
The Totalizing Flow Meter allows you to track the total and net flows passing through
any element. Note that the totalizing flow meter will only provide results after a
successful extended period simulation (EPS) has been calculated. The dialog box is
divided into three sections:
TimesThe Times section allows you to specify the time period for which the
meter will calculate flows. This section consists of two menus:
StartThe time when the meter begins calculating flow passing through the
corresponding element.
StopThe time when the meter stops calculating flow passing through the
corresponding element. To avoid errors, be sure the stop time is later than the
start time.
VolumesThe Volumes section displays the results of the meter calculations in
the following four result fields:
Net VolumeThe value reported in this field is the Negative Volume
subtracted from the Positive Volume.
%(ProjEngineer)
Project engineer,
retrieved from Project
Summary dialog
Project Engineer
%(ProjFileName) Project file name untitled.wcd
%(ProjStoreFileName)
Project directory
path, inclucing file
name
c:/program files/
haestad/wtrg/
untitled.mdb
%(ProjTitle)
Project title, retrieved
from Project
Summary dialog
Sample Project
Table 13-1: Dynamic Variables for Preformatted Reports
Variable Name
Corresponding
data
Example of
Output
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-569
Positive VolumeThe amount of flow passing through the meter from the
element upstream (From Node) to the element downstream (To Node).
Negative VolumeThe amount of flow passing through the meter from the
element downstream (To Node) to the element upstream (From Node).
Total VolumeThe total amount of flow passing through the meter in either
direction.
Note: When you change either the start or stop time, the values in the
volume fields are dynamically updated.
ElementsThis field allows you to add multiple elements to be metered. Click
the Select button displays the Selection Set dialog box (see Selection Set Dialog
Box on page 5-256), where you select the elements you want to include. When
you include multiple elements, volumes are computed for all selected elements.
13.3.13 Tabular Report Window
This window is used to display data in a tabular format. At the top of the window are
five buttons that provide the following functionality:
FileExport the data in the report to either a comma or tab delimited text file.
CopyCopy the data in the report to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into
another program such as a spreadsheet or word processor.
Print PreviewOpen a print preview of the report, from which the report can be
sent directly to the printer.
CloseClose the report.
HelpAccess the online help for this report.
13.3.14 System Head Curve Dialog Box
The System Head Curve dialog box contains the following three input fields:
PumpThe Pump field allows you to specify which pump the system head curve
will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this pump. The menu,
which lists all of the pumps in the network, the Ellipsis (...) button which opens
the Single Element Selection dialog box (see Single Element Selection Dialog
Box on page 5-252), and the Select From Drawing button, which allows you to
select the element using the graphical Drawing view. If you selected an pump
before accessing the System Head Curve dialog box, the pump already appears in
the Pump field.
Maximum FlowThis field is automatically supplied with the Maximum Oper-
ating Discharge value for the selected pump.
Reports
13-570 WaterCAD Users Manual
# of IntervalsThis field determines the number of Head/Discharge points that
will be used to create the system head curve. The higher the number of intervals
used, the smoother the curve will be.
ValidateIf this box is checked when you click the OK button, the curve input
data will be checked to ensure that it is valid. If a problem is found, a dialog box
will appear that provides details about the cause of the error. If the box is
unchecked when the OK button is clicked, the input data is not checked, and if
errors are present the operation will fail. You will then be prompted to check the
input data carefully using the Validate option.
See Predefined Reports on page 563.
13.3.15 Hydrant Curve Dialog Box
Hydrant curves allow you to find the flow the distribution system can deliver at the
specified residual pressure, helping you identify the systems capacity to deliver water
that node in the network. Hydrant curves are useful when you are trying to balance the
flows entering a part of the network, the flows being demanded by that part of the
network, and the flows being stored by that part of the network.
The Hydrant Curve dialog box contains the following controls:
ElementThe Element field allows you to specify the pressure junction the
hydrant curve will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this
junction. The menu, which lists all of the pressure junctions in the network, the
Ellipsis (...) button which opens the Single Element Selection dialog box (see
Single Element Selection Dialog Box on page 5-252), and the Select From
Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical
Drawing view. If you selected an element before accessing the Hydrant Curve
dialog box, the element already appears in the Element field.
Nominal Hydrant FlowThis field allow you to specify the flow that you
expect from the hydrant in normal conditions.
# of IntervalsThis field determines the number of points between zero flow and
nominal flow that will be used to create the curve. The higher the number of inter-
vals used, the smoother the curve will be.
ValidateIf this box is checked when you click the OK button, the curve input
data will be checked to ensure that it is valid. If a problem is found, a dialog box
will appear that provides details about the cause of the error. If the box is
unchecked when the OK button is clicked, the input data is not checked, and if
errors are present the operation will fail. You will then be prompted to check the
input data carefully using the Validate option.
See Predefined Reports on page 563.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-571
13.4 Graphs
Graphs includes:
Pump Curve on page 13-571
Tank Storage Curve on page 13-572
Junction Demand Graph on page 13-572
Pattern Graph and Report on page 13-572
Extended Period Simulation and Water Quality Analysis Domain Element
Graphs on page 13-572
Plotting a Variable versus Time on page 13-572
13.4.1 Pump Curve
To generate a pump curve, open the Pump Editor for the pump of interest, click the
Report button, and choose the Pump Curve menu item. Time step controls in the
pump curve pump window allow you animate the pump curve.
The following time step controls are available with pump curves:
Above the graph are the time step and animation controls. These include VCR-style
controls to move through the time steps or to animate the graph view and the Incre-
ment combo box which controls how many time steps are skipped when the Forward
or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also controls which time steps are
displayed during animation.
By clicking the down arrow next to the Play button, you can access the following
Animation Options:
Animation DelayOpens a dialog box that allows you to set the delay between
animated frames.
Animate All WindowsIf this option is selected, every window capable of being
animated will then animate when the play button is clicked. If the option is not
selected, then only the current window will animate.
Graphs
13-572 WaterCAD Users Manual
13.4.2 Tank Storage Curve
To generate a plot of the tank storage volume versus the elevation, open the Tank
Editor for the tank of interest, click the Report button, and choose the Tank Curve
menu item.
13.4.3 J unction Demand Graph
To generate a graph of the total demand at a junction over time, open the Junction
Editor for the junction of interest, select the Demand tab and click the Graph button.
13.4.4 Pattern Graph and Report
You can generate a graph or a full report of a pattern that represents the multiplier
variable of the pattern over time. To do so, open the appropriate Pattern Manager
dialog box and access the pattern for which you would like to generate output. From
the Pattern Editor dialog box (see Pattern Editor on page 9-389), click the Report
button, and select Graph or Detailed Report.
13.4.5 Extended Period Simulation and Water Quality Analysis
Domain Element Graphs
If you run scenarios using Extended Period Simulations or Water Quality Analyses,
you can quickly generate graphs of the domain elements in the results. To create this
type of graph, run an Extended Period Simulation or Water Quality Analysis scenario,
then right-click a domain element in the drawing pane and select Graph. Specify the
graph settings in the Graph Setup dialog box (see Graph Setup on page 13-573),
then click OK to view the graph.
Note: These types of graphs are available only in AutoCAD and Stand-
Alone modes.
13.4.6 Plotting a Variable versus Time
Plotting a variable versus time includes:
Graph Setup on page 13-573
Available Scenarios on page 13-573
Graph Window on page 13-573
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-573
Graph Setup
Note: The Graph Setup option is only available for Extended Period
Analysis (for more information, see Steady-State/Extended Period
Simulation on page 9-372).
When the Plot Window is open, click the Options button to graph
other dependent variables or to change the graph options.
Clicking Options > Graph Setup opens the Graph Setup dialog
box. Clicking Options > Graph Options opens the Graph Options
dialog box (for more information, see Graph Options on page 13-
621).
The Graph Setup dialog box allows you to graph calculated results for any element in
the system. The dialog box is divided into three tabs:
Graph SetupThis tab contains the dependent menu. This menu lists the
attributes that can be graphed for the current element type. The attribute range is
automatically initialized by the program depending on the calculated values for
the elements that are being graphed.
ElementsThis dialog box consists of a pane that lists the elements available for
graphing and a Select button. Click the check boxes next to each of the elements
that you want to graph. The Select button opens the Selection Set dialog box,
which allows you to choose the elements that will be displayed in the graph.
ScenariosSelect and compare various scenario computations (for more infor-
mation, see Available Scenarios on page 13-573).
Available Scenarios
Note: The only scenarios that will be available to graph are scenarios
for which an Extended Period Simulation have been calculated.
This feature allows you to select which scenarios you wish to view and compare on
the current graph. Place a check mark by the scenarios you wish to display.
Graph Window
The Graph window is divided into two tabs: Graph and Data. The Graph tab displays a
plot of the selected dependent variable vs. time. The Data tab will display the data
under the Graph tab in a tabular format.
The following functions will either be formed on the plot or the tabular data,
depending on which tab is selected.
CopyCopies the graph/data onto the Windows Clipboard for use in other appli-
cations. For more information, see Other Toolbar Buttons on page 2-69.
Graphs
13-574 WaterCAD Users Manual
PrintOutputs the contents of the Graph/Data tab to the printer. For more infor-
mation, see Other Toolbar Buttons on page 2-69.
Options/Graph OptionsAllows you to customize the plot by changing the
graphs axes, fonts, titles, etc. This is only available when the Graph tab is
selected. For more information, see Graph Options on page 13-621.
Options/Graph SetupAllows you to rebuild the graph with different data and
parameters. For more information, see Graph Setup on page 13-573.
CloseClose the Graph window. For more information, see Other Toolbar
Buttons on page 2-69.
HelpProvides access to help for the Graph window. For more information, see
Using the Online Help on page 2-58.
User-Defined Time Steps
This feature allows you to display user-defined attribute values alongside calculated
results in the graph display dialog. You can add these user defined time vs. attribute
value points to the graph display by importing data from a formatted text file using the
User Defined Time Series Data > Import command in the Report pulldown menu. The
data to be imported must reside in a tab-delimited text file using the following format:
Element Label <Tab> Time From Start <Tab> Attribute Value
J-14.0926.5
J-18.0928.7
J-112.0931.3
J-116.0935.2
J-120.0928.5
J-124.0927.1
J-24.0933.4
J-28.0934.9
etc.
Data in theTime From Start and Attribute Value columns are always interpreted to be
using the display units for the associated attributes. For example, the data:
Tank-112200.0
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-575
will be interpreted as 12 hours and 200 feet if times are displayed in hours and
hydraulic grade line in feet, or as 12 seconds and 200 meters if the times are displayed
in seconds, and the hydraulic grade line in meters.
Comments can be added to the file using the semicolon. Anything after a semicolon
will be ignored. If a line begins with a semicolon, the whole line is ignored.
Any leading or trailing whitespace will be ignored.
13.5 Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
GeoGrapher includes:
GeoGrapher Graph Manager on page 13-575
GeoGrapher Manager on page 13-576
13.5.1 GeoGrapher Graph Manager
GeoGrapher allows you to create, edit, and store custom graphs. The available graph
types in the first step of the Graph Creator Wizard are as follows:
When the Over Time Graph button is selected, there are four graph types to choose
from:
Elements Comparison (Over time)This graph type compares a primary and
secondary attribute for any number of elements over multiple time-steps in a line
graph format.
Element-Scenario Comparison (Over time)This graph type compares a
single attribute for any number of element-scenario pairs over multiple time-steps
in a line graph format.
Scenarios Comparison (Over time)This graph type compares a single
attribute for any element during multiple scenarios over multiple time-steps in a
line graph format.
Single Element (Over time)This graph type displays a single attribute for any
element across multiple time-steps in a line graph format.
When the Single Time Step button is selected, there are 3 graph types to choose from:
Attribute Comparison (Single time-step)This graph type compares a primary
and secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a
bar graph format.
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-576 WaterCAD Users Manual
Element Analysis (Single time-step)This graph type compares a primary and
secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a
scatter graph format.
Scenarios Comparison (Single time-step)This graph type compares a single
attribute for any number of elements during multiple scenarios across multiple
time-steps in a bar graph format.
13.5.2 GeoGrapher Manager
The GeoGrapher Manager dialog box provides the following commands:
NewCreates a new graph of the highlighted type.
OpenOpens the previously created graph that is currently highlighted.
RenameRenames the previously created graph that is currently highlighted.
DuplicateMakes a copy of the previously created graph that is currently high-
lighted.
DeleteDeletes the previously created graph that is currently highlighted.
13.5.3 GeoGrapher Wizard
The GeoGrapher Wizard assists you in the creation of graphs by stepping you through
the most commonly used setup options. Depending on the type of graph that is being
created, the specific steps of the wizard will vary.
Attribute Comparison (Single time-step)This graph type compares a primary
and secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a
bar graph format.
Step 1Select the Desired Graph Type: This step allows you to change the
type of graph being created from the default settings associated with the graph
type that was chosen in the Graph Manager. Click Next to retain the default
settings.
Step 2Select Elements to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
element(s) that will be displayed in the graph. The [>] and [<] buttons add and
remove (respectively) the highlighted element from the corresponding pane.
The [>>] and [<<] buttons add and remove (respectively) all elements from
the corresponding pane.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-577
Note: Multiple element types may be included in the same graph.
However, only attributes that all of the elements have in common
will be available in the next step.
Step 3Select Attributes to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
primary and secondary attributes that will displayed for the selected
element(s).
Step 4Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a
name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph
manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to
be used in the graph, with the following choices:
- Apply Selected Graph Types User Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the user default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1. A user default can be
saved by clicking the Save as Users Default format button in the
GeoGrapher Display Window (GeoGrapher Display Window on
page 13-581).
- Apply Selected Graph Types Factory Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the factory default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1.
Element Analysis (Single time-step)This graph type compares a primary and
secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a
scatter graph format.
Step 1Select the Desired Graph Type: This step allows you to change the
type of graph being created from the default settings associated with the graph
type that was chosen in the Graph Manager. Click Next to retain the default
settings.
Step 2Select Elements to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
element(s) that will be displayed in the graph. The [>] and [<] buttons add and
remove (respectively) the highlighted element from the corresponding pane.
The [>>] and [<<] buttons add and remove (respectively) all elements from
the corresponding pane.
Note: Multiple element types may be included in the same graph.
However, only attributes that all of the elements have in common
will be available in the next step.
Step 3Select Attributes to Graph: This step allows you to specify the x-axis
and y-axis attributes that will displayed for the selected element(s).
Step 4Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a
name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph
manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to
be used in the graph, with the following choices:
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-578 WaterCAD Users Manual
- Apply Selected Graph Types User Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the user default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1. A user default can be
saved by clicking the Save as Users Default format button in the
GeoGrapher Display Window (GeoGrapher Display Window on
page 13-581).
- Apply Selected Graph Types Factory Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the factory default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1.
Elements Comparison (Over time)This graph type compares a primary and
secondary attribute for any number of elements over multiple time-steps in a line
graph format.
Step 1Select the Desired Graph Type: This step allows you to change the
type of graph being created from the default settings associated with the graph
type that was chosen in the Graph Manager. Click Next to retain the default
settings.
Step 2Select Elements to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
element(s) that will be displayed in the graph. The [>] and [<] buttons add and
remove (respectively) the highlighted element from the corresponding pane.
The [>>] and [<<] buttons add and remove (respectively) all elements from
the corresponding pane.
Note: Multiple element types may be included in the same graph.
However, only attributes that all of the elements have in common
will be available in the next step.
Step 3Select Attribute to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
attribute that will displayed for the selected element(s).
Step 4Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a
name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph
manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to
be used in the graph, with the following choices:
- Apply Selected Graph Types User Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the user default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1. A user default can be
saved by clicking the Save as Users Default format button in the
GeoGrapher Display Window (GeoGrapher Display Window on
page 13-581).
- Apply Selected Graph Types Factory Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the factory default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-579
Element-Scenario Comparison (Over time)This graph type compares a
single attribute for any number of element-scenario pairs over multiple time-steps
in a line graph format.
Step 1Select the Desired Graph Type: This step allows you to change the
type of graph being created from the default settings associated with the graph
type that was chosen in the Graph Manager. Click Next to retain the default
settings.
Step 2Select Elements to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
element(s) that will be displayed in the graph. The [>] and [<] buttons add and
remove (respectively) the highlighted element from the corresponding pane.
The [>>] and [<<] buttons add and remove (respectively) all elements from
the corresponding pane.
Note: Multiple element types may be included in the same graph.
However, only attributes that all of the elements have in common
will be available in the next step.
Step 3Select Scenarios to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
scenario(s) that will displayed for the selected element(s).
Step 4Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a
name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph
manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to
be used in the graph, with the following choices:
- Apply Selected Graph Types User Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the user default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1. A user default can be
saved by clicking the Save as Users Default format button in the
GeoGrapher Display Window (GeoGrapher Display Window on
page 13-581).
- Apply Selected Graph Types Factory Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the factory default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1.
Scenarios Comparison (Over time)This graph type compares a single
attribute for any element during multiple scenarios over multiple time-steps in a
line graph format.
Step 1Select the Desired Graph Type: This step allows you to change the
type of graph being created from the default settings associated with the graph
type that was chosen in the Graph Manager. Click Next to retain the default
settings.
Step 2Select Scenarios to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
scenario(s) that will displayed for the selected element.
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-580 WaterCAD Users Manual
Step 3Select an Element to Graph: This step allows you to select the
element that will be displayed in the graph.
Step 4Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a
name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph
manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to
be used in the graph, with the following choices:
- Apply Selected Graph Types User Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the user default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1. A user default can be
saved by clicking the Save as Users Default format button in the
GeoGrapher Display Window (GeoGrapher Display Window on
page 13-581).
- Apply Selected Graph Types Factory Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the factory default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1.
Scenarios Comparison (Single time-step)This graph type compares a single
attribute for any number of elements during multiple scenarios across multiple
time-steps in a bar graph format.
Step 1Select the Desired Graph Type: This step allows you to change the
type of graph being created from the default settings associated with the graph
type that was chosen in the Graph Manager. Click Next to retain the default
settings.
Step 2Select Scenarios to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
scenario(s) that will displayed for the selected element(s).
Step 3Select Elements to Graph: This step allows you to specify the
element(s) that will be displayed in the graph. The [>] and [<] buttons add and
remove (respectively) the highlighted element from the corresponding pane.
The [>>] and [<<] buttons add and remove (respectively) all elements from
the corresponding pane.
Note: Multiple element types may be included in the same graph.
However, only attributes that all of the elements have in common
will be available in the next step.
Step 4Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a
name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph
manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to
be used in the graph, with the following choices:
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-581
- Apply Selected Graph Types User Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the user default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1. A user default can be
saved by clicking the Save as Users Default format button in the
GeoGrapher Display Window (GeoGrapher Display Window on
page 13-581).
- Apply Selected Graph Types Factory Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the factory default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1.
Single Element (Over time)This graph type displays a single attribute for any
element across multiple time-steps in a line graph format.
Step 1Select the Desired Graph Type: This step allows you to change the
type of graph being created from the default settings associated with the graph
type that was chosen in the Graph Manager. Click Next to retain the default
settings.
Step 2Select an Element to Graph: This step allows you to select the
element that will be displayed in the graph.
Step 3Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a
name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph
manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to
be used in the graph, with the following choices:
- Apply Selected Graph Types User Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the user default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1. A user default can be
saved by clicking the Save as Users Default format button in the
GeoGrapher Display Window (GeoGrapher Display Window on
page 13-581).
- Apply Selected Graph Types Factory Default formatChoosing this
option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the factory default
setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1.
13.5.4 GeoGrapher Display Window
The graph display window allows you to view graphs and change graph settings as
desired.
The following time step controls are available in this dialog box:
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-582 WaterCAD Users Manual
Above the graph display are the time step and animation controls. These include
VCR-style controls to move through the time steps or to animate the graph view and
the Increment combo box which controls how many time steps are skipped when the
Forward or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also controls which time steps
are displayed during animation.
By clicking the down arrow next to the Play button, you can access the following
Animation Options:
Clicking the Animation Options button provides the following functions:
Animation DelayOpens a dialog box that allows you to set the delay between
animated frames.
Animate All WindowsIf this option is selected, every window capable of being
animated will then animate when the play button is clicked. If the option is not
selected, then only the current window will animate.
If you right-click with the mouse over the drawing pane, a context menu appears,
offering the following options:
Copy ImageThis command copies the currently displayed graph to the clip-
board, to be pasted into a compatible graphics application.
Copy FormatThis command stores the settings used by the current graph to be
re-used in another graph. To re-use a copied format, right-click and choose Paste
Format.
Paste FormatThis command applies to the current graph settings that were
previously copied from another graph. To copy settings from another graph, right-
click and choose Copy Format.
Graph SetupThis command opens the GeoGrapher Graph Setup dialog box
(see GeoGrapher Graph Setup on page 13-584).
Graph OptionsThis command opens the GeoGrapher Options dialog box (see
GeoGrapher Options on page 13-585
Depending on the type of graph, the following drop-down menus may be available:
ScenariosAllows you to select the current scenario for the graph.
AttributeAllows you to select the attribute being graphed.
ElementsAllows you to select which element is being graphed.
The main graph display pane has the following tabs:
GraphThis tab displays the current graph.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-583
DataThis tab displays a tabular view of the data upon which the graph is based.
NotesThis tab shows any user-defined notes associated with the graph.
Note: The display units for the various attributes cannot be manually
changed through GeoGrapher. Instead, GeoGrapher will
automatically use the unit that is assigned to a given attribute in
WaterGEMS Modeler. To change the unit that is used, first
change it in WaterGEMS Modeler (seeFlexUnits on page 4-244),
then open GeoGrapher and create your graph.
The following buttons are found along the top of the graph display dialog box:
SaveSaves the current graph.
Save as Users Default formatSaves the graph settings as the user
default template for use in other graphs. To use the user default
template, select the Apply Selected Graph Types User Default
format option in the Completing the Add Graph Wizard step when
creating a new graph.
ExportExports the current graph image or data.
PrintPrints the current graph.
Print PreviewDisplays a preview of the graph as it will be printed.
Activate/Deactivate ZoomThis toggle button enables you to
magnify any area of the graph by click-dragging a selection box around
it.
Zoom ExtentsDisplays graph at the default (fully zoomed out)
magnification and view.
Graph SetupOpens a dialog box that allows you to change graph
settings.
Graph OptionsOpens the Graph Options dialog box.
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-584 WaterCAD Users Manual
13.5.5 GeoGrapher Print Preview
The GeoGrapher Print Preview window allows you to modify the print settings and
preview the graph before it is printed. The following controls are available in this
dialog box:
Printer (drop-down menu)This menu allows you to select the printer to which
the settings and commands issued in this dialog box will be applied.
Setup (button)Opens the printers settings and print options dialog box.
Print (button)Prints the current view that is displayed in the Preview pane
using the printer selected in the Printer menu.
Portrait (button)Orients the page to a long-vertical alignment.
Landscape (button)Orients the page to a long-horizontal alignment.
Margins (up/down increment controls)These four increment controls change
the margin spacing along the edges of the page.
Reset Margins (button)Resets the margins to the default settings.
View Margins (check box)Makes the margin lines visible in the Preview pane.
Detail (slider bar)This slider increases the detail of the preview in the Preview
pane as it is moved to the left, and decreases the amount of detail as the indicator
is moved to the right.
Preview PaneThis pane displays the current page view as it will be printed.
Changes made using the other controls in this dialog box are immediately updated
in this pane.
13.5.6 GeoGrapher Graph Setup
The GeoGrapher Graph Setup dialog box allows you to change various graph settings.
The specific settings that are available for modification in this dialog box vary
depending on the graph type. The possible variables that can be changed here include:
Elements
X-Axis Variable
Y-Axis Variable
Element Attribute
Scenario
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-585
13.5.7 GeoGrapher Options
The GeoGrapher Options dialog box is divided into two main tabs:
Chart Tab on page 13-585
Series Tab on page 13-596
Chart Tab
The Chart tab allows you to define overall Chart display parameters. This tab is
further subdivided into the following second-level sub-tabs:
SeriesThis tab contains a pane that displays the series that are associated with
the current graph. The check box next to each list item determines whether or not
the corresponding series is visible in the graph display. The Up and Down arrow
buttons move the highlighted series up or down one line in the list. The five addi-
tional buttons on this tab are as follows:
AddAdds a new series to the current graph.
DeleteRemoves the currently highlighted series.
Note: Only user-defined series can be deleted from the graph display.
The default factory-defined series cannot be deleted.
TitleAllows you to rename the currently highlighted series.
Note: Series titles are automatically generated by GeoGrapher when
you create a graph. Changing the value of the title will cause the
title to be user-defined. To have GeoGrapher once again
automatically assign a title for you, enter %auto as the value for
the title.
CloneCreates a duplicate of the currently highlighted series.
ChangeAllows you to edit the currently highlighted series.
AxisThe Axis sub-tab is further subdivided into six third-level sub-tabs.
Regardless of the tab that is active, the Axis sub-tab contains a pane on the left of
the dialog box that allows you to select the axis that any modifications will be
applied to. The Visible check box enables/disables visibility for all axes at once.
The Behind check box controls if axes will be displayed in front of or behind the
series display. The third-level sub-tabs for the Axis tab are as follows:
ScalesThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Automatic (Check Box)This check box determines whether the
Maximum and Minimum axis values may be manually set.
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-586 WaterCAD Users Manual
- Visible (Check Box)Determines the visibility of the scales within the
chart display.
- Inverted (Check Box)When Inverted is True, Axis Minimum and
Maximum scales will be swapped. Axis labels and series points will be
displayed accordingly.
- Auto, Maximum (Check Box)When this box is checked, the
maximum axis value is automatically determined and the maximum
Change button is disabled.
- Auto, Minimum (Check Box)When this box is checked, the minimum
axis value is automatically determined and the minimum Change button
is disabled.
- Logarithmic (Check Box)Determines if the current axis uses loga-
rithmic scale.
- Change, Minimum (Button)Allows input of a user-defined axis value.
This button is only enabled when the maximum Auto check box is not
checked.
- Change, Maximum (Button)Allows input of a user-defined axis
value. This button is only enabled when the minimum Auto check box is
not checked.
- Change, Increment (Button)This button allows you to edit the Axis
Increment. The Axis Increment is the minimum step between axis labels.
It must be a positive number or DateTime value. GeoGrapher will use this
value as the starting axis labels step.
- Log Base (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the logarithmic
base value when the Logarithmic check box is checked.
TitleThe Title sub-tab is further subdivided into six third-level sub-tabs.
Regardless of the tab that is active, the Title sub-tab contains a menu that allows
you to select the title type that any modifications will be applied to. These sub-
tabs are then further subdivided into fourth-level sub-tabs, as described below:
StyleThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Title (Text Box)Allows entry of an alphanumeric title.
- Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)Allows the display angle of the
title to be specified.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the font size of the
Title text.
- Visible (Check Box)Enables/Disables visibility of the title.
TextThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Font (Button)Specifies the font to be used in the title.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-587
- Outline (Button)Enables/Disables the display of an outline containing
the title text.
- Inter-char Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)Defines the size
of the space between characters.
- Color (Button)Determines the color of the title shadow.
- Horiz. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the horizontal
size of the title shadow.
- Vert. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the vertical size
of the title shadow.
LabelsThe Labels sub-tab is further subdivided into the following fourth-level
sub-tabs:
StyleThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Visible (Check Box)Determines label visibility in the chart display.
- Multi-Line (Check Box)When checked, spaces in point Labels or in
Axis DateTimeFormat/ValueFormat are used to break the label into more
than one line of text.
- Round First (Check Box)This property controls if Axis labels will be
automatically rounded to the nearest magnitude.
- Label On Axis (Check Box)This property controls whether or not
Labels just at Axis Minimum and Maximum positions will be shown.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the size of the
displayed labels.
- Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the display angle of
the corresponding labels.
- Min. Separation % (Up/Down Increment Control)This property
specifies the percent amount of minimum distance between Axis Labels.
- Auto (Button)Chooses the label style automatically.
- Value (Button)Axis labeling is based on axis Minimum and Maximum
properties.
- Text (Button)Label using series label strings.
- None (Button)No label.
- Mark (Button)Label using SeriesMarks style.
FormatThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Exponential (Check Box)Shows/hides the number of mantissa in
superscript font.
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-588 WaterCAD Users Manual
- Values Format (List Box)Determines the value display format.
- Default Alignment (Check Box)Enables/Disables default label align-
ment.
TextThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Font (Button)Specifies the font to be used.
- Outline (Button)Enables/Disables the display of an outline.
- Inter-char Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)Defines the
amount of space between characters.
- Color (Button)Determines the color of the text shadow.
- Horiz. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the horizontal
size of the text shadow.
- Vert. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the vertical size
of the text shadow.
TicksThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Axis (Button)The Axis property determines the kind of pen used to
draw the Axis major lines.
- Grid (Button)Defines the pen used to draw Chart Grid Lines.
- Centered (Check Box)Places Axis Grid lines between (not at) label
positions.
- Ticks (Button)The Ticks property determines the kind of Pen used to
draw Axis marks along the Axis line.
- Len, Ticks (Up/Down Increment Control)This property defines the
length of Axis Ticks.
- Len, Inner (Up/Down Increment Control)This property defines the
length in pixels of Axis ticks drawn inside Chart boundaries.
- At Labels Only (Check Box)This property sets the Axis Ticks to be
drawn only to coincide at Labels.
MinorThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
Ticks (Button)The Ticks property determines the kind of Pen used to draw
Axis marks along the Axis line.
Length (Up/Down Increment Control)This property defines the length of
Axis Ticks.
Grid (Button)Defines the pen used to draw Chart Grid Lines.
Count (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the number of minor
ticks.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-589
PositionThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
Position % (Up/Down Increment Control)Position of Axis as a
percentage of the Chart Height (horizontal Axis) or Chart Width (vertical
Axis).
Start % (Up/Down Increment Control)Start of Axis as percentage of
width (horizontal Axis) and height (vertical Axis) of the Chart rectangle.
Original Axis scale will be fitted to new Axis height/width.
End % (Up/Down Increment Control)End of Axis as percentage of
width.
TitlesThe Title sub-tab is further subdivided into six third-level sub-tabs.
Regardless of the tab that is active, the Title sub-tab contains a menu that allows
you to select the title type that any modifications will be applied to. The Titles
sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level sub-tabs:
StyleThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Visible (Check Box)Determines title visibility.
- Adjust Frame (Check Box)The Adjust Frame property controls if
Chart Title and Foot frames will be resized to full Chart dimensions or to
the title text width.
- Left Alignment (Button)Aligns the title to the left side of the chart.
- Center Alignment (Button)Aligns the title to the center of the chart.
- Right Alignment (Button)Aligns the title to the right side of the chart.
- Text PaneAllows entry of the title text.
PositionThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Custom (Check Box)Checking the Custom check box activates the
Left and Top controls to allow you to specify the placement of the Title on
the graph plot.
- Left (Up/Down Increment Control)Defines left position in pixels.
- Top (Up/Down Increment Control)Defines top position in pixels.
FormatThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Color (Button)If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this button
specifies the frame fill color.
- Frame (Button)If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this button
specifies the frame settings.
- Pattern (Button)If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this
button specifies the frame fill pattern settings.
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-590 WaterCAD Users Manual
- Bevel (Menu)If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this menu
specifies the frame bevel effect settings.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)If the Transparent check box is
unchecked, this control changes the size of the frame bevel effect.
- Round Frame (Check Box)If the Transparent check box is unchecked,
this check box enables/disables rounding of the frame shape.
- Transparent (Check Box)This check box enables/disables frame visi-
bility.
TextThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Font (Button)Specifies the font to be used.
- Outline (Button)Enables/disables the display of an outline.
- Inter-char Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)Defines the
amount of space between characters.
- Color (Button)Determines the color of the text shadow.
- Horiz. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the horizontal
size of the text shadow.
- Vert. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the vertical size
of the text shadow.
GradientThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Visible (Check Box)Enables/disables the three-dimensional graph
display. When this box is checked, the other gradient controls are acti-
vated.
- Direction (Menu)The Direction property specifies the direction in
which the gradient fill will be applied.
- Swap (Button)Switches the colors specified by the Start and End
buttons.
- Start (Button)This button specifies the first of the two required colors
that will be used to generate the gradient fill.
- Middle (Button)This button specifies an optional third color that will
be used to generate the gradient fill.
- End (Button)This button specifies the second of the two required
colors that will be used to generate the gradient fill.
- No Middle (Check Box)This check box enables/disables the Middle
button. When the No Middle box is unchecked, a two-base-color gradient
will be generated; when it is checked, a three-base-color gradient is gener-
ated.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-591
ShadowThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Color (Button)This button allows you to choose the color of the
shadow.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)This button allows you to adjust
the size of the shadow.
LegendThe Legend sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level
sub-tabs:
StyleThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Visible (Check Box)Turns legend visibility on and off.
- Inverted (Check Box)
- Check Boxes (Check Box)Activates/deactivates check boxes associ-
ated with each series in the Legend. When these boxes are unchecked in
the legend, the associated series are invisible.
- Font Series Color (Check Box)When this option is checked, the text
associated with each series in the Legend is the same color as the color
used to represent the series display.
- Legend Style (Menu)Specifies the Legend style that is used. Choices
include:
- Text Style (Menu)Specifies the content that will be displayed in the
Legend.
- Vert. Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)This control determines
the amount of space between each series line in the Legend.
- Dividing Lines (Button)Determines the presence of and display style
of lines dividing each series line in the Legend.
PositionThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Left (Button)Places the Legend in the left side of the chart.
- Right (Button)Places the Legend in the right side of the chart.
- Top (Button)Places the Legend at the top of the chart.
- Bottom (Button)Places the Legend at the bottom of the chart.
- Resize Chart (Check Box)The Resize Chart control indicates if
Legend will automatically reduce the Chart rectangle to prevent overlap
between Legend and Chart rectangles.
- Margin (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the amount of
space between the graph image and the Legend.
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-592 WaterCAD Users Manual
- Position Offset % (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the
vertical placement of the Legend. Lower values place the Legend higher
up in the display.
- Custom (Check Box)This check box activates the Left and Top
buttons to allow user-defined placement of the Legend.
- Left (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the horizontal place-
ment of the Legend.
- Top (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the vertical placement
of the Legend.
SymbolsThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Width (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the width of the
symbols used to represent the series displayed in the Legend.
- Width Units (Menu)Allows you to choose the units that the value in
the Width control represent.
- Position (Menu)Determines the left/right placement of the Legend
symbols in relation to the text contained within the Legend.
- Continuous (Check Box)When this box is checked, the series symbols
will appear as a continuous line.
FormatThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Color (Button)Determines the background color of the Legend pane.
- Frame (Button)This button allows you to define the Legend Frame
settings.
- Pattern (Button)Determines the background pattern of the Legend
pane.
- Bevel (Menu)Specifies the Legend frame bevel settings.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Specifies the size of the Legend
bevel frame.
- Round Frame (Check Box)This check box enables/disables rounding
of the Legend frame shape.
- Transparent (Check Box)This check box controls the visibility of the
Legend frame.
TextThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Font (Button)Specifies the font to be used.
- Outline (Button)Enables/disables the display of an outline.
- Inter-char Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)Defines the
amount of space between characters.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-593
- Color (Button)Determines the color of the text shadow.
- Horiz. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the horizontal
size of the text shadow.
- Vert. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the vertical size
of the text shadow.
GradientThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Visible (Check Box)Enables/disables the three-dimensional graph
display. When this box is checked, the other gradient controls are acti-
vated.
- Direction (Menu)The Direction property specifies the direction in
which the gradient fill will be applied.
- Swap (Button)Switches the colors specified by the Start and End
buttons.
- Start (Button)This button specifies the first of the two required colors
that will be used to generate the gradient fill.
- Middle (Button)This button specifies an optional third color that will
be used to generate the gradient fill.
- End (Button)This button specifies the second of the two required
colors that will be used to generate the gradient fill.
- No Middle (Check Box)This check box enables/disables the Middle
button. When the Middle button is disabled, a two-base-color gradient
will be generated; when it is enabled, a three-base-color gradient is gener-
ated.
ShadowThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Color (Button)This button allows you to choose the color of the
shadow.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)This button allows you to adjust
the size of the shadow.
PanelThe Panel sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level sub-
tabs:
BackgroundThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Color (Button)This button lets you specify the chart background color.
- Browse (Button)This button allows you to browse the hard drive for
background images.
- Inside (Check Box)Restrict the background image to display inside the
chart rectangle only.
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-594 WaterCAD Users Manual
- Transparent (Check Box)Enables/disables the visibility of the back-
ground image.
- Stretch (Button)Sizes the background image to fit within the graph
dialog box.
- Tile (Button)Repeats the background image to fill the graph dialog
box.
- Center (Button)Centers the background image within the graph dialog
box.
BordersThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Bevel Inner None (Button)Disables display of bevel effect around the
inside of the chart frame.
- Bevel Inner Lowered (Button)Enables display of a lowered bevel
effect around the inside of the chart frame.
- Bevel Inner Raised (Button)Enables display of a raised bevel effect
around the inside of the chart frame.
- Bevel Outer None (Button)Disables display of bevel effect around the
outside of the chart frame.
- Bevel Outer Lowered (Button)Enables display of a lowered bevel
effect around the outside of the chart frame.
- Bevel Outer Raised (Button)Enables display of a raised bevel effect
around the outside of the chart frame.
- Border (Check Box)Enables/disables a border around the inside of the
chart frame.
- Bevel Inner Width (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the
width of the inner bevel effect.
- Bevel Outer Width (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the
width of the outer bevel effect.
GradientThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Visible (Check Box)Enables/disables the three-dimensional graph
display. When this box is checked, the other gradient controls are acti-
vated.
- Direction (Menu)The Direction property specifies the direction in
which the gradient fill will be applied.
- Swap (Button)Switches the colors specified by the Start and End
buttons.
- Start (Button)This button specifies the first of the two required colors
that will be used to generate the gradient fill.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-595
- Middle (Button)This button specifies an optional third color that will
be used to generate the gradient fill.
- End (Button)This button specifies the second of the two required
colors that will be used to generate the gradient fill.
- No Middle (Check Box)This check box enables/disables the Middle
button. When the Middle button is disabled, a two-base-color gradient
will be generated; when it is enabled, a three-base-color gradient is gener-
ated.
WallsThis sub-tab contains the following controls, which are identical for each
of the Wall third-level sub-tabs (Left, Right, Bottom, Back):
Color (Button)Determines the presence of and settings for the wall color.
Border (Button)Determines the presence of and settings for the wall
border.
Pattern (Button)Determines the presence of and settings for the wall
pattern.
Gradient (Button)Determines the presence of and settings for the wall
gradient.
Visible (Check Box)Enables/disables visibility of the wall.
Dark 3D (Check Box)Enables/disables 3D surface shading of the wall.
This check box is active only when a Size greater than o has been specified in
the Size control.
Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the depth of the wall in
3D graphs.
Transparent (Check Box)Enables/disables visibility of the wall.
Note: Only the Back settings are used in 2D graphs.
3DThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
3 Dimensions (Check Box)Enables/disables 3-dimensional display of the
chart.
3D% (Up/Down Increment Control)Specifies the degree of the 3D effect.
Orthogonal (Check Box)Enables/disables the 2D Canvas and disables/
enables the Full 3D Canvas allowing Elevation and Rotation displacement of
the Chart.
Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)Specifies the display angle of the
3D orthogonal graph.
Zoom Text (Check Box)Enables/disables the zooming of text when using
the Zoom control.
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-596 WaterCAD Users Manual
Zoom (Slider)Zooms in/out in the graph display.
Rotation (Slider)Horizontally rotates the graph three dimensionally. This
control is disabled when an Orthogonal display is chosen.
Elevation (Slider)Vertically rotates the graph three dimensionally. This
control is disabled when an Orthogonal display is chosen.
Horiz. Offset (Slider)Determines the horizontal placement of the graph
image within the chart.
Vert. Offset (Slider)Determines the vertical placement of the graph image
within the chart.
Perspective (Slider)Use this property with Orthogonal unchecked to
modify the 3D perspective of the Chart. Larger values add more depth
perspective. This control is disabled when an Orthogonal display is chosen.
Series Tab
The Series tab contains parameters dependant on the series type concerned. The list
box at the top of the Series tab shows which series you are editing. This tab is further
subdivided into the following second-level sub-tabs:
FormatThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Border (Button) Determines whether the series indicator will display a
border.
- Color (Button)Determines the color of the series indicator.
- Pattern (Button)Determines the presence of and settings for the series
indicator pattern.
- Dark 3D (Check Box)Enables/disables shading of 3D surfaces.
- Color Each (Check Box)Assigns a different color to each series indi-
cator.
- Height 3D (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the width of
the 3D effect when a 3D graph is chosen.
- Stack (Menu)Determines stacking characteristics of series.
- Stairs (Check Box)When checked, 2 Lines between each pair of points
are drawn, thus giving a stairs appearance.
- Inverted (Check Box)Inverts the direction of the stair effect.
- Outline (Button)Draws an outline around the series indicator.
PointThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
Visible (Check Box)Enables/disables visibility of series points.
3D (Check Box)Enables/disables 3D representation of series points.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-597
Dark 3D (Check Box)Enables/disables shading of 3D point surfaces.
Style (Menu)Determines the symbol used to represent series points.
Width (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the width of the series
point symbol in pixels.
Height (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the height of the series
point symbol in pixels.
Pattern (Button)Determines the presence of and settings for the point
pattern.
Default (Check Box)Enables/disables use of the default pattern.
Border (Button)Determines the presence of and settings for the border
enclosing the point symbol.
MarksThe Marks sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level
sub-tabs:
StyleThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Visible (Check Box)Enables/disables display of marks, or series point
labels, in the graph.
- Clipped (Check Box)Allows/disallows display of marks outside of the
inner graph border.
- Multi line (Check Box)Enables/disables multiple lines within each
mark.
- All Series Visible (Check Box)Enables/disables display of all series
marks.
- Style (Menu)Determines the information that is displayed in the
marks.
- Draw every (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the interval of
the marks that are displayed. Selecting 2 would display marks for every
other series point, selecting 3 would display every third, etc.
- Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the display angle of
the mark.
- Color (Button)Determines the color of the line that connects the series
point and the mark.
- Length (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the length of the
line that connects the series point and the mark.
FormatThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Color (Button)Determines the background color of the marks.
- Frame (Button)Enables/disables display of a frame around each mark.
Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher
13-598 WaterCAD Users Manual
- Pattern (Button)Determines the presence of and settings for the marks
background pattern.
- Bevel (Menu)Determines the type of the bevel effect.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the size of the bevel
effect.
- Round Frame (Check Box)Rounds the frame corners.
- Transparent (Check Box)Enables/disables mark background transpar-
ency.
TextThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Font (Button)Specifies the font to be used.
- Outline (Button)Enables/disables the display of an outline.
- Inter-char Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)Defines the
amount of space between characters.
- Color (Button)Determines the color of the text shadow.
- Horiz. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the horizontal
size of the text shadow.
- Vert. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)Determines the vertical size
of the text shadow.
GradientThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Visible (Check Box)Enables/disables the three-dimensional graph
display. When this box is checked, the other gradient controls are acti-
vated.
- Direction (Menu)The Direction property specifies the direction in
which the gradient fill will be applied.
- Swap (Button)Switches the colors specified by the Start and End
buttons.
- Start (Button)This button specifies the first of the two required colors
that will be used to generate the gradient fill.
- Middle (Button)This button specifies an optional third color that will
be used to generate the gradient fill.
- End (Button)This button specifies the second of the two required
colors that will be used to generate the gradient fill.
- No Middle (Check Box)This check box enables/disables the Middle
button. When the Middle button is disabled, a two-base-color gradient
will be generated; when it is enabled, a three-base-color gradient is gener-
ated.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-599
ShadowThis sub-tab contains the following controls:
- Color (Button)This button allows you to choose the color of the
shadow.
- Size (Up/Down Increment Control)This button allows you to adjust
the size of the shadow.
13.6 Contours
Contours includes:
Contour Map Manager on page 13-599
Contour Plot on page 13-601
Contour Smoothing on page 13-601
Enhanced Pressure Contours on page 13-602
Contour Labeling on page 13-602
Spot Elevations on page 13-603
13.6.1 Contour Map Manager
The Contour Map Manager contains the information required to generate contours for
a calculated network, organized as follows:
ContourChoice list used to select the attribute that is to be contoured. Clicking
the sideways triangle button will open the categorized Quick Attribute Selector
(for more information, see Quick Attribute Selector on page 2-40).
Selection SetContours can be generated using all elements in the network or a
subset of elements, defined in the Selection Set Manager (for more information,
see Selection Sets Manager on page 5-255). Click the Ellipsis (...) button to
access the Selection Set Manager.
Contours
13-600 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: In addition to using selection sets. You can also add nodes to a
special zone that will ensure that they are excluded from the
contouring point set. Cybernet 2 users might recall that Zone
number 99 was reserved for this purpose. You should create a
zone named Do not contour. You can then add the nodes that
you do not want to be included in the contour set. You can
change the name of the contour exclusion zone by editing the
file, HAESTAD.INI, and setting the variable,
ExcludeFromContouringTag, equal to any string label. The
exclusion label is not case-sensitive.
If you want to exclude some spot elevations from the contouring
point set, set their Description field to Do not contour (or
whatever value is set in the HAESTAD.INI
ExcludeFromContouringTag variable).
MinimumLowest value to be included in the contour map. It may be desirable
to use a minimum that is above the absolute minimum value in the system to avoid
creating excessive lines near a pump or other high-differential portions of the
system.
MaximumHighest value for which contours will be generated.
IncrementStep by which the contours increase. The contours created will be
evenly divisible by the increment, and are not directly related to the minimum and
maximum values. For example, a contour set with 10 minimum, 20 maximum,
and an increment of 3 would result in the following set: [ 12, 15, 18 ] not [ 10, 13,
16, 19 ].
Index IncrementValue for which contours will be highlighted and labeled. The
index increment should be an even multiple of the standard increment.
InitializeThis button, located to the right of the Contour section, will initialize
the Minimum, Maximum, Increment, and Index Increment values based on the
actual values observed for the elements in the selection set.
RampAutomatically generate a gradient range between two colors that you
specify. Pick the color for the first and last values in the list and the program will
select colors for the other values. For instance, picking red as the first color and
blue as the last color will produce varying shades of purple for the other values.
Color by RangeContours are colored based on attribute ranges. Use the
Initialize button to create five evenly spaced ranges and associated colors.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-601
Tip: Initialization can be accomplished by clicking the Initialize
button. This program will then automatically generate values for
the minimum, maximum, and so on, to create an evenly spaced
contour set. These values may or may not be the desired range
for your purposes, but should at least give you a better concept
of the range of values with which you are dealing.
Color by IndexThe standard contours and index contours have separately
controlled colors so you can make the index contours more apparent.
13.6.2 Contour Plot
Note: Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this
view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot
Status pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.
The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accu-
rate, straight-line contours.
View the changes in the mapped attribute over time by using WaterCAD new anima-
tion feature. Click the Play button to automatically advance through the time step
increments selected in the Increment bar.
Tip: Although the straight-line contours generated by this program
are accurate, smooth contours are often more desirable for
presentation purposes. You can smooth the contours by clicking
Options, and selecting Smooth Contours.
The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file using the File button at the top of
the window. In AutoCAD mode, you can export the contours directly to your
AutoCAD drawing by clicking File > Export to AutoCAD.
In Stand-Alone and AutoCAD modes, you can export the contour to a shapefile by
clicking File > Export to Shapefile at the top of the window.
13.6.3 Contour Smoothing
The Contour Smoothing option displays the results of a contour map specification as
smooth, curved contours.
The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file using the command buttons at the
top of the window.
Contours
13-602 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this
view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot
Status Pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.
13.6.4 Enhanced Pressure Contours
Normal contouring routines only include model nodes, such as junctions, tanks and
reservoirs. When spot elevations are added to the drawing, however, you can create
more detailed elevation contours and enhanced pressure contours.
These enhanced contours include not only the model nodes, but also the interpolated
and calculated results for the spot elevations. Enhanced pressure contours can help the
Stand-Alone to understand the behavior of the system even in areas that have not been
included directly in the model.
13.6.5 Contour Labeling
You can apply contour labels after the contour plot has been exported to the AutoCAD
drawing. The labeling commands are accessed from the Tools menu. The following
options are available:
EndAllows you to apply labels to one end, both ends, or any number of
selected insertion points. After selecting this labeling option, AutoCAD will
prompt you to Select Contour to label. After selecting the contour to label,
AutoCAD prompts for an Insertion point. Click in the drawing view to place
labels at specified points along the contour. When prompted for an Insertion point,
clicking the Enter key once will prompt you to select point nearest the contour
endpoint. Doing so will apply a label to the end of the contour closest to the area
where you clicked. Clicking the Enter key twice when prompted for an Insertion
point will apply labels to both ends of the contour.
InteriorThis option applies labels to the interior of a contour line. You will be
prompted to select the contour to be labeled, then to select the points along the
contour line where you want the label to be placed. Any number of labels can be
placed inside the contour in this way. Clicking the label grip and dragging will
move the label along the contour line.
Group EndChoosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box.
The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected
will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple
of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be
prompted to select the Start point for a line. Contours intersected by the line drawn
thusly will have a label applied to both ends, as modified by the Elevation Incre-
ment that was selected.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-603
Group InteriorChoosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box.
The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected
will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple
of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be
prompted to select the Start point for a line.
Change SettingsAllows you to change the Style, Display Precision, and Font
Height of the contour labels.
Delete LabelPrompts to select the contour from which labels will be deleted,
then prompts to select the labels to be removed.
Delete All LabelsPrompts to select which contours the labels will be removed
from, then removes all labels for the specified contours.
13.6.6 Spot Elevations
In addition to the elevations at junction nodes and other network elements, supple-
mental spot elevations can be entered throughout the model without adding unneces-
sary model nodes.
Note: These spot elevations have no effect on the network model, but
can better define the terrain surface throughout the drawing. The
result is that elevation contours and enhanced pressure
contours can be generated with more detail. This gives the
Stand-Alone a better prediction of the systems behavior, even in
areas where the model has been skeletonized.
Because spot elevations are not included in the actual piping network, there is very
little information in the spot elevation editor. The data consists of the following:
Spot Elevation Input DataGeneral characteristics defined by you. For more
information, see Spot Elevation Input Data on page 13-603.
Spot Elevation Calculated ResultsValues calculated from the model results.
For more information, see Spot Elevation Calculated Results on page 13-604.
Spot Elevation Input Data
Spot Elevations have user-defined characteristics, including:
LabelUnique name by which a spot elevation element will be referenced in
reports, error messages, and tables.
X-Coordinate (Easting)The location may be presented as an X-value or
defined as an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.
Y-Coordinate (Northing)The location may be presented as a Y-value or
defined as a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.
Profile
13-604 WaterCAD Users Manual
ElevationElevation of the spot elevation.
DescriptionOptional notes describing the spot elevation.
Spot Elevation Calculated Results
Because spot elevations are not directly tied to the hydraulic network model, there are
only a few values that are calculated from the model results:
Note: These values are obtained by interpolating between three
adjacent model nodes. The enhanced hydraulic grade is
determined from this interpolation, and the enhanced pressure
is then computed as a function of the interpolated hydraulic
grade and the elevation.
For spot elevations that are outside the model bounds, there
may not be three adjacent model nodes. If this is the case, the
enhanced hydraulic grade will be determined to be zero, which
may result in negative pressures. This does not necessarily
demonstrate that there are poor conditions in the system. It
indicates that the spot elevations may cover a wider area than
the model itself.
Enhanced Hydraulic GradeInterpolated hydraulic grade at this location.
Enhanced PressurePressure based on the interpolated hydraulic grade.
13.7 Profile
A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance, such as ground
elevation along a section of piping. As well as these side or sectional views of the
ground elevation, profiles can be used to show other characteristics, such as hydraulic
grade, pressure, and constituent concentration.
WaterCAD offers two types of profiles, Profile Plots and Profile Graphs.
Profile Plots are detailed plan views that display structures, ground elevation,
hydraulic grade line, and energy grade line.
Profile Graphs simpler graph views that allow you to profile a wider range of
attributes.
Although profiles in general are not limited to a specific alignment, piping network
models are usually concerned with a specific profile alignment type called a network
walk (for more information, see Walk on page 13-615).
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-605
13.7.1 Profile Manager
Within the Profile Manager, profile views can be created and accessed. The previ-
ously created profile views will appear in the main pane of the dialog. To view a
profile in the list, highlight it and click the Open button.
By clicking the Profile Management button the following functions can be performed:
AddCreates a new profile view.
EditSelect elements to be profiled and edit the Profile Options for the high-
lighted profile.
RenameRenames the selected profile.
DeleteDeletes the selected profile.
NotesView and edit notes associated with the selected profile.
Apply TemplateUpdate a profile based on a new (or revised) template.
Click the Templates button to open up the Profile Templates dialog.
New Profile Dialog
This dialog consists of a text box that allows you to enter a name for the new profile.
This is the name that will be used for any labels or annotations that use the dynamic
parameter for profile name (%p).
Rename Profile Dialog
This dialog consists of a text box that allows you to enter a new name for the profile
that was highlighted when the Rename command was initiated. This is the name that
will be used for any labels or annotations that use the dynamic parameter for profile
name (%p).
Profile
13-606 WaterCAD Users Manual
13.7.2 Profile Wizard
The Profile Wizard is provided to guide you through the profile generation process.
You will be asked to specify a profile start and stop node, as well as the horizontal and
vertical axis scaling parameters.
Element Selection
The first step of the Profile Wizard allows you to specify the elements included in the
hydraulic profile. The specified elements will appear in the list pane in the dialog.
You can modify the list by clicking the following buttons:
Select From DrawingClicking this button will open the plan view of the
hydraulic network. Simply click the elements you wish to include in the profile.
The profile must consist of a single path that can go from upstream to downstream
or downstream to upstream or in both directions. The elements can include both
gravity and pressure elements. Right click and select done when finished. In
AutoCAD mode simply click the drawing pane to return to the Profile Wizard.
ReverseThis command will reverse the order of the elements in the list.
Remove AllThis command will delete all the elements from the profile list.
Remove All PreviousThis command will delete all elements upstream of the
selected node.
Remove All FollowingThis command will delete all the elements downstream
of the selected node.
In the first step of the Profile Wizard, you can also establish user-defined stationing
for the node elements in the profile, and weather the calculated Stationing Order is
increasing or decreasing.
To establish a user-defined station for a node in the list, click the User Defined Station
checkbox in the row occupied by the node. All stationing upstream of that node will
be recalculated based on the entered station if they are not specified as user defined.
Elevation Data
This step of the wizard allows you to define how the ground elevation will be
displayed in the profile plot. The two options include:
Constant Depth When this elevation display method is selected,
Ground Elevation/Depth Curv
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-607
Templates and Notes
The second step of the Profile Wizard allows you to specify the template to be applied
to the new profile. Select it from the Template pull-down menu. Click the ellipses
() button next to the Template pull-down menu to open up the Profile Templates
dialog. You can also enter any notes about the profile in the large text box below the
notes icon.
Note: Templates are only used initially when defining the profile. Once
the profile is created all connections to the selected template are
severed. Therefore if you change a characteristic of the
template the change will not be reflected in the profile. This
prevents undo modification.
You can reapply a template through the Profiles dialog. Click the
Profile Management button and select Apply Template.
Plot Options
The third step of the Profile Wizard allows you to customize the horizontal and
vertical axis scaling parameters. You can choose either automatic or user-defined axis
scaling. Use automatic scaling to accept the default scale for the profile axis. Choose
user-defined scaling to specify the axis minimum, and maximum values. The incre-
ment value is accessible regardless of which option is selected. You can also set the
direction of the profile either from left to right or from right to left.
13.7.3 Profile Templates Manager
The Profile Templates dialog allows you to create and modify pre-defined templates
that can be applied to new profiles in the first step of the Profile Wizard. The
templates will then establish the annotations and text properties for the new profile,
instead of having to reestablish all the information every time you create a new
profile.
The following buttons are displayed on the dialog:
AddCreate a new template. When this button is clicked you will be prompted
to name the template. Click OK to continue to the main Template dialog.
EditModify the existing template selected from the list.
DuplicateCreate a copy of the selected template. When this button is clicked
you will be prompted to name the duplicate.
DeleteRemove the selected template from the list.
RenameChange the name of the selected template. When this button is clicked
you will be prompted for the new name.
Profile
13-608 WaterCAD Users Manual
File/ImportThis command allows you to import templates from a previously
exported template file (.ltf).
File/ExportThis command allows you to export the currently highlighted
template to a template file (.ltf) for use by other users.
New Profile Template Dialog
This dialog consists of a text box that allows you to enter a name for the new profile
template.
Rename Dialog
This dialog consists of a text box that allows you to enter a new name for the profile
template that was highlighted when the Rename command was initiated.
Duplicate Dialog
This dialog consists of a text box that allows you to enter a name for the duplicate
profile template that was created when the Duplicate command was initiated.
13.7.4 Profile Templates
A template is a predefined set of text styles and annotations that can be applied to a
new profile upon its creation. By setting up a single template, you can eliminate
having to re-setup the generic portions of the profile every time a new one is created.
The Template dialog is divided into five tabs:
Layout Options
Under the Layout Options tab you set up the configuration for the pipe and node text
for the profile template. The following options are identical for both node and pipe
elements:
OrientationSet the orientation of the text in relation to the horizontal axis. You
can select from Horizontal, Vertical, and Other orientations. Other is any orienta-
tion with a rotation angle not 0 or 90 degrees.
RotationSpecify the angle in degrees of the text with respect to the horizontal
axis.
JustificationSelect how the text is justified from either: Left, Right, or
Centered.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-609
LeaderCheck this box to create a line from the text annotation to the item to
which it refers.
Show Leader ArrowCheck this box to create an arrow that will appear on the
leader line from the text annotation.
Instead of utilizing the above options you can also choose to Align Text with Pipes for
the pipe annotations.
Tip: These same options are available for individual annotations on
the Profile Window by right clicking on one of the annotations
and selecting Annotation Properties from the pop-up menu.
Drawing
Under the Drawing tab you can set various options associated with the drawing scale
and axes labeling to be specified in the template. The Drawing tab of the Template
dialog has the following sections:
Drawing ScaleIn this section you can choose to set the scale based on the
project scale by checking the Match Project check box. If the box is unchecked
then you can specify your own horizontal and vertical scales as well as the default
text height multiplier.
AxisIn this section you can specify the horizontal and vertical increment for the
axis labeling, as well as the position of the elevations on the Y-axis. For example,
if you choose Left from the Axis Labeling drop-down menu then labels will
appear on the left side of the profile. You can choose for the labels to also appear
on the right side of the profile or on both sides of the profile.
Annotation
Under the Annotation tab you can view the annotations selected for the current
template, as well as each annotations initial placement. You can edit a particular
annotation by highlighting it and clicking the Edit button to open the Annotation
Wizard.
Labels
Under the Labels tab you can specify various labels associated with the profile, as well
as an associated height multiplier.
In the label fields you can put one of several dynamic parameters that will automati-
cally update as the model updates. The following table shows the list of available
parameters and an example of their use.
Profile
13-610 WaterCAD Users Manual
Layers
From the Layers tab you can set various properties for the different layers associated
with a hydraulic profile. You can click whether or not the layer is visible. You can also
set the color for the layer. If you click the ellipses () button from inside one of the
Color fields you can select or create a customized color.
The properties established for the layers will remain if the profile is exported to a DXF
or directly to AutoCAD.
Sharing Templates Across Projects
All template information created at a computer is stored in the file called ProfileTem-
plates.LTM, located in the product directory. So if you create several templates types
that you wish to share between different users, simply transfer the file to the other
machines with the product installed, and copy over the existing profile templates file.
Alternatively, you can export individual profile templates for import by other users by
clicking the File button on the Template Manager dialog and selecting Export
Template from the pop-up menu. This creates an .LTF file with a saved copy of the
selected template.
To import the template, select Import Template after clicking the File button in the
Template Manager. This will copy the template data to the ProfileTemplates.LTM file
on that machine for reuse.
Table 13-2: Dynamic Parameters for Profile Labels
Dynamic
Parameter
Function
Label Input
Example
Label Output
Example
%s
Displays the
name of the
current scenario
in the label.
Scenario: %s Scenario: Base
%p
Displays the
profile name in
the label.
Profile: %p
Profile: Trunk
Line
%u
Displays the
units for the
associated
attribute in the
label.
Station (%u) Station (ft)
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-611
13.7.5 Profile Plot
The profile that you specified will be displayed in the Profile Plot window. The
following functions are available in the main toolbar.
File / Export to Drawing(AutoCAD mode only) Export the file to your
AutoCAD drawing.
File / Export to DXFExport the profile in a .DXF format for use in AutoCAD.
Undo / RedoClick the left facing arrow to undo the previous command. Click
the right facing arrow to redo the command.
PanMove around in the profile window.
Zoom ButtonsZoom in, Zoom Out, Zoom Extents, and Zoom Window.
OptionsOpens the menu with the following items
Find ElementLocate an element in the Profile Window.
Profile OptionsSet Axis and Drawing options and various other user-specified
parameters.
Annotation ManagerSet annotations for the elements in the profile.
Print PreviewPreview the Profile view.
CloseExit the Profile window. Any edits made in the Profile window will be
lost when you exit.
HelpOpens the dialogs online help topic.
In addition to the functions on the main toolbar, you can add your own text and
graphic annotations to the profile by clicking the representative buttons on the vertical
side-toolbar of the Profile Plot window.
You can change the current scenario from the drop-down list box. To the left of the
Scenario drop-down list box are the Extended Period Simulation Analysis controls.
These include VCR-style controls to move through the time steps or to animate the
profile view and the Increment list box, which controls how many time steps are
skipped when the Forward or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also
controls which time steps are displayed during animation.
Profile
13-612 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: You can make adjustments to your profile options after
generating the profile by using the Options button at the top of
the Profile Window.
You can use the mouse to graphically drag and reposition the
textual annotations in the Profile window.
The Hydraulic and Energy Grade Lines will only be plotted if the
calculated results are valid. You may need to Compute your
model to make sure the results are valid.
Use the scroll bars along the right and bottom of the Profile
window to pan left, right, up, and down.
Edit the outlet element to change the starting station used in
profiling.
Use the Scenario control located at the top of the Profile window
to see the profiles for different scenarios.
Profile Options
The Profile Options dialog allows you to customize the horizontal and vertical axis
scaling parameters, the line widths, text height, and layer visibility. The dialog is
divided into four tabs:
Axis tab
The Axis tab allows you to customize the horizontal and vertical axis scaling parame-
ters. You can choose automatic or user-defined axis scaling. Use the automatic
scaling to accept the default scale for the profile axis. Choose user-defined scaling to
specify the axis minimum, and maximum values by deselecting the Automatic Scaling
check box. You can also select the position of the labeling on the vertical axis. For
example, if you select Left from the Axis Labeling drop-down menu, the elevation
labels on the Y-axis will appear on the left hand side of the profile. You can also
choose for the labels to appear on the right side of the profile, as well as on both sides
of the profile.
You can also set the direction of the profile in the Direction field.
Drawing tab
The Drawing tab allows you to set line widths for some of the profile figures, toggle
layer visibility, and adjust the size of the text in the profile.
To change the line widths for the ground elevation, the node structures, and the
hydraulic grade and energy grade lines in the profile, simply enter the desired size in
their respective fields.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-613
The Text Height Annotation Multiplier allows you to adjust the size of the text in the
profile.
You can also adjust the line widths for various graphic attributes presented on the
profile such as:
Ground Elevation
Structures
Hydraulic Grade
Energy Grade
Layers tab
From the Profile Layers Tab you can set various properties for the different layers
associated with hydraulic profile. You can click whether or not the layer is visible.
You can also set the color for the layer. If you click the ellipses () button from
inside one of the Color fields you can select or create a customized color.
The properties established for the layers will remain if the profile is exported to a DXF
or directly to AutoCAD.
Background Tab
A .DXF image can be inserted as a background for the selected profile.
DXF Background FilenameThis field enables you to specify a .DXF file to be
used as the background for your project. Enter the drive, directory, and file name,
or click the Browse button to select a file interactively.
Show BackgroundIf the background .DXF file is turned off, it will not be read
from a disk or displayed in the drawing pane. If the background is not turned off,
it will be read from a disk and displayed.
DXF UnitThe .DXF drawing unit conversion is used when importing .DXF
background files, and also when exporting a .DXF file from the project. Note that
the value in this field governs the import behavior for .DXF files saved in scien-
tific, decimal, or fractional units, but not for .DXF files saved in architectural or
engineering units.
Insertion PointThese fields enables you to specify the point (X and Y coordi-
nates) in the profile where the drawing will be inserted.
Profile
13-614 WaterCAD Users Manual
.DXF file import behavior is governed by specific factors within the .DXF file. If a
file does not import as you expect, check the options used to generate it carefully. For
example, try importing the .DXF back into the original program or into another
program that supports the .DXF format, such as AutoCAD or MicroStation. If the file
does not import into other applications, there may be an invalid or missing header,
invalid elements, or other errors.
13.7.6 Profile Setup
Setting up a profile is a matter of selecting the walk and the attribute on which the
profile is to be based. The Profile Setup dialog box includes:
AttributeParameter to be plotted on the vertical axis of the profile.
ElementsList of elements that define the walk (see Walk on page 13-615) to
be profiled.
In addition, the network walk can be manipulated by using some of the associated
options:
Select From DrawingReturn to the drawing in a protected mode to select and
deselect elements for inclusion in the walk.
Note: In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu
command Repeat to re-open the Profile Setup dialog box.
ReverseReverse the order of the walk. The first node in the list becomes the
last, and the last node becomes the first.
Remove AllRemove all elements from the current walk.
Remove All PreviousRemove all elements that appear before the selected
element in the list. If the selected element is a pipe, the associated node will not be
removed.
Remove All FollowingRemove all elements that appear after the selected
element in the list. If the selected element is a pipe, the associated node will not be
removed.
When everything is set up to your satisfaction, click the Profile button to generate the
graph.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-615
13.7.7 Profile Plot
The Profile Plot window displays the results of an analysis in a profile format. The
plot can be copied to the Windows clipboard or printed out directly. By selecting the
Options > Graph Options menu button, you can also adjust the titles, axes, colors,
and other characteristics of the graph.
Note: For an extended period simulation, the extents of the axes are
determined based on the minimum and maximum attribute
values for the entire time step, not just the current time step.
This is done so that stepping through the time steps gives a
more accurate portrayal of the system behavior without
rescaling.
There is also a time toolbar on the Profile Plot window that allows you to follow the
profile through extended period simulation results (for more information, see Steady-
State/Extended Period Simulation on page 9-372).
13.7.8 Export Profiles (in AutoCAD Mode)
Profiles can be exported to the AutoCAD drawing using the File menu on the Profile
Plot dialog box (for more information, see Profile Plot on page 13-615). Profiles
will be exported to an insertion point below the current drawing extents.
13.7.9 Walk
A walk is a collection of nodes and pipes that follows a specific path through the
network. It can include any type of Network Element, but cannot include annotations
or spot elevations.
Note: A walk is a non-branching path through the network, and can
only be extended at either end. Pipes cannot be added along the
midsection of the walk. Likewise, elements in the midsection of
the walk cannot be deselected without first deselecting all of the
elements between one end and the undesired element.
A walk cannot double back on itself, so once a pipe has been selected it cannot be
included elsewhere in the walk.
Scenario Comparison
13-616 WaterCAD Users Manual
13.7.10 Walk Selection
After clicking the Select From Drawing button to define a walk, you will be returned
to the drawing editor. If there are already elements in the current walk, they will be
displayed in a highlighted mode. Otherwise, you need to begin a new walk by clicking
any pipe. The pipe and its end nodes will then be highlighted. Continue clicking pipes
to add them to the walk, or click highlighted end pipes to remove them from the
current walk.
Once you have selected a walk, press the Escape button on your keyboard, or right-
click with the mouse and select Done.
13.8 Scenario Comparison
Note: The active topology that is displayed is based on the current
scenario. Any elements that are inactive in the current scenario
will not be displayed, even if the elements are active in other
scenario.
The data calculated in different scenarios (see Scenarios on page 8-358) can be
compared through the use of the Scenario Comparison window. This allows you to
create an annotated drawing to display the differences in the values for any two
scenarios.
13.8.1 Annotation Comparison Wizard
The Annotation Comparison Wizard is used to create a drawing that contains text
elements displaying the differences between specific attributes of two scenarios (for
more information, see Scenarios on page 8-358). The Annotation Comparison
Wizard is identical to the Annotation Wizard (see The Annotation Wizard on
page 13-558) except it has one additional step. This step involves selecting the two
scenarios you wish to compare.
Scenario 1Choose the baseline scenario.
Scenario 2Choose the scenario you wish to compare to Scenario 1.
Note: The active topology that is displayed is based on the current
scenario. Any elements that are inactive in the current scenario
will not be displayed, even if the elements are active in other
scenario.
The value in Scenario 1 is subtracted from the value of Scenario 2, and the difference
is displayed. Therefore, if any specified attributes value is greater in Scenario 2 than
it is in Scenario 1, the difference is displayed as a positive number. If the value is
smaller in Scenario 2 than in Scenario 1, it is displayed as a negative number.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-617
Tip: For applications that support extended period simulations, you
can choose the same scenario for Scenario 1 and Scenario 2 to
annotate the differences between two time steps of that
scenario.
For example, suppose your model contains two scenarios. One is named 2002 Condi-
tions, and the other is named 2010 Conditions. To create a drawing that displays the
difference in velocity in a pipe between the 2002 scenario and the 2010 scenario, you
would use the Annotation Comparison Wizard. You could choose the 2002 scenario as
Scenario 1, and the 2010 scenario as Scenario 2. You would then complete the rest of
the steps in the wizard. The drawing produced would show positive values where the
velocity increased under 2010 conditions and negative values where the velocity
decreased under 2010 conditions.
13.8.2 Scenario Comparison Window
The Scenario Comparison window allows you to view, print, export, and modify
scenario comparison annotations (for more information, see Element Annotation on
page 13-557).
Along the top of the window is a row of buttons that perform the various functions
listed below:
File > Export To DXFExports the drawing in the standard .DXF file format.
For more information, see Advanced DXF Import Techniques on page 16-668.
File > Export To AutoCAD (available only in AutoCAD mode)Export the
drawing to the current AutoCAD drawing.
Zoom ToolsProvides standard zoom capabilities for navigating within the
drawing.
Options > Annotation ManagerOpens the Annotation Comparison Wizard to
add, delete, or modify the scenario comparison annotations. For more informa-
tion, see Annotation Comparison Wizard on page 13-616.
Options > Annotation Height MultiplierModifies the text height for the
scenario comparison annotations.
Options > Find ElementAllows you to locate an element by its label.
Print PreviewOpens the Print Preview window to view how the printed pages
will look.
CloseCloses the Scenario Comparison window.
HelpGet quick access to this help topic.
Graphic Annotation
13-618 WaterCAD Users Manual
Several user interface elements are available to let you modify the scenarios that are
being compared, and to control when the scenario comparison annotations are
updated. These interface elements are described in more detail below.
Scenario 1This row of controls is similar to the Analysis Toolbar on the main
window. This field allows you to choose, from the list of available scenarios, the
one that will be the baseline in the comparison.
Scenario 2This row of controls is identical to those described above in
Scenario 1, but instead of defining the baseline for the comparison, the scenario
you pick here will be compared to the baseline.
UpdateClick this button to refresh the scenario comparison annotations. This
button is used when Auto Update (described below) is off, and you have changed
either Scenario 1 or Scenario 2.
Auto UpdateA check in this box indicates that Auto Update is on, and that the
scenario comparison annotations will be refreshed whenever Scenario 1 or
Scenario 2 is changed. With Auto Update off, you can select the desired combina-
tion of Scenario 1 and Scenario 2, then click the Update button. With Auto
Update on, the annotations will refresh automatically to every scenario or time
step change.
13.9 Graphic Annotation
Note: To turn off Graphic Annotation, clear the corresponding check
box in the Symbol Visibility section (see Symbol Visibility on
page 4-239) of the Drawing Options tab in the Global Options
dialog box.
In Stand-Alone mode, several Graphic Annotation tools are provided for enhancing
the appearance of your drawing. Graphic annotations can be manipulated like any
other element in the Graphical Editor. You can add, move, and delete them just as you
would with any network elements.
To add graphic annotation to your drawing, use Tools > Layout > Graphic Annota-
tion, or use the tool palette located along the left side of the main window. The avail-
able tools are:
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-619
Tip: The program will calculate the area of a closed polyline. Right-
click the polyline for which you wish to determine the area and
select Enclosed Area.
To open or close a polyline, right-click the polyline and select
Close. A check will appear next to the menu item to indicate that
the polyline is closed.
To add bends or vertices to a polyline, right-click the polyline at
the location you would like to add a bend and select Bend > Add
Bend.
To remove bends or vertices from a polyline, select the polyline,
right-click the bend you would like to remove, and select Bend >
Remove Bend.
Line ToolAdd polylines or polygons such as drawing roads or catchment
outlines.
Border ToolAdd rectangles to your drawing for creating borders such as prop-
erty lines.
Text ToolAdd text to your drawing for adding explanatory notes, titles, or
labels for non-network elements.
13.9.1 Legend
Legends are used to display the ranges of the active link and node color coding. The
legend tool adds a color coding legend to the drawing. This legend is automatically
updated as the color coding is modified.
Tip: You can double-click a color coding legend in the drawing to edit
the associated color coding parameters.
Editing of the legend figure is not required. In Stand-Alone mode, multiple legends
may be placed in the drawing to assist you when printing specified regions within the
drawing.
Preview Windows
13-620 WaterCAD Users Manual
13.9.2 Scale Dialog Box
Access the scale dialog box by right-clicking on a color coding legend and selecting
the Scale Legend option.
The dialog box consists of a single numeric entry field. The value entered here is a
multiplier that is applied to the default legend size. The default legend size is deter-
mined automatically based on the scale of the drawing and the text height multiplier.
Therefore, a value of 2 entered in the Scale field will result in a Legend twice as big as
the default size; a value of 3 results in a legend three times as big as the default, and so
on.
13.10 Preview Windows
Preview windows includes:
Plot Window on page 13-620
Print Preview Window on page 13-621
Graph Options on page 13-621
13.10.1 Plot Window
The Plot window provides the following functionality:
CopyCopies the plot onto the Windows Clipboard for use in other applications.
For more information, see Other Toolbar Buttons on page 2-69.
PrintOutputs the contents of the Plot window to the printer. For more informa-
tion, see Other Toolbar Buttons on page 2-69.
Options > Graph OptionsAllows you to customize the plot by changing the
graphs axes, fonts, titles, etc. For more information, see Graph Options on
page 13-621.
CloseClose the Plot window. For more information, see Other Toolbar
Buttons on page 2-69.
HelpProvides access to help for the Plot window. For more information, see
Using the Online Help on page 2-58.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-621
13.10.2 Print Preview Window
This window provides you with a preview of what will be printed. The window
contains the following buttons:
Pg Up/Pg DnNavigate between pages of the report. For more information, see
Other Toolbar Buttons on page 2-69.
CopyCopy the reports to the Windows Clipboard. For more information, see
Other Toolbar Buttons on page 2-69.
PrintOutput the report to the printer. For more information, see Other Toolbar
Buttons on page 2-69.
OptionsFor more information, see Other Toolbar Buttons on page 2-69.
Print SetupChange printer options, such as portrait or landscape page
layout.
Fit to PageThe Fit to Page check box will not appear if the Print Preview
window does not contain a drawing, or if the drawing is in schematic mode.
When checked, the drawing will be scaled to fit within a single page. When
not checked, the drawing will be output using the drawing scale.
CloseClose the Print Preview window. For more information, see Other
Toolbar Buttons on page 2-69.
HelpProvides access to help for the Print Preview window. For more informa-
tion, see Using the Online Help on page 2-58.
13.10.3 Graph Options
These features allow you to customize the way a graph or pie chart looks. The dialog
box is divided into several tabs:
Titles on page 13-622
Axis (for Graphs Only) on page 13-622
Grid (for Graphs Only) on page 13-622
Display (for Pie Charts Only) on page 13-622
Legend on page 13-623
Preview Windows
13-622 WaterCAD Users Manual
Titles
TitlesThere are three sets of titles for a graph: Graph title, X-Axis title and Y-
Axis title. Each title set contains two levels: title and subtitle. A pie chart has a
title and a subtitle.
Title FontThis feature allows you to select and change the text font type for
specific items on the graph or pie chart. Use the selection list to choose the item
for which to change the font, then click the Ellipsis (...) button to select the
desired font type from the list of available fonts currently installed on your PC.
Axis (for Graphs Only)
Automatic ScalingBy default, the program uses the Automatic Scaling options
for setting the X and Y-axis minimum, maximum, and increment values. To
customize an axis, turn the check mark off and enter the desired values for the
minimum, maximum, and increment. If desired, you can customize a single axis
while leaving the other in the Automatic Scaling mode.
Log ScalePlace a check mark in this box to use a log scale for this axis. You can
use a log scale for one or both axes.
Grid (for Graphs Only)
Note: You can specify to use grid lines for one or both axes.
X-AxisPlace a check mark in this box to view grid lines corresponding to the
X-Axis labels.
Y-AxisPlace a check mark in this box to view grid lines corresponding to the Y-
Axis labels.
Line ColorUse this selection list to define the color to use for both axes grid
lines.
Line StyleUse this selection list to define the line type (solid, dashed, etc) to
use for both axes grid lines.
Fill ColorUse this selection list to define the color to use for background fill
within the plotting boundaries of the graph.
Save as DefaultPlace a check mark in this box to save the current grid settings
as the default for subsequent graphs.
Display (for Pie Charts Only)
Data LabelsAllows you to annotate pie charts with percentages, labels, or both.
PercentagesIndicates how many decimals are to be displayed for the
percentage figures.
Presenting your Results
WaterCAD Users Manual 13-623
Legend LocationAllows you to place the legend (if any) on the left, right, top,
or bottom of the pie chart.
Chart ViewAllows you to generate a 3D-view pie chart.
Legend
Show LegendA check mark designates that the legend will be included on the
graph or pie chart. Turn the check mark off if you do not wish to show the legend.
SeriesEach series represents a different curve on the graph or a slice on the pie
chart. If the graph contains only one curve, or the pie chart contains only one slice,
then it is designated as Series 1. Scroll through the list and select the desired curve
or slice (series number). Then, use one of the options below to customize it:
LabelName for the selected curve (series).
Line ColorColor for the selected curve (series).
Line Style (for graphs only)Style for the selected curve (series).
Line Width (for graphs only)Width for the selected curve (series).
Symbol (for graphs only)Data point symbol to use for the selected curve
(series).
Save as DefaultPlace a check mark in this box to save the current legend
settings as the default for subsequent graphs.
13.11 Status Log
Several commands generate a status log showing the results of that command. For
instance, a status log is displayed when you calculate a scenario using the GO button.
The status information is displayed at the top of the dialog box. The dialog box
contains the following buttons:
SaveExport the status log results as an ASCII file.
Print or Print PreviewPrint or preview the status log results.
CloseClose the status log dialog box after design calculations.
HelpAccess context-sensitive online help.
Status Log
13-624 WaterCAD Users Manual
WaterCAD Users Manual 14-625
14
Chapter
Engineering Libraries
The Bentley Systems Engineering Libraries and Library Managers are powerful and
flexible facilities for managing specifications of common materials, objects, or
components that are shared across projects. Some examples of objects that are speci-
fied through engineering libraries include pipe materials, pipe sections (in StormCAD
and SewerCAD), and sanitary loads (in SewerCAD only). You can modify engi-
neering libraries and the objects they contain by using the Tools > Engineering
Libraries option, or by clicking the Ellipsis (...) buttons available next to the fields in
dialog boxes that make use of library objects.
The data for each engineering library is stored in a tabular ASCII file with the exten-
sion .HLB.
Tip: We strongly recommend that you only edit these files using the
built-in facilities available by selecting Tools > Engineering
Libraries. If absolutely necessary, these library files may be
edited or repaired using any ASCII editor.
The standard set of engineering libraries shipped with your Bentley Systems product
resides in the products program directory. By default, each project you create will use
the objects in these default libraries. In special circumstances, you may wish to create
custom libraries to use with one or more projects. You can do this by copying a stan-
dard library or by creating a new library and setting the path in the Engineering
Library Manager to the path for the custom library.
When you change the properties for an object in an engineering library, those changes
will affect all projects that use that library object. At the time a project is loaded, all of
its engineering library objects are synchronized to the current library. Objects are
synchronized based on their label. If the label is the same, then the objects values will
be made the same. If any library referenced in a Library Manager path cannot be
found at the location specified, then the standard library in the program directory will
be used. Once a project is created, it is not necessary to have access to the engineering
library in order for that project to be edited or analyzed.
Engineering Library Manager
14-626 WaterCAD Users Manual
14.1 Engineering Library Manager
The Engineering Library Manager dialog box consists of a table of two columns and
three buttons. In the table section, there is one row for each kind of engineering library
used in your project. You cannot create library types other than the types found in the
set of standard libraries shipped with the product. The columns in the table are as
follows:
LibraryThis column lists the kind of object stored in the referenced library.
PathThis column lists the path to the library to be used for objects of a certain
kind within the current project. By default, the path will reference the standard
library shipped with your Bentley Systems product. To browse for other libraries
of the same type that you may have already created, select the library, and click
the Browse column.
The buttons will perform their respective actions for the row that is currently high-
lighted. These buttons are as follows:
Note: Most users do not need to create custom libraries or edit the
library paths. You only need to change path values if you wish to
create and use custom libraries.
BrowseClick this button if you wish to search your computer or network and
locate other engineering libraries. To reference a library in the path field, the
library must already exist. To create it you may copy a standard library using
Windows File Manager or Explorer, or click New as described below.
EditClick this button if you wish to add, delete, or edit the objects within a
specific kind of engineering library.
NewClick this button if you wish to create a new library.
14.2 WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules
WaterCAD makes use of the following library modules:
Material Properties on page 14-627
Minor Loss Properties on page 14-628
Liquid Properties on page 14-629
Constituent Properties on page 14-630
Engineering Libraries
WaterCAD Users Manual 14-627
14.2.1 Engineering Library Editor
The engineering library editor is where you add, delete, or edit the objects within a
specific kind of engineering library. To access the engineering library editor, select the
appropriate library and click Edit. The Engineering Library Editor dialog box consists
of a table with two columns:
LabelThis column contains a textual description of the object. In general,
objects are considered to be the same if their labels are the same. For example,
when a project is loaded, the engineering library objects are synchronized to the
current library based on label.
Available inThis column contains a check box indicating whether the library
object on the given row is enabled for use by this application. If an object is
enabled, it will appear in choice lists as a candidate for use in the project. If an
object is disabled, it will remain in the library and be editable, but it will not be
offered as a candidate for any operations in the program. If a disabled object has
already been used in a project, then it will remain in use. Disabling it will not
affect the existing project in any way.
The following command buttons appear on the Engineering Library dialog box:
InsertInsert a new, unlabeled object into the current library. You must then
click the Edit button to edit the label and add the appropriate values before the
library will be valid. Library objects will be sorted by label in ascending alphabet-
ical order the next time you open the Engineering Library Editor dialog box.
DuplicateCreate a copy of the currently highlighted library object.
DeleteDelete the object represented by the highlighted row. Note that this
command always deletes objects from the library, but never deletes an object from
your current project if it is in use. To change the library object that is currently in
use by a project, proceed to the dialog box containing the field where the library
object is referenced and select a different library object.
EditAccess the object properties editor.
UsageUse this button to specify specific uses for the material. (This only
applies to the material engineering library.)
Material Properties
A customizable library of materials is provided. Materials provide the pipe or channel
with a default value for the roughness coefficient used in the friction equations. There-
fore, a material must be defined with the following properties:
LabelName of the material as it will appear in material selection lists.
WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules
14-628 WaterCAD Users Manual
Culvert Inlet Material TypeLimits the type of culvert inlets that are available
when the material is used as the culvert material (used in CulvertMaster). The
inclusion of this property allows the sharing of libraries among Bentley Systems
products.
Mannings CoefficientDefault value for Mannings n. This is a number gener-
ally between 0.009 and 0.300. For more information, see Mannings Equation
on page B-797.
Roughness HeightDefault value for absolute roughness height. This will be
used in conjunction with the Darcy-Weisbach friction equation. The roughness
height has units of length, typically mm or ft. For more information, see Darcy-
Weisbach Equation on page B-795.
Kutters n Coefficient (StormCAD and SewerCAD)Default value for
Kutters formula. This is a unitless number generally between 0.009 and 0.300.
C CoefficientDefault value for Hazen Williams C. This is a unitless number
generally between 60 and 150. For more information, see Hazen-Williams Equa-
tion on page B-795.
The check boxes next to each item specify whether the friction method will be avail-
able for the material. For example, some materials, such as asphalt, only have
Mannings n values defined.
Usage
This dialog box only applies to the Material Library. Usage is what specifies the type
of section or pipe that will be available for each material. Use the following
commands to select which sections you would like to be available for each material:
[ > ]: Adds the selected items from the Available Items list
to the Selected Items list.
[ >> ]: Adds all of the items in the Available Items list to the
Selected Items list.
[ < ]: Removes the selected items from the Selected Items
list.
[ << ]: Removes all items from the Selected Items list.
Minor Loss Properties
An editable library of minor losses is provided. Minor losses are used on pressure
pipes and valves to model headlosses due to pipe fittings or obstructions to the flow. A
minor loss is defined with the following properties:
LabelName of the minor loss as it will appear in choice lists.
Engineering Libraries
WaterCAD Users Manual 14-629
TypeGeneral type of fitting or loss element. This field is used to limit the
number of minor loss elements available in choice lists. For example, the minor
loss choice list on the valve dialog box only includes minor losses of type valve.
You cannot add or delete types.
K CoefficientHeadloss coefficient for the minor loss. This unitless number
represents the ratio of the headloss across the minor loss element to the velocity
head of the flow through the element.
Liquid Properties
An editable library of liquids is provided. All hydraulic or hydrologic networks trans-
port a particular liquid. Liquids are defined with the following properties:
Note: Certain friction methods (i.e., Mannings, Hazen Williams) were
developed experimentally, and are only applicable to water at
room temperature (20C/68F). WaterCAD will prompt you to
confirm any choice you make that is inconsistent with the
chosen friction method, but it will not prevent you from using
the liquid properties you chose.
Use Tools > Options to specify the liquid to be modeled in the
Project Options dialog box.
Liquid LabelName of the liquid as it will appear in choice lists.
Kinematic ViscosityRatio of the liquids dynamic, or absolute, viscosity to its
mass density. This is a common parameter in fluid mechanics. The units of kine-
matic viscosity are length squared per unit time (typically m
2
/sec. or ft.
2
/sec.).
Specific GravityRatio of the specific weight of the liquid to the specific weight
of water at 4C (39F). Specific gravity is a unitless number.
TemperatureReference temperature for the liquid. This is required because the
two parameters listed above are generally a function of the temperature, however
this has no effect on the calculations. The default temperature for new liquids is
room temperature (20C/68F).
WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules
14-630 WaterCAD Users Manual
Constituent Properties
An editable library of constituents is provided. Constituents are used in water quality
analyses where the tracking of the growth or decay of a constituent is desired. The
Constituent dialog box contains the following two tabs:
Note: The constituent library shipped by Bentley Systems includes a
single constituent labeled Constituent. The values for this
constituent do not correspond to anything in particular. It is not
intended that you use this constituent for an actual analysis, but
it was provided as a starting point for the library.
A negative value for the reaction rate constant indicates
constituent decay, and a positive value indicates constituent
growth.
General TabThis tab allows you to input general constituent properties, such as
the name of the constituent, diffusivity, and concentration. For more information,
see General Tab on page 14-630.
Reaction Rates TabThis tab allows you to input the reaction order and reaction
rate for Bulk and Wall reactions. For more information, see Reaction Rates Tab
on page 14-631.
General Tab
Constituents are defined with the following general properties:
LabelName of the constituent as it will appear in choice lists.
DiffusivityMolecular diffusivity of the constituent. This value is only used
when pipe wall reactions are considered in the water quality analysis. Diffusivity
has units of length squared per unit time (typically m
2
/s or ft.
2
/s).
Unlimited ConcentrationCheck this box if the constituent does not have a
limiting concentration or potential. If this box is checked, the Concentration Limit
field will not be available for editing. If it is not checked, the Concentration Limit
field is applicable. This box will typically be checked, but certain constituents,
such as trihalomethanes (THMs), have a limiting concentration or formation
potential that needs to be modeled.
Concentration LimitLimiting concentration or potential for the constituent.
When a concentration limit is given, reaction rates will be proportional to the
difference of the current concentration and the concentration limit. Concentration
limit has units of mass per unit volume (typically mg/l or lbs./million gal.)
Engineering Libraries
WaterCAD Users Manual 14-631
Reaction Rates Tab
The water quality module of WaterCAD can track the growth or decay of a substance
by reaction as it travels through a distribution system. In order to do this it needs to
know the rate at which the substance reacts and how this rate might depend on
substance concentration. Reactions can occur both within the bulk flow and with
material along the pipe wall. Bulk fluid reactions can also occur within tanks.
WaterCAD allows a modeler to use different reaction rates for the two zones of reac-
tion. This tab allows you to input the reaction order and reaction rate for Bulk and
Wall reactions. This tab is divided into two sections:
Bulk Reaction SectionBulk flow reactions are reactions that occur in the main
flow stream of a pipe or in a storage tank, unaffected by any processes that might
involve the pipe wall. The following input fields are available in this section:
OrderThis value is used to set the order of reactions occurring in the bulk
fluid. WaterCAD is capable of modeling nth order reactions.
Bulk Reaction RateDefault bulk reaction rate coefficient assigned to all
pipes. Use a positive number for growth, a negative number for decay, or 0 if
no bulk reaction occurs.
Wall Reaction SectionWall reactions are reactions that occur with material on
or near the pipe wall. The rate of this reaction can be considered to be dependent
on the concentration in the bulk flow. The following components comprise this
section:
OrderThis value is used to set the order of reactions occurring at the pipe
wall. The value can be 0 or 1.
Roughness CorrelatedThis check box will make all pipe wall reaction
coefficients dependent on pipe roughness.
Wall Reaction RateThis input field is active when the Roughness Corre-
lated check box is clear. This value indicates the wall reaction rate coefficient
assigned to all pipes. Use a positive number for growth, a negative number for
decay, or 0 if no wall reaction occurs. The units used by this field will change
depending on the Order that is specified.
Correlation FactorThis input field is active when the Roughness Corre-
lated Box is checked. The Correlation Factor is a unitless value that represents
the factor correlating wall reaction coefficient to pipe roughness.
WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules
14-632 WaterCAD Users Manual
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-633
15
Chapter
Shapefile and
Database Connections
Bentley Systems GIS/Database Connection feature provides the modeler with the
ability to dynamically exchange data with a variety of applications. You can establish
a connection between your hydraulic model and relational and non-relational database
management systems (RDBMS and DBMS), spreadsheets, and ESRI shapefiles. The
term external file is used to generically refer to any one of these types of files. Where
information pertains to a specific type of external file, that type will be used.
The GIS/Database Connection system is extremely powerful. It can be used to update
hundreds or thousands of database records with a few clicks of the mouse. This
section provides detailed information on the structure and behavior of the system so
that it can be used more effectively.
The purpose of the GIS/Database Connection system is to provide you with a safe and
convenient means of exchanging data with external files. This system has several
advantages over providing an open file format for direct manipulation by the end user.
GeneralityOpen file formats have a specific form that must be adhered to. This
restrictiveness is problematic for both the developer and the end user. Developers are
now under additional constraints when modifying the software. They must be cogni-
zant of the fact that users may depend on this format, and are therefore less free to
modify it. The end user, on the other hand, has no control over this format, and is at
the mercy of the developer. A new version may change the format completely, and all
of your existing data must be converted. In addition, the file format is rarely conve-
nient for an end user since it is typically chosen for efficient processing by the
program. The GIS/Database Connection system allows you to exchange data between
the model and any arbitrarily defined external files. This flexibility allows you to set
up a database or spreadsheet, and it frees the developer to use a file format that is most
efficient for the program.
Data ProtectionOpen file formats can typically be modified by anyone, often
without the knowledge of the modeler. By providing an interface to exchange data, the
model is protected from inadvertent changes. The modeler is in complete control of
when and how the model or external files are updated.
15-634 WaterCAD Users Manual
Type CoercionQuite often the external files do not store the data using the format
expected by the hydraulic model. For example, a database may store the length of a
pipe using single precision floating point numbers, whereas the model works with
double precision floating point numbers. When exchanging data between the model
and the external file using the GIS/Database Connection system, the data is coerced
from one type to the other automatically.
Unit ConversionThe quantities used in hydraulic models almost always have some
unit associated with them. For example, pipe lengths are typically expressed in meters
or feet. General purpose database and spreadsheet applications do not support the
concept of unitized numbers. A pipe length, for example, is represented as 100.0. Is
that 100.0 meters or 100.0 feet? The GIS/Database Connection interface allows you to
specify the database unit so the numbers can be converted from the model unit to the
database unit and vice versa.
Virtually all model inputs and calculated results can be exchanged through the GIS/
Database Connection system. The system not only supports the update of existing
model elements and external file records, but also the creation and deletion of these
elements and records. For example, by performing a Sync In operation (explained in
detail below), an entire hydraulic model can be built from data stored in a spreadsheet.
Likewise, an empty spreadsheet can be completely populated with data from an
existing hydraulic model by performing a Sync Out operation. The spreadsheet can be
kept synchronized with the hydraulic model over the course of a project as new
elements are added or deleted, and the input and output data is modified.
The GIS/Database Connection system has a three-tiered architecture:
Connections
Table or Shapefile Links
Field Links
The first tier is the Connection. Connections are organized and managed by Connec-
tion Managers. There are two types of Connection Managers: a Database Connection
Manager (see Database Connection Manager on page 15-636) and a Shapefile
Connection Manager (see Shapefile Connection Manager on page 15-648). As the
names imply, the first manages connections to databases and spreadsheets, and the
second manages connections to ESRI shapefiles. The Connection Managers are
similar, and provide an interface for adding, editing, deleting, duplicating, and
synchronizing Connections.
To exchange data between the model and external files, a Connection must be created
and then synchronized. The two synchronization operations that can be performed on
a Connection are Sync In and Sync Out. Sync In synchronizes the model to the data
contained in external files. In this case, the model acts as a consumer of the data, and
external files act as the data provider. Sync Out synchronizes external files to the data
contained in the model. Thus, for Sync Out, the model is the data provider and
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-635
external files are the consumers. Exactly what data is exchanged during synchroniza-
tion depends on how the Connection is defined. Intuitively, a Connection must specify
which files are to be connected to the model, and what data in each file is to be
exchanged.
The second tier is the Table or Shapefile Link. A Database Connection uses these links
to gather and store information. Each Connection can contain one or more Table or
Shapefile Links. Each of these links specifies the type of external file with which to
exchange data (implied with shapefile links), the name of the file, and, if the file
contains multiple tables, which table within the file is of interest.
The third tier of the system is the Field Link. Each Table or Shapefile Link uses one or
more Field Links to specify exactly what data in the external file is going to be
exchanged. A Field Link defines the fundamental mapping between a field in an
external file and a field in the model. For example, a field link may be used to map the
GRND_FT field of an external database file to the Ground Elevation attribute of the
model.
In summary, a Connection defines a link between the model and external files. Table
or Shapefile Links and Field Links are used to specify files, tables, and fields to be
linked. Once a Connection is created, it can be synchronized in or out. The synchroni-
zation action will update models (in direction) or the external files (out direction).
The rest of this section provides details on the dialog boxes and windows used to
interact with the GIS/Database Connection system. Although Database Connections
and Shapefile Connections are similar in concept, there are differences in the inter-
faces and options. Therefore, they will be discussed in separate sections.
15.1 Database Connections
Database connections includes:
Database Connection Manager on page 15-636
Standard Database Import/Export on page 15-637
Database Connection Editor on page 15-639
ODBC on page 15-643
Sharing Database Connections between Projects on page 15-646
Database Connection Example on page 15-647
Database Connections
15-636 WaterCAD Users Manual
15.1.1 Database Connection Manager
This manager, accessed by selecting File > Synchronize > Database Connections,
helps you track and work with database connections. On the left side of this dialog box
is a list of the current Database Connections.
There are several options available in the Database Connection Manager, including:
AddCreates a new database connection using the Database Connection Editor.
For more information, see Shapefile Connection Editor on page 15-649.
EditChanges the configuration of the currently selected connection. This will
open the Database Connection Editor, where you can rename the connection,
change the associated database files, and perform other changes to the connection
configuration.
DuplicateCreates a connection identical to the selected one. This feature is
very helpful when defining two or more connections with many similar attributes.
DeleteRemoves the selected connection from the list.
Synchronize InUpdates the network attributes from the databases defined in
the selected connection.
Synchronize OutUpdates all databases in the connection from the current
status of the model.
ResetReturns the highlighted standard database import or export connection to
default settings. For more information, see Standard Database Import/Export on
page 15-637.
Tip: If you do not want your input values overwritten upon
synchronizing out, duplicate the connection. Then, edit one
connection such that it includes only the values you want to
synchronize in, and one that includes only the values you want
to synchronize out.
When synchronizing out, be sure that the model element labels
are of the same data type as the database column to which you
are mapping. Otherwise, synchronizing out to the database will
yield erroneous results. For example, if you were to synchronize
in from a database where your pipe identifier was numeric, then
any changes or additions to the pipes in the model should also
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-637
use a numeric-labeling scheme. To assure the consistency in
type in this case, select Element Labeling from the Tools menu
and remove the appropriate element prefixes before any
changes are made to the model.
When synchronizing in, output fields such as hydraulic grade line or computed pipe
flow will not be updated. If an attempt is made to update an output field during a
Synchronize In operation, a Read Only Warning will be issued in the status log, indi-
cating which attribute could not be updated.
When synchronizing out, all mapped information will be overwritten in the database
files, including input and output conditions.
15.1.2 Standard Database Import/Export
The Database Connection Manager (see Database Connection Manager on page 15-
636) is initialized with four standard database connections for importing and
exporting model data using simple File menu commands. These standard connections
are as follows:
[Project Export - SI]Used for the File > Export > Database command when the
global unit system is set to System International.
[Project Export - US]Used for the File > Export > Database command when the
global unit system is set to US Customary.
[Project Import - SI]Used for the File > Import > Database command when the
global unit system is set to System International.
[Project Import - US]Used for the File > Import > Database command when the
global unit system is set to US Customary.
The purpose of the standard database connections is to provide a powerful yet easy-to-
use method of exposing the model data to external applications using a standard data-
base format, Microsoft Access database (.MDB). This method is powerful because it
provides you with all the flexibility and functionality of a user-defined database
connection, such as unit conversion and type coercion. It is easy to use because it is
predefined with all of the standard model data, and requires nothing more than a file
name to execute.
The standard database connections are almost identical to user-defined database
connections with the following exceptions:
Standard connections cannot be deleted.
The label of a standard database connection cannot be changed.
Database Connections
15-638 WaterCAD Users Manual
The target database for a standard database connection is determined at the time it
is synchronized. During a Synchronize In operation, you will be prompted to
choose an existing Microsoft Access Database (.MDB). During a Synchronize
Out, you will be prompted for the name of a new Access database. If an existing
filename is chosen, a warning will indicate that the existing file will be over-
written.
The field names of the external database tables are editable from within the Table
Link Editor (for more information, see Database Table Link Editor on page 15-
641).
The Database Type on the Table Link Editor cannot be changed.
Standard connections can be reset to their factory default values. To do this, select
a standard connection from the list in the Database Connection Manager, and click
the Reset button.
By default, the standard database connections include a table link for each element
type, and field links for all the attributes related to that element type, with some minor
exceptions. The default units for the specified unit system (SI or US) are used for unit-
ized attributes. The Key Label field is designated as the key field for each of the table
links, and it is created as an index for the table during database creation. No duplicates
are allowed.
As noted above, the field links external field names can be edited directly within the
Table Link Editor. It is valid to have more than one internal attribute mapped to a
single external field name. Although this is not the case for the standard connections
in their factory default state, you can create this condition. Under this condition, the
following behaviors will be observed:
Import (Synchronize In)All of the attributes will be populated with the value
of the database field if it is a valid value for the specified attributes.
Export (Synchronize Out)The database field will be populated with the last
non-blank attribute value.
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-639
Note: If an existing filename is chosen during export, the existing
database file will be overwritten. Therefore, any custom tables,
queries, or forms present in that database will be lost.
Model data that are typically a collection of data (e.g., SewerCAD
unit sanitary loads, StormCAD watershed areas and rational C
coefficients, and WaterCAD junction demands) cannot be written
to a single record, and are therefore not exported to the
database. However, if these collections only contain a single
item, that single item will be transferred to and from the
database during export and import.
By default, the Standard Database Export creates Microsoft Office 2000 Access files.
These files cannot be read with Office 97. If you want to use Office 97, you need to
use a text editor to edit the HAESTAD.INI file located in your HAESTAD directory,
and replace the line:
ConnectionDatabaseFormat=0
with:
ConnectionDatabaseFormat=3
Basically, a value of 3 results in the program creating an Office 97 Access file,
whereas a value of 0 will have the program generate an Office 2000 Access file.
15.1.3 Database Connection Editor
The Database Connection Editor is used for defining the group of table links to be
included in the connection. The Database Connection Editor has tabs for Database
Connection (see Database Connection Tab on page 15-640) and Synchronization
Options (see Synchronization Options Tab on page 15-641).
There are three standard operation buttons at the bottom of the dialog box:
OKAccepts the current condition of the connection, including any changes that
have been made.
CancelCloses the Database Connection Editor without saving any changes.
HelpOpens the context-sensitive help system.
Database Connections
15-640 WaterCAD Users Manual
Database Connection Tab
The Database Connection tab of the Database Connection Editor (see Database
Connection Editor on page 15-639) provides an interface for the standard attributes
of a connection. It contains the following:
Connection LabelA required unique alphanumeric identification for the
connection. This is the label that appears in the list on the Database Connection
Manager dialog box (for more information, see Database Connection Manager
on page 15-636).
Table LinksProvide basic information about each table link, such as the refer-
enced database file, the specific table within the database, and the type of table
that is referenced. A table link can be highlighted from the list, at which point the
following commands can be performed using the buttons on the right side of the
dialog box (for more information, see Database Table Link Editor on page 15-
641):
AddAdds a new table link. If there are no table links currently defined for
this connection, this will be the only button available.
EditChanges the characteristics of the selected table link, such as the refer-
enced file or table, or the mapping of the tables field links.
DuplicateDuplicates the selected table. This command is very helpful
when defining two or more table links with similar attributes.
DeleteDeletes the selected table link from the connection.
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-641
Synchronization Options Tab
The Synchronization Options tab of the Database Connection Editor (see Database
Connection Editor on page 15-639) provides an interface for some of the behaviors
of the connection. These options cannot be accessed until the Table Links are defined,
and are as follows:
Note: In order to be successfully created from the database, pipe
elements must have a Start and Stop node associated with them.
This association can be established by mapping the + Start
Node and + Stop Node attributes in the pipe table link, or by
the + In Link or + Out Link of a node table link. Mapping both
the pipe table and node table attributes may result in the reading
of redundant data causing the connection to fail.
By default, elements created from a database are located at
coordinate (0,0). This behavior can be overridden by mapping
the X and Y or Northing and Easting attributes of the node
elements.
Add objects to destination if present in sourceIf this option is selected, when
performing a Synchronize Out for example, elements that are present in the model
but are not found in the database file will be created in the database. If this is not
checked, only the elements that are present in both the model and the database
will be updated.
Prompt before adding objectIf this is checked, you will get a dialog box noti-
fying you of each unmapped element in the source, and asking if you would like
to create a new element in the destination. If this is not checked, the additional
elements will be automatically created in the database.
Remove objects from destination if missing from sourceIf this is checked
when synchronizing out, elements that are present in the database but not in the
model will be deleted from the database. If this is not checked, the unmapped
elements will be ignored.
Prompt before removeWhen this box is checked a dialog box will appear noti-
fying you of each unmapped element in the destination and asking if you would
like to remove that element. If the box is not checked, the additional elements will
be automatically removed from the database.
Database Table Link Editor
The Table Link Editor is a tool for defining or modifying a table link. This dialog box
is separated into two groups, one dealing with the file and table information, and the
other dealing with the field links (attribute mapping).
The general table link information includes:
Database Connections
15-642 WaterCAD Users Manual
Database TypeType of database to which the link will be made. There are
many types of external files that can be linked into the model. Among these are
Btrieve, Dbase, Excel, FoxPro, Jet (.MDB files, such as Access), Lotus, and
Paradox, as well as Oracle, Sybase, SQL Server, or any other Open Database
Connectivity (ODBC) compliant database.
Database FileFile referenced by the table link. To browse directories and
specify a file path, click the Ellipsis (...) button.
Database TableOnce the external file has been selected, it will be scanned for
tables (or worksheets), which will then be available for selection from this field.
Only one table can be linked for each table link, but table links can be easily
duplicated and edited from the Database Connection Editor (for more informa-
tion, see Database Connection Editor on page 15-639).
Table TypeDefines the type of data that can be mapped for this particular table
link. For example, a Pipe type of table link means that the available model
attributes to be mapped are items such as material, roughness coefficient, flow
rate, and velocity.
Key\Label FieldKey by which the entire database-model mapping is defined.
The model references each element by a unique alphanumeric label, and the data-
base must contain the same labels in one of the columns. If the key field for you
data type is numeric, you will want to be sure that your model labels include
numbers only. Make sure that there are no duplicate element labels/keys within
the data source.
The Field Links group is a manager for the attribute mapping. The tabular list in this
group has three field columns:
ModelEach item in this column is an attribute in the model that is being
mapped to the database. The list of available attributes depends on the type of the
table.
Note: Clicking the button in the Field Links cell will open the
Quick Attribute Selector (for more information, see Quick
Attribute Selector on page 2-40). This will allow you select
attributes from organized categories to more easily find needed
attributes.
DatabaseEach item in this column is a heading from the database table, which
correlates to the item in the model being mapped.
UnitThis column defines the units of the values in the database. During a
synchronization operation, the values will automatically be converted to the
appropriate units to maintain the desired unit systems in both the model and the
database. No conversion on your part is required.
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-643
In addition to the standard table operations of Insert, Duplicate, and Delete, the Field
Links Manager offers the following additional operation:
SelectOpens the Select Field Links dialog box (see Select Field Links on
page 15-643) for an efficient method of selecting the fields of interest from the
available model fields.
Select Field Links
The Select Field Links dialog box provides an easy-to-use interface for populating the
Field Links group of the Table Link Editor (see Database Table Link Editor on
page 15-641) or Shapefile Link Editor (see Import Shapefile Link Editor on
page 15-654).
The dialog box contains two lists:
Available ItemsModel attributes that are available for mapping in the current
Table or Shapefile Link.
Selected ItemsModel attributes that have been selected for mapping.
The following buttons are provided to move items from one list to the other:
Note: The Select Field Links dialog box provides functions similar to
the Table Setup dialog box. For more information on topics such
as selecting multiple attributes, see Selected Table Columns on
page 7-327).
[>]Moves the selected item or items from the Available Items list to the
Selected Items list.
[>>]Moves all items from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list.
[<]Moves the selected item or items from the Selected Items list to the Avail-
able Items list.
[<<]Moves all items from the Items Selected list to the Available Items list.
15.1.4 ODBC
ODBC, which stands for Open Database Connectivity, is a standard programming
interface developed by Microsoft for accessing data in relational and non-relational
database management systems (DBMS). Using ODBC, applications such as Bentley
Systems engineering software can access data stored in many different PC, minicom-
puter, and mainframe DBMS, even though each uses a different storage format and
programming interface.
The ODBC architecture conceptually consists of three parts:
Database Connections
15-644 WaterCAD Users Manual
The application programThe Bentley Systems product.
The Data Source Administrator ProgramEmbedded in Microsoft Windows.
The low-level drivers for accessing specific databasesSupplied by your data-
base vendor.
Although most computers with Windows will have ODBC present, the exact data-
bases you can interface via ODBC will depend on the databases and drivers installed
on your computer.
ODBC is powerful because it is generic and can access many database systems,
including mainframe, GIS, and legacy systems. However, because ODBC must be
general, it is slower, more complex, and more difficult to use than working directly
with a database. When you have the option to work directly with a database, you will
usually find it faster and easier than going through ODBC.
For specific information about ODBC in your environment, see your database
vendors documentation. For general information on ODBC, see the online help for
the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program. To find the Administrator Program,
go to the Control Panel of your computer and double-click the ODBC icon. Choose
the Help button on the dialog box that appears, and go to the Contents tab.
ODBC Database Type
The first field of the database connection Table Link Editor (see Database Table Link
Editor on page 15-641) is the Database Type. The list box displays the external data-
bases and versions supported by the Database Connection feature. One of the Data-
base Types you can select is ODBC. This does not refer to a specific database or
version. It is actually a link to the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program running
on your computer. This link will provide an interface between the Bentley Systems
Database Connection and a specific DBMS and source database file.
ODBC Database File
If you have selected ODBC as the Database Type, when you click the Ellipsis (...)
button next to the Database File field the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program
will take over and offer a list of the ODBC data sources installed on your computer.
Depending on how your computer is configured, you may see database systems or
actual database files from which to choose.
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-645
Note: You will also see database systems such as Microsoft Jet or
Excel that are supported directly via choices in the Database
Type list. In general, the Database Connection feature will work
faster by choosing these database systems directly rather than
going through ODBC.
If you are unable to successfully synchronize to the data source
using the default form of the ODBC string, it is possible that you
may need to add some parameters to the string that are specific
to your environment. See your database vendors ODBC
documentation for details.
If you choose a data source from the Administrator Program, upon returning to the
Table Link Editor (see Database Table Link Editor on page 15-641) you will see an
ODBC connect string in the Database File field, rather than a file path. This connect
string is a series of key = value pairs, separated by semicolons. It specifies the data-
base location, security parameters, and access options needed by the particular ODBC
driver you are using. In general, you should not edit this string in any way as you
could introduce an error that would prevent the ODBC driver from accessing the data
source you have selected.
Synchronizing Via ODBC
Once you have successfully created and entered the data for a database connection
that uses ODBC, the Synchronize In and Synchronize Out operations perform as they
do for any other database format. However, ODBC databases are accessed with
slightly different internal mechanisms, and thus may generate different error condi-
tions. If synchronization fails to complete, see the status log for error messages. Note
the project or database object the program was processing when the error occurred.
See to your database vendors documentation for detailed information on any errors
reported.
Using ODBC to access SQL Server databases will result in an error #3197 if the
synchronization attempts to delete a database record. To avoid this error, clear
Remove Objects on the Synchronization Options tab of the Database Connection
Editor (for more information, see Database Connection Editor on page 15-639).
ODBC Database Tables and Fields
There are many complexities in successfully accessing ODBC databases. You will
know if there are problems on your machine because the Database Table or other data-
base-related fields will not have any entries in the associated drop-down lists.
If this happens, confirm that ODBC is installed and operating correctly on your
computer. Double-check that the ODBC data source you are trying to reference actu-
ally exists and is accessible by other programs in your environment. Check the
HAESTAD.LOG file for error messages pertaining to ODBC. If none of these steps
helps you correct the problem, please call Bentley Systems Technical Support.
Database Connections
15-646 WaterCAD Users Manual
Given the diversity of ODBC database drivers and the difficulty of reproducing your
networked computing environment, we cannot guarantee that the Database Connec-
tion feature will function with all ODBC databases. However, we will try to determine
the source of your problem and offer a fix or workaround if possible.
If you edit the connect string manually, you will need to re-enter the dependent fields
such as Database Table and Field Links.
15.1.5 Sharing Database Connections between Projects
When WaterCAD works with database connections, it is using a file with an .HDC
extension, which stores the information regarding database files, table links, and field
mapping.
When you open a WaterCAD project file (.WCD), WaterCAD first looks for a file in
the same directory and with the same filename but with the .HDC extension. If it finds
this file, it uses the database connectivity information contained therein. If it does not
find this file, then it defaults to a file in the installed WaterCAD directory called
Wtrc.HDC.
Sharing Database Connections between Projects
If you are working on a local drive and you have several project files, all of which
reference common Connection information, let your project files automatically default
to the Wtrc.HDC file. Any connectivity changes that you work on in one project will
be automatically reflected when you open any other project.
If there are several people working on different projects on different computers, but
they still wish to have common connectivity information, the appropriate .HDC file
can be copied (and renamed if necessary) to the individual local drives.
Preventing Database Connectivity Sharing between Projects
There are times when shared connectivity can be more cumbersome than helpful, such
as when there are many projects, each with different database connectivity. At these
times, it is more useful to have the connectivity associated with one specific project
rather than with all projects. To do this, copy the Wtrc.HDC file from the installed
WaterCAD directory to the same location as your project file, and rename it to the
same name as your .WCD file.
For example, if your WaterCAD project file is PROJECT1.WCD, rename Wtrc.HDC
to PROJECT1.HDC. The connections in PROJECT1.WCD can then be modified
without the effects being reflected in any other projects.
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-647
15.1.6 Database Connection Example
To connect your model to an external file, take the following steps:
From the File menu, select Synchronize > Database Connections to open the Data-
base Connection Manager. Click Add.
In the Database Connection Editor (see Database Connection Editor on
page 15-639), type a label for your Connection.
Click Add to create a new table link. This will take you to the Table Link Editor
(for more information, see Database Table Link Editor on page 15-641).
Select the type of file to which you would like to link, and then click the Ellipsis
(...) button to browse for and select your database file.
Choose the table to which you would like to link, and the type of table.
Choose the Key\Label field to define the column in the database that contains the
labels of the elements to be synchronized.
Define as many field links as you want by selecting the model attribute and the
associated database column and unit.
Click OK to exit the Table Link Editor.
Click OK again to exit the Database Connection Editor.
You should be back at the Database Connection Manager. You can leave this
dialog box and return to the model, or you can choose to Synchronize In to the
model from the database, or Synchronize Out to the database from the model.
Click OK to save changes and exit back to the model. Click Cancel exit back to
the model without saving changes.
15.2 Shapefile Connections
Shapefile connections includes:
Shapefile Connection Manager on page 15-648
Shapefile Connection Editor on page 15-649
Shapefile Link Wizard on page 15-651
Shapefile Connections
15-648 WaterCAD Users Manual
15.2.1 Shapefile Connection Manager
Note: For a general discussion of Shapefile Connections, see
Shapefile and Database Connections on page 15-633.
This manager is identical to the Database Connection Manager (see Database
Connection Manager on page 15-636), except that it helps you to track and work
with shapefile connections rather than database connections. Only a brief description
of each dialog box control is presented here. For more information, see Database
Connection Manager on page 15-636.
Note: You can export contour to a shapefile in the Contour Plot
window (see Contour Plot on page 13-601).
AddCreates a new shapefile connection. This will open the Shapefile Connec-
tion Wizard (for more information, see Shapefile Connection Wizard on
page 15-648).
EditChanges the configuration of the currently selected connection. This will
open the Shapefile Connection Editor (for more information, see Shapefile
Connection Editor on page 15-649).
DuplicateDuplicates the selected connection.
DeleteDeletes the selected connection from the list.
Synchronize InUpdates the network attributes from the shapefiles linked to the
selected connection.
Synchronize OutUpdates all shapefiles within the connection from the current
status of the model.
Shapefile Connection Wizard
The Shapefile Connection Wizard provides an easy-to-use interface for defining a new
Shapefile Connection. It is similar to the Shapefile Import Wizard (see Import Shape-
file Wizard on page 15-652), but has a few additional steps. The major steps in the
wizard are as follows:
LabelEnters an alphanumeric label to uniquely identify the Shapefile Connec-
tion. For more information, see Shapefile Connection Label on page 15-649.
Select Element TypesChooses the types of network elements you wish to
connect to shapefiles.
Shapefile Synchronization OptionsSpecifies the spatial data unit, and config-
ures other options.
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-649
Import Shapefile Link EditorChooses the shapefile to which you want to
connect and specifies the details of the link.
Synchronize NowChoose whether you want to synchronize the Shapefile
Connection when finished with the wizard. You can choose to synchronize in
either direction. For more information, see Synchronize Now? on page 15-649.
Shapefile Connection Label
The Shapefile Connection Label window allows you to enter a unique alphanumeric
label for your Shapefile Connection. This window is presented in the Import and
Export Shapefile Connection Wizards (see Import Shapefile Wizard on page 15-652
and Export Shapefile Wizard on page 15-655), as well as the Shapefile Connection
Wizard (see Shapefile Connection Wizard on page 15-648).
Synchronize Now?
The last step in the Shapefile Connection Wizard (see Shapefile Connection Wizard
on page 15-648), the Synchronize Now? Window, allows you to specify whether you
wish to synchronize the Shapefile Connection immediately after editing it in the
wizard. The following options are available:
Synchronize Shapefile ConnectionCheck this box if you wish to synchronize
the connection immediately upon clicking the Finished button. By default this
check box is selected; if you clear it, you will return to the Shapefile Connection
Manager (see Shapefile Connection Manager on page 15-648) after clicking the
Finished button.
InSelect this button if you wish to synchronize the connection in to the model.
This will update the model data from the shapefiles linked to the connection.
OutSelect this button if you wish to synchronize the connection out to the
shapefiles linked to the connection. This will update the shapefiles from the
model.
15.2.2 Shapefile Connection Editor
The Shapefile Connection Editor is similar to the Database Connection Editor (for
more information, see Database Connection Editor on page 15-639). It offers the
tabs for Shapefile Connection and Synchronization Options.
To use the Shapefile Connection Editor, do the following:
Select Synchronize > Shapefile Connections from the File menu.
Shapefile Connections
15-650 WaterCAD Users Manual
If you do not currently have any shapefile connections defined, you will be
prompted to indicate if you wish to create one now. If you answer Yes, you will be
automatically taken to the Shapefile Connection Wizard (for more information,
see Shapefile Connection Wizard on page 15-648).
If there are connections already defined, or if you answer No to the prompt to
create one now, you will be taken to the Shapefile Connection Manager (for more
information, see Shapefile Connection Manager on page 15-648). Select Edit to
open the Shapefile Connection Editor.
Shapefile Connection
The Shapefile Connection tab of the Shapefile Connection Editor is similar to the
Database Connection tab of the Database Connection Editor (for more information,
see Database Connection Editor on page 15-639). It contains the following:
Connection LabelA unique alphanumeric identification for the connection.
This is the label that appears in the list on the Shapefile Connection Manager
dialog box (for more information, see Shapefile Connection Manager on
page 15-648).
Table LinksList that provides basic information about each Shapefile link,
such as the referenced Shapefile, the feature type of the shapefile, and the type of
element that is referenced. As with the other managers, a shapefile link can be
highlighted from the list, at which point the following commands can be
performed using the buttons on the right side of the dialog box:
AddDefines a new shapefile link. If there are no table links currently
defined for this connection, this will be the only button available. Clicking
this button invokes the Shapefile Link Wizard (for more information, see
Shapefile Link Wizard on page 15-651).
EditChanges the characteristics of the selected shapefile link, such as the
referenced file or the mapping of the shapefiles field links. Clicking this
button also invokes the Shapefile Link Wizard.
DuplicateCreates an identical shapefile link to the selected one. This is
very helpful when defining two or more shapefile links with similar attributes.
DeleteRemoves the selected shapefile link from the connection.
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-651
15.2.3 Shapefile Link Wizard
The Shapefile Link Wizard is used when adding new Shapefile Links to a Shapefile
Connection, or when editing the existing links of a Shapefile Connection. The first
step of the wizard is bypassed when editing an existing link. The basic steps of the
wizard are as follows:
Select Element TypeSimilar to the Select Element Types window for
importing shapefiles, except that buttons are used rather than check boxes. This is
because a Shapefile Connection represents a single element type. For more infor-
mation, see Select Element Types on page 15-652.
Import ShapefileChoose the shapefile to which you would like to connect, and
the Key/Label field to specify the column in the shapefile that contains the
matching element labels in the network. Define as many field links as necessary.
For each link, specify the model attribute, the associated shapefile column, and
the Unit in which the shapefile attribute is stored. For more information, see
Import Shapefile Link Editor on page 15-654.
Shapefile Link SummaryQuick review of the details specified in the wizard.
For more information, see Shapefile Link Summary on page 15-651.
As with all wizards, you can move forward or backward through the process to make
changes. Click the Finished button when you are done making changes to the Shape-
file Link.
Shapefile Link Summary
The Shapefile Link Summary window provides an opportunity to review the details of
the Shapefile Link before completing the editing process. The following information
is provided in the summary window:
TypeType of element represented by this Shapefile Link.
ShapefileFull path and file name of the shapefile referenced by this Shapefile
Link.
Key/Label FieldShapefile field used to map shapefile records to their corre-
sponding network elements in the model.
Attributes MappedNumber of Field Links mapped in this Shapefile Link.
Shapefile Connections
15-652 WaterCAD Users Manual
15.2.4 Import Shapefile Wizard
The Import Shapefile Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of
importing ESRI shapefiles (for more information, see Shapefile Format on page 15-
658). These are the basic steps for importing shapefiles:
Select Element TypesSelect the type of network elements you wish to import.
For more information, see Select Element Types on page 15-652.
Shapefile Synchronization OptionsSpecify the spatial data unit and configure
other options. For more information, see Shapefile Synchronization Options on
page 15-652.
Import ShapefileBrowse to and select the shapefiles you would like to import,
and select the Key/Label field to specify the column in the shapefile that contains
the matching element labels in the network. Define as many field links as neces-
sary. For each link, specify the network attribute, the associated shapefile column,
and the Unit in which the shapefile attribute is stored. For more information, see
Import Shapefile Link Editor on page 15-654.
Create Shapefile ConnectionSelect whether you want to establish a Shapefile
Connection. The Shapefile Connection allows you to update the shapefile with
values from your model, or to update your model from the shapefile. For more
information, see Create Shapefile Connection on page 15-654.
While using the wizard, you can move forward or backward through the process to
make changes by clicking the Next and Back buttons. Click the Finished button when
you are done making changes to import shapefiles.
Select Element Types
The Select Element Types window is used for selecting the types of network elements
that are of interest when importing and exporting shapefiles, or when creating a
Shapefile Connection. The window contains a list of network element types with a
check box preceding each type.
To select an element type for Shapefile Import, Export, or Connection, put a check
mark in the corresponding box.
Shapefile Synchronization Options
Several options are available to customize the shapefile synchronization process. The
Shapefile Synchronization Options are available for editing in the Import Shapefile
Wizard or through the Shapefile Connection Editor.
The first group of options is only available when editing a Shapefile Connection.
These options are exactly the same as their counterparts in Database Synchronization
Options (see Synchronization Options Tab on page 15-641), and are as follows:
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-653
Prompt before adding object
Prompt before removing object
Unlike the Database Synchronization Options, the Shapefile Synchronization Options
do not allow for optionally adding or removing elements. When synchronized, shape-
files and the model will contain exactly the same number of records for the specified
element type. For example, suppose a shapefile contains a record for the junction
labeled J-1. When this shapefile is synchronized into the model, the model will auto-
matically add a junction labeled J-1 if none currently exists. Likewise, if J-1 is
removed from the model and then synchronized out to the shapefile, the record for J-1
will automatically be removed from the shapefile. You have no control over this.
The rest of the options are available during the Shapefile Import Wizard or through the
Shapefile Connection Editor.
Shapefile UnitChoose a unit from the available list. This is the unit of the spatial
data in the shapefile. For example, if the X and Y coordinates of the shapefile repre-
sent feet, choose feet from the list. If they represent meters, select meters. This unit
must be the same for every shapefile in the Shapefile Connection. If you wish to
import shapefiles that have different spatial data units, create a separate connection for
each unit.
When Missing Connectivity Data
As noted in the Table Link Editor (see Database Table Link Editor on page 15-641),
to create a pipe from an external file it is necessary for a pipe to have a start node and
stop node associated with it. Typically, these connectivity associations are created by
synchronizing the + Start Node and + Stop Node attributes of the pipe. Since a shape-
file contains spatial data, it is also possible to establish these associations based on the
location of nodes relative to the end points of the pipe. The following options allow
you to customize this behavior:
Establish By Spatial DataCheck this box to configure the synchronization so
that any missing connectivity data (start node, stop node, or both) for a pipe will
be established from the spatial data if possible.
ToleranceThis value represents the distance to be searched when trying to
locate nodes for establishing connectivity for a pipe. All nodes within the toler-
ance of a pipes end point will be collected, and the closest node will be selected
for connection.
Create Nodes if None FoundCheck this box if you would like nodes to be
created during the synchronization when no nodes are found within the specified
tolerance of a pipes end point. If this box is not checked, and no nodes are found
within the tolerance, the pipe will not be created because it has insufficient
connectivity data.
Shapefile Connections
15-654 WaterCAD Users Manual
Import Shapefile Link Editor
The Import Shapefile Link Editor is similar to the Database Table Link Editor. For
more information on the following Shapefile Link parameters, see Database Table
Link Editor on page 15-641):
ShapefileLocation of the file that is being referenced by the shapefile link. This
is identical to the Database File parameter of the Table Link Editor.
Key/Label FieldKey by which the entire shapefile/model mapping is defined.
Field LinksIdentical to the Field Links group of the Database Table Link
Editor.
Create Shapefile Connection
The Create Shapefile Connection window provides an opportunity during a shapefile
import or export to specify that a persistent connection containing the Shapefile Links
and Synchronization Options be created. This connection can be used at a later time to
synchronize the model and the shapefiles. The Create Shapefile Connection window
has the following parameters:
Add Shapefile ConnectionCheck this box if you wish to add a persistent
Shapefile Connection to the Shapefile Connection Manager. By default, this box
is checked.
LabelSpecify an alphanumeric label for the connection. This field is only edit-
able when the Add Shapefile Connection box is checked.
Shapefile Import Example
Follow these steps to import one or more shapefiles into a new or existing model:
From the File menu, select Import > Shapefile to access the Import Shapefile Wizard
(for more information, see Import Shapefile Wizard on page 15-652).
Choose the element types that you wish to import by selecting one or more of the
check boxes in the list, and then click the Next button.
Configure the options for this import. First, select the unit for the spatial data of
the shapefile. Then, if appropriate for your situation, click the Establish by
Spatial Data check box in the When Missing Connectivity Data group, and
enter a value in the Tolerance field. For more information, see Shapefile
Synchronization Options on page 15-652. Click the Next button to proceed to the
Shapefile Link Editors.
You will be presented with an Import Shapefile Link Editor (see Import Shape-
file Link Editor on page 15-654) for each element type you choose to import.
Perform the following steps for each Import Shapefile Link Editor:
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-655
Enter the name of the shapefile you wish to import for the specified element
type. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to interactively browse for and select your
shapefile.
Choose the Key/Label field to define the column in the shapefile that maps to
the element labels in the model.
Define as many field links as necessary by selecting the model attribute and
the associated shapefile column and unit. Use the Select button for making the
selection process more efficient. Click the Next button.
Click the Add Shapefile Connection check box if you wish to create a persistent
link between the shapefiles you are importing and the model. If you choose to
create a Shapefile Connection, enter an alphanumeric label to identify the connec-
tion. Click the Finished button to import the shapefiles.
15.2.5 Export Shapefile Wizard
This program has the capability of exporting network elements in the ESRI shapefile
format (for more information, see Shapefile Format on page 15-658). The ESRI
shapefile is actually three files that together define the spatial and non-spatial
attributes of a map feature. In the case of Bentley Systems hydraulic models, map
features are network elements (e.g., pipes, junctions). Exporting shapefiles creates
brand new files. If you are exporting a shapefile to a directory that already contains a
shapefile of the same name, the existing shapefile will be completely overwritten. If
you wish to update the shapefile rather than overwriting it, use the Shapefile Connec-
tion feature.
The major components of the Wizard are as follows:
Select Element TypesChoose the type of network elements you wish to export.
Each type of network element will have its own shapefile associated with it. This
component is identical to the Import Wizards Select Element Types component.
For more information, see Select Element Types on page 15-652.
Export Shapefile Link EditorEnter a name for each shapefile you wish to
create. Each shapefile name must be no more than eight characters in length, and
should not be duplicated. Define as many field links as necessary. For each link,
specify the network attribute. The shapefile variable will default to a preset value,
which can be edited. For more information, see Export Shapefile Link Editor on
page 15-656.
Shapefile Connections
15-656 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: The Label attribute is automatically exported to the shapefile
and should not be specified explicitly as one of the defined field
links.
Create Shapefile ConnectionChoose whether you want to establish a Shape-
file Connection for this shapefile. The Shapefile Connection allows you to update
the shapefile with values from your model, or to update your model from the
shapefile. This component is identical to the Import Wizards Create Shapefile
Connection component. For more information, see Create Shapefile Connection
on page 15-654.
While using the Wizard, you can move forward or backward through the process by
clicking the Next and Back buttons. When you are finished defining it, click the
Finished button to create the shapefile.
Export Shapefile Link Editor
The Export Shapefile Link Editor is similar to the Database Table Link Editor (see
Database Table Link Editor on page 15-641), with the following differences:
ShapefileThe name and location for the file that is being exported. The shape-
file name is limited to eight characters.
The Field Links group is used to specify the attributes and shapefile column headings
that you wish to export, as follows:
Note: The spatial data in the shapefiles being created will be in the
current display unit for map coordinates. For example, if the X
and Y or Northing and Easting values in the model are displayed
in meters at the time of the export, then the spatial data in the
shapefiles created will also be in meters.
The values for the exported attributes will be in the current
display units for that attribute. For example, if a junction
elevation attribute is displayed in feet at the time of the export,
the shapefile will contain that value in feet.
ModelEach item in this column is an attribute in the model that is being
exported to the shapefile. The list of available attributes depends on the type of
table.
ShapefileEach item in this column is a column heading in the shapefile being
created, which correlates to the item in the model being mapped. By default, the
headings are set to an all-capitals abbreviation of the attribute name, with spaces
and periods replaced by the underscore character. The column heading can be
changed, but must be less than ten characters long and cannot contain periods.
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-657
Shapefile Export Example
Follow these steps to export one or more shapefiles from the model:
From the File menu, select Export > Shapefile to access the Export Shapefile Wizard
(for more information, see Export Shapefile Wizard on page 15-655).
Select the element types that you wish to export by selecting one or more of the
check boxes in the list, then click the Next button.
You will be presented with an Export Shapefile Link Editor (see Export Shape-
file Link Editor on page 15-656) for each element type you choose to export.
Perform the following steps for each Export Shapefile Link Editor:
Enter the name of the shapefile you wish to create for the specified element
type. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to interactively browse for a directory in
which to store the shapefile.
Define as many field links as necessary by selecting the model attribute and
providing a name for the associated shapefile column. Use the Select button
for making the selection process more efficient. Click the Next button to
continue.
Click the Add Shapefile Connection check box if you wish to create a persis-
tent link between the shapefiles you are exporting and the model. If you
choose to create a Shapefile Connection, enter an alphanumeric label to iden-
tify the connection. Click the Finished button to export shapefiles.
15.2.6 Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects
When WaterCAD works with shapefile connections, it is using a file with an .HSC
extension, which stores the information regarding the shapefiles and field mapping for
each element type.
When you open a WaterCAD project file (.WCD), WaterCAD first looks for a file in
the same directory and with the same filename but with the .HSC extension. If it finds
this file, it uses the shapefile connectivity information contained therein. If it does not
find this file, it defaults to a file in the installed WaterCAD directory called Wtrc.HSC.
Shapefile Connections
15-658 WaterCAD Users Manual
Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects
If you are working on a local drive, and you have several project files that all reference
common Connection information, let your project files automatically default to the
Wtrc.HSC file. Any connectivity changes that you work on in one project will be
automatically reflected when you open any other project.
If there are several people working on different projects on different computers, but
they still wish to have common connectivity information, the appropriate .HSC file
can be copied (and renamed if necessary) to the individual local drives.
Preventing Shapefile Connectivity Sharing between Projects
There are times when shared connectivity can be more cumbersome than helpful such
as when there are many projects, each with different database connectivity. At these
times, it is more useful to have the connectivity associated with one specific project,
rather than with all projects. To do this, copy the Wtrc.HSC file from the installed
WaterCAD directory to the same location as your project file, and rename it to the
same name as your .WCD file.
For example, if your WaterCAD project file is PROJECT1.WCD, rename Wtrc.HSC
to PROJECT1.HSC. The connections in PROJECT1.WCD can then be modified
without the effects being reflected in any other projects.
15.2.7 Shapefile Format
An ESRI shapefile actually consists of three separate files that combine to define the
spatial and non-spatial attributes of a map feature. The three required files are as
follows:
Main FileA binary file with an extension of .SHP. It contains the spatial
attributes associated with the map features. For example, a polyline record
contains a series of points, and a point record contains X and Y coordinates.
Index FileA binary file with an extension of .SHX. It contains the byte position
of each record in the main file.
Database FileA dBase III file with an extension of .DBF. It contains the non-
spatial data associated with the map features.
All three files must have the same file name with the exception of the extension, and
be located in the same directory.
15.2.8 Shapefile Connection Example
Follow these steps to connect one or more shapefiles to the model:
Shapefile and Database Connections
WaterCAD Users Manual 15-659
From the File menu, select Synchronize > Shapefile Connections.
If you do not have any connections currently defined, you will be asked if you
want to create a new one now. Select Yes. If you already have one or more
connections defined, you will go to the Shapefile Connection Manager (for more
information, see Shapefile Connection Manager on page 15-648). Click Add to
access the Shapefile Connection Wizard (for more information, see Shapefile
Connection Wizard on page 15-648).
Provide an alphanumeric label to uniquely identify this new connection. Click the
Next button.
Choose the element types that you wish to import by clicking one or more of the
check boxes in the list, and click the Next button.
Configure the options for this connection. First select the unit for the spatial data
of the shapefile. Then, if appropriate for your situation, click the Establish by
Spatial Data check box in the When Missing Connectivity Data group, and enter
a value in the Tolerance field. For more information, see Shapefile Synchroniza-
tion Options on page 15-652. Click the Next button to proceed to the Shapefile
Link Editors.
You will be presented with an Import Shapefile Link Editor (see Import Shape-
file Link Editor on page 15-654) for each element type you chose to import.
Perform the following steps for each Import Shapefile Link Editor:
Enter the name of the shapefile to which you wish to connect for the specified
element type. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to interactively browse for and
select your shapefile.
Choose the Key/Label field to define the column in the shapefile that maps to
the element labels in the model.
Define as many field links as you want by selecting the model attribute and
the associated shapefile column and unit if appropriate. Use the Select button
for making the selection process more efficient. Click the Next button.
Check the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box if you wish to synchronize the
connection immediately upon clicking the Finished button.
If the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box is checked, choose whether you
want to Synchronize In to the model from a shapefile, or Synchronize Out to the
shapefile from the model.
Click the Finished button to synchronize the connection if the Synchronize
Shapefile Connection box is checked, or to return to the Shapefile Connection
Manager.
Shapefile Connections
15-660 WaterCAD Users Manual
WaterCAD Users Manual 16-661
16
Chapter
Exchanging Data with
CAD Software
Exchanging data with CAD software includes:
AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion on page 16-661
Importing and Exporting DXF Files on page 16-666
16.1 AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion
Tip: The Polyline to Pipe conversion cannot be undone. Be sure to
save your project before you begin.
You can import entities into an existing project. Polylines will
automatically be connected to nodes within the specified
Tolerance. You can add nodes to your project prior to
performing the import.
This feature allows you to quickly construct a network based on the entities contained
in an AutoCAD drawing. Although this feature is called Polyline to Pipe, Line and
Block entities can be converted as well. Polylines and Lines can be converted to pipes
and Blocks can be converted to any available node type.
Building a model based on graphical elements can be an error-prone process. This is
due to the fact that a drawing can appear to be correct visually, but may contain prob-
lems that are not readily apparent. For example, what appears to be a single line in a
drawing could in fact be made up of many line segments, or it could be made up of
two lines, one directly on top of another.
AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion
16-662 WaterCAD Users Manual
Tip: Stand-Alone modeYou should take some time to clean up your
AutoCAD drawing prior to performing the conversion. Look for
entities that should not be converted, such as leader lines, and
move them to their own layer. Turn off layers that you do not
wish to convert. Do a quick review of your drawing and correct
any potential conversion problems that you may find.
After performing the conversion, we recommend that you use
the converted file as a DXF Background (for more information,
see Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation on page 16-
667). This will greatly enhance your review process. If you
change the entities in your background drawing to a gray color
from within AutoCAD, it will make it easier to distinguish
between foreground elements and background entities.
AutoCAD modeYou can interactively convert individual
entities to pipes by using the Layout Tool.
To help alleviate some of the problems that you may encounter during the import
process, a comprehensive drawing review is also performed. During the conversion
process, the network is analyzed and potential problems are flagged for review. After
performing the conversion, the Drawing Review window (see Drawing Review
Window on page 5-262) will allow you to navigate to and fix any problems that are
encountered.
16.1.1 Converting Your Drawing in Multiple Passes
Depending on how your drawing layers are set up, you may be able to save yourself a
considerable amount of data entry time by converting your drawing in multiple passes.
For example, if your 12-inch pipes are located on a 12InchPipes layer, 18-inch pipes
are on a 18InchPipes layer, etc., you can import layers one at a time. Just set up your
prototypes prior to importing that layer.
To assist you in this process, your conversion settings will be retained between
imports. Therefore, on subsequent passes you will need to revise your prototypes and
specify the next layer to be imported.
This same technique can be used when importing blocks.
16.1.2 Polyline to Pipe Wizard
The Polyline to Pipe Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of
converting your entities to elements.
Exchanging Data with CAD Software
WaterCAD Users Manual 16-663
Step 1The import behavior depends on the mode in which you are working:
Stand-AloneSpecify the .DXF file that you would like to import. For more
information, see Polyline to Pipe WizardStep 1 (Stand-Alone Mode Only) on
page 16-663.
AutoCADThis step is skipped. You will be asked to select the entities to
convert before accessing the Wizard.
Step 2Specify the polyline to pipe conversion options. For more information,
see Polyline to Pipe WizardStep 2 on page 16-664.
Step 3Specify how T-intersections are to be handled. For more information, see
Polyline to Pipe WizardStep 3 on page 16-664.
Step 4Specify how blocks should be converted (for .DXF files that contain
blocks). For more information, see Polyline to Pipe WizardStep 4 (for .DXF
Files with Blocks) on page 16-665.
Step 5Configure prototypes. For more information, see Polyline to Pipe
WizardStep 5 on page 16-665.
Step 6Specify the layers to be imported. For more information, see Polyline to
Pipe WizardStep 6 on page 16-666.
Polyline to Pipe WizardStep 1 (Stand-Alone Mode Only)
This step allows you to specify the .DXF file to be imported.
Note: If you are running in AutoCAD mode, this step will be skipped.
AutoCAD-mode users will be asked to select the entities to be
converted before accessing the Polyline to Pipe wizard.
DXF FilenameSpecify the name of the .DXF file you would like to import. Use
the Browse button to select the file interactively.
DXF UnitSpecify the .DXF conversion unit (the unit that your .DXF file is in).
For example, if your drawing is in SI units, specify meters (m). If your drawing is
in architectural units, specify inches (in.).
AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion
16-664 WaterCAD Users Manual
Polyline to Pipe WizardStep 2
Note: If the conversion does not yield the desired results, you can
repeat the conversion process using different settings. Be sure
to save your project before performing the conversion.
This step allows you to specify the following Polyline to Pipe conversion options:
Connectivity tolerancePolylines whose endpoints fall within the specified
tolerance will be connected to the same node. A default tolerance is supplied
based on the current scale. This is generally a good starting point, but you may
wish to increase or decrease this default tolerance depending on your particular
drawing. If you complete the conversion process and find that the tolerance was
not correct (pipes that should be connected were not, or vise versa), you may wish
to repeat the conversion process using a new tolerance.
Specifying which entities to convertYou can optionally convert Polylines,
Lines, or both. You generally want to convert both Polylines and Lines. However,
if your drawing is set up so that Polylines are always used to represent pipes and
Lines are used for annotation purposes, you may wish to convert only Polylines.
Handling missing nodes at polyline endpointsA pipe can only be created if
there is a node at both endpoints. If a node cannot be found at a polyline endpoint,
a node must be added. Otherwise, the pipe cannot be converted. This option
allows you to specify whether a node is created, and, if so, the default type of
element to create.
In general, you will want to create a default node at polyline endpoints. However, if
your network already contains nodes at polyline endpoints, or if your drawing
contains blocks at polyline endpoints that are to be converted to nodes, you may wish
to specify that the polyline not be converted. Polylines that cannot be converted,
because one or both end nodes are missing, will be flagged for review at the end of the
conversion process.
Polyline to Pipe WizardStep 3
Note: The tolerance that you specify in Step 2 (see Polyline to Pipe
WizardStep 2 on page 16-664) will also be used for T-
intersection processing.
This step allows you to specify how T-intersections (pipe split candidates) should be
handled.
Nodes that fall within the specified tolerance of a pipe are referred to as pipe-split
candidates. There are two ways to handle these:
Exchanging Data with CAD Software
WaterCAD Users Manual 16-665
Join the pipes at the intersectionThe pipe-split candidate will be used to split
the intersecting pipe.
Do not join the intersecting pipesPipe-split candidates will be flagged for
later review using the Drawing Review window.
Polyline to Pipe WizardStep 4 (for .DXF Files with Blocks)
Note: When you select an AutoCAD block, the preview pane will
display the graphical representation of that block. This step will
be skipped if there are no AutoCAD Blocks in your drawing.
If your AutoCAD drawing contains blocks, this step will appear, allowing you to
convert AutoCAD blocks, if desired.
If you would like to convert blocks to nodes, activate the Yes toggle. A table with two
columns will appear, allowing you to map the AutoCAD blocks you would like to
convert to any of the available node element types. The AutoCAD block column
provides you with a list of available blocks to convert. The Element column provides
you with a list of available node element types.
For each AutoCAD block you would like to convert, specify the type of node element
you would like to create.
Polyline to Pipe WizardStep 5
Before performing the conversion, you may wish to configure your prototypes with
default data. During the conversion process, elements will be created using the speci-
fied defaults.
Click a button to configure the defaults for the associated element.
Importing and Exporting DXF Files
16-666 WaterCAD Users Manual
Polyline to Pipe WizardStep 6
Note: It is recommended that you process your drawing prior to
performing the import. If your drawing contains layers that you
do not wish to import, turn them off from within AutoCAD and
elements on those layers will be ignored during the import
process.
Specify the layers that contain the entities you would like to convert. Use the Preview
Drawing button to preview the elements on the selected layers. This step can be used
in conjunction with the Prototype step to allow you to convert your drawing in
multiple passes (for more information, see Converting Your Drawing in Multiple
Passes on page 16-662).
Polyline Conversion Problem Dialog Box
This feature is present in Stand-Alone mode only. This dialog box displays the reason
that a polyline was not converted after running the Polyline to Pipe Wizard.
Drawing Preview
Use the Preview Drawing button to view the elements in the .DFX file that will be
converted.
Next to the Preview Drawing button is a check box labeled Only include elements that
will be converted.
Turn the toggle on to preview the entities that will be converted. The entities to be
converted are based on the settings you specified in the Polyline to Pipe Wizard (see
Polyline to Pipe Wizard on page 16-662), such as type of line entities, blocks, and
layers to be converted.
Turn the toggle off to preview all entities.
16.2 Importing and Exporting DXF Files
Importing and exporting DXF files includes:
Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation on page 16-667
Exporting a DXF file on page 16-667
Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD on page 16-667
Advanced DXF Import Techniques on page 16-668
Exchanging Data with CAD Software
WaterCAD Users Manual 16-667
16.2.1 Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation
To import background graphics in Stand-Alone mode from another drafting program,
you must first export a .DXF file from your CAD program. This step is usually as
simple as selecting an item from a menu in that program, such as File > Export > as
DXF, or similar command. Once the .DXF file has been created, it can be imported
into this program as follows:
1. Select the File > Import > DXF Background command to access the Import
DXF File dialog box.
2. Select the .DXF file you wish to import, and click the Open button.
16.2.2 Exporting a DXF file
Note: You will be able to redefine all elements, except pipes, as blocks
in AutoCAD. Pipes will be exported as polylines, so you will be
able to set their line weight in AutoCAD.
A project can be saved in a format for use by AutoCAD, and many other common
CAD-based applications. When you use the Export command, a window appears so
that you can enter the file name, drive, and directory of the .DXF file you are saving.
A status bar appears at the bottom of the screen as the file is being exported.
To export the drawing plan view, select File > Export > DXF file.
16.2.3 Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD
When exporting a DXF file from WaterCAD in Stand-Alone mode, pipes will be
exported as Polyline entities, allowing you to change the line weights in AutoCAD.
Miscellaneous elements (flow arrows, control symbols, etc), nodes, pumps, and valves
will be exported as Block entities (named HMI_CKV, HMI_CSRC, HMI_FARW,
HMI_PS, JUNCTION, TANK, RESERVOIR, PUMP, PRV, PBV, PSV, FCV and
TCV) allowing you to redefine them in AutoCAD.
If you would like to change the appearance of these blocks in your AutoCAD drawing,
you can redefine them as follows:
To begin, start AutoCAD and create thirteen separate drawing files named
HMI_CKV.DWG, HMI_CSRC.DWG, HMI_FARW.DWG, HMI_PS.DWG, JUNC-
TION.DWG, TANK.DWG, RESERVOIR.DWG, PUMP.DWG, PRV.DWG,
PBV.DWG, PSV.DWG, FCV.DWG and TCV.DWG. Save these drawings in your
AutoCAD directory.
Importing and Exporting DXF Files
16-668 WaterCAD Users Manual
Open the existing drawing that contains the network blocks.
1. At the AutoCAD Command: prompt, type INSERT and press enter.
2. At the Block Name: prompt, type JUNCTION=C: JUNCTION.DWG and press
enter.
3. At this point, the block has been redefined and you can cancel this command.
4. Repeat these steps for the other named blocks.
5. Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for more information on Redefining
Blocks.
16.2.4 Advanced DXF Import Techniques
Note: Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for more information on
Importing .DXF files.
To import the network .DXF file into an existing AutoCAD drawing file, you will
have to perform a couple of preliminary steps:
1. In your existing drawing, at the AutoCAD Command: prompt, type (regapp
Wtrc) and press Enter. This will register the program application ID. Be sure to
include the parenthesis.
2. Define blocks named HMI_CKV, HMI_CSRC, HMI_FARW, HMI_PS, JUNC-
TION, TANK, RESERVOIR, PUMP, PRV, PBV, PSV, FCV and TCV.
Tip: To save time, you can perform the above steps in a new
AutoCAD drawing file and save it with the name WaterCAD.DWG.
Now, instead of performing the above steps, insert this new
drawing into your existing drawing file immediately before
importing a network .DXF file.
You are now ready to import a .DXF file into your existing AutoCAD drawing.
WaterCAD Users Manual 17-669
17
Chapter
Additional Features for
AutoCAD
Note: AutoCAD R14 is not supported in WaterCAD.
WaterCAD features optional support for AutoCAD integration. You can determine if
you have purchased AutoCAD functionality for your WaterCAD by using the Help >
About menu option. Click the Registration button to view the feature options that
have been purchased with your application license. If AutoCAD support is enabled,
then you will be able to run your WaterCAD application in both AutoCAD and Stand-
Alone mode.
The AutoCAD functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
Stand-Alone base product. Once you become familiar with the Stand-Alone mode,
you will not have any difficulty using the product in AutoCAD mode.
In AutoCAD mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available in
the AutoCAD design and drafting environment. The standard environment is extended
and enhanced by an AutoCAD ObjectARX WaterCAD client layer that lets you
create, view, and edit the native WaterCAD network model while in AutoCAD.
Some of the advantages of working in AutoCAD mode include:
Lay out network pipes and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and
drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans. You will
have access to any other third party applications that you currently use, along with
any custom LISP, ARX, or VBA applications that you have developed.
Use native AutoCAD insertion snaps to precisely position WaterCAD elements
with respect to other entities in the AutoCAD drawing.
Use native AutoCAD commands such as ERASE, MOVE, and ROTATE on
WaterCAD model entities with automatic update and synchronization with the
model database.
Output contours to your AutoCAD drawing, and interactively label them.
Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and anno-
tation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
AutoCAD Environment
17-670 WaterCAD Users Manual
Warning! ProjectWise Users: Please refer to the topic ProjectWise
Integration on page 17-685 for important instructions on
integrating AutoCAD and ProjectWise.
Additional features of the AutoCAD version includes:
AutoCAD Environment on page 17-670
AutoCAD Project Files on page 17-673
WaterCAD Element Properties on page 17-674
Working with Elements on page 17-675
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands on page 17-677
Undo/Redo on page 17-680
Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements on page 17-681
TRex Elevation Extraction for AutoCAD on page 17-682
Special Considerations on page 17-684
17.1 AutoCAD Environment
The AutoCAD environment includes:
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout on page 17-670
Toolbars on page 17-671
Drawing Setup on page 17-672
Symbol Visibility on page 17-672
Rebuild Figure Labels on page 17-673
17.1.1 AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout
In AutoCAD mode, Bentley Systems products provide a set of extended options and
functionality beyond those available in Stand-Alone mode (for more information, see
Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode on page 2-32). This additional functionality
provides enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends
the command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within
AutoCAD.
Key differences between AutoCAD and Stand-Alone mode include:
Additional Features for AutoCAD
WaterCAD Users Manual 17-671
Element editing functionality has been extended by adding the Scale Elements
and Rotate Labels commands, accessible under the Edit > Modify Elements menu,
and the Change Widths command under the Edit > Pipes menu.
You can control the appearance and destination of all model elements using the
Element Properties command (see Element Properties on page 17-675) under
the Tools menu. For example, you can assign a specific layer for all outlets, as
well as assign the label and annotation text style to be applied.
17.1.2 Toolbars
In AutoCAD mode, the following toolbars are available:
Command ToolsEnables the Command Toolbar for quick access to the main
commands, including computations, tables, graphic reports, Quick View, and
direct access to the Bentley Systems Web Site.
Layout ToolsEnables the Layout Toolbar for access to the Tool Palette.
Analysis ToolbarEnables the Analysis Toolbar to control the current scenario
and provide quick access to the Scenario Manager (see Scenario Control Center
on page 8-360), the Active Topology Selection dialog box (see Active Topology
Selection Dialog Box on page 9-414), the Darwin Calibrator (see Darwin Cali-
brator on page 10-469), and the Capital and Energy Cost Managers (see Capital
Cost Manager on page 11-496 and Energy Cost Manager on page 11-500), as
well as time and animation controls.
AutoCAD Environment
17-672 WaterCAD Users Manual
17.1.3 Drawing Setup
When working in the AutoCAD mode, you may work with Bentley Systems products
in many different AutoCAD scales and settings. However, Bentley Systems product
elements can only be created and edited in model space.
17.1.4 Symbol Visibility
Note: In AutoCAD, it is possible to delete element label text using the
ERASE command. You should not use ERASE to control
visibility of labels. If you desire to control the visibility of a
selected group of element labels, you should move them to
another layer that can be frozen or turned off.
For more information on restoring labels that have been erased
using the native AutoCAD command, see Rebuild Figure Labels
on page 17-673.
In AutoCAD mode, you can control display of element labels using the check box in
the Drawing Options dialog box.
The following commands allow you to customize the drawing by turning the visibility
of flow arrows and labels on or off:
To turn on the element labels, type: WTRCLABELSON
To turn them off, type: WTRCLABELSOFF
Additional Features for AutoCAD
WaterCAD Users Manual 17-673
17.1.5 Rebuild Figure Labels
When running WaterCAD in the AutoCAD mode, it is possible to delete associated
element label text entities. Element labels which have been erased can be selectively
undeleted using the command WTRCREBUILDLABELS.
17.2 AutoCAD Project Files
When using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, there are two files that fundamentally
define a WaterCAD model project:
Drawing File (.DWG)The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities
that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.
Model File (.WCD)The native WaterCAD model database file that contains all
the element properties, along with other important model data. WaterCAD .WCD
files can be loaded and run using the Stand-Alone mode. These files may be
copied and sent to other WaterCAD users who are interested in running your
project. This is the most important file for the WaterCAD model.
The two files will have the same base name. It is important to understand that
archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also
preserve the associated .WCD file.
Since the .WCD file can be run and modified separately from the .DWG file using
Stand-Alone mode, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you
ever modify the model in Stand-Alone mode and then later load the AutoCAD .DWG
file, the WaterCAD program will compare file dates, and automatically use the built-in
AutoCAD synchronization routine.
17.2.1 Drawing Synchronization
Whenever you open a WaterCAD-based drawing file in AutoCAD, the WaterCAD
model server will start. The first thing that the application will do is load the associ-
ated WaterCAD database (.WCD) file. If the time stamps of the drawing and database
file are different, WaterCAD will automatically check synchronization. This protects
against corruption that might otherwise occur from separately editing the WaterCAD
database file in Stand-Alone mode, or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station
where the WaterCAD application is not loaded.
The synchronization check will occur in two stages:
WaterCAD Element Properties
17-674 WaterCAD Users Manual
First, WaterCAD will compare the drawing model elements with those in the
server model. Any differences will be listed. WaterCAD enforces network topo-
logical consistency between the server and the drawing state. If model elements
have been deleted or added in the .WCD file during a Stand-Alone session, or if
proxy elements have been deleted, WaterCAD will force the drawing to be consis-
tent with the native database by restoring or removing any missing or excess
drawing custom entities.
After network topology has been synchronized, WaterCAD will compare other
model and drawing states such as location, labels, and flow directions. Again, any
differences between the drawing client and server data will be listed, and a
message box will open to give you a chance to indicate which state, drawing, or
model server should be adopted during the second stage of synchronization.
You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the command WTRC-
SYNCSERVER.
17.2.2 Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg
Note: If this situation inadvertently occurs (save on quit for example),
restart AutoCAD, use the Open command to open the
Drawing*.dwg file from its saved location, and use the Save As
command to save the drawing and model data to a different
name.
AutoCAD uses Drawing*.dwg as its default drawing name. Saving your drawing as
the default AutoCAD drawing name (for instance Drawing1.dwg) should be avoided,
as it makes overwriting model data very likely. When you first start AutoCAD, the
new empty drawing is titled Drawing*.dwg, regardless of whether one exists in the
default directory. Since Bentley Systems modeling products create model databases
associated with the AutoCAD drawing, the use of Drawing*.dwg as the saved name
puts you at risk of causing synchronization problems between the AutoCAD drawing
and the Bentley Systems modeling files.
17.3 WaterCAD Element Properties
WaterCAD element properties includes:
Element Properties on page 17-675
Select Layer on page 17-675
Select Text Style on page 17-675
Additional Features for AutoCAD
WaterCAD Users Manual 17-675
17.3.1 Element Properties
When working in the AutoCAD mode, this feature will display a tabbed dialog box
with tables containing different model element types and their associated properties,
along with the properties of the elements layer, label, and annotation. To modify an
attribute, double-click each associated grid cell. Setting changes made in this dialog
box will be used for any newly created elements. Property changes will be performed
on all elements of the given type. If the Apply to Existing Object check box is
selected, modifications made in this dialog box are performed on a global basis. To
restrict global changes to a certain layer for a particular element type, use the
*current* option setting for the attribute of interest.
17.3.2 Select Layer
When running in AutoCAD mode, this dialog box appears when you double-click the
layer name (*current* by default) in the Layer column of the Element Properties
dialog box. To access this, select Tools > Element Properties. It displays a list of the
available layers and their properties from the current AutoCAD drawing. Click the
appropriate field to select a layer. The *current* option will use whatever layer is set
to current in your AutoCAD drawing.
17.3.3 Select Text Style
When running in AutoCAD mode, this dialog box appears when you double-click the
text style name (*current* by default) in the Text Style column of the Labels and
Annotation tabs of the Element Properties dialog box. This is accessed by selecting
Tools > Element Properties. It displays a list of the available text styles and their prop-
erties from the current AutoCAD drawing. Click the appropriate field to select a text
style. The *current* option will use whatever text style is set to current in your
AutoCAD drawing.
17.4 Working with Elements
Working with elements includes:
Edit Element on page 17-676
Deleting Elements on page 17-676
Modifying Elements on page 17-676
Working with Elements
17-676 WaterCAD Users Manual
17.4.1 Edit Element
In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection will open an element editor for any specific
element. Select Edit > Edit Element, then select an element. This command is also
available by choosing the Select tool, then clicking an element in the drawing pane. In
addition, double-clicking an element will open the element editor for that element.
Note: Double-clicking an element when other elements are selected
will open the AutoCAD Properties dialog box rather than the
element editor.
The Edit Element command works with the current selection to allow you to generate
filtered reports. For more information on working with selections, see Selecting
Elements (AutoCAD Mode) on page 5-252.
17.4.2 Deleting Elements
In AutoCAD mode, this command removes all elements in the current selection. For
more information on working with selections, see Selecting Elements (AutoCAD
Mode) on page 5-252.
17.4.3 Modifying Elements
In AutoCAD mode, these commands are selected from the Edit menu. They are used
for scaling and rotating model entities.
Scale Elements
In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection resizes an element based upon a scale factor.
After choosing this command, select an element or group of elements, and enter the
scale factor to be applied.
Rotate Labels
In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection rotates the figure label. After choosing this
command, select an element or group of elements, and enter the desired rotation in
degrees.
Modify Pipes
Pipes (see Pressure Pipe Editor on page 6-271) may follow a non-linear alignment,
since in pressure systems minor losses can be safely lumped with friction losses
without significantly affecting model accuracy. WaterCAD uses the following special-
ized commands for editing pipes in AutoCAD:
Additional Features for AutoCAD
WaterCAD Users Manual 17-677
Insert BendUse this command to add a bend to a pipe. In AutoCAD, you will
be prompted to select a pipe to bend. Select the pipe and the location you want the
bend to appear. The pipe alignment will automatically conform to this location.
Remove BendUse this command to remove a specific bend from a pipe. In
AutoCAD, you will be prompted to select a pipe and the specific bend to remove.
Remove All BendsUse this command to completely straighten a pipe that
contains bends. In AutoCAD, you will be prompted to select a pipe, and all bends
will disappear.
Change WidthsUse this command to change pipe widths. After choosing this
command, select a pipe or group of pipes and enter the desired width. Note that
the width entered is equivalent to the AutoCAD polyline width.
Change Pipe Widths
In AutoCAD mode, this menu option is used to change the thickness of the pipe width.
You are first prompted to select pipes, and is then prompted to enter a new pipe width
to be assigned to the pipe figures.
Edit Elements
In AutoCAD mode, this menu command is used to open a spreadsheet FlexTable
editor or a selection of one or more network figures. You are prompted to select
figures on which to build a table.
17.5 Working with Elements Using AutoCAD
Commands
Working with elements using AutoCAD commands includes:
WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities on page 17-678
AutoCAD Commands on page 17-678
Explode Elements on page 17-679
Moving Elements on page 17-679
Moving Element Labels on page 17-679
Snap Menu on page 17-680
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands
17-678 WaterCAD Users Manual
17.5.1 WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities
The primary AutoCAD-based WaterCAD element entitiespipes, tanks, reservoirs,
pumps and valvesare all implemented using ObjectARX custom objects. Thus, they
are vested with a specialized model awareness that ensures that any editing actions
you perform will result in an appropriate update of the model database.
This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands (see AutoCAD
Commands on page 17-678) as you normally would, and the model database will be
updated automatically to reflect these changes.
It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will
also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes.
Using ObjectARX enables the implementation of highly specialized editing actions
that are not available with standard AutoCAD entities. Two examples of this special-
ized behavior are element morphs (see Morphing Elements on page 5-250) and pipe
splits (see Splitting Pipes on page 5-250). Again, these modifications will trigger an
automatic update of the model network topology and associated element properties.
Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained
during Undo and Redo transactions.
A custom model element has certain native text entities associated with it for
displaying label and annotated property values. These associated label and annotation
entities may be edited separately from the model element itself. However, most
drawing edits made directly to a model element will be applied in the appropriate
fashion against its associated label and annotation entities. Thus, if you drag an
element to a new location, the annotation and label locations will update as well.
17.5.2 AutoCAD Commands
When running in AutoCAD mode, Bentley Systems products make use of all the
advantages that AutoCAD has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features. Addi-
tionally, AutoCAD commands can be used as you would with any design project. For
example, Bentley Systems elements and annotation can be manipulated using
common AutoCAD commands.
Additional Features for AutoCAD
WaterCAD Users Manual 17-679
17.5.3 Explode Elements
In AutoCAD mode, running the AutoCAD Explode command will transform all
Bentley Systems custom entities into equivalent AutoCAD native entities. When a
Bentley Systems custom entity is exploded, all associated database information is lost.
Be certain to save the exploded drawing under a separate filename.
Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the
model network. You can also deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals
who do not own a Bentley Systems Product license, since a fully exploded drawing
will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects. For more information, see
.Working with Proxies on page 17-685.
17.5.4 Moving Elements
When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move elements. For more information, see Selecting
Elements (AutoCAD Mode) on page 5-252.
To move a node, execute the AutoCAD command by either typing it at the command
prompt or selecting it. Follow the AutoCAD prompts, and the node and its associated
label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch depending on the
new location of the node.
17.5.5 Moving Element Labels
When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move element text labels. For more information, see
Selecting Elements (Stand-Alone Mode) on page 5-251.
To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you
wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the AutoCAD command
either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by
selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the AutoCAD prompt, and the label will
be moved without the element.
Undo/Redo
17-680 WaterCAD Users Manual
17.5.6 Snap Menu
When using AutoCAD mode, the Snap menu is a standard AutoCAD menu that
provides options for picking an exact location of an object. See the Autodesk
AutoCAD documentation for more information.
17.6 Undo/Redo
Note: If you use the native AutoCAD undo, you are limited to a single
redo level. The WaterCAD undo/redo is faster than the native
AutoCAD undo/redo. If you are rolling back WaterCAD model
edits, it is recommended that you use the menu-based
WaterCAD undo/redo.
If you undo using the AutoCAD undo/redo and you restore
WaterCAD elements that have been previously deleted,
morphed, or split, some model state attributes such as
diameters or elevations may be lost, even though the locational
and topological state is fully consistent. This will only happen in
situations where the WaterCAD command history has been
deleted. In such cases, you will be warned to check your data
carefully.
In AutoCAD mode, you have two types of undo/redo available to you. From the Edit
menu, you have access to WaterCAD undo and redo. Alternatively, you can perform
the native AutoCAD undo and redo by typing at the AutoCAD command line. The
implementations of the two different operation types are quite distinct.
The menu-based undo and redo commands operate exclusively on WaterCAD
elements by invoking the commands directly on the model server. The main advantage
of using the specialized command is that you will have unlimited undo and redo
levels. This is an important difference, since in layout or editing it is quite useful to be
able to safely undo and redo an arbitrary number of transactions.
Whenever you use a native AutoCAD undo, the server model will be notified when
any WaterCAD entities are affected by the operation. WaterCAD will then synchro-
nize the model to the drawing state. Wherever possible, the model will seek to map the
undo/redo onto the model servers managed command history. If the drawings state is
not consistent with any pending undo or redo transactions held by the server,
WaterCAD will delete the command history. In this case, the model will synchronize
the drawing and server models.
Additional Features for AutoCAD
WaterCAD Users Manual 17-681
17.7 Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to
WaterCAD Elements
WaterCAD features powerful tools dedicated to assisting you in building WaterCAD
models from existing AutoCAD drawing information. In addition to the standard GIS
shapefile conversion options, there are two specific commands available in the
AutoCAD platform that will be especially useful to the AutoCAD modeler:
Layout Pipe Using Entity on page 17-681
Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes on page 17-681
17.7.1 Layout Pipe Using Entity
Note: This command is extremely useful for constructing pipes that
follow a curved alignment. In these cases, use an arc as the
defining template entity for the pipe creation.
In addition to the standard options available under the Pipe layout command (accessed
by clicking the button in the WaterCAD Tools toolbar, or by selecting the Tools >
Layout > Pipe menu option), you may elect to use an existing AutoCAD line, polyline,
or arc as a template to define an equivalent WaterCAD pipe or series of pipes.
While you are in the Pipe Layout command, you may invoke the Entity conversion
option by using the Entity keyword, or by selecting Entity from the right-mouse
button context menu. Once selected, you will be prompted to choose an entity to use
as a basis for a new pipe, and conditionally specify the type of nodal WaterCAD
element to use at each end of the pipe.
17.7.2 Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes
Note: This is an automated batch process that requires some care and
attention with respect to the selection set that is going to be
used as a basis for generating actual WaterCAD model elements.
For instance, it may be desirable to select like-sized pipe
elements during each pass. This way, you can use the
prototyping capabilities to their greatest advantage. A little time
spent in planning and strategizing a series of individual
conversion steps will go a long way toward preventing
confusion, which could necessitate later re-conversions.
When running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, this special AutoCAD command
allows you to use a selection of AutoCAD entitiesarcs, lines, polylines, and
blocksas a defining template set for the creation of equivalent WaterCAD elements.
This command performs the element generation in batch fashion. You are prompted
TRex Elevation Extraction for AutoCAD
17-682 WaterCAD Users Manual
for the selection of entities to convert, and the selection is followed by the Polyline to
Pipe Conversion Wizard that leads you through a sequence of steps defining the basis
of the batch conversion. For more information, see AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe
Conversion on page 16-661.
17.8 TRex Elevation Extraction for AutoCAD
Collecting elevation data is one of the more straightforward but tedious tasks in model
building. In light of this, Bentley Systems TRex Terrain Extractor has been designed
to expedite the elevation assignment process by automatically assigning elevations to
the model features according to the elevation data stored within AutoCAD point,
polyline, and 3Dpolyline layers. If you are using AutoCAD Land Development
Desktop or AutoCAD Map, you can also use TIN surfaces.
The TRex Terrain Extractor can quickly and easily assign elevations to any or all of
the nodes in the water distribution model. Data input for TRex consists of:
1. Select the model features to which elevations should be applied; all model
features, a selection set of features, or a current selection of elements can be
chosen.
2. Specify the AutoCAD layer(s) that contains the elevation data to be extracted.
3. Specify the WaterCAD alternative that will receive the elevation data.
TRex then assigns an elevation value for each specific point occupied by a model
feature. The final step of the wizard displays a list of all of the features to which an
elevation was applied, along with the elevation values for those features. These eleva-
tion values can then be applied to a new physical properties alternative, or an existing
one.
RELATED TOPICS
TRex for AutoCAD Wizard on page 17-682
17.8.1 TRex for AutoCAD Wizard
The TRex Wizard for AutoCAD allows you to extract elevations from AutoCAD enti-
ties and surface TINs and apply them to a group of nodes.
Step 1 - Specify Target Nodes and Source Data
In this step, the features to which elevations will be assigned and the AutoCAD enti-
ties that contain the elevation data are specified.
First, choose which elements to assign elevations to using the following controls:
Additional Features for AutoCAD
WaterCAD Users Manual 17-683
All WTRC Nodes in the drawingWhen this button is selected, TRex will
attempt to assign elevations to all nodes within the WaterCAD model.
Selection Set (Button)When this button is selected the Selection Set menu is
activated, allowing you to choose a previously created selection set.
Selection Set (Drop-Down List)When the WTRC Selection Set button is
selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to all nodes within the selection
set that is specified in this menu.
SelectionWhen this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to
all currently highlighted nodes. Alternatively, you can click the Select button to
select a new group of elements.
Next, choose the elevation data source(s) using the following controls:
TINThis button is only available when you are using AutoCAD Land Develop-
ment Desktop or AutoCAD map. It allows you to select a surface TIN to use as
your elevation data source.
AutoCAD EntitiesWhen this button is selected, the following checkboxes are
activated:
PointsThis checkbox allows you to assign elevations to nodes based on
their proximity to AutoCAD point entities.
3d PolylinesThis checkbox allows you to assign elevations to nodes based
on their proximity to AutoCAD point entities.
PolylinesThis checkbox allows you to assign elevations to nodes based on
their proximity to AutoCAD point entities.
On LayerThis list displays all layers within the drawing that contain points,
polylines, and 3d polylines, allowing you to select the layers that contain elevation
information to be extracted. You can select multiple layers in the list by holding
down the Ctrl button and clicking the desired layers.
Use WaterCAD Spot Elevations as sourceWhen this box is checked, TRex
will use elevation data contained within WaterCAD spot elevation entities, as well
as elevations from Tin and AutoCAD entity data sources.
Step 2 - Specify Target Alternative and Assign Elevation Data
In this step, the results of the elevation extraction process are displayed, and the
results can be applied to a new or existing physical alternative. The following controls
are available in this step:
Results Preview PaneThis tabular pane displays the elevations that were
calculated by TRex.
Special Considerations
17-684 WaterCAD Users Manual
New Alternative (button)When this button is selected, the results will be
applied to a new physical alternative. First, the currently active physical alterna-
tive will be duplicated, then the results generated by TRex will be applied to the
newly created alternative. The name of this new alternative must be supplied in
the New Alternative text field.
New Alternative (text field)When the New Alternative button is selected, the
new alternative must be named by typing a label in this text field.
Use Existing Alternative (button)When this button is selected, the results will
be applied to the physical alternative that is selected in the Use Existing Alterna-
tive menu.
Use Existing Alternative (Menu)When the Use Existing Alternative button is
selected, this menu allows the selection of the physical alternative to which the
results will be applied.
Export ResultsThis button exports the results generated by TRex to a tab or
comma-delimited text file (.TXT). These files can then be re-used by WaterGEMS
or imported into other programs.
When you are satisfied with the settings, click the Finish button to assign the calcu-
lated elevations to the specified alternative.
Note: TRex will assign an elevation to a node according to the value
associated with the closest point or polyline, with no
interpolation. When 3d polylines are used, TRex will assign an
elevation to a node according to the value associated with the
point along the 3d polyline closest to it.
17.9 Special Considerations
Special considerations include:
Import WaterCAD on page 17-685
.Working with Proxies on page 17-685
Additional Features for AutoCAD
WaterCAD Users Manual 17-685
17.9.1 Import WaterCAD
When running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, this command imports a selected
WaterCAD data (.WCD) file for use in the current drawing. The new project file will
now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.WCD. When-
ever you save changes to the network model through WaterCAD, the associated
.WCD data file is updated and can be loaded into WaterCAD 4.0 or higher.
17.9.2 ProjectWise Integration
If you previously installed Bentley ProjectWise and turned on AutoCAD integration,
you must add the following key to your system registry using the Windows Registry
Editor.
Warning! Before you edit the registry, make a backup copy.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Bentley\ProjectWise
iDesktop Integration\XX.XX\Configuration\AutoCAD"
String value name: DoNotChangeCommands
Value: 'On'
To access the Registry Editor, click Start > Run, then type regedit. Using the Registry
Editor incorrectly can cause serious, system-wide problems that may require you to
reinstall Windows to correct them. Always make a backup copy of the system registry
before modifying it.
17.9.3 .Working with Proxies
If you open a WaterCAD drawing file on an AutoCAD workstation that does not have
the WaterCAD application installed, you will get an AutoCAD Proxy Information
message box. This is because the executable logic for managing the AutoCAD entities
is not available, and the WaterCAD modeling elements are not associated with the
WaterCAD native database.
WaterCAD proxy objects can be moved and erased. However, doing so will put the
drawing state out of sync with the model database if the drawing is saved with its orig-
inal name. If this happens, and you later reload the drawing on an AutoCAD station
that is running a WaterCAD application, the application will automatically load and
will attempt to reconcile any differences it finds by automatically loading its Database
Synchronization routine. (for more information, see Drawing Synchronization on
page 17-673).
Special Considerations
17-686 WaterCAD Users Manual
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-687
18
Chapter
Automated
Skeletonization
Skeletonization is the process of selecting only the parts of the hydraulic network that
have a significant impact on the behavior of the system for inclusion in a water distri-
bution model. For example, including each individual service connection, valve, and
every one of the numerous other elements that make up the actual network would be a
huge undertaking for larger systems. The portions of the network that are not modeled
are not ignored; rather, the effects of these elements are accounted for within the parts
of the system that are included in the model.
A fully realized water distribution model can be an enormously complex network
consisting of thousands of discrete elements, and not all of these elements are neces-
sary for every application of the model. When elements that are extraneous to the
desired purpose are present, the efficiency, usability, and focus of the model can be
substantially effected, and calculation and display refresh times can be seriously
impaired. In addition to the logistics of creating and maintaining a model that employs
little or no skeletonization, a high level of detail might be unnecessary when incorpo-
rating all of these elements in the model has no significant effect on the accuracy of
the results that are generated.
Different levels of skeletonization are appropriate depending on the intended use of
the model. For an energy cost analysis, a higher degree of skeletonization is preferable
and for fire flow and water quality analysis, minimal skeletonization is called for. This
means that multiple models are required for different applications. Because of this
necessity, various automated skeletonization techniques have been developed to assist
with the skeletonization process.
Automated Skeletonization includes:
A generic skeletonization exampleFor an example of skeletonization, see
Skeletonization Example on page 18-688.
What automated skeletonizers generally doFor a discussion of common,
generic approaches to automated skeletonization, see Common Automated Skel-
etonization Techniques on page 18-689.
Skeletonization Example
18-688 WaterCAD Users Manual
How Skelebrator approaches skeletonizationFor a discussion of the features
and advantages of Bentley Systems Skelebrator, see Skeletonization Using
Skelebrator on page 18-692.
Using the Skelebrator softwareFor reference information on using the Skele-
brator software to perform skeletonizations of networks, see Using the Skele-
brator Software on page 18-699.
18.1 Skeletonization Example
The following series of diagrams illustrate various levels of skeletonization that can
be applied. The diagram below shows a network subdivision before any skeletoniza-
tion has been performed.
As you can see, there is a junction at each service tap and a pipe and node at each
house for a total of 48 junctions and 47 pipes within this subdivision.
To perform a low level of skeletonization, the nodes at each house could be removed
along with the connecting pipes that tie in to the service line. The demands at each
house would be moved to the corresponding service tap. The resulting network would
now look like this:
There are now 19 junctions and 18 pipes in the subdivision. The demands that were
assigned to the junctions that were removed are moved to the nearest upstream junc-
tion. The only information that has been lost is the data at the service connections that
were removed.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-689
A further level of skeletonization is possible if you remove the service taps and model
only the ends and intersections of the main pipes. In this case, re-allocating the
demands is a bit more complex. The most accurate approximation can be obtained by
associating the demands with the junction that is closest to the original demand junc-
tion (as determined by following the service pipe). In the following diagram, these
service areas are marked with a dotted line.
To fully skeletonize this subdivision, the pipes and junctions that serve the subdivision
can be removed, and the demands can be assigned to the point where the branch
connects to the rest of the network, as shown in the following diagram:
As can be seen by this example, numerous levels of skeletonization can be applied;
determining the extent of the skeletonization depends on the purpose of the model. At
each progressive level of skeletonization, more elements are removed, thus the
amount of available information is decreased. Deciding whether this information is
necessary to the intended use of the model dictates the point at which the model is
optimally skeletonized.
18.2 Common Automated Skeletonization
Techniques
The following are descriptions of the skeletonization techniques that have been
employed to achieve a level of automation of the skeletonization process. Generally, a
combination of these techniques proves to be more effective than any one on its own.
Common techniques include:
GenericData Scrubbing on page 18-690
Common Automated Skeletonization Techniques
18-690 WaterCAD Users Manual
GenericBranch Trimming on page 18-690
GenericSeries Pipe Removal on page 18-691
18.2.1 GenericData Scrubbing
Data scrubbing is the simplest, and generally the first, step of the skeletonization
process. In fact, some automated skeletonizers rely entirely on this reduction tech-
nique. (Data scrubbing is called Smart Pipe Removal in Skelebrator.) Data scrubbing
consists of removing all pipes that meet user-specified criteria, such as diameter,
roughness, or other attributes. Criteria combinations can also be applied, such as:
Remove all 2-inch pipes that are less than 200 feet in length.
This step of skeletonization is especially useful when the model has been created from
GIS data, since GIS maps generally contain much more information than is necessary
for the hydraulic model. Examples of elements that are commonly included in GIS
maps, but not necessarily in the distribution model, are service connections and isola-
tion valves. Removing these elements generally has a negligible impact on the accu-
racy of the model, depending on the application for which the model is being used.
The primary drawback of this type of skeletonization is that there is generally no
network awareness involved. No consideration of the hydraulic effects of a pipes
removal is taken into account, so there is a large potential for errors to be made by
inadvertent pipe removal or by causing network disconnections. (Bentley Systems
Skelebrator does account for hydraulic effect.)
18.2.2 GenericBranch Trimming
Branch trimmingreferred to as Branch Collapsing in Skelebratoris the process of
removing short dead-end links and their corresponding junctions. Since pipes and
junctions are removed by this process, you specify the criteria for both types of
element. An important element of this skeletonization type is the reallocation of
demands that are associated with junctions that are removed. The demand associated
with a dead-end junction is assigned to the junction at the beginning of the branch.
Branch trimming is a recursive process; as dead-end pipes and junctions are removed,
other junctions and pipes can become the new dead-endsif they meet the trimming
criteria, these elements may also be removed. You specify whether this process
continues until all applicable branches have been trimmed or if the process should
stop after a specified number of trimming levels.
Branch trimming is an effective skeletonization technique; dead-end junctions with no
loading have no effect on the model, and dead end junctions that do have demands are
accounted for at the point through which this flow would pass anyway (without skele-
tonization), so the hydraulic behavior of the network as a whole is unaffected.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-691
The only situation that presents a drawback to this type of skeletonization is the
obvious one; information and results cannot be obtained from non-existent elements.
During water quality or fire flow analysis, information on these trimmed elements
may be desired but unavailable. Again, having multiple models utilizing various
levels of skeletonization is the solution to this potential drawback.
18.2.3 GenericSeries Pipe Removal
Series pipe removal, also known as intermediate node removal or pipe merging, is the
next skeletonization technique. It works by removing nodes that have only two adja-
cent pipes and merging these pipes into a single one. As with Branch trimming, any
demands associated with the junctions being removed must be reallocated to nearby
nodes, and generally a number of strategies for this allocation can be specified.
An evenly-distributed strategy simply divides the demand equally between the two
end nodes of the newly merged pipe. A distance-weighted technique divides the
demands between the two end nodes based on their proximity to the node being
removed. These strategies can be somewhat limiting, and maintaining an acceptable
level of network hydraulic precision while removing nodes and merging pipes is made
more difficult with this restrictive range of choices.
Other criteria are also used to set the allowable tolerances for relative differences in
the attributes of adjacent pipes and nodes. For example, an important consideration is
the elevation difference between nodes along a pipe-merge candidate. If the junctions
mark critical elevation information, this elevation (and by extension, pressure) data
would be lost if this node attribute is not accounted for when the pipes are merged.
Another set of criteria would include pipe attributes. This information is needed to
prevent pipes that are too different (as defined by the tolerance settings) hydraulically
from being merged. It is important to compare certain pipe attributes before merging
them to ensure that the hydraulic behavior will approximate the conditions before the
merge. However, requiring that pipes have exactly matching criteria limits the number
of elements that could potentially be removed, thus reducing the level of skeletoniza-
tion that is possible.
In other words, although it is desirable for potential pipe merge candidates to have
similar hydraulic attributes, substantial skeletonization is difficult to achieve if there
are even very slight variances between the hydraulic attributes of the pipes, since an
exact match is required. This process is, however, very good at merging pipes whose
adjacent nodes have no demand and that have exactly the same attributes. Removing
these zero-demand junctions and merging the corresponding pipes has no effect on the
models hydraulics, except for loss of pressure information at the removed junctions.
Series pipe removal is called Series Pipe Merging in Skelebrator.
Skeletonization Using Skelebrator
18-692 WaterCAD Users Manual
18.3 Skeletonization Using Skelebrator
Skeletonization Using Skelebrator discusses the advantages and approach to skeleton-
ization of Bentley Systems Skelebrator process.
Skelebrator includes:
GenericData Scrubbing on page 18-690
SkelebratorBranch Collapsing on page 18-693
SkelebratorSeries Pipe Merging on page 18-694
SkelebratorParallel Pipe Merging on page 18-696
SkelebratorOther Skelebrator Features on page 18-697
SkelebratorConclusion on page 18-698
18.3.1 SkelebratorSmart Pipe Removal
The first step that Skelebrator performs is Smart Pipe Removal, which is an improved
version of the data scrubbing technique described in GenericData Scrubbing on
page 18-690. The main drawback of standard data scrubbing procedures is that they
have no awareness of the effects that removing elements from the model will have on
the calculated hydraulics. This can easily cause network disconnections and lead to a
decrease in the accuracy of the simulated network behavior.
Skelebrator eliminates the possibility of inadvertent network disconnections caused
by the data scrubbing technique. This is accomplished by utilizing a sophisticated
network-walking algorithm. This algorithm marks pipes as safe to be removed if the
removal of the pipe so marked would not invalidate, or disconnect, the network. For a
pipe to be removed, it must:
Meet the user-specified removal criteria
Be marked safe for removal
Not be marked as non-removable
Not be connected to a non-removable junction (to prevent orphaning)
This added intelligence protects the models integrity by eliminating the possibility of
inadvertently introducing catastrophic errors during the model reduction process.
This innovation is not available in other automated skeletonization applications; a
likely result of performing skeletonization without this intelligent safety net is the
invalidation of the network caused by the removal of elements that are critical to the
performance and accuracy of the model. At the very least, verifying that no important
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-693
elements have been removed during this skeletonization step and re-creating any
elements that have been erroneously removed can be a lengthy and error-prone
process. These considerations are addressed automatically and transparently by the
Skelebrators advanced network traversal algorithm.
18.3.2 SkelebratorBranch Collapsing
Branch Collapsing is a fundamental skeletonization technique; the improvements over
the branch trimming that was described in GenericBranch Trimming on page 18-
690 that Skelebrator brings to the table are primarily a matter of flexibility, efficiency,
and usability. The branch trimming method utilized by other automated skeletoniza-
tion applications allows a limited range of removal criteria; in some cases, just eleva-
tion and length. Workarounds are required if another removal criteria is desired,
resulting in more steps to obtain the desired results.
Conversely, Skelebrator innately provides a wide range of removal criteria, increasing
the scope of this skeletonization step and eliminating the need for inefficient manual
workarounds.
The following diagrams illustrate the results of Branch Collapsing.
Figure 18-1: Before Branch Collapsing
Figure 18-2: After One Branch Collapsing Iteration
Skeletonization Using Skelebrator
18-694 WaterCAD Users Manual
Figure 18-3: After Two Branch Collapsing Iterations (Branch is
Completely Removed)
18.3.3 SkelebratorSeries Pipe Merging
Tip: If you want to combine only pipes with the same hydraulic
characteristics (i.e., diameter and roughness) then, to a series
pipe removal operation add a pipe tolerance of 0.0 and a
roughness tolerance of 0.0. Also make sure to deselect the Use
Equivalent Pipes option.
The Skelebrator Series Pipe Merging technique overcomes the basic drawbacks to
series pipe removal that were mentioned previously (see GenericSeries Pipe
Removal on page 18-691) in two ways:
First, the demand reallocation strategies normally available for this step are not
comprehensive enough, limiting you to choosing from an even demand distribution or
a distance-weighted one. This limitation can hinder your ability to maintain an accept-
able level of hydraulic parity.
To overcome this limitation, Skelebrator provides a greater range of demand realloca-
tion strategies, including: Equally Distributed, Proportional to Existing Load (at the
ends of the new pipe), Proportional to Dominant Criteria, and User Defined Ratio.
Evenly Distributed divides the demand equally between the two end nodes of the
newly merged pipe. The Proportional to Existing Load divides demand based on the
amount of demand already associated with the end nodes. The Proportional to Domi-
nant Criteria strategy can supply the distance-weighted option, and allows other pipe
attributes to be weighting factors as well (for example, roughness or diameter). The
User-Defined Ratio option assigns the specified proportion of demand to the upstream
junction and the remainder of the demand to the downstream one. These additional
choices allow the proper simulation of a wider range of hydraulic behaviors.
Second, and more importantly, this technique is effective because it lets you specify
tolerances that determine if the pipes to be merged are similar enough that combining
them into a single pipe will not significantly impact the hydraulic behavior of the
network. This increases the number of potential merge candidates over requiring exact
matches, thereby increasing the scope of skeletonization but affecting hydraulics,
since differences in hydraulic properties are ignored.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-695
Figure 18-4: Before Series Pipe Merging (Exact Match Pipes)
Figure 18-5: After Series Pipe Merging (Exact Match Pipes)
To counter the hydraulic effects of merging pipes with different hydraulic attributes, a
unique hydraulic equivalency feature has been developed. This feature works by
determining the combination of pipe attributes that will most closely mimic the
hydraulic behavior of the pipes to be merged, and applying these attributes to the
newly merged pipe. By generating an equivalent pipe from two non-identical pipes,
the number of possible removal candidates (and thus, the potential level of skeleton-
ization) is greatly increased.
This hydraulic equivalency feature is integral to the application of a high degree of
effective skeletonization, the goal of which is the removal of as many elements as
possible without significantly impacting the accuracy of the model. Only Skelebrator
implements this concept of hydraulic equivalency, breaking the barrier that is raised
by other skeletonizers that only allow exactly matched pipes to be merged by this
process.
J1 J2 J3
P1 P2
Length: 250 ft.
Diameter: 8 in.
Roughness: 120
Length: 350 ft.
Diameter: 8 in.
Roughness: 120
J1 J3
P1
Length: 600 ft.
Diameter: 8 in.
Roughness: 120
Skeletonization Using Skelebrator
18-696 WaterCAD Users Manual
Figure 18-6: Before Series Pipe Merging (Different Diameters)
Figure 18-7: After Series Pipe Merging (Using Skelebrators Hydraulic
Equivalency feature)
18.3.4 SkelebratorParallel Pipe Merging
Parallel Pipe Merging is the process of combining pipes that share the same two end
nodes into a single hydraulically equivalent pipe. This skeletonization strategy relies
on the hydraulic equivalency feature described in SkelebratorSeries Pipe Merging
on page 18-694.
To merge parallel pipes, you specify which of the two pipes is the dominant one.
The length of the dominant pipe becomes the length of the merged pipe, as does either
the diameter or the roughness value of the dominant pipe. You specify which of the
two attributes to retain (diameter or roughness) and the program determines what the
value of the other attribute should be in order to maintain hydraulic equivalence.
For example, the dominant pipe has a diameter of 10 inches and a C factor of 120; one
of these values is retained. The pipe that will be removed has a diameter of 6 inches
and a C factor of 120. If the 10-inch diameter value is retained, the program performs
hydraulic equivalence calculations to determine what the roughness of the new pipe
should be in order to account for the additional carrying capacity of the parallel pipe
that is being removed.
J1 J2 J3
P1 P2
Length: 350 ft.
Diameter: 8 in.
Roughness: 120
Length: 250 ft.
Diameter: 6 in.
Roughness: 120
J1 J3
P1
Length: 600 ft.
Diameter: 8 in.
Roughness: 77
Length: 600 ft.
Diameter: 6 in.
Roughness: 163
OR
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-697
Because this skeletonization method removes only pipes and accounts for the effect of
the pipes that are removed, the network hydraulics remain intact while increasing the
overall potential for a higher level of skeletonization.
Figure 18-8: Before Parallel Pipe Merging
Figure 18-9: After Parallel Pipe Merging
18.3.5 SkelebratorOther Skelebrator Features
Skelebrator offers numerous other features that improve the flexibility and ease-of-use
of the skeletonization process.
The Skeletonization Preview option allows you to preview the effects that a given
skeletonization step, or method, will have on the model. This important tool can assist
the modeler in finding potential problems with the reduced model before a single
element is removed from it.
Before skeletonization is begun or between steps, you can use Skelebrators protected
element feature to manually mark any junctions or pipes as non-removable. Any pipes
marked in this way will always be preserved by the Skelebrator, even if the elements
meet the removal criteria of the skeletonization process in question. This option
provides the modeler with an additional level of control as well as improving the flex-
ibility of the process.
Skeletonization Using Skelebrator
18-698 WaterCAD Users Manual
The ability of the Skelebrator to preserve network integrity by not removing elements
that would cause the network to be invalidated is an important timesaving feature that
can prevent this common error from happening. There may be circumstances,
however, when you do not want or need this additional check, so this option can be
switched off.
For the utmost control over the skeletonization process, you can perform a manual
skeletonization. This feature allows you to step through each individual removal
candidate. The element can then be removed or marked to be excluded from the skele-
tonization. You can save this process and choices you made and reuse them in an auto-
matic skeletonization of the same model.
18.3.6 SkelebratorConclusion
With the overwhelming amount of data now available to the water distribution
modeler, some degree of skeletonization is appropriate for practically every model,
although the extent of the skeletonization varies widely depending on the intended
purpose of the model. In light of this, it has become desirable to maintain multiple
models of the same system, each for use in different types of analysis and design.
A model that has been minimally skeletonized serves as a water quality and fire flow
analysis model, while energy cost estimating is performed using a model with a higher
degree of skeletonization.
Creating a number of reduced models with varying levels of skeletonization can be a
lengthy and tedious process, which is where the automated techniques described
above demonstrate their value. To ensure that the skeletonization process produces a
reduced model with the minimum number of elements that is necessary for the
intended application while simultaneously maintaining an accurate simulation of
network behavior, the automated skeletonization routine must be flexible enough to
accommodate a wide variety of conditions.
Skelebrator provides an unmatched level of flexibility, providing numerous demand
reallocation and element removal strategies. It alone amongst automated skeletonizers
maximizes the potential level of skeletonization by introducing the concept of
Hydraulic Equivalence, eliminating the limitation posed by exact attribute matching
requirements. Another distinction is the advanced network walking algorithm
employed by Skelebrator, which ensures that your model remains connected and
valid, thereby greatly reducing the possibility for inadvertent element removal errors.
These features, and others such as the Skeletonization Preview (see Skeletonization
Preview on page 18-703) and Manual Skeletonization (see Manual Skeletonization
on page 18-705), greatly expedite and simplify the process of generating multiple,
special-purpose water distribution models, each skeletonized to the optimal level for
their intended purpose.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-699
18.4 Using the Skelebrator Software
Skelebrator is available for use with a number of products. Skelebrator has slightly
different behavior and features in some environments. It is available for:
WaterCAD v6 or higher (Stand Alone and AutoCAD)
WaterGEMS Modeler
WaterGEMS (ArcCatalog and ArcMap)
This section describes using the Skelebrator software.
When using Skelebrator, please note:
We strongly recommended that you first make a copy of your model as a safe
guard before proceeding with Skelebration. In ArcGIS (ArcCatalog or ArcMap),
there is no ability to undo your changes after they have been made.
We strongly recommended that you eliminate all scenarios other than the one to
be skeletonized from a model prior to skeletonization.
For information on the reasons for these recommendations, see Important Skele-
brator Information on page 18-719.
Note: Skelebrator reduces a WaterGEMS model and applies its
changes to the models WaterGEMS datastore, which is
contained within an .MDB file. Skelebrator cannot view or make
changes to a standard GIS geodatabase.
To use Skelebrator with a GIS geodatabase, you must first use
ModelBuilder to create a WaterGEMS datastore from the GIS
data.
To use Skelebrator with a CAD drawing, you must first perform a
Polyline-to-Pipe conversion to create a WaterGEMS datastore
from the CAD file.
Using Skelebrator includes:
Skeletonizer Manager on page 18-700
Manual Skeletonization on page 18-705
Smart Pipe Removal Operations on page 18-708
Branch Collapsing Operations on page 18-710
Series Pipe Merging Operations on page 18-710
Parallel Pipe Merging Operations on page 18-714
Add New Operation Dialog Box on page 18-716
Using the Skelebrator Software
18-700 WaterCAD Users Manual
Rename Operation Dialog Box on page 18-716
Skelebrator Progress Summary on page 18-716
Conditions and Tolerances on page 18-716
18.4.1 Skeletonizer Manager
Use Skelebrators skeletonization manager to define how you are going to skeletonize
your network. The basic unit in Skelebrator is an operation. An operation defines and
encapsulates the settings required to be defined in order to perform some reduction
process on your hydraulic network. Skelebrator provides these types of operation that
may be used to reduce the size of your mode:
Smart Pipe Removal (See SkelebratorSmart Pipe Removal on page 18-692)
Branch Collapsing (See SkelebratorBranch Collapsing on page 18-693)
Series Pipe Merging (See SkelebratorSeries Pipe Merging on page 18-694)
Parallel Pipe Merging (See SkelebratorParallel Pipe Merging on page 18-
696)
To use Skeletonizer Manager:
1. Click the skeletonization technique you want to use: Smart Pipe Removal, Branch
Collapsing, Series Pipe Merging, Parallel Pipe Merging.
2. Click New.
3. Type the name you want to use for the operation you are creating, or keep the
default name.
4. Click OK. The respective operation editor will be displayed.
5. Choose your settings and conditions.
6. Click OK.
NewClick New to add a skeletonization operation. This adds an operation
for the option that is currently selected: Smart Pipe Removal, Branch
Collapsing, Series Pipe Merging, or Parallel Pipe Merging. Skelebrator
performs a single operation at a time. An operation consists of the strategy to use
(Smart Pipe Removal, Branch Collapsing, etc.) and the settings and conditions
specific to that operation. One operation might be branch trim pipes < 6-in. diameter.
EditClick Edit (or double-click an operation) to edit the currently selected opera-
tion. If there is no operation listed, you must first Add one by selecting New.
RenameClick Rename to rename the currently-selected operation.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-701
DuplicateClick Duplicate to create a copy of the currently-selected operation. You
can rename and edit the copy as needed.
DeleteClick Delete to remove the currently selected operations from the list.
GoTo run automatic skeletonization and apply your skeletonization opera-
tions to your model, click Go. The run is executed using the selected (high-
lighted) operations. You can select more than one operation.
ManualClick Manual to manually run the skeletonization operation.
Manual skeletonization lets you conduct skeletonizations in a concise and
controlled manner, whilst viewing the pipes that will be removed and gives
you the opportunity to protect some of those pipes on a real-time basis. For more
information, see Manual Skeletonization on page 18-705.
Note: The preview feature is not available when running WaterGEMS
from ArcCatalog or ArcMap.
PreviewTo preview the results of your skeletonization, click Preview. For
more information, see Skeletonization Preview on page 18-703.
ExportSelect Export to export the current Skelebrator setup. All your defined
Skelebrator operations, batch run settings, and protected element settings will be
saved to an .SKE file of your choice. (An .SKE file is a file in XML, eXtensible
Markup Language, format that contains all of the settings related to your skelebra-
tion.) We strongly recommended that you do not manually modify the contents of any
.SKE file.
ImportSelect Import to import a previously exported Skelebrator setup (*.SKE
file).
Note: Protected Element Settings are saved as references to the
originally skeletonized model. Using the Skelebrator protected
element settings with a different model is likely to result in
different (and unintended) elements being protected from
skeletonization. If you wish to re-run previously-saved
skeletonizations on the original model, be sure to save your
Skelebrator setup with the original model or in a place with a
name that make it obvious that the export file belongs to that
particular model. If you are not using the protected element
feature, then this caution does not apply.
For more information, see Important Skelebrator Information on
page 18-719.
Protected PipesClick the Protected Pipes button to specify that certain pipes in
your model are protected from being removed as part of the skeletonization process.
Under all circumstances, pipes listed as protected will not be removed by Skelebrator.
For more information, see Protected Pipes and Protected Junctions on page 18-707.
Using the Skelebrator Software
18-702 WaterCAD Users Manual
Protected JunctionsClick the Protected Junctions button to specify that certain
junctions in your model are protected from being removed as part of the skeletoniza-
tion process. Under all circumstances, junctions listed as protected will not be
removed by Skelebrator. For more information, see Protected Pipes and Protected
Junctions on page 18-707.
Note: Pumps, tanks, valves and reservoirs are automatically protected
from skeletonization and will never be skeletonized by
Skelebrator. The only exception to this is during Series Pipe
Merging you may select to treat TCV (Throttle Control Valves) as
junctions by selecting the Allow Removal of TCVs option. In that
situation TCVs may be removed from your model.
Batch RunWhereas automatic runs only selected skeletonization operations of the
same type, Batch Run lets you choose which of all your defined skeletonization oper-
ations to run and in what order to run them. Use Batch Run if you want to run skele-
tonization operations for more than one option, e.g., a combination of Smart Pipe
Removal, Branch Collapsing, Series Pipe Merging, or Parallel Pipe Merging opera-
tions and where the order of applied operations is important. For more information,
see Batch Run on page 18-706.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-703
Skeletonization Preview
Skeletonization preview lets you review the affects of a skeletonization on your model
without actually making any changes to or deletions from your model. To use the
preview feature:
1. Create a skeletonization operation and select it.
2. Click the Preview button.
3. The network displays in the preview window.
Using the Skelebrator Software
18-704 WaterCAD Users Manual
File: File lets you export your network to AutoCAD .DXF
format. For more information, see Advanced DXF
Import Techniques on page 16-668.
Pan/Zoom Tools: Use the Pan and Zoom buttons to change your view of
the network. For example, you might want to magnify a
section of the network by zooming in.
Options: Use the Options button to find an element or change how
your network displays. The preview feature uses three
colors to display a preview of your network. Using three
different colors lets you distinguish:
Unchanged Elements
Modified Elements
Deleted Elements
You can use colors and change the size of affected
elements to better see and understand how
skeletonization affects your network.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-705
Print Preview: Use Print Preview to review how your network will print.
For more information, see Print Preview Window on
page 13-621.
Close: Click Close to exit the preview window.
18.4.2 Manual Skeletonization
If you click the Manual Skeletonization button, the Manual Skeletonization Review
dialog box opens. The manual skeletonization review dialog box lists the proposed
skeletonization actions for the particular skeletonization process selected. The
contents of the action list window (to the left of the buttons) will vary depending on
the type of operation being run. For Smart Pipe Removal and Branch Collapsing each
Skelebrator action will have one pipe associated with it whereas Series and Parallel
Pipe Merging will have two pipes associated with each action. For Smart Pipe
Removal, when network integrity is enforced, the contents of the action list are
updated, after every executed action, to reflect only valid actions, after each action is
performed.
Go To
1
Select an element in the element window and click Go To to jump to the
element in WaterGEMS. WaterGEMS displays the element at the level of zoom you
selected in the Zoom drop-down list.
Next
1
Click Next to preview the next element in the Manual Skeletonization
Review dialog box.
Previous
1
Click Previous to preview the previous element to the one you have
selected in the Manual Skeletonization Review dialog box.
Click the Ellipsis
button to choose
a color from the
color palette
1. Not available when using Skelebrator from ArcCatalog or ArcMap.
Using the Skelebrator Software
18-706 WaterCAD Users Manual
ProtectClick Protect to protect the selected element. Protected elements cannot be
deleted from the network by skeletonization. In a Series or Parallel Pipe Merging
operation, protecting one pipe in an action will mean that the action will not be able to
be executed. The remaining un-protected pipe will not be skeletonized during this
skeletonization level; however, it is not precluded from subsequent skeletonization
levels unless it also is protected.
ExecuteClick Execute to run Skelebrator only for the selected Skelebrator action.
In the case of Smart Pipe Removal and Branch Collapsing the associated pipe will be
removed from the model, and associated loads redistributed as specified. Additionally,
for branch collapsing, one junction will be removed. For Series Pipe Merging two
pipes and one junction will be removed, associated loads redistributed as specified and
an equivalent pipe added as a replacement, if the option is selected. Otherwise, the
properties of the dominant pipe will be used to create a new pipe. For Parallel Pipe
Merging, one pipe will be removed and the remaining pipe will be updated to the
hydraulic equivalent, if you selected hydraulic equivalency.
Auto Next?
1
Select this check box if you wish for Skelebrator to immediately
advance to the next pipe element in the action list. This is the equivalent of clicking
Execute then clicking Next immediately afterwards.
CloseClick Close to exit the Manual Skeletonization Review dialog box. Any
remaining actions listed will not be executed.
Zoom
1
Select a Zoom at which you want to display elements you preview using Go
To, Previous, and Next.
Batch Run
Note: The batch run manager does not become available until at least
one Skelebrator operation is added.
All operations selected into the lower window of the batch run
manager dialog box will be executed during a batch run. There is
no need to select (highlight) the operations before running them.
Conversely, selecting only some operations in this window does
not mean only those operations will be run.
If you click the Batch Run button, the Batch Run Manager opens. Use the Batch Run
Manager to select the skeletonization strategies you want to use and the order in which
you want to run them.
Operations appearing in the top window are the operations you have defined and
which are available for use in a batch run. Any operations in this window may be
selected for a batch run. The same operation can be selected multiple times.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-707
Click Add to add a selected operations to the lower window. Any operations in the
lower window are selected as part of the batch run. Use the Remove, Move Up, and
Move Down buttons to manage the makeup and order of the operations in the batch
run list.
Note: When using Skelebrator from ArcCatalog or ArcMap, only
automatic skeletonization is an option and only a GO button is
available (with no drop-down selection menu).
Click GO > Run Batch to commence an automatic skeletonization using the opera-
tions you have defined in your batch run.
Click GO > Preview to preview the results of the operations you have defined in your
batch run.
Protected Pipes and Protected Junctions
Note: Simply by its presence in the left hand side removable elements
window an element is not guaranteed to be skeletonized. In
order to be skeletonized the element must meet all other
conditional, tolerance and topological criteria, be active in the
current topological alternative and have no external references
such as calibration observed data, simple control references,
logical control references, VSP control node references, or WQ
(Water Quality) Trace Node references. Only then will the
element be skeletonized.
The Protected Elements Manager provides a way of making certain elements in your
model immune to skeletonization. Use this feature to mark important elements in your
model as not skeletonizable. Note that only pipes and junctions may be protected from
skeletonization since all other node elements (valves, pumps, tanks and reservoirs) are
already immune to skeletonization. (TCVs are the noted exception to this rule and
may be treated as junctions, if selected, during Series Pipe Merging.)
Elements displayed in the left hand side window are potential skeletonization candi-
dates and elements displayed in the right hand side window are immune to skeleton-
ization.
Junctions/Base DemandIf you choose to set up protection for junctions, the Junc-
tions and Base Demand column headings are displayed. Clicking these column head-
ings lets you sort the list of elements.
Pipes/DiameterIf you choose to set up protection for pipes, the Pipes and Diameter
column headings display. Clicking these column headings lets you sort the list of
elements.
Using the Skelebrator Software
18-708 WaterCAD Users Manual
Tip: Right-click anywhere in either the removable elements window
or non-removable elements window in order to customize the
units and precision of the displayed values.
You can use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple
elements at once. Double-clicking an element will move it to the
opposite list.
Use the following buttons:
>to protect the selected elements. If you subsequently click OK, that element
cannot be removed by Skelebrator.
>>to protect all of the elements.
<to unprotect the selected elements. If you subsequently click OK, that element is
available for removal by Skelebrator.
<<to unprotect all of the elements.
OKClick OK to apply your changes.
CancelClick Cancel to exit Protected Elements Manager without saving any
changes.
18.4.3 Smart Pipe Removal Operations
Note: We recommend that Smart Pipe Removal be performed with
conditions defined. At the very least, a limiting condition placed
on pipe diameter should be used. Smart Pipe Removal is
designed to allow removal of small diameter pipes (including
those that form parts of loops) and thus it is recommended that
smart pipe removal be used with a condition that limits the
scope to only remove small diameter pipes.
When you add or edit a removal operation, the Smart Pipe Removal Operation Editor
dialog box opens. Removal operations have two sets of parameters, Settings and
Conditions.
1. Click the Settings tab to edit settings.
Preserve Network IntegritySelect Preserve Network Integrity if you
want Skelebrator to ensure the topological integrity of your network will not
be broken by a removal operation. All non-junction node elements (valves,
tanks, pumps and reservoirs) will remain connected to the network, and the
network will not be disconnected by Skelebrator. Total system demand will be
preserved. Any junctions marked as non-removable will also remain
connected to the network.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-709
Remove Orphaned NodesSelect Remove Orphaned Nodes if you want
Skelebrator to find and automatically remove any nodes left disconnected
from the network after removal operations. (Orphaned or disconnected nodes
are solitary nodes no longer connected to any pipes. By virtue of the nature of
pipe removal, junctions can be left disconnected.) Note that Skelebrator does
not remove any orphaned nodes that were orphaned prior to skeletonization.
This option is not available if the preserve network integrity is not selected. If
you leave this option unchecked, your model will contain junctions not physi-
cally connected to the hydraulic network, which will result in warning
messages when you run your model.
Loop Retaining SensitivityAdjust the loop retaining sensitivity in order to
control how sensitive the pipe removal algorithm is to retaining loops in your
model. The lower the setting is, and in the absence of any other limiting
conditions, the higher number of loops will be retained in your model (i.e.,
loops are less likely to be broken). Conversely, a higher setting will favor
retaining less loops in your model. Use this setting in tandem with Skele-
brators preview feature to get a feel for the effect of the various settings. This
option is only available if you have selected the Preserve Network Integrity
option.
2. Click Conditions to edit or create pipe conditions. You can add more than one
condition.
3. Click Add to add pipe conditions. You can add more than one condition.
4. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition.
The condition editor lets you define pipe conditions that determine which pipes are
included in the Smart pipe Removal process. It is acceptable to define an operation
that has no conditions (the default). In this case no pipes will be excluded from the
skeletonization based on any of their physical attributes alone.
Using the Skelebrator Software
18-710 WaterCAD Users Manual
18.4.4 Branch Collapsing Operations
When you add or edit a Branch Collapsing operation, the Branch Collapsing Opera-
tion Editor dialog box opens. Branch Collapsing operations have two sets of parame-
ters, Settings and Conditions.
1. Click the Settings tab to edit settings.
Maximum Number of Trimming LevelsSet the maximum number of
trimming levels you want to allow. In Branch Collapsing, a single trimming
level run to completion would trim every valid branch in the model back by
one pipe link. Two trimming levels would trim every valid branch back two
pipe links and so on.
Load Distribution StrategySelect what you want to do with the hydraulic
load on the sections you trim. The choices are Dont Move Load, which
means that the demands are no longer included in the model, or Move Load,
which means transfer the demands to the upstream node.
2. Click Conditions to edit or create conditions.
3. Click Add to add conditions. You can add pipe and/or junction conditions. You
can add more than one condition.
4. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition. You
can add and edit Junction and Pipe Conditions.
The condition editor lets you set select parameters that determine which pipes are
included in the skeletonizing process. In Branch Collapsing, the junctions referred
to (in junction conditions) are the two end junctions of the pipe being trimmed.
Tolerances can also be defined for junctions. Tolerances work by limiting the
pipes skeletonized only to the ones that have the specified attribute within the
specified tolerance. For example, in Branch Collapsing a tolerance on junction
elevation of 3 feet would limit skeletonization to pipes that had both end junctions
with an elevation within three feet of each other.
18.4.5 Series Pipe Merging Operations
Note: In WaterGEMS Modeler, you can assign prefixes and/or suffixes
to pipes and junctions created during Series Pipe Merging
operations by using the Element Labeling feature.
For instance, to assign a prefix of sk to all pipes that are
merged using the Series Pipe Merging operation, open the
Element Labeling dialog box and enter sk before the P- in
the Prefix field of the Pressure Pipe row. Any pipes merged
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-711
during the Series Pipe Merging will now be labeled skP-1,
skP-2, etc. Remember to reinstate the original prefixes/suffixes
after skeletonization has been performed. For more information
about Element Labeling, see Element Labeling on page 5-266.
When you add or edit a Series Pipe Merging operation, the Series Pipe Merging Oper-
ation Editor dialog box opens. Operations have two sets of parameters, Settings and
Conditions.
1. Click the Settings tab to edit settings.
Maximum Number of Removal LevelsSelect the number of levels of
pipes that get removed per iteration of the Series Pipe Merging operation. The
maximum number of removal levels is 50. This is because in the absence of
any other limiting factors (conditions, protected elements, non-removable
nodes, etc.) one series pipe removal iteration will effectively halve the number
of pipes. A second iteration will again halve the number of pipes, and so on.
Therefore, 50 is the practical limit for removal levels.
Dominant Pipe CriteriaSelect the criteria by which Skelebrator deter-
mines the dominant pipe. The dominant pipe is the pipe whose properties are
retained as appropriate. For example, when merging a 6-in. pipe and 8-in.
pipe, if diameter is selected as the dominant pipe criteria then the larger diam-
eter pipe (e.g., 8-in.) will provide the properties for the new pipe. That is, the
8-in. pipes diameter, roughness, bulk reaction rate etc will be used for the
new pipe.
Use Equivalent PipesSelect Use Equivalent Pipe if you want Skelebrator
to adjust the merged pipe properties as such to attain equivalent hydraulics as
the two merged pipes.
Equivalent Pipe MethodSelect whether you wish to modify the dominant
pipe roughness or the dominant pipe diameter for the equivalent pipe calcula-
tions.
- Modify Diameter
- Modify Roughness
If modify diameter is selected, the new pipes roughness is kept constant and
the diameter adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains
constant. Conversely if modify roughness is selected, the new pipes diameter
is kept constant and the roughness adjusted such that the head loss through the
pipe remains constant.
Using the Skelebrator Software
18-712 WaterCAD Users Manual
Note: When using Darcy-Weisbach for the friction method, Modify
Diameter is the only available selection since calculated
equivalent roughnesses can be invalid (negative) in some
circumstances.
Load Distribution StrategySelect how you want the load distributed from
junctions that are removed.
- Equally Distributed puts 50% of the load on the starting and ending
junctions of the post-skeletonized pipe.
- Proportional to Dominant Criteria assigns loads proportional to the
attribute used to select the dominant pipe. For example, if diameter is the
dominant attribute and one pipe is 6-in., while the other is 8-in. (14-in.
total length), 8/14 of the load will go to the upstream node, while 6/14
will go to the downstream node.
Note: For the length attribute, load assignment is inversely
proportional, such that the closest junction gets the majority of
the demand.
- Proportional to Existing Load maintains the pre-skeletonization load
proportions.
- User-Defined Ratio lets you specify the percentage of the load applied to
the upstream node in the post-skeletonized pipe.
Note: If either of the uncommon nodes of the two pipes being merged
are not junction nodes, then the selected load distribution
strategy is ignored and all load is moved to the junction node. If
both uncommon nodes are not junctions, then skeletonization is
only carried out if the common junction node has zero demand.
Upstream Node Demand ProportionSet a user-defined load distribution
percentage. Set the percentage of the node demand that you want applied to
the upstream node adjacent to the removed sections. This parameter is only
available if you select User Defined in the Load Distribution Strategy drop-
down list. Upstream in this context relates to the physical topology of the pipe
and its nodes and may not correspond to the direction of flow in either the pre-
skeletonized or post-skeletonized pipe.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-713
Note: The resulting pipe from a Series Pipe Merging operation is
routed in the same direction as the dominant pipe. Therefore,
upstream and downstream nodes relate to the topological
direction of the dominant pipe. If check valves are present, then
the resulting pipe is routed in direction the direction of the pipe
that contains the check valve. If check valves are present in both
pipes and those pipes oppose each other then skeletonization is
not performed.
Apply Minor LossesSelect Apply Minor Losses if you wish for Skele-
brator to preserve any minor losses attached to the pipes in your network. For
Series Pipe Merging the minor losses for the original pipes are summed and
added to the resulting pipe. If this option is not selected then the minor loss of
the resulting pipe will be set to zero.
Tip: To combine only pipes with the same hydraulic characteristics
(i.e., diameter and roughness), create a Series Pipe Removal
Operation and click the Conditions tab. Then, add a pipe
tolerance condition of 0.0 and a roughness tolerance condition
of 0.0. Also, make sure to deselect the Use Equivalent Pipes
check box.
Allow Removal of TCVsActivate this option by checking the box to allow
Skelebrator to remove TCVs during the Series Pipe Merging operation.
2. Click Conditions to edit or create conditions.
a. Click Add to add conditions. You can add pipe and/or junction conditions.
You can add more than one condition.
b. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition.
You can add and edit Junction and Pipe Conditions.
Note: In the case where not all nodes connected to the two pipes are
junctions, tolerances are only evaluated based upon the junction
type nodes. For example, if a tolerance of 5gpm was defined this
would not invalidate the merging of two pipes that had one
uncommon node that was a pump, for example. The tolerance
condition would be evaluated based only upon the two junction
type nodes.
The Pipe Condition Editor lets you set select parameters that determine which
pipes are included in the skeletonizing process. Tolerances can also be speci-
fied for both pipe and junction conditions.
In the context of series pipe merging, pipe tolerances are calculated between
the specified attribute of the two pipes to be merged. For example, a tolerance
on diameter of 2-in. means that only pipes within a range of 2-in. diameter of
each other will be merged (i.e., a 6-in. and an 8-in. pipe would be merged, an
8-in. and a 12-in. pipe would not).
Using the Skelebrator Software
18-714 WaterCAD Users Manual
In the context of series pipe merging, junction tolerances are calculated on all
present junctions. If all three nodes are junctions, then all three junctions will
be used to evaluate the tolerance. For example, a tolerance of 10 ft. on eleva-
tion would mean that the two pipes would not be merged unless all of the
three junctions had an elevation within 10 ft. of each other.
18.4.6 Parallel Pipe Merging Operations
Note: In WaterGEMS Modeler, you can assign prefixes and/or suffixes
to pipes and junctions created during Parallel Pipe Merging
operations by using the Element Labeling feature.
For instance, to assign a prefix of sk to all pipes that are
merged using the Parallel Pipe Merging operation, open the
Element Labeling dialog box and enter sk before the P- in
the Prefix field of the Pressure Pipe row. Any pipes merged
during the Parallel Pipe Merging will now be labeled skP-1,
skP-2, etc. For more information about Element Labeling, see
Element Labeling on page 5-266.
When you add or edit a Parallel Pipe Merging operation, the Parallel Pipe Merging
Operation Editor dialog box opens. Operations have two sets of parameters, Settings
and Conditions.
1. Click Settings to edit or create settings.
2. Click Add to add a new pipe condition.
3. Or, select a condition and click Edit to change its parameters.
The condition editor lets you set select parameters that determine which pipes are
included in the skeletonization process.
Maximum Number of Removal LevelsSet the maximum number of removal
levels you want to allow. In the context of Parallel Pipe Merging a single removal
level will merge two parallel pipes. Consider a case where there exists 4 pipes in
parallel. It would take 3 removal levels to merge all 4 pipes into a single pipe. In the
first removal level, two pipes are merged leaving three pipes. In the second level
another two pipes are merged leaving only two pipes. The last two pipes are merged
into a single pipe in the third removal level. Unless you have a large degree of parallel
pipes in your model, one or two levels of Parallel Pipe Merging will generally be all
that is necessary to merge the majority of parallel pipes in your system.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-715
Dominant Pipe CriteriaSelect the criteria by which Skelebrator determines the
dominant pipe. The dominant pipe is the pipe whose properties are retained as appro-
priate. For example, when merging a 6-in. pipe and 8-in. pipe, if diameter is selected
as the dominant pipe criteria then the larger diameter pipe (e.g., 8-in.) will provide the
properties for the new pipe. That is, the 8-in. pipes diameter, roughness, bulk reaction
rate, etc., will be used for the new pipe.
Use Equivalent PipesSelect Use Equivalent Pipe if you want Skelebrator to adjust
remaining pipes to accommodate the removal of other pipes in series.
Equivalent Pipe MethodSelect whether you wish to modify the dominant pipe
roughness or the dominant pipe diameter for the equivalent pipe calculations.
Modify Diameter
Modify Roughness
If modify diameter is selected, the new pipes roughness is kept constant and the diam-
eter adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains constant. Conversely, if
modify roughness is selected, the new pipes diameter is kept constant and the rough-
ness adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains constant.
Note: When using Darcy-Weisbach for the friction method, Modify
Diameter is the only available selection since calculated
equivalent roughnesses can be invalid (negative) in some
circumstances.
Minor Loss StrategyIf your network models minor losses, select what you want
Skelebrator to do with them.
Use Ignore Minor Losses if you want to ignore any minor losses in parallel pipes.
Resulting merged pipes will have a minor loss of 0.
Use Skip Pipe if Minor Loss > Max to protect from skeletonization any pipes
that have a higher minor loss than a value you set for the Maximum Minor Loss.
Use 50/50 Split to apply 50% of the sum of the minor losses from the parallel
pipes to the replacement pipe that Skeletonizer uses.
Maximum Minor LossIf you select Skip Pipe if Minor Loss > Max from the Minor
Loss Strategy drop-down list, any pipes with a minor loss value greater than the value
you set will not be removed by Skelebrator.
Using the Skelebrator Software
18-716 WaterCAD Users Manual
18.4.7 Add New Operation Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when the New button is clicked in the Skeletonization
Manager. The text field allows you to enter a identifying label for the newly created
operation.
18.4.8 Rename Operation Dialog Box
This dialog box appears when the Rename button is clicked in the Skeletonization
Manager. The text field allows you to change the identifying label for the highlighted
operation.
18.4.9 Skelebrator Progress Summary
This dialog box appears following the successful completion of an automatic skele-
tonization operation. The text pane provides information concerning the operation that
was performed, including the model name, date, the length of time the operation took
to run, and the number of elements that were deleted.
18.4.10 Conditions and Tolerances
Conditions and Tolerances are used in Skelebrator to define the scope of Skelebrator
operations. They consist of an attribute (e.g., diameter), an operator (e.g., less than)
and a unitized value (e.g., 6 inches). These values together define the effect of the
condition. The examples just listed when combined into a condition would reduce the
scope of an operation to only skeletonizing pipes with a diameter less than 6 inches.
A condition is able to be assessed based on a single element type, regardless of
topology. It is possible to assess whether pipes meet the specified condition of diam-
eter less than 6 inches without knowing the pipes location in the hydraulic model.
Tolerances, however, are different. They are assessed based on the ensuing topology,
and thus, the meaning of a tolerance varies depending on Skelebrator operation type.
Additionally, the tolerance operator is not available when it doesnt make sense. For
example, it does not make sense to define a pipe tolerance for Smart Pipe Removal
since only a single pipe is being considered at a time. An example of a valid tolerance
is for Branch Collapsing where a junction tolerance can be specified between the two
end junctions of the pipe.
Conditions and tolerances are cumulative. That is with every additional condition, the
number of pipes able to be skeletonized will be reduced. Setting conflicting conditions
such as diameter < 6-in. and diameter > 8-in. will result in no pipes being able to be
skeletonized since conditions are joined with the logical AND operator. It is not
possible to specify OR conditions or tolerances.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-717
It is possible to specify no conditions for a particular operation. In that case all pipes
are valid for skeletonization based on their physical attributes.
However, conditions and tolerances are not the only elements that determine whether
a pipe will be skeletonized. For a pipe to be skeletonized it has to meet all of the
following criteria:
Be valid in terms of the network topology with respect to the particular skeleton-
ization operation. That is, during Branch Reduction the pipe has to be part of a
branch. Any pipes whose topology dictates they are not part of a branch will not
be skeletonized.
Must not be an element that is inactive as part of a topological alternative. All
inactive topological elements are immune to skeletonization.
Must not be referenced by a logical control, simple control, or calibration
observed data set.
Must not be connected to a VSP control node or the trace node for WQ analysis.
Must not be a user-protected element.
Must meet all user defined conditional and tolerance criteria.
Conditions and tolerances includes:
Pipe Conditions and Tolerances on page 18-717
Junction Conditions and Tolerances on page 18-718
Add New Operation Dialog Box on page 18-716
Rename Operation Dialog Box on page 18-716
Skelebrator Progress Summary on page 18-716
Important Skelebrator Information on page 18-719
Pipe Conditions and Tolerances
Click Add to add conditions. You can add more than one condition. The Pipe Condi-
tion Editor opens. This lets you set select parameters that determine which pipes are
included in the skeletonization process.
AttributeSelect the Attribute that you want to use to determine which pipes to skel-
etonize. These include:
Diameter
Length
Roughness
Minor Loss Coefficient
Using the Skelebrator Software
18-718 WaterCAD Users Manual
Check Valve
Bulk Reaction Rate
Wall Reaction Rate
OperatorSelect an operator that defines the relationship between the attribute you
select and the value you select for that attribute. For example, if you select an attribute
of Diameter, an operator of Less Than, and a value of 6 in., then any pipes with less
than a 6-in. diameter are valid for skeletonization. Depending on operation type,
Tolerance may also be an option for operator. When using a tolerance, a tolerance (as
opposed to a condition) is defined. For example, in the context of Series Pipe Merging
where two pipes are being merged, a tolerance of 2-in. diameter means that those
pipes will only be merged if their diameters are within 2-in. of each other.
ValueThe label, units, and appropriate value range depend on the attribute you
select.
Junction Conditions and Tolerances
The Junction Condition Editor lets you set selective parameters that determine which
junctions are included in the Branch Collapsing process.
AttributeSelect the Attribute that you want to use to determine which junctions to
trim. These include:
Base Demand
Emitter Coefficient
Elevation
OperatorSelect an operator that defines the relationship between the attribute you
select and the value you select for that attribute. For example, if you select an attribute
of Base Demand, an operator of Less Than, and a value of 50 gpm, any pipes with end
nodes with a base demand less than 50 gpm are valid for skeletonization.
ValueThe label, units, and appropriate value range depend on the attribute you
select.
Junction tolerances are only evaluated against junctions. For example, if two series
pipes are to be merged, but their common node is a pump, any defined junction toler-
ance is evaluated based on the two end nodes only.
Where only one junction exists, as may be the case when allowing skeletonization of
TCVs, tolerance conditions are not evaluated and do not limit the scope of the skele-
tonization.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-719
18.5 Important Skelebrator Information
Consider the following before using Skelebrator:
Backing Up Your Model on page 18-719
Skeletonization and Scenarios on page 18-719
Importing/Exporting Skelebrator Settings on page 18-721
Skeletonization and Active Topology on page 18-722
18.5.1 Backing Up Your Model
Note: We strongly recommended that you first make a copy of your
model as a safe guard before proceeding with Skelebration.
In ArcGIS (ArcCatalog or ArcMap), there is no ability to undo your changes after they
have been made. Skelebrator makes transactions against the GEMS database without
the ability to rollback those changes. From within WaterCAD v6 (Stand Alone or
AutoCAD), and WaterGEMS Modeler, changes can be undone on a global level by
not saving the model after skeletonizing. However, any changes made prior to skele-
bration will also be lost if this method of avoiding committing skeletonization changes
is used.
Making a copy of your model up front will ensure that you can always get back to
your original model if problems occur.
18.5.2 Skeletonization and Scenarios
Note: Before you use Skelebrator, we strongly recommended that you
eliminate from your model all scenarios other than the one to be
skeletonized.
Skelebrator is designed to skeletonize a single scenario at a time. Specifically, skele-
brator modifies information in the set of alternatives (topological, demand, physical
etc.) that are referred to by the currently selected scenario. It follows that any other
scenarios that refer to these alternatives in some way can also potentially be modified
by skeletonization, but most likely in an undesirable and inconsistent way, since skel-
etonization only works on the data in the alternatives referenced by the currently
active scenario.
For example, a second scenario that references all the same alternatives as the scenario
being skeletonized except for, say, the demand alternative, will itself be seemingly
skeletonized (its topological and physical alternatives etc are modified) except that the
values of demands in its local demand records have no way of being factored into the
Important Skelebrator Information
18-720 WaterCAD Users Manual
skeletonization process. Due to this, demands may actually be lost since pipes that
were deleted (e.g., dead ends) did not have their local demands relocated upstream.
Relocated demands will represent the result of merging the demands in the parent
alternative, and not those of the child alternative where local records are present.
Due to the behavior of skeletonization with respect to scenarios and alternatives, and
to save possible confusion after skeletonization, it is very strongly recommended that
you eliminate all other scenarios (other than the one to be skeletonized) from the
model prior to skeletonization. Some exceptions, however, exist to this recommenda-
tion and may provide some additional flexibility to those users who have a strong
desire to skeletonize multiple scenarios. In general, it is strongly recommended that
multiple scenario skeletonization be avoided.
A multiple scenario model can be successfully skeletonized only if all of the following
conditions are met:
All scenarios all belong to the same parent-child hierarchy
The scenario being selected for skeletonization must contain only parent (base)
alternatives
All elements that reference local records in any child alternative are protected
from skeletonization
As a simple example, consider a model with two scenarios, Base and Fire Flow. The
Base scenario references a set of parent (base) alternatives, and the Fire Flow scenario
references all the same alternatives, except for the demand alternative, where it refer-
ences a child alternative of the Base scenario demand alternative, with local records at
junctions A-90 and A-100 which are to model the additional flow at the fire flow junc-
tions. This model meets all of the above 3 conditions and thus skeletonization of this
model can be conducted successfully for all scenarios in the model, but only if all of
the following skeletonization rules are adhered to:
The Base scenario is always selected for skeletonization
The elements associated with local demand records (i.e., junctions A-90 and A-
100 in our example) are protected from skeletonization using the Skelebrator
element protection feature
The reason the base scenario (a) must be selected for skeletonization is so that only
parent (base) alternatives are modified by skeletonization. This is so that changes
made to alternatives propagate down the parent-child hierarchy. If skeletonization was
to occur on a scenario that referenced child alternatives, then the changes made to the
scenario will not propagate back up the parent-child hierarchy, and would result in
incorrect results.
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-721
The reason for the element protections (b) is to limit the scope of skeletonization to
the data common to both scenarios. That is, any model elements that possess any local
records in any referenced child alternative, are excluded from the skeletonization
since the differences in properties between the child and parent alternatives cannot be
resolved in a skeletonization process that acts for all intents and purposes on a single
scenario. This idiom can be extended to other alternative types besides the demand
alternative.
18.5.3 Importing/Exporting Skelebrator Settings
Note: We strongly recommended that you review protected element
settings when importing an .SKE file that was created using a
different model.
Skeletonization settings can be saved and restored by using Skelebrators import/
export feature. This feature allows all skeletonization settings to be retained and
reused later on the same computer, or on different computers as required.
In addition to saving skelebrator operations and batch run settings, protected element
information is saved. Ideally, this information should be stored only with the model
that it pertains to, because it only makes sense for that model, but that limitation
would prevent skelebrator settings to be shared between different projects or users.
The caveat of allowing protected element information to be saved in a file that is sepa-
rate to the original model, and thus be able to be shared between users, is that the situ-
ation is created whereby importing an .SKE file that was created with another model
can result in meaningless protected element information being imported, in the
context of the new model.
However, your protected element information will probably be valid if you import a
skelebrator .SKE file that was created using the same original model, or a model that
is closely related to the original. The reason for this is that protected element informa-
tion is stored in an .SKE file by recording the elements GEMS IDs from the GEMS
database. For the same or closely related models, the same pipes and junctions will
still have the same GEMS IDs and, so will remain correctly protected.
Protected element behavior for imported files is not guaranteed because a potential
problem arises when elements that were deleted from the model were previously
marked as protected and where the following three things have happened in order:
1. Modeling elements (pipes, junctions) have been deleted from the model.
2. The model database is compacted (thus making available the IDs of deleted
elements for new ones).
3. New elements (pipes, junctions) have been added to the model after compaction,
potentially using IDs of elements that have been deleted earlier.
Important Skelebrator Information
18-722 WaterCAD Users Manual
From the above steps, it is possible that the IDs of new pipe or junction elements are
the same as previously protected and deleted elements, thereby causing the new
elements to be protected from skeletonization when they should not necessarily be
protected.
Even though the above protected-element behavior is conservative by nature, it is
recommended that you review protected element information after importing an .SKE
file to make sure that it is correct for your intended skeletonization purposes.
18.5.4 Skeletonization and Active Topology
Skeletonization occurs on only active topology, but considers all topology. That is,
any inactive topology of a model is unable to be skeletonized, but is not outright
ignored for skeletonization purposes. This fact can be used to perform spatial skele-
tonization. For example, if you only wish to skeletonize a portion of your model, you
can temporarily deactivate the topology you wish to be immune to skeletonization,
remembering of course, to reactivate it after you have completed the skeletonization
process. Any points where inactive topology ties in to the active topology will not be
compromised. To better explain this, consider two series pipes that are not merged by
series pipe removal. Under most circumstances two series pipes that meet the
following conditions will be skeletonized:
Meet topological criteria (e.g., that the two pipes are in series and have a common
node that is legal to remove, i.e., not a tank, reservoir, valve or pump)
Meet all conditional and tolerance based criteria
Are not protected from skeletonization
Have a common node that is not protected from skeletonization
Have no simple control or logical control references
Have no calibration references including to the junctions they are routed between
Are routed between nodes that are free of references from variable speed pumps
(VSPs)
Are routed between nodes that are free from Water Quality (WQ) trace analysis
references
Are routed between nodes that represent at least one junction, if the common node
is a loaded junction (so the load can be distributed)
Do not have opposing check valves
Automated Skeletonization
WaterCAD Users Manual 18-723
The two series pipes still may not be skeletonized if any inactive topology could be
affected by the execution of the skeletonization action. For example, if the two series
pipes have an additional, but inactive pipe connected to their common node, and if the
series pipe removal action was allowed to proceed, the common node would be
removed from the model, and the inactive topology would become invalid. This is
prevented from occurring in Skelebrator.
Important Skelebrator Information
18-724 WaterCAD Users Manual
WaterCAD Users Manual 19-725
19
Chapter
WaterSafe
WaterSafe is an extension of the WaterCAD water quality simulation capability. It
allows you to run multiple constituent, trace, and age analyses, and it also incorporates
previously unavailable statistical results. Enhanced reporting and graphing capabili-
ties improve your ability to compare, examine and predict the effects of various water
quality scenarios.
19.1 WaterSafe Manager
The WaterSafe Manager provides a central location to store and manage your Water-
Safe analysis projects. It is divided into two panesthe left pane allows you to select
the analysis type, while the right pane displays all of the projects of the highlighted
type. For instance, highlighting Trace Analysis in the left pane will cause all of the
previously created Trace Analysis projects to be displayed in the right pane.
Above the right pane are eight command buttons, as follows:
NewThis command creates a new analysis project of the currently high-
lighted type.
EditThis command opens the Analysis Project Editor for the currently high-
lighted analysis project.
RenameThis command allows you to rename the currently highlighted
analysis project.
DuplicateThis command creates a copy of the currently highlighted anal-
ysis project.
DeleteThis command removes the currently highlighted analysis project.
GoThis command calculates the currently highlighted analysis project.
GraphThis command opens the WaterSafe graph manager.
Trace Analysis Project Editor
19-726 WaterCAD Users Manual
ReportThis command opens the WaterSafe report manager.
19.2 Trace Analysis Project Editor
The trace analysis editor allows you to create trace analysis projects. First, a scenario
is chosen from the Select Scenario menu. The scenario that is selected will specify the
active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that
will be used while calculating the analysis project. The dialog box contains the
following controls:
ScenarioThe scenario chosen in the Scenario menu dictates the active topology,
physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that will be used while
calculating the analysis project.
Start TimeThe Start Time specifies the beginning of the time period that the anal-
ysis project will simulate. Any time-based controls that are applied in the scenarios
operational alternative will be affected by the start time chosen here.
DurationThe Start Time specifies the length of the time period that the analysis
project will simulate.
Hydraulic Time StepEnter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for this
calculation. The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the hydraulic
conditions of the network are assumed to be constant.
Trace NodeThe Trace Node pane lists the nodes that will be included in the trace
analysis project. To add elements to the list pane (and thus, to the analysis project)
click the Insert button. After at least one element has been added to the list pane, you
can remove elements from the list pane by highlighting them and clicking the Delete
button.
19.2.1 Select Trace Nodes Dialog Box
The Select Trace Nodes dialog box allows you to select the trace nodes that will be
included in the trace analysis project. The dialog box is divided into two panes:
The Type menu allows you to filter the elements that are available in the left pane. The
left pane contains the nodes that are available for inclusion in the analysis project, as
modified by the Type menu. By default, the Water Sources option is selected here,
which enables display of all source nodes. Selecting Junction, for instance, causes the
left pane to display only junction nodes; selecting Tanks displays only tanks in the left
pane, and so on.
WaterSafe
WaterCAD Users Manual 19-727
The right pane contains the nodes that have been selected for inclusion in the analysis
project.
Elements can be moved between the panes using the following buttons:
[>]This button moves the highlighted element from the left pane to the right pane.
[>>]This button moves all of the elements in the left pane to the right pane.
[<]This button moves the highlighted element from the right pane to the left pane.
[<<]This button moves all of the elements in the right pane to the left pane.
Additionally, single elements can be moved from one pane to the other by simply
double-clicking them.
19.3 Constituent Analysis Project Editor
The constituent analysis editor allows you to create constituent analysis projects. First,
a scenario is chosen from the Select Scenario menu. The scenario that is selected will
specify the active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alterna-
tives that will be used while calculating the analysis project. The dialog box contains
the following controls:
ScenarioThe scenario chosen in the Scenario menu dictates the active topology,
physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that will be used while
calculating the analysis project.
Start TimeThe Start Time specifies the beginning of the time period that the anal-
ysis project will simulate. Any time-based controls that are applied in the scenarios
operational alternative will be affected by the start time chosen here.
DurationThe Start Time specifies the length of the time period that the analysis
project will simulate.
Hydraulic Time StepEnter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for this
calculation. The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the hydraulic
conditions of the network are assumed to be constant.
Age Analysis Project Editor
19-728 WaterCAD Users Manual
Constituent AlternativeThe Constituent Alternative pane lists the alternatives that
will be included in the constituent analysis project. To add alternatives to the list pane
(and thus, to the analysis project) click the Insert button. After at least one alternative
has been added to the list pane, you can remove alternatives from the list pane by
highlighting them and clicking the Delete button.
19.3.1 Select Constituent Alternatives Dialog Box
The Select Constituent Alternatives dialog box allows you to select the constituent
alternatives that will be included in the constituent analysis project. The dialog box is
divided into two panes:
The left pane contains the alternatives that are available for inclusion in the analysis
project.
The right pane contains the alternatives that have been selected for inclusion in the
analysis project.
Alternatives can be moved between the panes using the following buttons:
[>]This button moves the highlighted alternative from the left pane to the right
pane.
[>>]This button moves all of the alternatives in the left pane to the right pane.
[<]This button moves the highlighted alternative from the right pane to the left
pane.
[<<]This button moves all of the alternatives in the right pane to the left pane.
Additionally, single alternatives can be moved from one pane to the other by simply
double-clicking them.
19.4 Age Analysis Project Editor
The age analysis editor allows you to create age analysis projects. First, a scenario is
chosen from the Select Scenario menu. The scenario that is selected will specify the
active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that
will be used while calculating the analysis project. The dialog box contains the
following controls:
ScenarioThe scenario chosen in the Scenario menu dictates the active topology,
physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that will be used while
calculating the analysis project.
WaterSafe
WaterCAD Users Manual 19-729
Start TimeThe Start Time specifies the beginning of the time period that the anal-
ysis project will simulate. Any time-based controls that are applied in the scenarios
operational alternative will be affected by the start time chosen here.
DurationThe Start Time specifies the length of the time period that the analysis
project will simulate.
Hydraulic Time StepEnter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for this
calculation. The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the hydraulic
conditions of the network are assumed to be constant.
Age AlternativeThe Age Alternative pane lists the alternatives that will be
included in the age analysis project. To add alternatives to the list pane (and thus, to
the analysis project) click the Insert button. After at least one alternative has been
added to the list pane, you can remove alternatives from the list pane by highlighting
them and clicking the Delete button.
19.4.1 Select Age Alternative Dialog Box
The Select Age Alternatives dialog box allows you to select the age alternatives that
will be included in the age analysis project. The dialog box is divided into two panes:
The left pane contains the alternatives that are available for inclusion in the analysis
project.
The right pane contains the alternatives that have been selected for inclusion in the
analysis project.
Alternatives can be moved between the panes using the following buttons:
[>]This button moves the highlighted alternative from the left pane to the right
pane.
[>>]This button moves all of the alternatives in the left pane to the right pane.
[<]This button moves the highlighted alternative from the right pane to the left
pane.
[<<]This button moves all of the alternatives in the right pane to the left pane.
Additionally, single alternatives can be moved from one pane to the other by simply
double-clicking them.
Graphing
19-730 WaterCAD Users Manual
19.5 Graphing
Graphing includes:
Graph Setup on page 19-730
Graph Display on page 19-731
Statistics Report on page 19-734
WaterSafe Manager on page 19-725
19.5.1 Graph Setup
The graph setup dialog boxes for each analysis project type allow you to specify the
elements that will be graphed.
Trace Analysis Graph Setup
The Trace Analysis graph setup dialog box consists of a drop-down list that lets you
select the element type and two panes that allow you to select the elements to be
graphed.
The left pane contains all of the available elements of the type specified in the
Element Type drop-down list.
The right pane contains all of the elements that have been selected for inclusion in the
graph.
Elements can be moved between the panes using the following buttons:
[>]This button moves the highlighted element from the left pane to the right pane.
[<]This button moves the highlighted element from the right pane to the left pane.
Additionally, single elements can be moved from one pane to the other by simply
double-clicking them.
Constituent Analysis Graph Setup
The Constituent Analysis graph setup dialog box consists of a drop-down list that lets
you select the element type and two panes that allow you to select the elements to be
graphed.
The left pane contains all of the available elements of the type specified in the
Element Type drop-down list.
WaterSafe
WaterCAD Users Manual 19-731
The right pane contains all of the elements that have been selected for inclusion in the
graph.
Elements can be moved between the panes using the following buttons:
[>]This button moves the highlighted element from the left pane to the right pane.
[<]This button moves the highlighted element from the right pane to the left pane.
Additionally, single elements can be moved from one pane to the other by simply
double-clicking them.
Age Analysis Graph Setup
The Age Analysis graph setup dialog box consists of a drop-down list that lets you
select the element type and two panes that allow you to select the elements to be
graphed.
The left pane contains all of the available elements of the type specified in the
Element Type drop-down list.
The right pane contains all of the elements that have been selected for inclusion in the
graph.
Elements can be moved between the panes using the following buttons:
[>]This button moves the highlighted element from the left pane to the right pane.
[<]This button moves the highlighted element from the right pane to the left pane.
Additionally, single elements can be moved from one pane to the other by simply
double-clicking them.
19.5.2 Graph Display
The graph display window allows you to view graphs and change graph settings as
desired.
The following time step controls are available in this dialog box:
Graphing
19-732 WaterCAD Users Manual
Above the graph display are the time step and animation controls. These include
VCR-style controls to move through the time steps or to animate the graph view and
the Increment combo box which controls how many time steps are skipped when the
Forward or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also controls which time steps
are displayed during animation.
By clicking the down arrow next to the Play button, you can access the following
Animation Options:
Animation DelayOpens a dialog box that allows you to set the delay between
animated frames.
Animate All WindowsIf this option is selected, every window capable of being
animated will then animate when the play button is clicked. If the option is not
selected, then only the current window will animate.
If you right-click with the mouse over the drawing pane, a context menu appears,
offering the following options:
Copy ImageThis command copies the currently displayed graph to the clip-
board, to be pasted into a compatible graphics application.
Copy FormatThis command stores the settings used by the current graph to be
re-used in another graph. To re-use a copied format, right-click and choose Paste
Format.
Paste FormatThis command applies to the current graph settings that were
previously copied from another graph. To copy settings from another graph, right-
click and choose Copy Format.
Graph SetupThis command opens the GeoGrapher Graph Setup dialog box
(see GeoGrapher Graph Setup on page 13-584).
Graph OptionsThis command opens the GeoGrapher Options dialog box (see
GeoGrapher Options on page 13-585.
The main graph display pane has the following tabs:
GraphThis tab displays the current graph.
DataThis tab displays a tabular view of the data upon which the graph is based.
Note: The display units for the various attributes cannot be manually
changed through the graph display dialog box. Instead, the
graph will automatically use the unit that is assigned to a given
attribute in the WaterCAD project. To change the unit that is
used, first change it in the project (seeFlexUnits on page 4-244),
then open WaterSafe and create your graph.
The following buttons are found along the top of the graph display dialog box:
WaterSafe
WaterCAD Users Manual 19-733
Bar and Pie Graphs
You can display bar and pie graphs in conjunction with the main graph view by
clicking the Add Pie/Bar Graph button. A dialog box containing the pie or bar graph
will appear attached (docked) to the left side of the main graph dialog box. The
following options are available when the right mouse button is clicked over the bar/pie
graph dialog box:
Copy ImageThis command copies the currently displayed graph to the clip-
board, to be pasted into a compatible graphics application.
Copy FormatThis command stores the settings used by the current graph to be
re-used in another graph. To re-use a copied format, right-click and choose Paste
Format.
ExportExports the current graph image or data.
PrintPrints the current graph.
Print PreviewDisplays a preview of the graph as it will be printed.
Activate/Deactivate ZoomThis toggle button enables you to
magnify any area of the graph by click-dragging a selection box around
it.
Zoom ExtentsDisplays graph at the default (fully zoomed out)
magnification and view.
RefreshUpdates current graph display to reflect current changes.
Graph SetupOpens a dialog box that allows you to change graph
settings.
Graph OptionsOpens the Graph Options dialog box.
Add Pie/Bar GraphAdds a Pie or Bar graph to the graph display.
Statistics Report
19-734 WaterCAD Users Manual
Paste FormatThis command applies to the current graph settings that were
previously copied from another graph. To copy settings from another graph, right-
click and choose Copy Format.
Graph OptionsThis command opens the GeoGrapher Options dialog box (see
GeoGrapher Options on page 13-585).
Print PreviewThis command opens the print preview dialog box for the graph
display (see Table Print Preview Dialog Box on page 19-736).
3DToggles 3 dimensional perspective on/off.
Marks VisibleToggles labels detailing graph values on/off.
19.5.3 Graph Print Preview Dialog Box
This dialog box displays a print preview of the current pie or bar chart. The dialog box
contains two radio buttons that allow you to select the page orientation, as follows:
PortraitWhen this button is selected, the chart will be printed in portrait orien-
tation (page will be taller than it is wide).
LandscapeWhen this button is selected, the chart will be printed in landscape
orientation (page will be wider than it is tall).
Clicking the Print button sends the currently displayed printer to the default printer.
The Preview Chart dialog box is accessible by right-clicking on the bar/pie chart and
selecting Print Preview.
19.6 Statistics Report
The Statistics Report dialog box consists of the following items:
ExportThis button exports the currently displayed table as a comma-delimited text
file.
CopyThis button copies the currently displayed table to the Windows clipboard.
PrintThis button prints the currently displayed table.
PreviewThis button opens the Table Print Preview Dialog Box on page 19-736,
allowing you to display a print preview of the currently displayed table.
Color CodingColor Coding allows you to automatically create user-defined
attributes for the statistical results contained in the table. In WaterCAD, color coding
can then be applied to the model based on the new user defined attributes. Clicking
this button opens the Color Coding Dialog Box on page 19-736.
WaterSafe
WaterCAD Users Manual 19-735
Report VariableThis menu changes depending on the type of analysis project that
is being viewed.
Trace NodeThis drop-down list appears on the statistical reports for trace anal-
ysis projects. The options included in the list are the trace nodes that were selected
in the trace analysis project editor.
AlternativeThis drop-down list appears on the statistical reports for constituent
and age analysis projects. The options included in the list are the alternatives that
were selected in the constituent or age analysis project editor.
Start TimeThis menu, in conjunction with the Finish Time drop-down list, allows
you to select the time frame that is presented in the report. Select the hour at which
you want the report to begin.
Finish TimeThis menu, in conjunction with the Start Time drop-down list, allows
you to select the time frame that is presented in the report. Select the hour at which
you want the report to end.
Tip: The table can be sorted by any of the column attributes. Click
the column heading once to sort ascending and twice to sort
descending.
Columns and rows can be manually resized. Hover the mouse
cursor over the break between the row or column headings. The
mouse cursor will change to a double-headed arrow. Click and
hold the mouse button and a line will appear, displaying the new
position of the row or column break. Drag this line to the desired
position of the new break.
Tabular ReportThis table is the main body of the report dialog box. The various
statistical results are displayed here in tabular format.
Node TabThis table displays statistical results for all of the nodes contained in
the scenario that was chosen during the analysis project setup.
Links TabThis table displays statistical results for all of the pipes contained in
the scenario that was chosen during the analysis project setup.
Statistics Report
19-736 WaterCAD Users Manual
19.6.1 Color Coding Dialog Box
The Color Coding dialog box allows you to create user defined attributes in your
WaterCAD model based on the statistical analysis attributes displayed in the table.
You can then color-code by these user defined attributes in WaterCAD.
The dialog box consists of a check box for each of the statistical attributes in the
report; Average, Variance, Deviation, Minimum, Maximum, Min. Record Time, and
Max Record Time. There is also an All check box which selects all of the attributes.
Place a check in the corresponding box of each of the attributes for which you want a
user-defined attribute to be created, then click the OK button.
19.6.2 Table Print Preview Dialog Box
The Print Preview dialog box displays the tabular report as it will appear when
printed. The following controls are available in this dialog box:
PrintThis button prints the report as it appears in the preview pane.
ZoomThis button allows you to set the zoom level of the preview pane.
Preview Pane Layout ButtonsThis button allows you to control the number of pages
that are simultaneously displayed in the preview pane. The following choices are
available:
One Page
Two Pages
Three Pages
Four Pages
Six Pages
CloseCloses the print preview dialog box.
PageThis control allows you to select the page that is currently displayed in the
preview pane.
19.6.3 Statistical Report Attributes
The following attributes are calculated and displayed in the statistical report:
Average
WaterSafe
WaterCAD Users Manual 19-737
Trace AnalysisThe average flow percentage contributed to a node by a
trace source node over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time
and Finish Time.
Constituent AnalysisThe average concentration at a node for the simulated
constituent over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time and
Finish Time.
Maximum
Trace Analysisthe maximum flow percentage contributed to a node by a
trace source node over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time
and Finish Time.
Constituent AnalysisThe maximum concentration at a node for the simu-
lated constituent over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time
and Finish Time.
Max Record Time
Trace AnalysisThe hour during the specified time frame when the
Maximum flow percentage occurs.
Constituent AnalysisThe hour during the specified time frame when the
Maximum concentration occurs.
Minimum
Trace AnalysisThe minimum flow percentage contributed to a node by a
trace source node over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time
and Finish Time.
Constituent AnalysisThe minimum concentration at a node for the simu-
lated constituent over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time
and Finish Time.
Min. Record Time
Trace AnalysisThe hour during the specified time frame when the
Minimum flow percentage occurs.
Constituent AnalysisThe hour during the specified time frame when the
Minimum concentration occurs.
Statistics Report
19-738 WaterCAD Users Manual
19.6.4 Graph Unit Selection Dialog Box
The Unit Selection dialog box allows you to set the parameters for all the units used.
The dialog box consists of the following controls:
UnitType of measurement displayed. To change the unit of an attribute type,
click the choice list and click the unit you want. This option allows you to use
both US Customary and SI units.
Display PrecisionRounding of numbers and number of digits displayed after
the decimal point. Enter a negative number for rounding to the nearest power of
10: (-1) rounds to 10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to 1000, and so on. Enter a
number from 0 to 15 to indicate the number of digits after the decimal point. This
feature works the same whether scientific notation is on or off.
Scientific NotationDisplays numbers in scientific notation. Click the field to
turn scientific notation on or off. If it is turned on, a check mark appears in the
box.
19.6.5 Table Unit Selection Dialog Box
The Unit Selection dialog box allows you to set the parameters for all the units used.
The dialog box consists of the following controls:
ValueDisplays the value of the currently highlighted cell.
UnitType of measurement displayed. To change the unit of an attribute type,
click the choice list and click the unit you want. This option allows you to use
both US Customary and SI units.
Display PrecisionRounding of numbers and number of digits displayed after
the decimal point. Enter a negative number for rounding to the nearest power of
10: (-1) rounds to 10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to 1000, and so on. Enter a
number from 0 to 15 to indicate the number of digits after the decimal point. This
feature works the same whether scientific notation is on or off.
Scientific NotationDisplays numbers in scientific notation. Click the field to
turn scientific notation on or off. If it is turned on, a check mark appears in the
box.
WaterCAD Users Manual A-739
A
Appendix
Frequently Asked
Questions
A.1 Overview: How Do I
How Do I tips are available in the following categories:
Import/Export Tips on page A-740
Modeling Tips on page A-749
Display Tips on page A-765
Editing Tips on page A-767
Extensive, up-to-date tips are available at your fingertips by clicking the
Globe button. This will take you to the Bentley Select area of Bentley
Systems web site, where you will be able to look up Frequently Asked Ques-
tions (FAQs), modeling tips, and other useful information in our Knowledge Base and
do a search on any keywords. This area of the website is only available if you are
participating in the Bentley Select program.
If the information you need is not available in this section, click the Search tab at the
top of the Help window for an index. To make your work easier, WaterCAD and the
Help system are designed to be used together. If you have a high-resolution display
monitor, you will probably find it helpful to size the frames of both the program and
the Help windows so that they fit side by side. Then, while using the program, you can
use the right mouse button or the Help button in any dialog box to update the Help
window with context-sensitive Help.
Import/Export Tips
A-740 WaterCAD Users Manual
A.2 Import/Export Tips
Note: You can import data from virtually any model using our intuitive
and powerful Database Connections and Shapefile Connections
(see Shapefile Connections on page 15-647) feature.
The following tips will be covered in this section:
Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions on page A-740
Transitioning from Cybernet v2 on page A-741
Importing EPANET Files on page A-747
Importing KYPIPE Data on page A-747
Importing Spot Elevations on page A-748
Exporting Spot Elevations on page A-748
A.2.1 Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet
Versions
You can import data from the following versions:
Cybernet v1 Drawing
Cybernet v2 drawing
WaterCAD/Cybernet v3 and v4 Files
Cybernet v1 Drawing
No support is available for importing a Cybernet v1 drawing directly into WaterCAD.
If you want to import a Cybernet v1 drawing, load it into Cybernet v2 (for DOS) and
re-save the data as a Cybernet v2 drawing. The data can then be imported into
WaterCAD following the procedure described below.
If you are running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, open the drawing that contains the
Cybernet v2 data. The import Wizard of WaterCAD will automatically begin
importing the data.
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-741
Cybernet v2 drawing
If you are running WaterCAD in Stand-Alone mode, you must first convert the
Cybernet v2 drawing into a special C2W file format that can then be imported into
WaterCAD. This is accomplished by using one of the C2W utilities inside any of the
following AutoCAD versions: AutoCAD 12, 13 DOS, 13 Windows, 14, 2000, or
2002. Consult the C2W Utility Help.pdf located in your WaterCAD/Util folder for
specifics on its use.
Note: Because the color coding legend is comprised of native entities,
the built-in conversion is unable to automatically remove these
elements. In WaterCAD v3.0 and up in AutoCAD mode, color
coding legends are block inserts. If your Cybernet v2 drawing
contains legends, you must manually edit these out of the
drawing.
When using the C2W utility in AutoCAD 12 or 13, there are certain limitations to the
amount of data imported:
Only Cybernet v2 base data is imported. No change records in Cybernet scenarios
are supported.
Cybernet multi-point pump curves are not supported. The C2W utility converts
the pump to a standard three-point curve pump. This may not be the optimum
solution for the multi-point curve. Validate the points chosen, and consider manu-
ally entering the multi-point data.
Cybernet demand patterns are not imported. However, junction node demand type
data is imported. Use the Pattern Manager to enter the Cybernet Extended Period
Simulation GDF curves.
WaterCAD/Cybernet v3 and v4 Files
Open the WaterCAD v3 or v4 file, or import the .WCD file as you normally would in
WaterCAD/Cybernet v3. The .WCD file will be automatically converted to the
WaterCAD format. Once you save this file in WaterCAD, it can no longer be opened
in WaterCAD/Cybernet v3/ v4.
A.2.2 Transitioning from Cybernet v2
This section is intended to offer you some insight about the tools in this version of
WaterCAD that are different from Cybernet v2 methods.
We have seen the questions that arise in technical support. We designed WaterCAD
v3, v4, and v5 specifically to help you avoid many of these problems, while offering
even more flexibility and a much friendlier interface.
Import/Export Tips
A-742 WaterCAD Users Manual
Working with the Graphical Editor
One of the first differences between WaterCAD and previous versions of WaterCAD
is the interface, aside from just the difference of WaterCAD being a Windows applica-
tion. For more information, see AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout on page 17-670.
WaterCAD actually has two interfaces, one for AutoCAD (called WaterCAD
AutoCAD mode), and our own CAD-style Stand-Alone interface (called WaterCAD
Stand-Alone Mode). For more information, see Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode
on page 2-32.
This offers an amazing amount of flexibility, especially since both interfaces can be
used with the exact same hydraulic model. Organizations now have the flexibility to
allow AutoCAD users and non-AutoCAD users to work with the same model, without
struggling through any type of intermediate conversion. Even the style of the two
interfaces is similar with identical toolbars and menus.
Where is the Modeling Control Center (MCC)?
The Modeling Control Center in Cybernet v2 served two purposes: tabular reporting
and scenario management (including calculation). In WaterCAD, these same purposes
are served by two separate objects, which are each better than anything that has come
before: FlexTables and Scenario Management.
Report Tables (FlexTables)
In Cybernet v2, you were provided with a tabular view of the network that was a bit
inflexible and tedious at times. WaterCAD FlexTables provide tabular reporting tools
that are so powerful and flexible that you can perform your typical tasks in less time
than it used to take you just to enter the MCC.
With features like sorting, filtering, and global editing, you can review and adjust your
data in a fraction of the time it used to take, and with none of the hassle. Even the vari-
ables and sequences that are presented in tabular form are totally customizable to fit
your needs.
For more information, see FlexTables on page 7-323.
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-743
Links to Graphical Information Systems (GIS) and Databases
One of the most exciting developments of the software industry in the 1990s has been
the push for data reuse. Constantly improving database capabilities, published file
formats (such as the shapefile format), and even tools as simple as the Windows clip-
board are all contributing to a level of data sharing that has never been seen before.
WaterCAD is right there on the leading edge.
With WaterCAD database connectivity, your hydraulic model can easily be linked to
virtually any major database, spreadsheet, or GIS product currently in use today.
Shapefile wizards and flexible database linking tools make the process simple and
straightforward, without anchoring you to a specific database layout or units system.
For more information, see Shapefile and Database Connections on page 15-633.
Scenario Management
Cybernet v2 had two levels of definition: the base data as entered in the AutoCAD
interface or through the Edit menu in the MCC, and scenario changes as entered
through the Setup Analysis menu. Although this was far better than any competing
scenario management, it was very limited and certainly not oriented toward data-
reuse.
WaterCAD has a whole new outlook on scenarios, stemming from the basic principle
that every system has unknowns. If there is only one unknown, such as junction
demand, for example, the options are quite simple. With the addition of more
unknowns, the options quickly become difficult to manage. How can a modeler keep
track of so many unknowns? Through alternatives and inheritance.
Alternatives are collections of very specific data, such as junction demands, or pump
and valve operational settings. A scenario references a certain combination of these
alternatives, similar to a slot machine rolling different symbols in and out of each
position. Rather than several similar scenarios each holding onto individually adjusted
data, they can instead each reference some of the same alternatives (just as several slot
machine combinations can show the same symbol). This not only allows for far more
flexibility, it also greatly reduces the amount of data that is handled. This greatly
reduces the chance of that data being mishandled.
Inheritance is another attribute of WaterCAD scenario management that adds a level
of functionality that has never existed before. In Cybernet v2, each scenario essen-
tially inherited data from the base model, unless a specific change was made. As
mentioned above, this is fine for individual changes, but it falls apart for subsequent
changes. Consider, for example, a system that is to have pipes replaced in phases.
Phase I changes inherit from the base model, but then what happens for Phase II?
Repeat all of the changes from Phase I, and add the changes for Phase II? And then
again for Phase III? It is too easy to overlook a change and make simple typographical
errors.
Import/Export Tips
A-744 WaterCAD Users Manual
In WaterCAD, there is no limit to the extent of inheritance that could exist. To follow
the example given above, Phase II inherits its data from Phase I, and then has what-
ever changes are specific to Phase II rehabilitation. Likewise, Phase III inherits from
Phase II, and so on. Best of all, if something changes in Phase I, that change is inher-
ited through the hierarchy such that all of the children (Phase II, Phase III, etc.) reflect
the new data.
There is a scenario tutorial for the Stand-Alone editor, and there is a scenario Wizard
to help you through your first few scenario creations. Once you have seen what alter-
natives and inheritance can do for your model, you will be glad that you spent a few
minutes becoming familiar with them.
For more information, see Scenarios/Alternatives on page 8-339.
Using the Scenario Control Center
Scenario functionality is extended even further by the presence of comparative tools,
such as graphing. Scenario results can be directly compared graphically, plotting all of
the scenarios on the same axes. This means that determining the effects of things such
as system expansion, future demand increases, and pipe deterioration can all be seen
within seconds of running the models.
Combined with batch runs, which is running several scenarios in sequence, scenario
management has reached a level that most modelers have only dreamed of until now.
For more information, see Scenario Control Center on page 8-360.
Demand Alternatives
With the new scenario management, demand loading also has all new flexibility.
Rather than being limited to Avg. Day, Max Day, Peak Hr., User 1 and User 2, there
are an unlimited number of demand alternatives available in WaterCAD. You can still
have global demand and global roughness factors for your WaterCAD model, so you
can make minor adjustments during calibration without having to generate new alter-
natives.
For more information, see Demand Alternative on page 8-348.
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-745
Composite Demands
As well as having an unlimited number of demand alternatives, there is also no limit to
the number of different demand types you can have. Cybernet v2 was limited to five
demand types (1, 2, 3, 4, and Fixed), but WaterCAD allows as many different types
necessary. Also, they can have alpha-numeric labels, such as Residential, Commer-
cial, and Industry XYZ. This enables you to model service connections with much
more detail, because you can specify diurnal demand patterns for any number of
special individual customers.
In addition to demands, WaterCAD also provides inflow, or flows that are introduced
into the system.
Perhaps the best improvement for demands, however, is the ability to attribute more
than one type of demand to a given junction node. An unlimited number of different
customer types can all contribute to the total demand at a single junction, so there is no
need to estimate an equivalent demand type or add another demand type to a fake
junction immediately adjacent to another node.
For more information, see Demand on page 6-294.
Control Valves
Cybernet v2 provided you with three types of controlling valves: Pressure Reducing
Valves (PRVs), Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSVs), and Flow Control Valves (FCVs).
WaterCAD also provides them, plus two additional types: Pressure Breaker Valves
(PBVs) that create a constant headloss across the valve, and Throttle Control Valves
(TCVs) that allow you to adjust minor loss coefficients based on system pressures,
HGLs, or time.
Cybernet v2 also allowed a valve setting of Maintain Always for PRVs and FCVs.
These settings were primarily used to simulate a pump for preliminary design work.
Through numerous support calls and dozens of inaccurate models, however, we found
that this feature was often misused, resulting in frustration. These Maintain Always
settings are no longer supported in WaterCAD. Instead, we offer a wider variety of
pump options to encourage modelers to make better educated guesses and better
preliminary design decisions.
For more information, see Valve Theory on page B-792.
Import/Export Tips
A-746 WaterCAD Users Manual
Pumps and Pump Curves
Cybernet v2 pumps can be categorized as one of three types: constant horsepower,
three-point, and multi-point (up to eleven points).
In WaterCAD, three-point pump curves are still fully supported, as are multi-point
pump curves. In fact, there is no limit to the number of points you can enter to approx-
imate the pumps exponential curve.
Although we continue to discourage the use of constant horsepower pumps (for many
of the same reasons we discouraged the use of Maintain Always setting for valves),
this type of pump is still available in WaterCAD. However, do not use one unless you
have actually looked at a constant horsepower curve. It only resembles the shape of a
typical pump curve over a very short range near the best efficiency point, and diverges
from this curve rapidly as the curve becomes asymptotic to both the head and
discharge axes.
If you are performing a preliminary design or if you have another purpose that
requires you to estimate pump characteristics based on insufficient data, consider
using a one-point pump curve. This allows you to enter the design point and approxi-
mate a curve based on a typical pump curve. Of course, nothing beats having actual
pump test data so you can generate a truly accurate representation of your pump, and,
subsequently, an accurate representation of the remainder of your system.
For more information, see Pump Editor on page 6-273.
In Summary
There are many more features and enhancements in WaterCAD, and they appear in
every dialog box and button. The following are two very important points that we
would like to emphasize as you prepare to use WaterCAD for the first time:
Tutorials are available in the Stand-Alone editor for a deeper introduction to
nearly every topic, and there is context-sensitive online help available from
anywhere in the program by pressing the F1 key, or by clicking a Help button.
Dont be afraid to explore. Some of the neatest features can be easy to overlook.
Remember, whenever you see an Ellipsis () button it means that a special
feature is available. Play with the model, and most importantly, start to enjoy
modeling again.
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-747
A.2.3 Importing EPANET Files
Note: In EPANET, pumps and valves are modeled as links. In this
program, they are graphically modeled as node elements.
Hence, during an import, each EPANET valve and pump link is
replaced by two pipes and one pump or valve element. This will
not affect the behavior of these elements in your system.
In EPANET, tanks can have an optional inactive volume
parameter. If this parameter is omitted from the input file or a
zero is entered for this parameter, the EPANET numerical engine
will compute an inactive volume based on the tanks diameter
and the minimum level. To mimic this behavior, this software will
calculate the inactive volume and display it in the tank data upon
import of the file. When using this software, it is important to
remember that zero inactive volume means zero inactive
volume, and not some internally computed value.
Select File > Import > Network and choose EPANet (inp). Then, from the File Open
dialog box, select the file you would like to import. During the import procedure, you
will be prompted for a map scale factor (for more information, see Map Scale Factor
on page 4-240). You may also be asked to specify the Unit of Concentration (for more
information, see Concentration Units Import on page A-747).
Concentration Units Import
Select the unit of concentration that the data contained in the [QUALITY] section of
the EPANET file is in.
A.2.4 Importing KYPIPE Data
This program supports the import of KYPIPE 1.0, 2.0 and 3.0 data sets. If the data set
does not include geometry data, all nodes will be assigned a coordinate of (0,0). This
has no effect on the hydraulic state of the model. Pipe lengths will not be computed
based on the coordinates of the end nodes, but will be taken directly from the KYPIPE
data set.
This program only supports the import of the pipes and nodes of a KYPIPE model.
You must insert pumps, valves, and tanks into the current project.
Import/Export Tips
A-748 WaterCAD Users Manual
A.2.5 Importing Spot Elevations
A series of spot elevations can be imported from an ASCII text file, which might be
generated from a survey data recorder or another software program. These ASCII files
can contain a combination of the information that is required for spot elevations, such
as the label, coordinates, and elevation. The fields in the text file are usually separated
by either blank spaces or commas.
A.2.6 Exporting Spot Elevations
All of the spot elevations in the current project can be exported to an ASCII text file,
from which they can be brought into a spreadsheet, word processor, or other program.
These ASCII files can contain a combination of the information that is required for
spot elevations, such as the label, coordinates, and elevation. The fields in the text file
are usually separated by either blank spaces or commas.
A.2.7 Importing Database and Shapefile Data Created with
WaterCAD v3
As a result of overwhelming user feedback, as well as through a review of common
technical support questions, Bentley Systems has decided to make a fundamental
change in the way pump/valve connectivity is modeled. These elements are now
handled as nodes, whereas they were previously represented as links in database and
GIS connections prior to release of WaterCAD. Unfortunately, this change will affect
existing users who have built database connections using WaterCAD version 3.5 and
earlier. However, a survey of our customers has shown that nodes are the natural and
preferred way to represent a pump or valve in a database. The change is driven by the
desire to improve and enhance the mapping of these elements onto GIS and enterprise
data. Bentley Systems has invested significant effort to separate the model representa-
tion of pumps and valves from your view of these elements.
Specific changes are as follows:
Pumps and valves used to be represented in the model as links, and had To and
From Node attributes. Now pumps and valves are represented as nodes, and have
To and From Pipe attributes.
Pumps and valves exported to the Links Table will not be restored to the model. If
you try to import a Link Table with pumps and valves, they will be created as new
pipes of zero length and at coordinates of (0,0).
The import of pump and valve tables will work as expected, with the exception of
the items listed above.
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-749
A.2.8 Additional Considerations When Working with Large
Model Files
WaterCAD is designed to utilize up to 500 megabytes of RAM, even if your machine
has more memory available. The reason for this is that we found during testing that
increasing this amount prevented WaterCAD from running under certain machine
configurations. With the 500 MB setting, WaterCAD ran under all tested system
configurations while still allowing sufficient memory to run the vast majority of
models.
If you encounter a Non-Continuable Protection Violation or Out of Memory error
while working with a large model, you may be hitting the 500 MB limit. To increase
this limit:
1. Browse to your Wtrc folder and find the Wtrcsys.exe file.
2. Rename it to Wtrgsys_backup.exe.
3. Find the v10.exe file and rename it to Wtrcsys.exe.
4. Start WaterCAD.
5. If WaterCAD starts successfully, your machine configuration is compatible with
the higher memory setting. WaterCAD will now utilize up to 1000 MB of RAM.
Note: If WaterCAD does not start successfully, your computer
configuration is not able to utilize the higher memory setting.
Contact Bentley Systems Bentley Select Support for assistance.
If, after performing the above operation you continue to receive Non-Continuable
Protection Violation or Out of Memory errors, please contact Bentley Systems
Bentley Select Support for assistance.
A.3 Modeling Tips
The paragraph presents some FAQs related to modeling water distribution networks
with WaterCAD. Also, please keep in mind that Bentley Systems offers workshops in
North America and abroad throughout the year. These workshops cover these
modeling topics in depths and many more in a very effective manner. The following
modeling tips are presented:
Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank on page A-750
Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well on page A-750
Modeling Parallel Pipes on page A-751
Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series on page A-752
Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks on page A-753
Modeling Tips
A-750 WaterCAD Users Manual
Modeling Fire Hydrants on page A-753
Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main on page A-753
Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank on page A-755
A.3.1 Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank
Hydropneumatic tanks can be modeled using a regular tank element and converting
the tank pressures into equivalent water surface elevations. Based on the elevation
differences, the tanks cross-sectional area can then be determined.
For example, consider a hydropneumatic tank that operates between 50 psig and 60
psig. The tanks storage volume is approximately 50 cubic feet.
The tank base elevation is chosen to be equal to the ground elevation, and the pres-
sures are converted into feet of water (1 psi = 2.31 feet). It is apparent that the tank
operates between levels of 115.5 feet and 138.6 feet. The difference between the levels
is 23.1 feet, which brings us to a needed cross-section of 2.16 square feet.
A.3.2 Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well
A groundwater well is modeled using a combination of a reservoir and a pump. Set the
hydraulic grade line of the reservoir at the static groundwater elevation. The hydraulic
grade line can be entered on the reservoir tab of the reservoir editor dialog box, or
under the Reservoir Surface Elevation column heading in the Reservoir Report.
Pump curve data can be entered on the Pump Tab of the Pump Editor. The following
example will demonstrate how to adjust the manufacturers pump curve to account for
drawdown at higher pumping rates. Drawdown occurs when the well is not able to
recharge quickly enough to maintain the static groundwater elevation at high pumping
rates.
Figure A-1: Pump Curve Accounting for Drawdown
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-751
EXAMPLE:
The pump manufacturer provides the following data in a pump catalog:
Based on field conditions and test results, the following drawdown data is known:
To account for the drawdown, the pump curves should be offset by the difference
between the static and pumped groundwater elevations. Subtract the drawdown
amount from the pump head, and use these new values for your pump curve head data.
The following adjusted pump curve data is based on the drawdown and the manufac-
turers pump data.
A.3.3 Modeling Parallel Pipes
With some water distribution models, parallel pipes are not allowed. This forces you
to create an equivalent pipe with the same characteristics.
With this program, however, you can create parallel pipes by drawing the pipes with
the same end nodes. To avoid having pipes drawn exactly on top of one another, it is
recommended that the pipes have at least one vertex, or bend, inserted into them.
Head (ft.) Discharge (gpm)
1260 0
1180 8300
1030 12400
Drawdown (ft.) Discharge (gpm)
40 8300
72 12400
Head (ft.) Discharge (gpm)
1260 0
1140 8300
958 12400
Modeling Tips
A-752 WaterCAD Users Manual
Figure A-2: Pipe Bends
A.3.4 Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series
Note: With pumps in series, it is actually more desirable to use a
composite pump than to use multiple pumps in the network.
When pumps shut off, it is easier to control one pump. Several
pumps in series can even cause disconnections by checking if
upstream grades are greater than the downstream grade plus
the pump heads.
Parallel pumps can be modeled by inserting a pump on different pipes that have the
same From and To Nodes. Pumps in series (one pump discharges directly into another
pumps intake) can be modeled by having the pumps located on the same pipe. The
following figure illustrates this concept:
Figure A-3: Pumps in Parallel and Series
If the pumps are identical, the system may also be modeled as a single, composite
pump that has a characteristic curve equivalent to the two individual pumps. For
pumps in parallel, the discharge is multiplied by the number of pumps, and used
against the same head value. Two pumps in series result in an effective pump with
twice the head at the same discharge.
For example, two pumps that can individually operate at 150 gpm at a head of 80 feet
connected in parallel will have a combined discharge of 2150 = 300 gpm at 80 feet.
The same two pumps in series would pump 150 gpm at 280 = 160 feet of head. This
is illustrated as follows:
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-753
Figure A-4: Pumps Curves of Pumps in Series and Parallel
A.3.5 Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks
If tanks are hydraulically close, as in the case of several tanks adjacent to each other, it
is better to model these tanks as one composite tank with the equivalent total surface
area of the individual tanks.
This process can help to avoid fluctuation that may occur in cases where the tanks are
modeled individually. This fluctuation is caused by small differences in flow rates to
or from the adjacent tanks, which offset the water surface elevations enough over time
to become a significant fluctuation. This results in inaccurate hydraulic grades.
A.3.6 Modeling Fire Hydrants
Fire Hydrant flow can be modeled by using a short, small diameter pipe with large
Minor Loss, in accordance with the hydrants manufacturer. Alternatively, hydrants
can be modeled using Flow Emitters. For more information, see Estimating Hydrant
Discharge Using Flow Emitters on page A-756.
A.3.7 Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main
If you are unable to model an existing system back to the source, but would still like to
model a connection to this system, a reservoir and a pump with a three-point pump
curve may be used instead. This is shown below:
Figure A-5: Approximating a Connection to a Water Main with a Pump
and a Reservoir
Modeling Tips
A-754 WaterCAD Users Manual
The reservoir simulates the supply of water from the system. The Elevation of the
reservoir should be equal to the elevation at the connection point.
The pump and the pump curve will simulate the pressure drops and the available flow
from the existing water system. The points for the pump curve are generated using a
mathematical formula (given below), and data from a fire flow test. The pipe should
be smooth, short and wide. For example, a Roughness of 140, length of 1 foot, and
diameter of 48 inches are appropriate numbers.
Please note that it is ALWAYS best to model the entire system back to the source. This
method is only an approximation, and may not represent the water system under all
flow conditions.
Qr = Qf * [(Hr/Hf)^.54]
EXAMPLE: DETERMINING THE THREE-POINT PUMP CURVE
1. The first point is generated by measuring the static pressure at the hydrant
when the flow (Q) is equal to zero.
Q = 0 gpm
H = 90psi or 207.9 feet of head (90 * 2.31)
(2.31 is the conversion factor used to convert psi to feet of head).
2. The engineer chooses a pressure for the second point, and the flow is calcu-
lated using the Formula below. The value for Q should lie somewhere
between the data collected from the test.
Q = ?
H = 55 psi or 127.05 feet (55 * 2.31) (chosen value)
Formula:
Qr = Qf * (Hr/Hf)^.54
Qr = 800 * [((90 - 55) / (90 - 22))^.54]
Qr = 800 * [(35 / 68)^.54]
Qr = 800 * [.514^.54]
Qr = 800 * .69
Qr = 558
Where:
Qr = Flow available at the desired fire flow residual
pressure
Qf = Flow during test
Hr = Pressure drop to desired residual pressure (Static
Pressure minus Chosen Design Pressure)
Hf = Pressure drop during fire flow test (Static Pressure
minus Residual Pressure)
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-755
Therefore,
Q = 558 gpm
3. The third point is generated by measuring the flow (Q) at the residual pressure
of the hydrant.
Q = 800 gpm
H = 22 psi or 50.82 ft. of head (22 * 2.31)
Pump curve values for this example:
A.3.8 Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank
A tank element in WaterCAD is modeled as a bottom feed tank. Some tanks, however,
are fed from the top, which is different hydraulically and should be modeled as such.
Figure A-6: Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Tank
To model a top feed tank, start by placing a pressure sustaining valve (PSV) at the end
of the tank inlet pipe. Set the elevation of the PSV to the elevation of the inlet to the
tank. The pressure setting of the PSV should be set to zero to simulate the pressure at
the outfall of the pipe.
Head (ft.)
Discharge
(gpm)
207.9 0
127.05 558
50.82 800
Modeling Tips
A-756 WaterCAD Users Manual
Next, connect the downstream end of the PSV to the tank with a short, smooth, large
diameter pipe. The pipe must have these properties so that the headloss through it will
be minimal.
The tank attributes can be entered normally using the actual diameter and water eleva-
tions.
The outlet of the tank can then proceed to the distribution system.
Figure A-7: Example Layout
A.3.9 Estimating Hydrant Discharge Using Flow Emitters
Another way to model the discharge from a hydrant is to use flow emitters. A flow
emitter relates the discharge to pressure immediately upstream of the emitter using:
The pressure exponent, n, is a variable that can be set in the Hydraulic Analysis
Options section of the Calculation Options dialog box (for more information, see
Hydraulic Analysis Options on page 9-386). The default value is 0.5, which should
be used when using flow emitters to model hydrant outlets.
You should be able to model a hydrant as a flow emitter and enter the appropriate
value for K. Not all of the energy available immediately upstream of the hydrant is
lost, however. Instead, some of the energy is converted into increased velocity head,
especially for the smaller (2.5 in, 63 mm) hydrant outlet.
Where: Q = flow through hydrant (gpm, l/s)
K =
overall emitter coefficient (gpm/psi
n
, l/s/m
n
)
P = pressure upstream of hydrant (psi, m)
n = pressure exponent (0.5 for hydrant outlets)
n
KP Q =
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-757
In order to accurately model a hydrant, the model must be given an overall K value,
which includes head loss through a hydrant and conversion of pressure head to
velocity head. AWWA Standards C502 and C503 govern the allowable pressure drop
through a hydrant. For example, the standards state that the 2.5 in. outlet must have a
pressure drop less than 2.0 psi (1.46 m) when passing 500 gpm (31.5 l/s).
The energy equation can be written between a pressure gauge immediately upstream
of the hydrant and the hydrant outlet:
The difference between K and k is that K includes the terms for conversion of velocity
head to pressure head. k is known, but K is the value needed for modeling.
A typical hydrant lateral in North America is 6 in. (150 mm) and typical outlet sizes
are 2.5 in. (63 mm) and 4.5 in. (115 mm). Values for k vary from minimum values,
which can be back calculated from AWWA standards, to much higher values actually
delivered by hydrants. Values for K for a range of k values for 6 in. (150 mm) pipes
are given below.
Where: v = velocity (ft./sec., m/s)
C
F
= unit conversion factor (2.31 for pressure in psi,
1 for pressure in m)
c
F
= unit conversion factor (2.44 for flow in gpm,
diameter in inches, 0.0785 for flow in l/s,
diameter in mm)
g =
gravitation acceleration (ft./sec.
2
, m/s
2
)
k = pressure drop coefficient for hydrant
K = overall emitter coefficient
2
1
2 4 4 2
1
)
1 1
(
2
1
1
!
!
"
#
$
$
%
&
+
=
k D D c gC
K
P O F F
Modeling Tips
A-758 WaterCAD Users Manual
The coefficients given are based on a 5 ft. (1.5 m) burial depth and a 5.5 in. (140 mm)
hydrant barrel. A range of values is given because each manufacturer has a different
configuration for hydrant barrels and valving. The lowest value is the minimum
AWWA standard.
A.3.10 Modeling Variable Speed Pumps
With WaterCAD, it is possible to model the behavior of variable speed pumps (VSP),
whether they are controlled by variable frequency drives, hydraulic couplings or some
other variable speed drive. Workarounds that were previously used, such as pumping
through a pressure-reducing valve, are no longer needed.
The parameter that is used to adjust pump speeds is the relative speed. The relative
speed is the ratio of the pumps actual speed to some reference speed. The reference
speed generally used is the full speed of the motor. For example, if the pump speed is
1558 rpm while the motor is a 1750-rpm motor, the relative speed is 0.89. This rela-
tive speed is used with the pump affinity laws to adjust the pump head characteristic
curve to model the pump.
If only a steady state run is being made and the pump relative speed is known, the
speed of the variable speed pump can be set in the General tab of the pump dialog box.
However, if the conditions that control the pump are not known at the start or an EPS
run is being made, then variable speed behavior must be described in more detail.
Modeling variable speed pumps includes:
Types of Variable Speed Pumps on page A-759
Pattern Based on page A-759
Fixed Head on page A-759
Controls with Fixed Head Operation on page A-760
Table A-1: Emitter K Values for Hydrants
Outlet
Nominal (in.)
k
gpm, psi
k
l/s, m
K
gpm/psi
n
,
l/s/m
n
K
l/s, m
2.5 250-600 18-45 150-180 11-14
2-2.5 350-700 26-52 167-185 13-15
4.5 447-720 33-54 380-510 30-40
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-759
Types of Variable Speed Pumps
The behavior of the VSP is set under the VSP tab within the pump dialog box. There
are two ways to control a variable speed pump. One is to provide a Pattern (see
Pattern Manager on page 9-388) of pump relative speeds. This is best used for cases
where you are trying to model some past event where the pump speeds are known
exactly or where the pump is not being controlled by some target head. This would be
the case where human operators set speed based on a combination of time of day,
weather and other factors.
The second type of control is Fixed Head control, where the pump speed is adjusted to
maintain a head somewhere in the system. For water distribution pumping into a pres-
sure zone with no storage, this is usually some pressure sensor on the downstream side
of the pump. For wastewater pumping, the pump may be operated to maintain a
constant wet well level on the suction side (i.e., flow matching).
To indicate that a pump is behaving as a VSP, first check the box next to Variable
Speed Pump? at the top of the VSP tab. This will change the remaining boxes on the
tab from gray to white.
Pattern Based
If you want to provide the actual pump relative speeds, Pattern Based should be
selected from the VSP Type menu. The default pattern is Fixed, which corresponds to
constant speed performance at a speed from the General tab.
Usually, you will want to specify a series of pump relative speeds. To do this, click the
Ellipsis () button next to Pump Speed Pattern. This will open the Pattern Manager
dialog box (for more information, see Pattern Manager on page 9-388). Click the
Add button, and the Pattern Editor dialog box will appear (for more information, see
Pattern Editor on page 9-389). From this dialog box, you can assign a label (name)
to the new Pattern and complete the series of multipliers (i.e., relative speeds) versus
time. Clicking OK twice will return you to the VSP tab.
A difficulty in using Pattern Based speeds is that the pattern that would work well for
one scenario may not work well for other scenarios. For example, tanks will run dry or
fill and shut off for a slightly different scenario than the one for which the pattern was
created.
Fixed Head
Fixed head control is achieved by selecting Fixed Head from the VSP Type? menu.
Once Fixed Head is selected, you must describe how the control is implemented.
You must identify a node that controls the pump. This is the node where some type of
pressure or water level sensor is located. This can be done by:
Using the menu and picking the node from the list
Modeling Tips
A-760 WaterCAD Users Manual
Clicking the Ellipsis () button and using the Select Element dialog box (for
more information, see Single Element Selection Dialog Box on page 5-252)
Clicking the Select From Drawing button (see Select From Drawing Button on
page 5-253) and picking the node from the drawing
In selecting the control node, you must choose a node that is actually controlled by the
VSP. For example, the selected node must be in the same pressure zone (i.e., one that
is not separated from the pump by another pump or PRV) and should not have a tank
directly between the node and the pump.
You must then select the head to be maintained at that node. If the node selected for
control is a tank, then the Target Head is set as the initial head in the tank. If a junction
node is selected, the head must be a feasible head. If a physically infeasible head is
given, the problem may not be solved or some unrealistic flow may be forced to meet
this head (e.g., backward flow through pump).
You also have the option of setting the maximum relative speed of the pump, which
would usually correspond to the rated speed of the motor. The default value for this is
1.0. You can have the model ignore this limit by placing a large value in the field for
maximum speed.
Controls with Fixed Head Operation
Note: There should only be a single VSP serving a given pressure
zone. If more than one VSP tries to use the same node as a
control node, then the model will issue an error message and
not solve. If you try to use two different nodes that are very close
hydraulically, an error will also result.
When the relative pump speed reaches maximum speed (usually 1.0), the model treats
the pump essentially as a constant speed pump. In the case of pumps controlled by a
junction node, when the conditions warrant, the pump will once again behave as a
VSP.
However, for pumps controlled by tanks, the pump will run at a maximum speed for
the remainder of the EPS run, once they reach maximum speed. To get the pump to
switch back to variable speed operation, you need to insert a control statement that
switches the pump back to variable speed. Consider the example below:
PMP-1 tries to maintain 280 ft. discharge at node T-1 on the discharge side of the
pump, but pump (PMP-1) switches to full speed when the flow is so great that it
cannot maintain 280 ft. In that case, the water level drops below 280 ft. As demand
decreases, the level increases until it reaches 280 ft., at which time variable speed
operation begins again. To make this occur in the model, you must use a logical
control (see Logical Controls on page 9-391) to restore variable speed operation:
IF (HGL T-1 >= 280 ft) THEN (PMP-1 = ON)
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-761
Parallel VSPs
Variable speed pumps can also be modeled in parallel. If you use the Fixed Head
pump type, both parallel VSPs must be set to the same target node. The program
will attempt to meet the fixed head requirements you set using only one of the
pumps. If the fixed head cannot be met with only one of the pumps, the second
pump will be turned on, and the relative speed settings of the pumps will be
adjusted to compensate.
Variable speed pumps (VSPs) can be modeled in parallel. This allows you to model
multiple VSPs operated at the same speed at one pump station. To model this, a VSP
is chosen as a lead VSP, which will be the primary pump to deliver the target head.
If the lead VSP cannot deliver the target head while operating at maximum speed, then
the second VSP will be triggered on and the VSP calculation will determine the
common speed for both VSPs. If the target head cannot be delivered while operating
both VSPs at the maximum speed, then another VSP will be triggered on until the
target head is met with all the available VSPs.
All VSPs that are turned on are operated at the same speed. VSPs are to be turned off
if they are not required due to a change in demand. If all standby VSPs are running at
the maximum speed, but still cannot deliver the target head, the VSPs are translated
into fixed speed pumps.
To correctly apply the VSP feature to multiple variable speed pumps in parallel, the
following criteria must be met:
1. Parallel VSPs must be controlled by the same target node;
2. Parallel VSPs must be controlled by the same target head;
3. Parallel VSPs must have the same maximum relative speed factors;
4. Parallel VSPs must be identical, namely the same pump curve.
5. Parallel VSPs must share common upstream and downstream junctions within 3
nodes (inclusive) of the pumps in order for them to be recognized as parallel
VSPs.
If there are more than 3 nodes between the pumps and their common node,
upstream and downstream, the software will treat them as separate VSPs. Since
separate VSPs cannot target the same control node, this will result in an error
message.
Modeling Tips
A-762 WaterCAD Users Manual
A.3.11 Creating Scenarios to Model What If? Situations
The scenario management feature was designed to let you model What If? situations
by easily switching between different input data sets without having to re-enter data.
Comparing different output results is just as simple.
To create a new scenario:
1. Open the Scenario Control Center dialog box by clicking the Scenario
Control Center button next to the drop-down scenario list in the main
application window.
2. Click the Scenario Wizard button in the upper left of the Scenario Control Center
dialog box.
3. Complete each step in the Scenario WizardName the new scenario, choose
which scenario to base it on, and choose the alternatives to be included. Click
Next between each step, and click Finish when you are done.
4. Close the Scenario Control Center dialog box. Notice the scenario you have just
created is displayed as the current scenario in the Scenario choice list in the main
application window.
5. Proceed to modify your model with the changes you want recorded in the new
scenario.
A.3.12 How Do I Access the Bentley Systems Knowledge Base?
You can access of hundreds of commonly asked questions at our online Knowledge
Base.
The quickest way to access the Knowledge Base is to click the Globe Icon in
the product toolbars. This will automatically log you on to our website. Simply
click the Knowledge Base icon next to the Haestad product of interest.
If the computer you are using does not have internet access, you can log on to Knowl-
edge Base at an alternate computer by going to http://www.haestad.com and entering
the Bentley Select portion of the website. You can then log on with the Product ID
located in the back of the users manual or your PID number.
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-763
A.3.13 Darwin Calibrator Troubleshooting Tips
If youve found your way to this section, then you are probably looking for an answer
to a problem that you cannot find elsewhere. Please refer to the list below if you are
having problems running Darwin Calibrator (you keep getting unsatisfactory solu-
tions) or if you receive this message while running a calibration: The calibration
engine was unsuccessful. See the help system for troubleshooting tips.
If you are receiving the engine unsuccessful message, try the following:
Take note of the error message that is provided along with the calibration engine
was unsuccessful message. It may provide a clue as to why your calibration didnt
run and save you from having to go any further through this list!
Ensure that the scenario model upon which the calibration is based will run prop-
erly in WaterCAD. Select Analysis > Compute, select the steady state button, and
click GO. If the run obtains either a yellow or green light, then the hydraulic
model runs and this is not the problem.
Ensure that all your roughness and demand group settings are valid and reason-
able. For example, ensure that roughness adjustments and/or demand adjustments
are not such that your hydraulic model might have difficulty converging. For
example, make sure that you are not allowing demands to be set too high or pipes
too rough, causing excessive amounts of head loss.
If you have a large number of pipes assigned to status groups, review the need to
include all of those pipes as status decisions and try to minimize the number of
pipes in status groups.
Note: Virtual memory settings should only be adjusted by advanced
users or system administrators.
You may be experiencing low system memory. When running Darwin Calibrator,
be sure to close any other unused applications and if adjusting advanced GA
parameters ensure that you are using a cut probability of more than a few percent,
and a splice probability of less than 90 percent. If your system doesnt have much
RAM (<128Mb), you may also wish to increase the amount of allocated virtual
memory that your system is using. Windows 98/ME users should let Windows
manage virtual memory, however, Windows NT4/2000/XP users may wish to
increase the size of their system paging file. Please see your Microsoft Windows
documentation for information on virtual memory settings specific to your oper-
ating system.
If you are having problems getting reasonable calibration solutions, try the following:
Modeling Tips
A-764 WaterCAD Users Manual
Ensure that the Time field for each of your field data measurement sets corre-
sponds to the time of day that your measurements were taken. The reason being
that the time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers
(from hydraulic patterns), which are in turn used to calculate the junction
demands that will be simulated within the GA calibration engine. (The demand at
a junction during a GA calibration run is the product of its baseline demands and
the demand factors at the time specified for the field data set.) Pump settings and
control settings, etc., are also determined from the time setting you specify.
Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire flow
tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from
pattern multipliers. Also note that a steady state run in WaterCAD will run with
only junction baseline demands applied, whereas a GA calibration run based on a
steady state scenario will still use pattern multipliers for the specified time.
Modifying the status of a link can have significant effects on hydraulic results and
your chances of finding good calibration solutions. If you are using a number of
status group adjustments, you should review why you need those adjustment
groups. It may be better to experiment with these kinds of adjustments manually,
or get somebody to find out whether that valve really is closed and remove the
status decision from the GA calibration. In general, try to keep status adjustment
decisions to a minimum.
Make sure that your adjustment groupings are logical. For example, junctions are
grouped by similar pattern or demands for demand groups and pipes are grouped
by similar size, age and location for roughness groups.
Ensure that you do not have too many adjustment groups or the allowable ranges
and increments for those groups do not allow too many choices for each group.
For example, a roughness group allowed to vary between a Hazen-Williams C of
80 and a Hazen-Williams C of 130, with an increment of 0.1 equates to 500
different possible roughness settings for one group. This is far too high! Try to
choose lower and upper bounds, and an increment that will give you no more than
10-12 possible values. If need be, you can start off with course settings (say 80 to
130 with an increment of 5) initially, and gradually refine the allowable range and
increment to refine your calibration solutions. This applies to both roughness
adjustment groups and also to demand adjustment groups.
Make sure that you have sufficient and quality field data and that it has been
entered correctly. In general, it is a good idea to have as many (or more) field data
measurements as adjustment groups for the calibration, or else your calibration
problem is under-specified. This means that there is likely to be multiple calibra-
tion solutions that produce the same or very similar hydraulic results (e.g., solu-
tions that exhibit compensating errors). In theory, there is only one correct
solution, however, due to limits observed for many practical model calibrations,
the more quality field data you can provide, the better chance you have of finding
a solution that is close to the real situation. When assessing the number of field
observations that you have, consider that each individual observation should
contribute unique and accurate information to the calibration. For example, pres-
sure measurements made at two junctions in different parts of the distribution
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-765
system are likely to be more valuable than two measurements made at locations
close to each other in the distribution system. In fact, the two measurements taken
at points close together may only be as good as one measurement. That is, both
measurements say the same thing about the system. Simply, the field data you
collect and enter into Darwin Calibrator should be data that represents times when
your system is experiencing high demand, even if it is only the result of such
activities as fire flow tests. The reason for this is that during times of normal
demands, the head loss across the system is usually on the same order of magni-
tude as the error in measuring head loss. Therefore, small errors in measurement
can lead to huge errors in roughness coefficient or demand.
Make sure that you havent entered field data observations that are made impos-
sible to achieve by any observed boundary conditions, such as an observed grade
out for a PRV set to a different grade.
Note: Tank levels, pump speed settings, and valve settings are all used
by the calibration engine as boundary conditions and as such
these field data entries will not appear in the calibration report
summary. That is, these quantities are set as fixed in the
calibration simulations and the calibration does not try to match
these data. All other quantities are used as observed quantities
that the calibration engine tries to match by adjusting
parameters defined in your adjustment groups.
Make sure you are using the correct boundary conditions. If you have entered
observations for tank levels etc., ensure that you have not made any errors in
entering the data.
If after following the tips in this check list you are still experiencing problems, or
just to learn more about the GA or Darwin Calibrator itself, see Darwin Cali-
brator Methodology on page B-814.
A.4 Display Tips
The following display tips will be discussed in this section:
How Do I Change Units in a Column? on page A-766
How Do I Control Element and Label Sizing? on page A-766
How Do I Color Code Elements? on page A-766
How Do I Remove Color Coding from Pre-v3.5 AutoCAD Labels? on page A-
767
How Do I Reuse Deleted Element Labels? on page A-767
Display Tips
A-766 WaterCAD Users Manual
A.4.1 How Do I Change Units in a Column?
Note: The change of units affects only the data in the Table. It DOES
NOT change the units within your network design.
In a Table, you may change the units of all the data within any column. To change the
units:
Select Use Local Units from the Options menu in the Tabular Report dialog box.
Right-click the column heading, or any data item within a column.
Select Properties from the shortcut menu.
Change the units and select OK. All data items in that column will change to the
selected units.
A.4.2 How Do I Control Element and Label Sizing?
To change the size of element symbols and labels:
Select Tools > Options, and select the Drawing tab.
In the Annotation Multipliers group, change the Symbol Size Multiplier to
modify the element size, and the Text Height Multiplier to modify the label size.
Smaller numbers will make the element symbols and text decrease in size.
These changes will affect all symbols and text, including color coding legends, but
will not have any effect on pipe lengths.
A.4.3 How Do I Color Code Elements?
To color code elements:
Select Tools > Color Coding, or click the Color Coding (rainbow) button on the
toolbar.
In the Color Coding dialog box, select the attribute you would like to color code.
Click the Initialize button to automatically build a range of colors. You may
decide to modify these default ranges. Alternatively, pick a color for the first and
last values in the list and click the Ramp button. This will automatically generate
a gradient range based on a combination of the specified colors.
Click OK to color code the drawing.
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-767
All link or node elements and their labels will be colored based on the specified
ranges. You can also use the Initialize button to quickly set up and modify Color
Coding Options. A Color Coding Legend may be inserted into the drawing by using
the Legend tool (see Legend on page 13-619) located on the Tool Palette.
A.4.4 How Do I Remove Color Coding from Pre-v3.5 AutoCAD
Labels?
Due to popular request, Bentley Systems has implemented the separation of elements
and their labels. This gives you much more control over the placement and formatting
of the labels, in addition to resolving the problem of color coding labels with
elements. However, if you open an old drawing (version 3.1 or earlier) with existing
color coding on the labels, this color coding will not dynamically update.
The solution to this problem is to move the labels to a different layer, and assign a
neutral color to them. To do this, select Tools > Element Properties, and choose the
Labels tab. Assign a new layer to the labels for all the elements, and check Apply to
Existing Objects.
A.4.5 How Do I Reuse Deleted Element Labels?
To make the program reuse the label for a deleted element:
1. Select Tools > Element Labeling.
2. Enter the ID number for the deleted element in the Next field for the appropriate
type of element.
3. Click OK.
4. Add a new element to the drawing.
A.5 Editing Tips
The following tips will be discussed in this section:
Mouse Tips on page A-768
Laying out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline on page A-768
Changing a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline on page A-769
Editing Tips
A-768 WaterCAD Users Manual
A.5.1 Mouse Tips
The right mouse button (Mouse Buttons) can be used to:
Select units and precision for displaying data.
Get context-sensitive Help for dialog boxes and data entry fields.
Open a pop-up Context Menu of command options for an element.
The mouse wheel can be used in a few different ways:
Click and hold the mouse wheel while moving to pan the drawing view.
Scroll the drawing view horizontally by rolling the mouse wheel.
Hold down the Ctrl button while scrolling with the mouse wheel to zoom in and
out in the drawing view.
A.5.2 Laying out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline
When laying out pipes using the Pipe Layout tool, this program will allow you to draw
pipes with multiple bends by using the Control key on your keyboard.
To draw a pipe with bends:
1. Click the Pipe Layout tool to begin laying out your network.
2. Move the mouse to the desired location, and click to insert the first element.
3. The layout tool will rubber-band, indicating that a pipe will be inserted when the
next element is added.
In Stand-Alone mode:
1. At this point, hold down the Control key. The cursor appearance will change to a
Crosshair to indicate that pipe bends will be added.
2. While holding the Control key down, click to insert any number of pipe bends.
3. When you are through adding pipe bends, release the Control key.
4. The appearance of the cursor will change to reflect the next element to be added.
5. Click with the mouse to terminate the pipe and add the next element.
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-769
In AutoCAD mode:
1. Select Bend from the right-click menu.
2. Draw the pipe as you would draw a polyline.
3. Right-click and select the end node of the pipe.
A.5.3 Changing a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline
Tip: In Stand-Alone mode, you can remove vertices by selecting the
pipe. Right-click the vertex you wish to remove, and select Bend
> Remove Bend. In AutoCAD mode, you can remove vertices by
selecting Edit > Modify Pipes > Remove Bends. Select the pipe
and the location of the bend that you would like removed.
In Stand-Alone mode, to make a straight pipe into a multi-segmented polyline:
1. Right-click the pipe to which you would like to add a vertex.
2. From the context menu, select the Bend > Add Bend menu item.
3. A vertex will be added to the pipe. Click and drag the vertex to move it.
In AutoCAD Mode:
Note: There is no limit on the number of vertices that a pipe may have.
1. Select Edit from the Main Menu.
2. Select Modify Pipe.
3. Select Insert Bend.
4. Click the location in the pipe where you want the bend.
5. Use the AutoCAD Move command to move the bend in the pipe.
Advanced Darwin Designer Tips
A-770 WaterCAD Users Manual
A.6 Advanced Darwin Designer Tips
1. How do I consider fire flows in my design?
You may consider fire flows by one of two methods:
a. Use the demand adjustments feature in the required design event to add addi-
tional demand to the specific junctions at which fires are to be fought.
b. In WaterCAD, create a child demand alternative of the demand alternative
referenced by the representative scenario, and then add the fire flows as fixed
pattern flows to the appropriate junctions. Next, in Darwin Designer, set up a
design event and select the Override Scenario Demand Alternative check
box, and select the new child demand alternative you created.
Of the two methods, the second one is preferred, since, after you have exported
your design from Darwin Designer to a new scenario, you will most likely want to
verify the performance of the design directly within WaterCAD. If you have used
method one to add fire flows, then you will have to add those fire flows to your
current (or new) demand alternative in order to simulate the design against the
same demands as in your design event. If you had used method two, however,
then you would not need to create any additional demand alternatives, since you
had already done that.
2. Where should I set fire flows in my system to achieve a good design?
Fire-flow design event can be set up by using one of two methods in Question 1.
To achieve a good design, you need to ensure that a design can funcion under the
most important fire-fighting scenarios. This will be different from system to
system. When you set a fire-flow design event, Darwin Designer optimizes the
system capacity (pipe sizes) to meet the additional demand requirement for the
portion of a system where a fire flow is set up. The other portion of the system
may have inadequate capacity. To improve the system-wide emergency response
capability, it is recommened that fire flows are set at the outskirts of a distribution
grid; this will allow Darwin Designer to optimize the systemwide supply capacity.
3. How do I consider emergency conditions and facility outages?
Emergency conditions, such as pipe breaks and facility outages, can be handled in
Darwin Designer by using the boundary-conditions feature of a design event to
close pipes that would normally be open. For example, you may want to consider
the effect of a water treatment plant being out of service. This can be achieved by
adding any connecting pipes to the design-event boundary conditions and setting
their status to closed.
4. Designer only sizes or rehabilitates pipes. How can I consider the inclusion of
new facilities?
Selection of new facilities may be achieved by using various modeling tech-
niques, an example of which follows.
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-771
Selecting the location of a new tank:
a. You can select the location of a new tank modeling the new proposed tank in
the representative scenario. Given a specific tank location you will need to
enter the tank elevation, diameter, and other size information as if it existed
but, connect the tank to the system with a short small diameter pipe. Give the
new pipe an obvious label such as New Tank Connector.
The pipe that connects the tank to the system should have a length of 1 and a
diameter of 0.01.
b. Create a new Design group and label it as New Tank Connector, or some-
thing similar, and add the connecting pipe to the new group.
c. In Darwin Designer, create a new pipe option group, label it New Tank, or
something similar, and add the following data:
Where, X is some large diameter sufficient for the expected flows to and from
the tank.
d. In your local design run group, enable the new pipe group by clicking Active
and select the New Tank option group.
Darwin Designer can now connect the tank to the system and incur the cost
specified in the above table, or it will construct a 0 diameter pipe (no pipe)
and the tank will not be included in the system. Note that it is up to you to
make sure that sufficient demand cases are investigated to verify the tanks
design and that tank operation is independently verified through an EPS simu-
lation.
Using similar logic Designer could be used to consider the inclusion exclu-
sion of pump stations, valves, water treatment facilities, reservoirs and so on.
5. Designer keeps coming up with strange results. What am I doing wrong?
There are a number of things that could be causing you get strange or unexpected
results with Darwin Designer. Before calling technical support, please take the
time to review this list to see if any of these things may apply to you.
a. Make sure you are using the correct design data. Make sure you are using
the correct representative design scenario and that scenario includes all pipes
to be sized by Darwin Designer.
b. Make sure that the representative design scenario runs successfully
within WaterCAD. If it does not, then Designer will not be able to function
correctly.
Diameter Cost
0 0
X Cost of Tank
Advanced Darwin Designer Tips
A-772 WaterCAD Users Manual
c. Make sure that the correct demands are present. For EPS representative
scenarios, make sure your patterns are correct and that you are using the
correct time from start value in your design events.
d. Make sure that you have applied the correct and necessary boundary
conditions. For example, if you are designing for a 7 a.m. peak-flow condi-
tion, make sure that you have boundary conditions specified for all necessary
tank levels, pump operation, etc. For designs that include a significant amount
of new infrastructure or completely new designs, tank levels have to be
assumed tank levels.
e. Make sure that the range of pipe sizes and rehab actions you are using
are reasonable. For example, make sure that you are allowing Darwin
Designer a sufficient range of pipe diameters to come up with a reasonable
design. While Darwin Designer does perform an initial feasibility check (it
uses the largest pipe sizes and checks minimum pressures), too few pipe
choices may artificially restrict the flexibility of the optimization. Conversely,
too many choices may affect the convergence of the optimization on to a good
solution. It doesnt make sense, for example, to allow a rising main from a
pump station to be 6 in. or 8 in.
f. Make sure that you have a reasonable number of design and/or rehab
groups. As an extreme example, consider that every pipe to be design was in
the same group. Then the only possible solution that the optimization can
arrive at is to construct all of the pipes the same size. While it may still be
possible to find a feasible solution, only having a single design group will
restrict the flexibility of the optimization and the ability of Darwin Designer
to find cheaper solutions. Conversely, too many design groups will hinder the
convergence of the optimization and result in sub-optimal solutions. A good
number of design groups will depend on the actual model and design situa-
tion, but would lie somewhere between 10 and 100.
g. Make sure you have sufficient and reasonable design constraints in place.
The genetic algorithm optimization engine in Darwin Designer is very
powerful. If the objective of the optimization is to minimize cost, the optimi-
zation engine will do everything in its power to minimize cost including
unwanted things that may not have been disallowed by the designer. The
worst case scenario is a design with no constraints. If the design does not have
any performance requirements, then the cheapest design is no design at all.
The optimization algorithm only knows the problem that is defined for it, and
to that end if you wish to get meaningful designs from Darwin Designer, you
need to constrain your designs appropriately. The idea is to set up design
constraints that corner the optimization algorithm into a region of the solution
space (region of all possible solutions) that makes the most practical sense.
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-773
Design constraints can be applied in Darwin Designer by pressures (max. and
min.) and also pipe velocities (max. and min.). An example of an impractical
situation in a hydraulic model might be a 1 MG tank that is draining at far too
high a rate. In order to save costs on constructing pipes to a more distant
source, the optimization algorithm may over-use a closer water source.
Another example of a design constraintother than the pressure and flow
constraintsis the number of design events (and hence demand/operational
cases) that the design must meet. The optimal solution to a single demand
case does not fully reflect the real system operating scenarios. If a single load
condition is used along with a zero-diameter as one of possible sizes in a
option group, it will most likely result in a branched network design. Thus, it
is necessary for reliability reasons to design systems for multiple demand
conditions.
It is up to the engineer to recognize any impracticality of an optimized design
and set up the necessary design constraints to prevent that type of design from
being feasible, thus removing that design possibility from the grasp of the
optimization algorithm.
6. How do I include a special cost, such as the cost of a highway crossing or
interconnection in my design?
To do this you need to do three things:
a. Group together the pipes that will attract the special cost. These pipes can be
each in their own groups or all in one group, but they should be grouped such
that they are separate from pipes that wont attract the special cost.
b. Create a option group (new pipe or rehabilitation option group) that includes
the special cost premiums.
c. Assign the special option groups to the associated design groups locally, for
the design run you wish to use with the special costs.
7. Designer keeps coming up with pipe sizes that change up or down in size. I
wouldnt construct such a design; what can I do?
Darwin Designer applies a competent genetic algorithm to optimize the design. It
does not require or have any domain-specific knowledge about the water system,
which ensures it is a generic tool, but also causes some side-effect for some design
caseslike giving up-or-down pipe sizes. In particular, the solutions are evalu-
ated by comparing the fitness values of solutions. Darwin Designer will assume a
pipeline with pipe sizes that go up and down (to meet required pressures as closely
as possible) is better than one that has a constant size that exceeds the pressures at
Advanced Darwin Designer Tips
A-774 WaterCAD Users Manual
some locations, since there is no specific penalty assigned to the fitness of a solu-
tion that has pipes that change up and down in size. It is, therefore, up to you to
control the eventual design and this can be done by different means, as follows:
a. The first means is simply to make manual adjustments to a design after
Darwin Designer has finished, in order to clean up the design and make it a
practical design. Cleaning up a design may technically move you away from
the cheapest design, but an inexpensive design that wont be constructed is of
little use. You may find that not much cleaning up is necessary. Quick edits to
diameters or rehab actions like can be performed effectively in Darwin
Designer by using a manual design run.
b. Another thing to consider when analyzing a Darwin Designer design is
whether the chosen pipe sizes are a function of the lengths of pipe in your
model.
To better illustrate this concept, consider a run of four pipes in series, each
with different lengths. For these four pipes, the controlling pressure is the
downstream-most junction, and all intermediate junctions are well above the
required pressure. Now, after Darwin Designer finishes designing the run of
pipe, it selects the first pipe as a 16 in., the second as 12 in., the third as 16 in.
and the fourth as 12 in. It is unlikely that this design would be constructed as-
is, but if the pipes themselves represented sufficient length of pipe, then it
may be practical to construct a portion of the pipeline as 16 in. and a portion
as 12 in. If this is the case, then you need to look at the model to determine
why Darwin Designer is changing the third pipe back up to 16 in. It may be
that since the downstream-most junction is the only controlling node, that
Darwin Designer is merely trying to achieve the right head-loss in the total
pipe length, by choosing the length of pipe that should be 16 in. and the length
that should be 12 in. Of course, it is still constrained by the individual pipe
lengths in the model, but if they are different, the optimization algorithm will
use this fact to its advantage. In this case, it may very well be that Designer is
saying construct a total of 1500 ft. of 16-in. and 1000 ft. of 12-in. pipe, and
not necessarily 850 feet of 16-in., 600 feet of 12-in., 650 feet of 16-in., and
400 feet of 12-in. pipe in sections. Use engineering judgment when analyzing
the results.
c. Another means of achieving more constructible designs from Darwin
Designer is to group in the same group pipes that would be constructed the
same size. For example, a rising main would most likely be constructed a
single size, and it would thus make sense to include all the model pipes that
make up the rising main in the same design group. What you dont want to do
by grouping pipes is artificially design the system even before you have had a
chance to optimize it.
8. When sizing new pipes, Darwin Designer can choose a zero-size, which
means, do not construct that pipe. Is it possible to do a similar thing for reha-
bilitation actions?
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-775
It is possible to do the same thing for rehabilitation actions. To create a rehabilita-
tion action that represents a Do Nothing option, simply follow these steps:
a. Create a pre-rehab diameter versus post-rehab diameter function that defines
at least two diameters that cover the domain of diameters in your model. For
example, mi.n pipe size through max. pipe size and make the pre-rehab diam-
eter the same as the post-rehab diameter. This function will define that the
diameter of any single pipe remains the same before and after the rehab
action.
b. Create a diameter versus unit cost function that defines at least two diameters
that cover the domain of diameters in your model. E.g., min. pipe size through
max. pipe size and make the cost for each diameter zero. This function will
thus define that the cost for the rehab action, regardless of pipe size is zero.
c. Create a pre-rehab diameter versus post-rehab roughness function that defines
at least two diameters that cover the domain of diameters in your model. E.g.,
min. pipe size through max. pipe size and make the post-rehab roughness, the
roughness of the current pipes to which the Do Nothing option will be an
option. This function will thus define that the resulting roughness stays the
same as the original values.
Create a Do Nothing rehab action that references each of the above functions. If
selected by Designer, the Do Nothing action will leave the same diameter, cost
nothing, and leave the same roughness: in effect, doing nothing.
9. Do I have to change the parameters or can I simply use the defaults?
In most circumstances it is not necessary to change the parameters in order to run
Darwin Designer, however, you may wish to modify certain values as follows:
a. Random SeedThe Darwin Designer optimization algorithm depends on the
generation of pseudo-random numbers through a random number generator.
The reason the numbers are pseudo-random is that they are generated by a
mathematical formula, and hence the resulting series of numbers is not actu-
ally random at all. In order to make the random numbers different the random
number algorithm is initialized with what is known as a seed. For a different
seed value, a different series of pseudo-random numbers will be produced.
When no parameters in the Designer optimization problem change (i.e., no
changes at all, including hydraulic model changes, constraint changes, etc.),
running Darwin Designer twice will result in exactly the same result. Darwin
Designer results are therefore repeatable in this way. One way of ensuring a
different result (or at least a different progression to the same result) is by
changing the random number seed. Doing this will result in different optimi-
zation results for different runs. By the nature of genetic algorithm optimiza-
tion, you should not just accept the result of a single optimization run, but run
Advanced Darwin Designer Tips
A-776 WaterCAD Users Manual
several runs and make sure that all runs produce similar results. An easy way
to run multiple runs and achieve different results is to change the random
number seed.
b. Penalty FactorPenalty factor is a weighting that is used in the determination
of the fitness value for an hydraulic solution. In particular the penalty factor is
used to discourage the survival of designs that fail the design constraints. A
higher value for penalty factor will put designs that fail the design constraints
in greater disfavor, where as a lower value for penalty factor will place
designs that fail the design constraints in less disfavor. A reasonable default
for penalty factor has already been selected for you. However, if you find that
Darwin Designer keeps settling on designs that contain constraint violation,
then you may wish to increase the penalty factor value.
c. Probabilities, Era Numbers, and Population SizeGood defaults have already
been selected for you for these values, but instead of changing the random
number seed when conducting multiple optimization runs of the same design,
you may want to change these values. Good ranges for the values are there-
fore listed below for your convenience.
Note: The upper limit values for population size, maximum era
number, and era generation number are problem-dependent. For
larger design models, you should use greater values than for
smaller models.
Population Size: 40 to 200
Cut Probability: 0.5 to 2.5%
Splice Probability: 50 to 80%
Mutation Probability: 0.5 to 2%
Maximum Era Number: 4 to 10
Era Generation Number: 50 to 200
10. Is there a way to select design and rehab group pipes from the model
drawing?
You cannot select pipes directly from the drawing in this first release of Darwin
Designer. For this reason, we recommend you identify pipe groups and create
appropriately-named selection sets before starting Darwin Designer. When you
have defined the necessary selection sets, they can be used directly within Darwin
Designer. Selection sets can also be used to define pressure and flow constraints,
and to select boundary condition elements.
11. Darwin Designer cannot find a feasible solution. How do I work out what is
going wrong?
Frequently Asked Questions
WaterCAD Users Manual A-777
It is very likely that in using Darwin Designer, you will encounter situations
where Darwin Designer cannot find a feasible solution. This happens even to
those experienced in genetic-algorithm optimization and is due to the fact that the
determination of which designs are feasible and which arent is assessed by a
computer subject to the information you tell it. That is, the rules are applied, with
no exceptions.
For example, if you want a minimum of 20 psi across the board, Darwin Designer
will determine as infeasible any solution that does not have 20 psi at every junc-
tion. If you have a couple of junctions that are part of the detail of a tank inlet
valving, for example, then maybe you dont really require 20 psi at those junc-
tions. Perhaps what you really mean is that you want 20 psi at all service junc-
tions. In that case, youll find where an engineer would have said the design is
feasible (because the design only fails the 20 psi requirement at non-service junc-
tions), but Darwin Designer is unable to make that determination, since it was told
20 psi was required at all junctions. The process by which you can get around
these kinds of issues is simply to identify them, correct them, and then re-run the
optimization. For the case of the 20 psi junction example, the fix might be to
create a selection set (in WaterCAD) of the junctions that are service junctions,
and only use those junctions as pressure constraint junctions. (The selection set
can be selected from within Darwin Designer.)
Along these same lines, you may also want to consider if any of the following
things might be causing trouble, before calling technical support:
a. Check for constraint violations in the results. Check both pressure and flow
constraints for the presence of constraint violations. If any violations exist,
you will need to determine why the junctions and/or pipes at which the viola-
tions occur are problematic. Maybe a minimum pressure constraint is simply
impossible to meet due to the junction elevation, etc. Other things to check for
are the applicability of blanket minimum and maximum pressures and veloci-
ties to modeling elements in detail models of pump stations, and the like. If
you find anything, then you need either to change the model, or modify/
remove the offending constraint and run the optimization again.
b. Make sure you have sufficient design options for a feasible design. That is,
make sure that you have a sufficient range of pipe sizes and/or rehabilitation
actions available to Darwin Designer to find a valid design.
c. Make sure that you havent specified competing design events. While it may
be possible to meet one design event or another separately, it may be impos-
sible to meet two together if they compete with each other. For example, one
design event might specify that a minimum pressure is required, and as such
the corresponding pipe taking the flow to that location needs to be large,
however, in the next design event with similar demands, a minimum velocity
constraint means the pipe has to be sized smaller. It may be impossible to
meet both design events with the single pipe size. To test this, build runs up by
performing initially with only one design event, then adding more in. If all of
Advanced Darwin Designer Tips
A-778 WaterCAD Users Manual
a sudden after adding in a design event no more feasible solutions can be
found, then you can try to work out what in the most recently added design
event is causing the problem.
d. For multi-objective and maximum benefit optimizations, make sure you have
sufficient budget specified. It may just be that you have not given Darwin
Designer sufficient budget to allow a feasible design to be found. Try
increasing the budget.
For more information, see Designer keeps coming up with strange results. What am I
doing wrong? on page A-771.
WaterCAD Users Manual B-779
B
Appendix
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD is a state-of-the-art software tool primarily for use in the modeling and
analysis of water distribution systems. However, the methodology is applicable to any
fluid system with the following characteristics:
Steady or gradually-varying turbulent flow
Incompressible, Newtonian, single phase fluids
Full, closed conduits (pressure systems)
Examples of systems with these characteristics include potable water systems, sewage
forcemains, fire protection systems, well pumps, and raw water pumping.
The WaterCAD algorithms are anticipated to grow and evolve to keep pace with the
state of the practice in water distribution and water quality modeling. Because the
mathematical solution methods are being continually extended, this manual deals
primarily with the fundamental principles underlying these algorithms, and focuses
less on the details of the implementation of the algorithms.
B.1 Acknowledgements
WaterCAD was designed, developed and programmed by Bentley Systems staff of
Software Engineers and Civil Engineers. This program is intended to represent the
latest technology in Windows-based Water Distribution Analysis and Design.
WaterCAD numerical computations are based on research conducted by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Drinking Water Research Division, Risk
Reduction Engineering Laboratory, its employees and consultants. As a result,
WaterCAD will generate results consistent with the EPA computer program EPANET
2.
Pressure Network Hydraulics
B-780 WaterCAD Users Manual
B.2 Pressure Network Hydraulics
Pressure network hydraulics includes:
Network Hydraulics Theory on page B-780
The Energy Equation on page B-782
Hydraulic and Energy Grades on page B-782
Conservation of Mass and Energy on page B-783
The Gradient Algorithm on page B-785
Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm on page B-785
The Linear System Equation Solver on page B-788
Pump Theory on page B-789
Valve Theory on page B-792
B.2.1 Network Hydraulics Theory
In practice, pipe networks consist not only of pipes, but of miscellaneous fittings,
services, storage tanks and reservoirs, meters, regulating valves, pumps, and elec-
tronic and mechanical controls. For modeling purposes, these system elements are
organized into the following categories:
PipesTransport water from one location (or node) to another.
Junctions/NodesSpecific points, or nodes, in the system at which an event of
interest is occurring. This includes points where pipes intersect, where there are
major demands on the system such as a large industry, a cluster of houses, or a fire
hydrant, or critical points in the system where pressures are important for analysis
purposes.
Reservoirs and TanksBoundary nodes with a known hydraulic grade that
define the initial hydraulic grades for any computational cycle. They form the
baseline hydraulic constraints used to determine the condition of all other nodes
during system operation. Boundary nodes are elements such as tanks, reservoirs,
and pressure sources.
PumpsRepresented as nodes. Their purpose is to provide energy to the system
and raise the water pressure.
ValvesMechanical devices used to stop or control the flow through a pipe, or to
control the pressure in the pipe upstream or downstream of the valve. They result
in a loss of energy in the system.
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-781
An event or condition at one point in the system can affect all other parts of the
system. While this complicates the approach that the engineer must take to find a solu-
tion, there are some governing principles that drive the behavior of the network,
including the Conservation of Mass and Energy Principle (see Conservation of Mass
and Energy on page B-783), and the Energy Principle (see The Energy Principle on
page B-781).
The two modes of analysis are Steady-State Network Hydraulics and Extended Period
Simulation (for more information, see Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation on
page 9-372). This program solves for the distributions of flows and hydraulic grades
using the Gradient Algorithm.
The Energy Principle
The first law of thermodynamics states that for any given system, the change in energy
is equal to the difference between the heat transferred to the system and the work done
by the system on its surroundings during a given time interval.
The energy referred to in this principle represents the total energy of the system minus
the sum of the potential, kinetic, and internal (molecular) forms of energy, such as
electrical and chemical energy. The internal energy changes are commonly disre-
garded in water distribution analysis because of their relatively small magnitude.
In hydraulic applications, energy is often represented as energy per unit weight,
resulting in units of length. Using these length equivalents gives engineers a better feel
for the resulting behavior of the system. When using these length equivalents, the state
of the system is expressed in terms of head. The energy at any point within a hydraulic
system is often represented in three parts:
Pressure Head: p/
Elevation Head: z
Velocity Head:
V
2
/2g
Where:
p =
Pressure (N/m
2
, lb./ft.
2
)
=
Specific weight (N/m
3
, lb./ft.
3
)
z = Elevation (m, ft.)
V = Velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)
g =
Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s
2
, ft./sec.
2
)
Pressure Network Hydraulics
B-782 WaterCAD Users Manual
These quantities can be used to express the headloss or head gain between two loca-
tions using the energy equation (for more information, see The Energy Equation on
page B-782).
B.2.2 The Energy Equation
In addition to pressure head, elevation head, and velocity head, there may also be head
added to the system, by a pump for instance, and head removed from the system due
to friction. These changes in head are referred to as head gains and headlosses, respec-
tively. Balancing the energy across two points in the system, you then obtain the
energy equation:
The components of the energy equation can be combined to express two useful quanti-
ties, which are the hydraulic grade and the energy grade.
B.2.3 Hydraulic and Energy Grades
Hydraulic and energy grades includes:
Hydraulic Grade on page B-783
Energy Grade on page B-783
Where:
p =
Pressure (N/m
2
, lb./ft.
2
)
g =
Specific weight (N/m
3
, lb./ft.
3
)
z = Elevation at the centroid (m, ft.)
V = Velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)
g =
Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s
2
, ft./sec.
2
)
h
p
= Head gain from a pump (m, ft.)
h
L
= Combined headloss (m, ft.)
L
2
2
2
2
p
2
1
1
1
h
2g
V
z
!
p
h
2g
V
z
!
p
+ + + = + + +
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-783
Figure B-1: EGL and HGL
Hydraulic Grade
The hydraulic grade is the sum of the pressure head (p/g) and elevation head (z). The
hydraulic head represents the height to which a water column would rise in a piezom-
eter. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the hydraulic
grade line, or HGL.
Energy Grade
The energy grade is the sum of the hydraulic grade and the velocity head (V2/2g).
This is the height to which a column of water would rise in a pitot tube. The plot of the
hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the energy grade line, or EGL. At a
lake or reservoir, where the velocity is essentially zero, the EGL is equal to the HGL,
as can be seen in the following figure.
B.2.4 Conservation of Mass and Energy
Conservation of mass and energy includes:
Conservation of Mass on page B-783
Conservation of Energy on page B-784
Conservation of Mass
At any node in a system containing incompressible fluid, the total volumetric or mass
flows in must equal the flows out, less the change in storage. Separating these into
flows from connecting pipes, demands, and storage, you obtain:
S OUT IN
V t Q t Q + =
' '
Pressure Network Hydraulics
B-784 WaterCAD Users Manual
Conservation of Energy
The conservation of energy principle states that the headlosses through the system
must balance at each point. For pressure networks, this means that the total headloss
between any two nodes in the system must be the same regardless of what path is
taken between the two points. The headloss must be sign consistent with the assumed
flow direction (i.e., gain head when proceeding opposite the flow direction and lose
head when proceeding in the flow direction).
Figure B-2: Conservation of Energy
The same basic principle can be applied to any path between two points. As shown in
the figure above, the combined headloss around a loop must equal zero in order to
achieve the same hydraulic grade (see Hydraulic and Energy Grades on page B-
782) as at the beginning.
Where:
Q
IN
=
Total flow into the node (m
3
/s, cfs)
Q
OUT
=
Total demand at the node (m
3
/s, cfs)
V
S
=
Change in storage volume (m
3
, ft.
3
)
t = Change in time (s)
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-785
B.2.5 The Gradient Algorithm
The gradient algorithm for the solution of pipe networks is formulated upon the full
set of system equations that model both heads and flows. Since both continuity and
energy are balanced and solved with each iteration, the method is theoretically guaran-
teed to deliver the same level of accuracy observed and expected in other well-known
algorithms such as the Simultaneous Path Adjustment Method (Fowler) and the
Linear Theory Method (Wood).
In addition, there are a number of other advantages that this method has over other
algorithms for the solution of pipe network systems:
The method can directly solve both looped and partly branched networks. This
gives it a computational advantage over some loop-based algorithms, such as
Simultaneous Path, which require the reformulation of the network into equiva-
lent looped networks or pseudo-loops.
Using the method avoids the post-computation step of loop and path definition,
which adds significantly to the overhead of system computation.
The method is numerically stable when the system becomes disconnected by
check valves, pressure regulating valves, or modelers error. The loop and path
methods fail in these situations.
The structure of the generated system of equations allows the use of extremely
fast and reliable sparse matrix solvers.
The derivation of the Gradient Algorithm starts with two matrices and ends as a
working system of equations.
B.2.6 Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm
Given a network defined by N unknown head nodes, P links of unknown flow, and B
boundary or fixed head nodes, the network topology can be expressed in two inci-
dence matrices:
and
The following convention is used to assign matrix values:
A
12
= A
21
T
(P x N) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix
A
10
= A
01
T
(P x B) Fixed head nodes incidence matrix
Pressure Network Hydraulics
B-786 WaterCAD Users Manual
Assigned nodal demands are given by:
Assigned boundary nodal heads are given by:
The headloss or gain transform is expressed in the matrix:
These matrix elements that define known or iterative network state can be used to
compute the final steady-state network represented by the matrix quantities for
unknown flow and unknown nodal head.
Unknown link flow quantities are defined by:
Unknown nodal heads are defined by:
These topologic and quantity matrices can be formulated into the generalized matrix
expression using the laws of energy and mass conservation:
A
12
(i,j)
= 1, 0, or -1 (PxN) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix
q
T
= [q
1
, q
2,
, q
N
] (1 x N) Nodal demand vector
H
f
T
= [H
f1
, H
f2
,, H
fB
] (1 x B) Fixed nodal head vector
F
T
(Q) = [f
1
, f
2
, f
p
]
(1 x P) Non-linear laws expressing headlosses in
links
Q
T
= [Q
1
,Q
2
, Q
p
] (1 x P) Unknown link flow rate vector
H
T
= [H
1
, H
2
, H
N
] (1 x N) Unknown nodal head vector
) (Q f f
i i i
=
f 10 12
H A F(Q) H A = +
q Q A
12
=
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-787
A second diagonal matrix that implements the vectorized head change coefficients is
introduced. It is generalized for Hazen-Williams friction losses in this case:
This yields the full expression of the network response in matrix form:
To solve the system of non-linear equations, the Newton-Raphson iterative scheme
can be obtained by differentiating both sides of the equation with respect to Q and H
to get:
with
The final recursive form of the Newton-Raphson algorithm can now be derived after
matrix inversion and various algebraic manipulations and substitutions (not presented
here). The working system of equations for each solution iteration, k, is given by:
The solution for each unknown nodal head for each time iteration is computationally
intensive. This high-speed solution utilizes a highly optimized sparse matrix solver
(see The Linear System Equation Solver on page B-788) that is specifically tailored
to the structure of this matrix system of equations.
Sources:
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
0
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
4
=
1 n
P P
1 n
2 2
1 n
1 1
11
P
2
1
Q R
...
...
Q R
Q R
A
/
0
1
2
3
4
=
/
0
1
2
3
4
/
0
1
2
3
4
q
H A
H
Q
0 A
A A
f 10
21
12 11
/
0
1
2
3
4
=
/
0
1
2
3
4
/
0
1
2
3
4
dq
dE
dH
dQ
0 A
A NA
21
12 11
/
/
/
/
0
1
2
2
2
2
3
4
=
P
2
1
n
...
n
n
N
{ } ) Q A (q ) H A A (Q N A ) A A N (A H
k
21 f 10
1
11
k 1
21
1
12
1
11
1
21
1 k
+ + =
+
) H A H (A A N )Q N (1 Q
f 10
1 k
12
1
11
1 k 1 1 k
+ =
+ +
Pressure Network Hydraulics
B-788 WaterCAD Users Manual
Todini, E. and S. Pilati, A gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks,
Computer Applications in Water Supply, Vol. 1Systems Analysis and Simulation,
ed. By Bryan Callback and Chin-Hour Or, Research Studies Press LTD, Watchword,
Hertfordshire, England.
B.2.7 The Linear System Equation Solver
The Conjugate Gradient method (see The Gradient Algorithm on page B-785) is
one method that, in theory, converges to an exact solution in a limited number of steps.
The Gradient working equation can be expressed for the pressure network system of
equations as:
where:
The structure of the system matrix A at the point of solution is:
and it can be seen that the nature of the topological matrix components yield a total
working matrix A that is:
Symmetric
Positive definite
Stieltjes type
Because of the symmetry, the number of non-zero elements to be retained in the
matrix equals the number of nodes plus the number of links. This results in a low
density, highly sparse matrix form. It follows that an iterative solution scheme would
be preferred over direct matrix inversion, in order to avoid matrix fill-in, which serves
to increase the computational effort.
Because the system is symmetric and positive definite, a Cholesky factorization can
be performed to give:
where L is lower triangular with positive diagonal elements. Making the Cholesky
factorization allows the system to be solved in two steps:
b Ax =
1 k
H x
+
=
{ } ) Q A (q ) H A A (Q N A b
k
21 f 10
1
11
k 1
21
+ + =
12 21 12
1
11 21
DA A A ) (NA A A = =
T
LL A =
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-789
The use of this approach over more general sparse matrix solvers that implement
traditional Gaussian elimination methods without consideration to matrix symmetry is
preferred, since performance gains are considerable. The algorithm utilized in this
software solves the system of equations using a variant of Choleskys method which
has been optimized to reduce fill-in of the factorization matrix, thus minimizing
storage and reducing overall computational effort.
B.2.8 Pump Theory
Pumps are an integral part of many pressure systems. Pumps add energy, or head
gains, to the flow to counteract headlosses and hydraulic grade differences within the
system.
A pump is defined by its characteristic curve, which relates the pump head, or the
head added to the system, to the flow rate. This curve is indicative of the ability of the
pump to add head at different flow rates. To model behavior of the pump system, addi-
tional information is needed to ascertain the actual point at which the pump will be
operating.
The system operating point is based on the point at which the pump curve crosses the
system curve representing the static lift and headlosses due to friction and minor
losses (for more information, see Minor Losses on page B-798). When these curves
are superimposed, the operating point can easily be found. This is shown in the figure
below.
Figure B-3: System Operating Point
b L y
1
=
y ) (L x
1 T
=
Pressure Network Hydraulics
B-790 WaterCAD Users Manual
As water surface elevations and demands throughout the system change, the static
head (Hs) and headlosses (HL) vary. This changes the location of the system curve,
while the pump characteristic curve remains constant. These shifts in the system curve
result in a shifting operating point over time.
Variable Speed Pumps
A pumps characteristic curve is fixed for a given motor speed and impeller diameter,
but can be determined for any speed and any diameter by applying the affinity laws.
For variable speed pumps, these affinity laws are presented as:
and
Figure B-4: Effect of Relative Speed on Pump Curve
Where:
Q =
Pump flow rate (m
3
/s, cfs)
h = Pump head (m, ft.)
n = Pump speed (rpm)
2
1
2
1
n
n
Q
Q
=
2
2
1
2
1
n
n
h
h
!
!
"
#
$
$
%
&
=
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-791
Constant Horsepower Pumps
During preliminary studies, the exact characteristics of the constant horsepower pump
may not be known. In these cases, the assumption is often made that the pump is
adding energy to the water at a constant rate. Based on power-head-flow rate relation-
ships for pumps, the operating point of the pump can then be determined. Although
this assumption is useful for some applications, a constant horsepower pump should
only be used for preliminary studies.
Note: It is not necessary to place a check valve on the pipe
immediately downstream of a pump because pumps have built
in check valves that prevent reverse flow.
This software currently models six different types of pumps:
Tip: Whenever possible, avoid using constant power or design point
pumps. They are often enticing because they require less work
on behalf of the engineer, but they are much less accurate than a
pump curve based on several representative points.
Constant PowerThese pumps may be useful for preliminary designs and esti-
mating pump size, but should not be used for any analysis for which more accu-
rate results are desired.
Design Point (One-Point)A pump can be defined by a single design point (Hd
@ Qd). From this point, the curves interception with the head and discharge axes
is computed as Ho = 1.33Hd and Qo = 2.00Qd. This type of pump is useful for
preliminary designs, but should not be used for final analysis.
Standard (Three-Point)This pump curve is defined by three pointsthe
shutoff head (pump head at zero discharge), the design point (as with the single-
point pump), and the maximum operating point (the highest discharge at which
the pump performs predictably).
Standard ExtendedThe same as the standard three-point pump, but with an
extended point at the zero pump head point. This is automatically calculated by
the program.
Custom ExtendedThe custom extended pump is similar to the standard
extended pump, but allows you to enter the discharge at zero pump head.
Multiple PointThis option allows you to define a custom rating curve for a
pump. The pump curve is defined by entering points for discharge rates at various
heads. Since the general pump equation, shown below, is used to simulate the
pump during the network computations, the user-defined pump curve points are
used to solve for coefficients in the general pump equation:
) Q B ( A Y
C
=
Pressure Network Hydraulics
B-792 WaterCAD Users Manual
The Levenberg-Marquardt Method is used to solve for A, B and C based on the given
multiple-point rating curve.
B.2.9 Valve Theory
There are several types of valves that may be present in a pressurized system. These
valves have different behaviors and different responsibilities, but all valves are used
for automatically controlling parts of the system. They can be opened, closed, or throt-
tled to achieve the desired result.
Check Valves (CVs) on page B-792
Flow Control Valves (FCVs) on page B-792
Pressure Reducing Valves (PRVs) on page B-792
Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSVs) on page B-793
Pressure Breaker Valves (PBVs) on page B-793
Throttle Control Valves (TCVs) on page B-793
General Purpose Valves (GPVs) on page B-793
Check Valves (CVs)
Check valves are used to maintain flow in only one direction by closing when the flow
begins to reverse. When the flow is in the specified direction of the check valve, it is
considered to be fully open. Check valves are added to the network on a pipe element.
Flow Control Valves (FCVs)
FCVs are used to limit the maximum flow rate through the valve from upstream to
downstream. FCVs do not limit the minimum flow rate or negative flow rate (flow
from the To Pipe to the From Pipe). These valves are commonly found in areas where
a water district has contracted with another district or a private developer to limit the
maximum demand to a value that will not adversely affect the providers system.
Pressure Reducing Valves (PRVs)
Pressure reducing valves are often used for separate pressure zones in water distribu-
tion networks. These valves prevent the pressure downstream from exceeding a speci-
fied level in order to avoid pressures that could have damaging effects on the system.
Where: Y = Head (m, ft.)
Q =
Discharge (m
3
/s, cfs)
A,B,C = Pump curve coefficients
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-793
Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSVs)
Pressure sustaining valves maintain a specified pressure upstream from the valve.
Similar to the other regulating valves, these are often used to ensure that pressures in
the system (upstream, in this case) will not drop to unacceptable levels.
Pressure Breaker Valves (PBVs)
Pressure breaker valves create a specified headloss across the valve, and are often
used to model components that cannot be easily modeled using standard minor loss
elements.
Throttle Control Valves (TCVs)
Throttle control valves simulate minor loss elements whose headloss characteristics
change over time.
General Purpose Valves (GPVs)
GPVs are used to model situations and devices where you specify the flow-to-head-
loss relationship, rather than using standard hydraulic formulas. GPVs can be used to
represent reduced pressure backflow prevention valves, well draw-down behavior,
and turbines.
B.3 Friction and Minor Losses
Friction and minor losses includes:
Friction Loss Methods on page B-793
Minor Losses on page B-798
B.3.1 Friction Loss Methods
Friction loss methods include:
Chezys Equation on page B-794
Colebrook-White Equation on page B-794
Hazen-Williams Equation on page B-795
Darcy-Weisbach Equation on page B-795
Mannings Equation on page B-797
Friction and Minor Losses
B-794 WaterCAD Users Manual
Chezys Equation
Chezys equation is rarely used directly, but it is the basis for several other methods,
including Mannings equation. Chezys equation is:
Colebrook-White Equation
The Colebrook-White equation is used to iteratively calculate for the Darcy-Weisbach
friction factor:
Free Surface:
Full Flow (Closed Conduit):
Where:
Q =
Discharge in the section (m
3
/s, cfs)
C =
Chezys roughness coefficient (m
1/2
/s, ft.
1/2
/sec.)
A =
Flow area (m
2
, ft.
2
)
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft./ft.)
S R A C Q =
Where: f = Friction factor (unitless)
k = Darcy-Weisbach roughness height (m, ft.)
Re = Reynolds Number (unitless)
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)
D = Pipe diameter (m, ft.)
1
2
120
251
f
k
R R f
e
=
\
)
log
.
.
1
2
37
251
f
k
D R f
e
=
\
)
log
.
.
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-795
Hazen-Williams Equation
The Hazen-Williams Formula is frequently used in the analysis of pressure pipe
systems (such as water distribution networks and sewer force mains). The formula is
as follows:
Darcy-Weisbach Equation
Because of non-empirical origins, the Darcy-Weisbach equation is viewed by many
engineers as the most accurate method for modeling friction losses. It most commonly
takes the following form:
For section geometries that are not circular, this equation is adapted by relating a
circular sections full-flow hydraulic radius to its diameter:
D = 4R
Where:
Q =
Discharge in the section (m
3
/s, cfs)
C = Hazen-Williams roughness coefficient (unitless)
A =
Flow area (m
2
, ft.
2
)
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft./ft.)
k = Constant (0.85 for SI units, 1.32 for US units).
54 . 0 63 . 0
S R A C k Q =
Where:
h
L
= Headloss (m, ft.)
f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)
D = Pipe diameter (m, ft.)
L = Pipe length (m, ft.)
V = Flow velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)
g =
Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s
2
, ft./sec.
2
)
h f
L
D
V
g
L
=
2
2
Friction and Minor Losses
B-796 WaterCAD Users Manual
This can then be rearranged to the form:
The Swamee and Jain equation can then be used to calculate the friction factor. For
more information, see Swamee and Jain Equation on page B-796.
Swamee and Jain Equation
Note: The Kinematic Viscosity is used in determining the friction
coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method. The default
units are initially set by Bentley Systems.
The friction factor is dependent on the Reynolds number of the flow, which is depen-
dent on the flow velocity, which is dependent on the discharge. As you can see, this
process requires the iterative selection of a friction factor until the calculated
discharge agrees with the chosen friction factor.
Where: R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)
D = Diameter (m, ft.)
Where:
Q =
Discharge (m
3
/s, cfs)
A =
Flow area (m
2
, ft.
2
)
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft./ft.)
f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)
g =
Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s
2
, ft./sec.
2
)
f
S R
g 8 A Q
=
Where: f = Friction factor (unitless)
= Roughness height (m, ft.)
D = Pipe diameter (m, ft.)
R
e
= Reynolds Number (unitless)
f
D
R
e
=
\
)
l
l
l
l
1325
37
574
09
2
.
ln
.
.
.
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-797
Mannings Equation
Note: Mannings roughness coefficients are the same as the
roughness coefficients used in Kutters equation.
Mannings equation, which is based on Chezys equation, is one of the most popular
methods in use today for free surface flow. For Mannings equation, the roughness
coefficient in Chezys equation is calculated as:
Substituting this roughness into Chezys equation, you obtain the well-known
Mannings equation:
Where:
C =
Chezys roughness coefficient (m
1/2
/s, ft.
1/2
/sec.)
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)
n =
Mannings roughness (s/m
1/3
)
k =
Constant (1.00 m
1/3
/m
1/3
, 1.49 ft.
1/3
/ft.
1/3
)
Where:
Q =
Discharge (m
3
/s, cfs)
k =
Constant (1.00 m
1/3
/s, 1.49 ft.
1/3
/sec.)
n = Mannings roughness (unitless)
A =
Flow area (m
2
, ft.
2
)
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft./ft.)
n
R
k C
6 / 1
=
2 / 1 3 / 2
S R A
n
k
Q =
Friction and Minor Losses
B-798 WaterCAD Users Manual
B.3.2 Minor Losses
Minor losses in pressure pipes are caused by localized areas of increased turbulence
that create a drop in the energy and hydraulic grades at that point in the system. The
magnitude of these losses is dependent primarily upon the shape of the fitting, which
directly affects the flow lines in the pipe.
Figure B-5: Flow Lines at Entrance
The equation most commonly used for determining the loss in a fitting, valve, meter,
or other localized component is:
Typical values for fitting loss coefficients are included in the Fittings Table. For more
information, see Fitting Loss Coefficients on page B-813.
Generally speaking, more gradual transitions create smoother flow lines and smaller
headlosses. For example, the figure below shows the effects of entrance configuration
on typical pipe entrance flow lines.
Where:
h
m
= Loss due to the minor loss element (m, ft.)
K = Loss coefficient for the specific fitting
V = Velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)
g =
Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s
2
, ft./sec.
2
)
2g
V
K h
2
m
=
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-799
B.4 Water Quality Theory
The governing equations for WaterCAD water quality solver are based on the princi-
ples of conservation of mass coupled with reaction kinetics. The following
phenomena are represented (Rossman et al., 1993; Rossman and Boulos, 1996):
Advective Transport in Pipes on page B-799
Mixing at Pipe Junctions on page B-800
Mixing in Storage Facilities on page B-800
Bulk Flow Reactions on page B-801
Pipe Wall Reactions on page B-804
System of Equations on page B-805
Lagrangian Transport Algorithm on page B-805
References on page B-807
B.4.1 Advective Transport in Pipes
A dissolved substance will travel down the length of a pipe with the same average
velocity as the carrier fluid while at the same time reacting (either growing or
decaying) at some given rate. Longitudinal dispersion is usually not an important
transport mechanism under most operating conditions. This means there is no inter-
mixing of mass between adjacent parcels of water traveling down a pipe.
Advective transport within a pipe is represented by the following equation:
Where:
C
i
= Concentration (mass/volume) in pipe i
u
i
= Flow velocity (length/time) in pipe i
r = Rate of reaction (mass/volume/time) as a function
of concentration
C
i
t
-------- u
i
C
i
x
-------- r C
i
( ) + =
Water Quality Theory
B-800 WaterCAD Users Manual
B.4.2 Mixing at Pipe J unctions
At junctions receiving inflow from two or more pipes, the mixing of fluid is taken to
be complete and instantaneous. Thus the concentration of a substance in water leaving
the junction is the flow-weighted sum of the concentrations from the inflow pipes.
For a specific node k one can write:
B.4.3 Mixing in Storage Facilities
It is convenient to assume that the contents of storage facilities (tanks and reservoirs)
are completely mixed. This is a reasonable assumption for many tanks operating under
fill-and-draw conditions, providing that sufficient momentum flux is imparted to the
inflow (Rossman and Grayman, 1999). Under completely mixed conditions the
concentration throughout the tank is a blend of the current contents and that of any
entering water. At the same time, the internal concentration could be changing due to
reactions.
The following equation expresses these phenomena:
Where: I = Link with flow leaving node k
I
k
= Set of links with flow into k
L
j
= Length of link j
Q
j
= Flow (volume/time) in link j
Q
k,ext
= External source flow entering the network at node
k
C
k,ext
= Concentration of the external flow entering at
node k
C
i|x=0
= The concentration at the start of link i.
C
i|x=L
= The concentration at the end of link i.
C
i x 0 =
j
I '
k
Q
j
C
j x L
j
=
Q
k ext ,
C
k ext ,
+
j
I '
k
Q
j
Q
k ext ,
+
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- =
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-801
B.4.4 Bulk Flow Reactions
While a substance moves down a pipe or resides in storage, it can undergo reaction
with constituents in the water column. The rate of reaction can generally be described
as a power function of concentration:
When a limiting concentration exists on the ultimate growth or loss of a substance, the
rate expression becomes:
For n > 0, K
b
> 0:
For n > 0, K
b
< 0:
Where:
V
s
= Volume in storage at time t
C
s
= Concentration within the storage facility
I
s
= Set of links providing flow into the facility
O
s
= Set of links withdrawing flow from the facility
V
s
C
s
( )
t
------------------
i
I '
s
Q
i
C
i x L
i
= j
O
'
s
Q
j
C
s
r C
s
( + =
Where: k = Reaction constant
n = Reaction order
Where:
C
L
= Limiting concentration
r kC
n
=
R K
b
C
L
C ( )C
n 1 ( )
=
R K
b
C C
L
( )C
n 1 ( )
=
Water Quality Theory
B-802 WaterCAD Users Manual
Simple 1st-Order Decay
(C
L
= 0, K
b
< 0, n = 1)
The decay of many substances, such as chlorine, can be modeled adequately as a
simple first-order reaction.
First-Order Saturation Growth
(C
L
> 0, K
b
> 0, n = 1)
This model can be applied to the growth of disinfection by-products, such as trihalom-
ethanes, where the ultimate formation of by-product (CL) is limited by the amount of
reactive precursor present.
Two-Component, 2nd-Order Decay
(C
L
> 0|C
L
< 0, K
b
< 0, n = 2)
This model assumes that substance A reacts with substance B in some unknown ratio
to produce a product P. The rate of disappearance of A is proportional to the product of
A and B remaining. C
L
can be either positive or negative, depending on whether either
component A or B is in excess, respectively. Clark (1998) has had success in applying
this model to chlorine decay data that did not conform to the simple first-order model.
Michaelis-Menton Decay Kinetics
(CL > 0, Kb < 0, n < 0)
Note: These expressions apply only for values of K
b
and C
L
used with
Michaelis-Menton kinetics.
R K =
b
C
R K =
b
C
L
C ( )
R K =
b
C C
L
C ( )
R
K
b
C
C
L
C
------------------ =
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-803
As a special case, when a negative reaction order n is specified, WaterCAD will utilize
the Michaelis-Menton rate equation, shown above for a decay reaction. (For growth
reactions the denominator becomes C
L
+ C.) This rate equation is often used to
describe enzyme-catalyzed reactions and microbial growth. It produces first-order
behavior at low concentrations and zero-order behavior at higher concentrations. Note
that for decay reactions, C
L
must be set higher than the initial concentration present.
Koechling (1998) has applied Michaelis-Menton kinetics to model chlorine decay in a
number of different waters and found that both K
b
and C
L
could be related to the
waters organic content and its ultraviolet absorbance as follows:
Zero-Order Growth
(C
L
= 0, K
b
= 1, n = 0)
This special case can be used to model water age, where with each unit of time the
concentration (i.e., age) increases by one unit.
The relationship between the bulk rate constant seen at one temperature (T1) to that at
another temperature (T2) is often expressed using a vant Hoff-Arrehnius equation of
the form:
In one investigation for chlorine, q was estimated to be 1.1 when T1 was 20 deg. C
(Koechling, 1998).
Where: UVA = Ultraviolet absorbance at 254 nm (1/cm)
DOC = Dissolved organic carbon concentration (mg/L)
K
b
0.32 UVA
1.365 100UVA ( )
DOC
-------------------------- =
C
L
4.98UVA 1.91DOC =
Where: = Constant
R 1.0 =
K
b2
K
b1
T2 T1 ( )
=
Water Quality Theory
B-804 WaterCAD Users Manual
B.4.5 Pipe Wall Reactions
While flowing through pipes, dissolved substances can be transported to the pipe wall
and react with material such as corrosion products or biofilm that are on or close to the
wall. The amount of wall area available for reaction and the rate of mass transfer
between the bulk fluid and the wall will also influence the overall rate of this reaction.
The surface area per unit volume, which for a pipe equals 2 divided by the radius,
determines the former factor. The latter factor can be represented by a mass transfer
coefficient whose value depends on the molecular diffusivity of the reactive species
and on the Reynolds number of the flow (Rossman et. al, 1994).
For first-order kinetics, the rate of a pipe wall reaction can be expressed as:
For zero-order kinetics, the reaction rate cannot be any higher than the rate of mass
transfer, so:
Mass transfer coefficients are usually expressed in terms of a dimensionless Sherwood
number (Sh):
In fully developed laminar flow, the average Sherwood number along the length of a
pipe can be expressed as:
Where:
k
w
= Wall reaction rate constant (length/time)
k
f
= Mass transfer coefficient (length/time)
R = Pipe radius
Where: kw = Mass/area/time
Where:
D = Molecular diffusivity of the species being
transported (length
2
/ time)
d = Pipe diameter
r
2k
w
k
f
C
R k
w
k
f
+ ( )
------------------------- =
r MIN k
w
k ,
f
C ( ) 2 R ( ) =
k
f
Sh
D
d
---- =
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-805
For turbulent flow the empirical correlation of Notter and Sleicher (1971) can be used:
B.4.6 System of Equations
When applied to a network as a whole, Equations 1-3 represent a coupled set of differ-
ential/algebraic equations with time-varying coefficients that must be solved for Ci in
each pipe i and Cs in each storage facility s. This solution is subject to the following
set of externally imposed conditions:
Initial conditions that specify Ci for all x in each pipe i and Cs in each storage
facility s at time 0
Boundary conditions that specify values for Ck,ext and Qk,ext for all time t at
each node k which has external mass inputs
Hydraulic conditions which specify the volume Vs in each storage facility s and
the flow Qi in each link i at all times t
B.4.7 Lagrangian Transport Algorithm
WaterCAD water quality simulator uses a Lagrangian time-based approach to track
the fate of discrete parcels of water as they move along pipes and mix together at junc-
tions between fixed-length time steps (Liou and Kroon, 1987). These water quality
time steps are typically much shorter than the hydraulic time step (e.g., minutes rather
Where: Re = Reynolds number
Sc = Schmidt number (kinematic viscosity of water
divided by the diffusivity of the chemical)
(Edwards et. al, 1976).
Sh 3.65
0.0668 d L ( )ReSc
1 0.04 d L ( )ReSc [ ]
2 3
+
-------------------------------------------------------------- + =
Sh 0.0149Re
0.88
Sc
1 3
=
Water Quality Theory
B-806 WaterCAD Users Manual
than hours) to accommodate the short times of travel that can occur within pipes. As
time progresses, the size of the most upstream segment in a pipe increases as water
enters the pipe while an equal loss in size of the most downstream segment occurs as
water leaves the link. The size of the segments in between these remains unchanged.
The following steps occur at the end of each such time step:
1. The water quality in each segment is updated to reflect any reaction that may have
occurred over the time step.
2. The water from the leading segments of pipes with flow into each junction is
blended together to compute a new water quality value at the junction. The
volume contributed from each segment equals the product of its pipes flow rate
and the time step. If this volume exceeds that of the segment, then the segment is
destroyed and the next one in line behind it begins to contribute its volume.
3. Contributions from outside sources are added to the quality values at the junc-
tions. The quality in storage tanks is updated depending on the method used to
model mixing in the tank (see Figure B-6: Behavior of Segments in the
Lagrangian Solution Methodon page B-807).
4. New segments are created in pipes with flow out of each junction, reservoir, and
tank. The segment volume equals the product of the pipe flow and the time step.
The segments water quality equals the new quality value computed for the node.
To cut down on the number of segments, this step is only carried out if the new
node quality differs by a user-specified tolerance from that of the last segment in
the outflow pipe. If the difference in quality is below the tolerance, then the size of
the current last segment in the outflow pipe is increased by the volume flowing
into the pipe over the time step.
This process is then repeated for the next water-quality time step. At the start of the
next hydraulic time step, the order of segments in any links that experience a flow
reversal is switched. Initially each pipe in the network consists of a single segment
whose quality equals the initial quality assigned to the upstream node.
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-807
Figure B-6: Behavior of Segments in the Lagrangian Solution Method
B.4.8 References
Bhave, P.R., Analysis of Flow in Water Distribution Networks, Technomic Publishing,
Lancaster, PA, 1991.
Clark, R.M., Chlorine demand and Trihalomethane formation kinetics: a second-
order model, Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol. 124, No. 1, pp. 16-24,
1998.
Dunlop, E.J., WADI Users Manual, Local Government Computer Services Board,
Dublin, Ireland, 1991.
George, A. & Liu, J. W-H., Computer Solution of Large Sparse Positive Definite
Systems, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1981.
1 2
1
1
2
2 3
1 3
1
2
2 3 2
Time t
Time t + t
Water Quality Theory
B-808 WaterCAD Users Manual
Hamam, Y.M., & Brameller, A., Hybrid method for the solution of piping networks,
Proc. IEE, Vol. 113, No. 11, pp. 1607-1612, 1971.
Koechling, M.T., Assessment and Modeling of Chlorine Reactions with Natural
Organic Matter: Impact of Source Water Quality and Reaction Conditions, Ph.D.
Thesis, Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering, University of Cincin-
nati, Cincinnati, Ohio, 1998.
Liou, C.P. and Kroon, J.R., Modeling the propagation of waterborne substances in
distribution networks, J. AWWA, 79(11), 54-58, 1987.
Notter, R.H. and Sleicher, C.A., The eddy diffusivity in the turbulent boundary layer
near a wall, Chem. Eng. Sci., Vol. 26, pp. 161-171, 1971.
Osiadacz, A.J., Simulation and Analysis of Gas Networks, E. & F.N. Spon, London,
1987.
Rossman, L.A., Boulos, P.F., and Altman, T., Discrete volume-element method for
network water-quality models, Journal of Water Resource Planning and Manage-
ment, Vol. 119, No. 5, 505-517, 1993.
Rossman, L.A., Clark, R.M., and Grayman, W.M., Modeling chlorine residuals in
drinking-water distribution systems, Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol.
120, No. 4, 803-820, 1994.
Rossman, L.A. and Boulos, P.F., Numerical methods for modeling water quality in
distribution systems: A comparison, Journal of Water Resource Planning and
Management, Vol. 122, No. 2, 137-146, 1996.
Rossman, L.A. and Grayman, W.M., Scale-model studies of mixing in drinking water
storage tanks, Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol. 125, No. 8, pp. 755-761,
1999.
Salgado, R., Todini, E., & OConnell, P.E., Extending the gradient method to include
pressure regulating valves in pipe networks, Proc. Inter. Symposium on Computer
Modeling of Water Distribution Systems, University of Kentucky, May 12-13, 1988.
Todini, E. & Pilati, S., A gradient method for the analysis of pipe networks, 1987.
International Conference on Computer Applications for Water Supply and Distribu-
tion, Leicester Polytechnic, UK, September 8-10.
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-809
B.5 Engineers Reference
This section provides you with tables of commonly used roughness values and fitting
loss coefficients.
Roughness Values:
Roughness ValuesMannings Equation on page B-809
Roughness ValuesDarcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White) on page B-
810
Roughness ValuesHazen-Williams Equation on page B-811
Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes on page B-812
Coefficients:
Fitting Loss Coefficients on page B-813
B.5.1 Roughness ValuesMannings Equation
Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:
Table B-1: Mannings Coefficient (n) for Closed Metal Conduits
Flowing Partly Full
Channel Type and Description Minimum Normal Maximum
a. Brass, smooth 0.009 0.010 0.013
b. Steel
1. Lockbar and welded 0.010 0.012 0.014
2. Riveted and spiral 0.013 0.016 0.017
c. Cast iron
1. Coated 0.010 0.013 0.014
2. Uncoated 0.011 0.014 0.016
d. Wrought iron
1. Black 0.012 0.014 0.015
Engineers Reference
B-810 WaterCAD Users Manual
B.5.2 Roughness ValuesDarcy-Weisbach Equation
(Colebrook-White)
Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:
2. Galvanized 0.013 0.016 0.017
e. Corrugated metal
1. Subdrain 0.017 0.019 0.021
2. Storm drain 0.021 0.024 0.030
Table B-1: Mannings Coefficient (n) for Closed Metal Conduits
Flowing Partly Full (Contd)
Channel Type and Description Minimum Normal Maximum
Table B-2: Darcy-Weisbach Roughness Heights e for Closed
Conduits
Pipe Material (mm) (ft.)
Glass, drawn brass, copper (new) 0.0015 0.000005
Seamless commercial steel (new) 0.004 0.000013
Commercial steel (enamel coated) 0.0048 0.000016
Commercial steel (new) 0.045 0.00015
Wrought iron (new) 0.045 0.00015
Asphalted cast iron (new) 0.12 0.0004
Galvanized iron 0.15 0.0005
Cast iron (new) 0.26 0.00085
Concrete (steel forms, smooth) 0.18 0.0006
Concrete (good joints, average) 0.36 0.0012
Concrete (rough, visible, form marks) 0.60 0.002
Riveted steel (new) 0.9 ~ 9.0 0.003 - 0.03
Corrugated metal 45 0.15
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-811
B.5.3 Roughness ValuesHazen-Williams Equation
Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:
Table B-3: Hazen-Williams Roughness
Coefficients (C)
Pipe Material C
Asbestos Cement 140
Brass 130-140
Brick sewer 100
Cast-iron
New, unlined 130
10 yr. Old 107-113
20 yr. Old 89-100
30 yr. Old 75-90
40 yr. Old 64-83
Concrete or concrete lined
Steel forms 140
Wooden forms 120
Centrifugally spun 135
Copper 130-140
Galvanized iron 120
Glass 140
Lead 130-140
Plastic 140-150
Steel
Coal-tar enamel, lined 145-150
New unlined 140-150
Engineers Reference
B-812 WaterCAD Users Manual
B.5.4 Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes
Typical pipe roughness values are shown below. These values may vary depending on
the manufacturer, workmanship, age, and many other factors.
Riveted 110
Tin 130
Vitrified clay (good condition) 110-140
Wood stave (average condition) 120
Table B-3: Hazen-Williams Roughness
Coefficients (C) (Contd)
Pipe Material C
Table B-4: Comparative Pipe Roughness Values
Material
Mannings
Coefficient
n
Hazen-
Williams
C
Darcy-Weisbach
Roughness Height
k (mm) k (0.001 ft.)
Asbestos cement 0.011 140 0.0015 0.005
Brass 0.011 135 0.0015 0.005
Brick 0.015 100 0.6 2
Cast-iron, new 0.012 130 0.26 0.85
Concrete:
Steel forms 0.011 140 0.18 0.6
Wooden forms 0.015 120 0.6 2
Centrifugally spun 0.013 135 0.36 1.2
Copper 0.011 135 0.0015 0.005
Corrugated metal 0.022 45 150
Galvanized iron 0.016 120 0.15 0.5
Glass 0.011 140 0.0015 0.005
Lead 0.011 135 0.0015 0.005
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-813
B.5.5 Fitting Loss Coefficients
For similar fittings, the K-value is highly dependent on things such as bend radius and
contraction ratios.
Plastic 0.009 150 0.0015 0.005
Steel
Coal-tar enamel 0.010 148 0.0048 0.016
New unlined 0.011 145 0.045 0.15
Riveted 0.019 110 0.9 3
Wood stave 0.012 120 0.18 0.6
Table B-4: Comparative Pipe Roughness Values (Contd)
Material
Mannings
Coefficient
n
Hazen-
Williams
C
Darcy-Weisbach
Roughness Height
Table B-5: Typical Fitting K Coefficients
Fitting K Value Fitting K Value
Pipe Entrance 90 Smooth Bend
Bellmouth 0.03-0.05 Bend Radius / D = 4 0.16-0.18
Rounded 0.12-0.25 Bend Radius / D = 2 0.19-0.25
Sharp-Edged 0.50 Bend Radius / D = 1 0.35-0.40
Projecting 0.80 Mitered Bend
ContractionSudden = 15 0.05
D
2
/D
1
= 0.80 0.18 = 30 0.10
D
2
/D
1
= 0.50 0.37 = 45 0.20
D
2
/D
1
= 0.20 0.49 = 60 0.35
ContractionConical = 90 0.80
D
2
/D
1
= 0.80 0.05 Tee
D
2
/D
1
= 0.50 0.07 Line Flow 0.30-0.40
Genetic Algorithms Methodology
B-814 WaterCAD Users Manual
B.6 Genetic Algorithms Methodology
Genetic algorithms methodology includes:
Darwin Calibrator Methodology on page B-814
Darwin Designer Methodology on page B-819
References on page B-829
B.6.1 Darwin Calibrator Methodology
Computer models have become an essential tool for the management of water distri-
bution systems around the world. There are numerous purposes for using a computer
model to simulate the flow conditions within a system. A model can be employed to:
Ensure adequate quantity and quality service of the potable water resource to the
community
Evaluate planning and design alternatives
Assess system performance
Verify operating strategies for better management of the water infrastructure
system
Perform vulnerability studies to assess risks that may be presented and affect the
water supply
D
2
/D
1
= 0.20 0.08 Branch Flow 0.75-1.80
ExpansionSudden Cross
D
2
/D
1
= 0.80 0.16 Line Flow 0.50
D
2
/D
1
= 0.50 0.57 Branch Flow 0.75
D
2
/D
1
= 0.20 0.92 45 Wye
ExpansionConical Line Flow 0.30
D
2
/D
1
= 0.80 0.03 Branch Flow 0.50
D
2
/D
1
= 0.50 0.08
D
2
/D
1
= 0.20 0.13
Table B-5: Typical Fitting K Coefficients (Contd)
Fitting K Value Fitting K Value
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-815
For these purposes, a model is constructed in which data describing network elements
of pipes, junctions, valves, pumps, tanks, and reservoirs are assembled in a systematic
manner to predict pipe flow and junction hydraulic grade lines (HGL) or pressures
within a water distribution system.
Computer models are significant investments for water companies. To ensure a good
investment return and correct use of the models, the model must be capable of
correctly simulating flow conditions encountered at the site. This is achieved by cali-
brating the models. A calibration involves the process of adjusting model characteris-
tics and parameters so that the models predicted flows and pressures match actual
observed field data to some desirable or acceptable level. This is described in more
detail in Walski, Chase and Savic (2001).
Calibration of a water distribution model is a complicated task. There are many uncer-
tain parameters that need to be adjusted to reduce the discrepancy between the model
predictions and field observations of junction HGL and pipe discharges. Pipe rough-
ness coefficients are often considered for calibration. However, there are many other
parameters that are uncertain and affect junction HGL and pipe flow rate. To minimize
errors in model parameters and eliminate the compensation error of calibration param-
eters (Walski 2001), you should consider calibrating all the model parameters, such as
junction demand, operation status of pipes and valves, and pipe roughness coeffi-
cients.
Calibrating water distribution network models relies upon field measurement data,
such as junction pressures, pipe flows, water levels in storage facilities, valve settings,
pump operating status (on/off), and pump speeds. Among all the possible field obser-
vation data, junction HGL and pipe flows are most often used to evaluate the good-
ness-of-fit of the model calibration. Other parameters, such as tank levels, valve
settings, and pump operating status/speed are used as boundary conditions that are
recorded when collecting a set of calibration observations of junction pressures and
pipe flow rates.
Field observation data are measured and collected at different times of the day and at
various locations on site, which may correspond to various demand loadings and
boundary conditions. In order for the model simulation results to more closely repre-
sent observed data, simulation results must use the same demand loading and
boundary conditions as observed data. Thus, the calibration process must be
conducted under multiple demand loading and operating boundary conditions.
Traditional calibration of a water distribution model is based on a trial-and-error
procedure, by which an engineer or modeler first estimates the values of model param-
eters, runs the model to obtain a predicted pressure and flow, and finally compares the
simulated values to the observed data. If the predicted data does not compare closely
with the observed data, the engineer returns to the model, makes some adjustments to
Genetic Algorithms Methodology
B-816 WaterCAD Users Manual
the model parameters, and calculates it again to produce a new set of simulation
results. This may have to be repeated many times to make sure that the model
produces a calibrated prediction of the water distribution network in the real world.
The traditional calibration technique is, among other things, quite time consuming.
In addition, a typical network representation of a water network may include hundreds
or thousands of links and nodes. Ideally, during the water distribution model calibra-
tion process, the roughness coefficient is adjusted for each link and demand is
adjusted for each node. However, only a small percentage of representative sample
measurements can be made available for the use of model calibration, due to the
limited financial and labor requirements for data collection. Therefore, it is of utmost
importance to have a comprehensive methodology and efficient tool that can assist the
engineer in achieving a highly accurate model under practical conditions, including
various model parameters such as pipe roughness, junction demand, and link status,
and also multiple demand and boundary conditions.
Calibration Formulation
An optimized calibrator is formulated and developed for facilitating the calibration
process of a water distribution model. The parameters are obtained by minimizing the
discrepancy between the model-predicted and the field-observed values of junction
pressures (hydraulic grades) and pipe flows for given boundary conditions. The opti-
mized calibration is then defined as a nonlinear optimization problem with three
different calibration objectives.
Calibration Objectives
The goodness-of-fit of model calibration is evaluated by the discrepancy between the
model simulated and field measured junction HGL and pipe flow. The goodness-of-fit
score is calculated by using a user-specified fitness-point-per-hydraulic head for junc-
tions and fitness-point-per-flow for pipes. This allows a modeler to flexibly weight the
evaluation of both pipe flow and junction hydraulic head.
Objective Type One: Minimize the Sum of Difference Squares
Objective Type Two: Minimize the Sum of Absolute Differences
NF NH
Fpnt
Fobs Fsim
w
Hpnt
Hobs Hsim
w
minimize
NF
nf
nf nf
nf
NH
np
nh nh
nh
+
!
!
"
#
$
$
%
&
+
!
!
"
#
$
$
%
&
' '
= = 1
2
1
2
NF NH
Fpnt
Fobs Fsim
w
Hpnt
Hobs Hsim
w
minimize
NF
nf
nf nf
nf
NH
np
nh nh
nh
+
' '
= = 1 1
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-817
Objective Type Three: Minimize the Maximum Absolute Difference
Where: Hobs
nh
designates the nh-th observed hydraulic grade.
Hsim
nh
is the nh-th model simulated hydraulic grade. Hloss
nh
is the head loss at observation data point nh, Fobs
nf
is the
observed flow, Fsim
nf
is model simulated flow, Hp
nt
notes the
hydraulic head per fitness point, while Fp
nt
is the flow per
fitness point. NH is the number of observed hydraulic grades
and NF is the number of observed pipe discharges, W
nh
and
W
nf
represent a normalized weighting factor for observed
hydraulic grades and flows respectively. They are given as:
Wnh = f(Hloss
nh
/ Hloss
nh
)
Wnf = f(Fobs
nf
/ Fobs
nf
)
Where: f( ) is a function which can be linear, square, square root, log,
or constant. An optimized calibration can be conducted by
selecting one of three objectives above and the weighting
factors between head and flow. The model parameters are
calculated by using a genetic algorithm while minimizing the
selected objective function and satisfying the calibration
constraints.
Calibration Constraints
Optimized calibration is conducted by satisfying two type constraints, the hydraulic
system constraints and calibration parameter bound constraints. The system
constraints are a set of implicit equations that ensure the conservation of flow conti-
nuity at nodes and energy for the loops within a water distribution system. Each trial
solution generated by the GA is analyzed using WaterCAD hydraulic network solver.
The calibration bound constraints are used to set the minimum and maximum limits
for the pipe roughness coefficients and junction demand multiplier. They are given as
follows.
)
*
+
,
-
.
= =
Fpnt
Fobs Fsim
w
Hpnt
Hobs Hsim
w minimize
nf nf
nf
NF
nf
nh nh
nh
NH
nh 1 1
max , max max
nPipeGroup i RFmax RF RFmin
i i i
,..., 3 , 2 , 1 =
up nDemandGro i DMmax DM DMmin
i i i
,..., 3 , 2 , 1 =
Genetic Algorithms Methodology
B-818 WaterCAD Users Manual
Where: RFmin
i
is the minimum roughness coefficient or multiplier
for roughness group i; RFmax
i
is the maximum roughness
coefficient or multiplier for roughness group i; and RF
i
is the
roughness coefficient or multiplier for roughness group i,
DMmin
i
is the minimum junction demand multiplier for
demand group i; DMmax
i
is the maximum demand multiplier
for demand group i; and DM
i
is the demand multiplier for
demand group i.
Pipes that have the same physical and hydraulic characteristics are allowed to be
grouped as one calibration link, and one new roughness coefficient or one roughness
coefficient multiplier is assigned to all the pipes in the same group. Junctions that have
the same demand patterns and within a same topological area can also be aggregated
as one calibration junction, to which a same demand multiplier is calculated and
assigned. Calibration parameters are bounded by prescribed upper and lower limits
and adjusted with a user-prescribed incremental value. For example, a Hazen-Will-
iams C value for a pipe or a group of pipes will be computed within a range of 40 to
140, and by an increment of 5. Demand multipliers may range from 0.8 to 1.2 by 0.1.
Parameter aggregation is useful at reducing the calibration dimension, however
caution needs to be exercised when grouping pipes and junctions, as this may affect
the accuracy of the model calibration.
Genetic Algorithm Optimized Calibration
A genetic algorithm (GA) is a robust search paradigm based on the principles of
natural evolution and biological reproduction (Goldberg, 1989). For optimizing cali-
bration of a water distribution model, a genetic algorithm program first generates a
population of trial solutions of the model parameters. A hydraulic solver then simu-
lates each trial solution. The resulting hydraulic simulation predicts the HGL (junction
pressures) and pipe flows at a predetermined number of nodes (or data points) in the
network. This information is then passed back to the associated calibration module.
The calibration module evaluates how closely the model simulation is to the observed
data, the calibration evaluation computes a goodness-of-fit value, which is the
discrepancy between the observed data and the model predicted pipe flows and junc-
tion pressures or HGL, for each solution. This goodness-of-fit value is then assigned
as the fitness for that solution in the genetic algorithm.
One generation produced by the genetic algorithm is then complete. The fitness
measure is taken into account when performing the next generation of the genetic
algorithm operations. To find the optimal calibration solutions, fitter solutions will be
selected by mimicking Darwins natural selection principal of survival of the fittest.
The selected solutions are used to reproduce a next generation of calibration solutions
by performing genetic operations. Over many generations, the solutions evolve, and
the optimal or near optimal solutions ultimately emerge. There are numerous varia-
tions of genetic algorithms over last decade. Many successful applications of GA to
solving model calibration have been carried out for optimized calibration of water
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-819
resource systems (Wang 1992; Wu 1994; Babovic etc. 1994; Wu and Larsen 1996).
More recently, a competent genetic algorithm (also called fast messy GA), which has
been demonstrated the most efficient GA for the optimization of a water distribution
system (Wu & Simpson 2001), has been used for the optimized calibration. A brief
overview is given in the following section.
B.6.2 Darwin Designer Methodology
Darwin Designer uses a genetic algorithm (GA) generic search paradigm to help
hydraulic engineers efficiently plan and design a water distribution system.
The optimization model can be established to include the combination and aggrega-
tion of sizing new pipes and rehabilitating old pipes, multiple demand loading condi-
tions, and various boundary system conditions. This will enable a modeler to optimize
either an entire water system or a portion of the system with the minimum cost and
maximum benefit. The cost effective design and/or rehabilitation solution is deter-
mined by the least cost, the maximum benefit, or the trade-off between the cost and
benefit. You can select any one of three optimization models to best suit your project
needs.
Model Level 1: Least Cost Optimization
The least cost design and rehabilitation is defined as a single objective optimization;
the optimal solution is determined by the minimum cost of a water distribution design
and rehabilitation that satisfies prescribed hydraulic criteria such as:
Minimum required junction pressure
Maximum allowable junction pressure
Maximum allowable pipe flow velocity requirement
Minimum required pipe flow velocity
Model Level 2: Maximum Benefit Optimization
The benefit optimization model is developed to determine the maximum pressure
benefit design/rehabilitation solution for a water distribution system. A competent
genetic algorithm is employed to search for the optimal solution by maximizing the
design benefit while meeting the hydraulic criteria and the available budget.
Model Level 3: Cost-Benefit Trade-off Optimization
The cost-benefit trade-off model is formulated to determine the design of optimal
trade-off between the cost and benefit, subject to the funding available for a design
and/or rehabilitation. You can customize the benefit functions and specify the
maximum affordable budget. The model produces a set of non-inferior (non-domi-
nant) solutions that represent the Pareto optimal for different cost and benefit levels.
Genetic Algorithms Methodology
B-820 WaterCAD Users Manual
Both model level 1 and 2 are single-objective optimization while level 3 is the multi-
objective optimization. A modeler is able to select optimization model for a study. The
optimization framework including both the cost and benefit functions is given in the
following sections.:
Design Variables on page B-820
Cost Objective Functions on page B-820
New Pipe Cost on page B-821
Rehabilitation Pipe Cost on page B-821
Design Variables
Two types of design variables are used for the optimal design and rehabilitation of
water distribution systems. They are pipe sizes (d) and design actions (e).
Pipe Size: Pipe diameter is treated as a design variable for a new
pipe to be sized. A new pipe can be the pipe added to
a subdivision, a replacement, or a pipe that is parallel
to existing pipes. A modeler can aggregate a number
of pipes as one design link. Pipes within one pipe
group are sized to the same diameter. Pipe diameter
can be selected from a set of discrete and
commercially available pipe sizes, given as:
Design Action: Design action is introduced as a design variable for
optimizing the rehabilitation alternatives (e.g.
cleaning, relining, replacement, parallel pipe, etc.)
for existing pipes. A modeler can define a set of
possible actions that can be applied to a group of
pipes. The pipes within one pipe group will have the
same rehabilitation action, given as:
Cost Objective Functions
Total cost of a network design and rehabilitation is the sum of the new pipe cost
(C
new
) and rehabilitation pipe cost (C
rehab
). Thus the total cost is given as:
i d
i
, D
0
d
m
0
m 1 DC , , = ,
, )
- *
. +
=
k e
k
, E
0
e
m
0
m 1 EC , , = ,
, )
- *
. +
=
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-821
C
total
= C
new
+ C
rehab
New Pipe Cost
The cost of a new design pipe is defined as a function of pipe length. Let the total
number of design pipes be DP, and let ck(dk) be the cost per unit length of the k-th
pipe diameter selected from a set of available pipe diameter D
0
of DC choices. The
new pipe cost is given as:
Rehabilitation Pipe Cost
The cost of a rehabilitation pipe is associated with the pipe diameter and the rehabili-
tation action. Let c
k
(e
k
, d
k
) be cost per unit length of a pipe for the k
th
rehabilitation
action e
k
chosen from a set of possible action E
0
of EC choices for the existing pipe of
diameter d
k
. The cost of rehabilitation pipes is formulated as:
For the pipes that are grouped into one design link, the same pipe size or rehabilitation
action will be applied to the pipes.
Where:
L
k
=
Length of the k
th
pipe
C
cnew
C
k
d
k
( )L
k
k 1 =
DP
'
=
Where:
L
k
=
Length of the k
th
pipe
RP = Number of rehabilitation pipes
C
rehab
c
k
d
k
e
k
( , )L
k
k 1 =
RP
'
=
Genetic Algorithms Methodology
B-822 WaterCAD Users Manual
Benefit Functions
The goal of a water system design is to maximize the value, or benefit, of the system
while reducing the cost of the system. Minimizing cost alone may result in the
smallest pipe sizes, which leads to the minimum-capacity design. The least capacity is
not the preferable solution for long term system planning; some extra pipe capacity is
beneficial to allow the supply to grow into its full capacity within a planning horizon,
to account for uncertainty in demands, and to meet the need for reliability in case of
outages.
The true benefit of water system design is to reliably supply service of adequate water
quantity and quality. Provision of sufficient water supply must be ensured for a
community not only at the present time but also in a reasonable planning horizon.
During this planning period, the amount of water required for a system, or the
demand, is estimated, and this is typically performed with some uncertainty. Thus, it is
difficult to precisely forecast the demand. In order that a design is carried out for the
maximum value or benefit for a water distribution system, engineers must be able to
determine the maximum benefit within a budget.
The benefits of a design and rehabilitation may result from hydraulic performance
improvement (hydraulic benefit), excess hydraulic capacity (capacity benefit), and
pipe rehabilitation improvement (rehabilitation benefit). The hydraulic benefit is
measured by using a surrogate of the junction pressure improvement. In this version of
Darwin Designer, only pressure benefit is considered.
Pressure benefit is measured by the improvement of junction pressure of a design. If
the pressure at a junction exceeds the minimum required, this shows the system has
some extra capacity, which is considered a benefit. For some nodes, where the pres-
sure is already high, you may want to exclude the node from the pressure benefit
calculation because there is no value in increasing pressure at that node. (This is done
in Pressure Constraints tab. For more information, see Pressure Constraints Tab on
page 12-536.) For other nodes, the first unit of pressure is worth a great deal while
subsequent units of pressure improvement are not worth as much. For example, if the
minimum pressure is 20 psi, the increase from 20 to 21 psi is worth a great deal but an
increase from 60 to 61 psi is not worth as much. To account for this effect, you can
lower the exponent b in the benefit calculation from the default of 1 to a lower value,
say 0.5 (see Pressure Benefits on page B-823).
With the definition of a benefit function as one of design objectives, the optimal
design is no longer a single-objective (minimizing cost) optimization problem but a
multi-objective (minimizing cost and maximizing benefit) one. A multi-objective
optimization enables engineers to create a design that trades off between cost and
benefit. The trade-off optimization problem is solved by using a competent genetic
algorithm.
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-823
Darwin Designer concurrently optimizes two conflicting objectives and produces a set
of Pareto optimal (i.e. non-dominated, non-inferior) solutions. One objective solution,
such as cost, cannot be improved (minimized) without diminishing the other objective
(reducing benefit). Therefore, a Pareto optimal solution set represents the best design
solution for each cost range. Engineers can further justify the best design by other
non-quantifiable criteria.
Pressure Benefits
The benefit of the hydraulic performance is measured by using junction pressure (P)
improvements. Two types of pressure benefit are provided in Darwin Designer,
namely dimensionless benefit and unitized benefit.
Dimensionless Pressure Benefit: The pressure improvement for dimensionless benefit
is proposed as a ratio of pressure difference between
the actual pressure and a user-defined reference
pressure. The benefit is normalized by the junction
demand (JQ). The factors are also introduced to
enable a modeler to convert and customize the
hydraulic benefit function.
Where:
a and b = Factors that allow an optimization modeler to
weight, convert, and customize pressure
improvement to hydraulic benefit. The pressure
benefit coefficient a linearly increases and
decreases the benefit of pressure improvement.
When coefficient b is 1.0, every unit of pressure
improvement is worth as much as the same benefit
score. However, usually as pressure increases,
each additional unit of pressure benefit is worth
less. Therefore, b should usually be less than 1.0
(say about 0.5).
NJ = Number of pressure benefit junctions
ND = Number of design events for which the pressure
benefit is considered
HYbenefit a
JQ
JQtotal
P P
P
i k
k
i k i k
ref
i k
ref
=
(
\
)
, , ,
,
( )
l
l
l
l
l
'
!
1
1
1
+
1
1
1
'
!
1
1
1
+
1
1
1
= =
i
NJ
b
k
ND
1 1
Genetic Algorithms Methodology
B-824 WaterCAD Users Manual
Unitized Pressure Benefit: Pressure benefit resulting from a design and
rehabilitation can also be quantified by using the
unitized average pressure improvement across the
entire system. The benefit functions can be given as
follows.
The advantage of using the unitized pressure benefit
function is that a modeler is able to evaluate the
average pressure enhancement for the investment. It
is worth being aware of the value of the dollars spent.
Design Constraints
Each design trial solution is analyzed by a number of hydraulic simulation runs corre-
sponding to the multiple demand conditions. The system responses, such as junction
pressures, flow velocities, and hydraulic gradients, will be checked against the design
criteria you set.
Pipe-Size Constraint: A list of available pipe sizes (and costs) is specified
and used as a commonly shared data by all the pipe
groups. For each group, you specify the minimum
and maximum diameters, which narrows the scope of
the optimization problem. Pipe size is selected from a
list of commercially available pipe diameters within
the range of the minimum and maximum limit, such
as:
JQ
i,k
= Demand at junction i for demand alternative k
JQtotal
k
= Total junction demand for demand alternative k
P
i,k
= Post-rehabilitation pressure at junction i for
demand alternative k
P
ref
= Reference junction pressure defined by a user to
evaluate the pressure improvement. The reference
pressure is taken as the minimum required
junction pressures.
Pavg
P P
NJ
k
ND
i k
i
NJ
i k
ref
=
=
=
1
1
, ,
D
i
min
d
i
D
i
max
i ,
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-825
A set of pipe diameters can also be introduced to
exclude the unfavorable pipe sizes to a pipe group.
This set can be noted as:
Junction-Pressure Constraint: Junction pressure is often required to maintain
greater than a minimum pressure level, to ensure
adequate water service, and less than a maximum
pressure level, to reduce water leakage in a system.
Thus junction pressure constraints are given as:
Pipe Flow Constraint: A design and rehabilitation solution is also
constrained by a set of pipe flow criteria that are
often given as a maximum allowable flow velocity
and a maximum allowable hydraulic gradient or
slope, given as:
Where:
H
i,j
= Hydraulic head at junction i for demand loading
case j
NJ = Number of junctions in system (excluding fixed
grade junctions)
H
min
= Minimum required hydraulic pressures at junction
i for demand loading case j
H
max
= Maximum allowable hydraulic pressures at
junction i for demand loading case j
NDM = Number of demand loading cases
Where: Vi,j = Flow velocity of pipe i for demand loading case j
d
i
D
i
d
i 1 ,
d
i 2 ,
d
i n ,
, , { , } =
H
i j ,
min
H
i j ,
H
i j ,
max
t i , 1 NJ j ; , , = , 1 NDM , , =
V
i j ,
H
i j ,
max
t i , 1 NP j ; , , = , 1 NDM , , =
HG
i j ,
HG
i j ,
max
t i , 1 NP j ; , , = , 1 NDM , , =
Genetic Algorithms Methodology
B-826 WaterCAD Users Manual
In many system improvement designs, a feasible
design solution must ensure the storage tank to be
refilled to a certain water level so that a stable
periodical supply can be established. To meet a tank
refilling criteria, pipe flow velocity must be greater
than the minimum required velocity, given as:
Budget Constraint: Water utilities are often constrained by a budget for a
new subdivision design and/or the rehabilitation of
an existing water system. When the optimization is
conducted to maximize the value or benefit of the
design, the optimal solution will be constrained by
the available funding.
Multi Objective Genetic Algorithm Optimized Design
Genetic algorithms have been widely applied to solving single-objective optimization
problems in water resources system analysis (Bavic et al. 1994; Wu and Simpson
1996, 1997a, 1997b and 2001; Wu et al. 2000 and 2001). In recent years, multi-objec-
tive genetic algorithms have been found to be more effective than traditional optimiza-
tion techniques at solving multi-objective optimization problems. A wide range of
multi-objective optimization problems have been successfully solved by using evolu-
tionary algorithms.
There is no need to modify or simplify the system hydraulics and design criteria to fit
multi-objective GA. Single-objective optimization is used to identify the optimal or
near-optimal solutions according to the sole objective function. As soon as a solution
is found better than the current-best solution, it is accepted. Multi-objective optimiza-
tion is to locate the non-inferior (or non-dominated) solutions in solution space. Solu-
tion A is called non-inferior to solution B if and only if solution A is no worse than
solution B in all the objectives. It is also said that solution A dominates solution B or
that solution A is a non-dominated solution. A global non-dominated solution is
Vmax = Maximum allowable flow velocity
NP = Number of constraint pipes in system
HGi,j = Hydraulic gradient (slope) of pipe i for demand
loading case j
HGmax = Maximum allowable hydraulic gradient
V
i j ,
V
i j ,
min
t i , 1 NP j ; , , = , 1 NDM , , =
C
total
Fund
max
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-827
defined as the solution that is no worse than any other feasible solutions in all the
objectives. There exist multiple global non-dominated solutions. The task of a multi-
objective optimization is to search for all the global non-dominated or non-inferior
solutions also known as the Pareto-optimal set or Pareto-optimal front.
Conventionally, a multi-objective optimization problem was transformed into a
single-objective optimization problem by using two approaches including weighted
sum of objectives and e-constraint method (Cohon, 1978). Weighted sum approach
applies a set of weighting factors to all the objectives and sums up the weighted objec-
tives to construct a composite single objective. It is expected that the optimization of a
composite objective is equivalent to the optimization of the original multiple objec-
tives, but the optimal solution depends on the chosen weights and it can only search
for a single optimal solution rather than Pareto-optimal solutions in one run. The
constraint method chooses one of the objective functions and treats the other objective
functions as constraints. Each of the constraints is limited to a prescribed value. It
transforms a multi-objective optimization problem into a single-objective optimiza-
tion. The optimal solution resulted by the constraint method, however, depends on the
pre-defined constraint limits. Pareto-optimal solutions can be obtained by performing
multiple runs of the single-objective optimization problem using different weighting
factors or constraint limits. The more combinations of weighting factors or constraint
limits, the more optimization runs are required, the greater the computational cost. In
contrast, multi-objective genetic algorithm concurrently optimizes all the objective
functions in one run without any fix-up on objective functions. It provides an effective
method for handling multi-objective optimization.
The goal of single-objective optimization is to search for an optimal solution. Multi-
objective optimization has two goals during the search process. One goal is to find a
set of Pareto-optimal solutions as close as possible to Pareto-optimal front. The
second goal is to maintain a set of Pareto-optimal solutions as diverse as possible.
Searching for Pareto-optimal solutions is certainly the primary task for multi-objec-
tive optimization. A solution of single-objective optimization problem is evaluated by
the objective value, which directly contributes to the fitness of the corresponding
genotype solution. However, the fitness of a solution for multi-objective optimization
problem is determined by the solution dominance that can be defined as the number of
solutions dominated among the current population of solutions. The stronger the
dominance, the greater the fitness is assigned to a solution. While identifying Pareto-
optimal solutions is important, maintaining the diversity of Pareto-optimal solutions is
also essential. Dealing with multi-objective optimization, such as minimizing cost and
maximizing benefit for a water distribution system, it is anticipated that optimal trade-
off solutions are found and uniformly distributed for the entire range of cost budget.
This is normally achieved by using a method of fitness sharing or solution clustering.
To effectively solve the problem of cost-benefit trade-off optimal design, as formu-
lated in the early section, fast messy genetic algorithm (Goldberg et al. 1993) has been
extended to handle the multi-objective functions. The multi-objective fast messy GA
has been integrated with WaterCAD hydraulic network solver. The integrated
Genetic Algorithms Methodology
B-828 WaterCAD Users Manual
approach (Wu et al. 2002) provides a powerful design optimization tool to assist
hydraulic engineers to practically and efficiently design a water distribution system. It
offers capability of three levels of optimization design analysis, including minimum
cost design, maximum benefit design and cost-benefit trade-off design optimization.
B.6.3 Competent Genetic Algorithms
The working mechanics of a genetic algorithm are derived from a simple assumption
(Holland 1975) that the best solution will be found in the solution region that contains
a relatively high proportion of good solutions. A set of strings that represent the good
solutions attains certain similarities in bit values. For example, 3-bit binary strings
001, 111, 101 and 011 have a common similarity template of **1, where asterisk (*)
denotes a dont-care symbol that takes a value of either 1 or 0. The four strings repre-
sent four good solutions and contribute to the fitness values of 10, 12, 11, and 11 to a
fitness function of:
Where, x
1
, x
2
and x
3
directly takes a bit value as an integer from left to right. In
general, a short similarity template that contributes an above-average fitness is called
a building block. Building blocks are often contained in short strings that represent
partial solutions to a specific problem. Thus, searching for good solutions uncovers
and juxtaposes the good short strings, which essentially designate a good solution
region, and finally leads a search to the best solution.
Goldberg et al. (1989) developed the messy genetic algorithm as one of the competent
genetic algorithm paradigms by focusing on improving GAs capability of identifying
and exchanging building blocks. The first-generation of the messy GA explicitly
initializes all the short strings of a desired length k, where k is referred as to the order
of a building block defined by a short string. For a binary string representation, all the
combinations of order-k building blocks requires a number of initial short strings of
length k for an l-bit problem:
For example, the initial population size of short strings, by completely enumerating
the building blocks of order 4 for a 40-bit problem, is more than one million. This
made the application of the first-generation messy GA to a large-scale optimization
problem impossible. This bottleneck has been overcome by introducing a building
block filter procedure (Goldberg et al. 1993) into the messy GA. The filter procedure
speeds up the search process and is called a fast messy GA.
f x
1
x
2
x
3
, , ( ) x
1
x
2
10
x 3
+ + =
n 2
k l
k
--
% "
& #
=
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-829
The fast messy GA emulates the powerful genetic-evolutionary process in two nested
loops, an outer loop and an inner loop. Each cycle of the outer loop, denoted as an era,
invokes an initialization phase and an inner loop that consists of a building block
filtering phase and a juxtapositional phase. Like a simple genetic algorithm, the messy
GA initialization creates a population of random individuals. The population size has
to be large enough to ensure the presence of all possible building blocks. Then a
building block filtering procedure is applied to select better-fit short strings and reduce
the string length. It works like a filter so that bad genes not belonging to building
blocks are deleted, so that the population contains a high proportion of short strings of
good genes. The filtering procedure continues until the overall string length is reduced
to a desired length k. Finally, a juxtapositional phase follows to produce new strings.
During this phase, the processed building blocks are combined and exchanged to form
offspring by applying the selection and reproduction operators. The juxtapositional
phase terminates when the maximum number of generations is reached, and the cycle
of one era iteration completes. The length of short strings that contains desired
building blocks is often specified as the same as an era, starting with one to a
maximum number of era. Because of this, preferred short strings increase in length
over outer iterations. In another words, a messy GA evolves solutions from short
strings starting from length one to a maximum desired length. This enables the messy
GA to mimic the natural and biological evolution process that a simple or one cell
organism evolves into a more sophisticated and intelligent organism. Goldberg et al.
(1989, 1993) has given the detail analysis and computation procedure of the messy
GA.
B.6.4 References
Babovic V., Wu Z. Y. & Larsen L. C., Calibrating Hydrodynamic Models by Means
of Simulated Evolution, in Proceeding of Hydroinformatics, Delft, Netherlands,
pp193-200, 1994.
Cohon, J.L., Multi-objective Programming and Planning. Academic Press, New York,
1978.
Goldberg, D.E., Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning.
Addison Wesley, Reading, MA, 1989.
Goldberg, D. E., Korb, B., & Deb, K., Messy genetic algorithms: Motivation, anal-
ysis, and first results, Complex Systems, 3, 493-530, 1989.
Goldberg, D. E., Deb, K., Kargupta, H., & Harik G., Rapid, Accurate Optimization of
Difficult Problems Using Fast Messy Genetic Algorithms, IlliGAL Report No.
93004, Illinois Genetic Algorithms Laboratory, University of Illinios at Urbana-
Champaign, Urbana, IL 61801, 1993.
Walski, T.M., Model Calibration Data: The Good, The Bad and The Useless, J.
AWWA, 92(1), p. 94, 2000.
Genetic Algorithms Methodology
B-830 WaterCAD Users Manual
Walski, T. M., Understanding the adjustments for water distribution system model
calibration, Journal of Indian Water Works Association, April-June, 2001, pp151-
157, 2001.
Walski, T.M., Chase, D.V. and Savic, D.A., Water Distribution Modeling, Haestad
Press, Waterbury, CT, 2001.
Wang Q.J., The Genetic Algorithm and its Application to Conceptual Rainfall-
Runoff Models, Water Resources Research, Vol.27, No.9, pp2467-2482, 1991.
Wu Z.Y., Automatic Model Calibration by Simulating Evolution, M.Sc. Thesis,
H.H. 191, International Institute for Infrastructure, Hydraulic and Environmental
Engineering, Delft, Netherlands, 1994.
Wu, Z. Y., Boulos, P.F., Orr, C.H., and Ro, J.J., An Efficient Genetic Algorithms
Approach to an Intelligent Decision Support System for Water Distribution
Networks, in Proceedings of the Hydroinformatics 2000 Conference, Iowa, IW, July
26-29, 2000.
Wu, Z. Y., Boulos P. F., Orr C.-H. and Ro J. J., Rehabilitation of water distribution
system using genetic algorithm, Journal of AWWA, Vol. 93, No. 11, pp74-85, 2001.
Wu Z.Y. & Larsen C.L., Verification of hydrological and hydrodynamic models cali-
brated by genetic algorithms, Proc. of the 2nd International Conference on Water
Resources & Environmental Research, Vol. 2, Kyoto, Japan, pp175-182, 1996.
Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., An Efficient Genetic Algorithm Paradigm for Discrete
Optimization of Pipeline Networks, International Congress on Modeling and Simula-
tion, Hobart, Tasmania, Australia, 8-11 December, 1997b.
Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., Competent Genetic Algorithm Optimization of Water
Distribution Systems, Journal of Computing in Civil Engineering, ASCE, Vol 15,
No. 2, pp89-101, 2001.
Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., Messy Genetic Algorithm for Optimal Design of Water
Distribution Systems, Research Report, No. 140, Department of Civil & Environ-
mental Engineering, University of Adelaide, South Australia., 1996
Wu, Z. Y and Simpson A. R., Optimal Rehabilitation of Water Distribution Systems
Using a Messy Genetic Algorithm, AWWA 17th Federal Convention Water in the
Balance, Melbourne, Australia, 16-21 March 1997a.
Wu, Z. Y, Walski, T., Mankowski, R., Cook, J. Tryby, M. and Herrin G., Optimal
Capacity of Water Distribution Systems, in Proceeding of 1st Annual Environmental
and Water Resources Systems Analysis (EWRSA) Symposium, Roanoke, VA, May 19-
22, 2002.
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-831
B.7 Energy Cost Theory
The concept behind energy usage for a water distribution system is simple: pumps are
used within a system to add energy, counteracting the energy losses that occur due to
pipe friction and other losses. The cost of operating these pumps, however, can be one
of the largest expenses that a utility incurs during normal operations. An accurate
understanding of these energies and the costs associated with them is the key to devel-
oping better, more efficient, and more economical pumping strategies.
Energy cost theory includes:
Pump Powers, Efficiencies, and Energy on page B-831
Water Power on page B-831
Brake Power and Pump Efficiency on page B-832
Motor Power and Motor Efficiency on page B-832
Energy on page B-833
Cost on page B-834
Storage Considerations on page B-834
Daily Cost Equivalents on page B-835
B.7.1 Pump Powers, Efficiencies, and Energy
Power is the rate at which energy can be transferred, and there are several different
powers that are associated with the pumping process. In order for power to be trans-
ferred to the water, it needs to go through several steps: from the electrical wires into
the pump motor, from the motor into the pump, and finally from the pump to the water
itself. Each transfer results in energy losses.
B.7.2 Water Power
Water power is the power associated with the water itself, and is a function of the fluid
characteristics, the gain in head, and the rate of discharge.
PW = g H Q
Energy Cost Theory
B-832 WaterCAD Users Manual
B.7.3 Brake Power and Pump Efficiency
Brake power is the power at the pump itself, and is related to the water power by:
PW = PB ep
In other words, the pump efficiency represents the ability of the pump to transfer
power from the pump itself to the water. The pump efficiency varies over the oper-
ating range of the pump, so it is important to model pump efficiency as closely as
possible to ensure an accurate representation of your system.
B.7.4 Motor Power and Motor Efficiency
Motor power is the power that the pumps motor receives from the electrical utility,
and is related to the pump brake power by:
PB = PM em
In other words, the motor efficiency represents that ability of the motor to transfer
power from the electrical lines to the pump itself. For most pumps, the motor effi-
ciency can be considered to be constant over the whole operating range of the pump.
Where: PW = Water power
= Fluid density
g = Gravitational acceleration
H = Change in head
Q = Discharge rate
Where: PW = Water power
PB = Brake power
ep = Pump efficiency
Where: PB = Brake power
PM = Motor power
em = Motor efficiency
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-833
Note: In the case of variable speed pumps, the efficiency of the
variable speed drive needs to be accounted for. This efficiency
varies with pump speed among other things. You are
encouraged to correct the motor efficiency to include the
variable speed drive efficiency. For variable speed pumps, there
is a drive mechanism between the motor and the pump itself.
There are also energy losses associated with this drive, which
may be significant in some cases.
For example, if a motor has an efficiency of 90% (0.90) and the variable speed drive
has an efficiency of 85% (0.85) at the speeds being used, then the motor efficiency
should be entered as 76.5% (0.765).
Note: The variable-speed data is merely presented as an example and
should not be construed as representative of any particular
pump.
You are encouraged to find the drive efficiency data for the specific drive that is being
used. See Table B-6: Variable Speed Drive Efficiencyon page B-833 for some
typical data for variable speed drive efficiency, found in the report, Operations and
Training Manual on Energy Efficiency in Water and Wastewater Treatment Plants,
TREEO Center, University of Florida, 1986.
These corrections should not be made to alternatives with constant speed pumps. If
you are performing an analysis to compare constant and variable speed pump, you
should set up two alternatives: one for the constant speed pump and a second for the
variable speed pump.
B.7.5 Energy
Energy is a representation of the ability to do work, and is related to power by:
E = P t
Table B-6: Variable Speed Drive Efficiency
Percent of Full
Speed
Variable
Frequency Drive
Eddy Current
Coupling
Hydraulic
Coupling
100 83 85 83
90 82 78 75
70 81 59 56
50 76 43 33
Energy Cost Theory
B-834 WaterCAD Users Manual
Although water energy and pump energy could be calculated, the motor energy is the
primary consideration for water distribution systems because this is the energy that the
utility is billed for.
B.7.6 Cost
There are several different methods that an electrical provider may use to bill for their
energy.
Energy Usage Cost
Energy usage costs are simple: there is a cost associated with a unit of energy. This
price may vary for different times of day, different days of the week, different seasons,
etc., but the basic concept is still the same.
Peak Usage Cost
Some energy providers also charge customers based on peak usage (sometimes also
called a ratchet charge). This charge is actually based on power rather than energy,
with the cost being based on the highest instantaneous power that the customer used
during the billing cycle.
B.7.7 Storage Considerations
Tank storage can have a considerable effect on the estimated energy costs for a
system. As tanks fill or drain, they also act as an energy (and therefore cost) storage
element. If a tank is full when a simulation begins and empty when it ends, there is an
energy deficitat some point the pumps will need to operate again in order to
replenish the tank. Likewise, if a tank begins empty and fills over the course of a
simulation, that represents an energy credit when the total daily cost is calculated.
Where: E = Energy (kW-hours)
P = Power (kW)
t = Time (hours)
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-835
B.7.8 Daily Cost Equivalents
Different scenarios may have different analysis durations, so a direct comparison of
costs would not be equitable. To normalize all analyses to a common reference, costs
are also converted as daily equivalents.
For energy costs and storage costs, the total computed cost is adjusted according to the
ratio of a single day to the analysis duration. For peak usage cost, a daily cost is
computed by dividing the peak usage cost by the number of days in a billing cycle.
B.8 Variable Speed Pump Theory
The variable speed pump (VSP) model within WaterCAD lets you model the perfor-
mance of pumps equipped with variable frequency drives. Variable frequency drives
continually adjust the pump drive shaft rotational speed in order to maintain pressure
and flow requirements in a network while improving energy efficiency and other oper-
ating characteristics as summarized by Lingireddy and Wood (1998);
Minimization of excess pressures and energy usage,
Leakage control through more precise pressure regulation,
Flexible pump scheduling, improving off peak energy utilization,
Control of tank drain and fill cycles,
Improved system performance during emergency water usage events such as fires
and main breaks,
Reduction of transients produced when pumps start and stop,
Simplification of flow control procedures.
WaterCAD variable speed pumping feature will allow designers to make better deci-
sions by empowering them to fully evaluate the advantages and disadvantages associ-
ated with VSPs for their unique application.
Within WaterCAD there are two different ways to model VSPs depending on the data
available to describe pump operations. The relative speed factor is a unitless number
that quantifies the rotational speed of the pump drive shaft. 1) If the relative speed
factor (or for EPS simulations a series of factors) is known, a pattern based VSP can
be used. 2) If the relative speed factor is unknown, it can be estimated using the VSP
with WaterCAD new Automatic Parameter Estimation eXtension (APEX).
Variable Speed Pump Theory
B-836 WaterCAD Users Manual
Pattern Based VSPsThe variable speed pumping model lets you adjust pump
performance using the relative speed factor. A single relative speed setting or a
pattern of time varying relative speed factors can be applied to the pump. This is
especially useful when modeling the operation of existing VSPs in your system.
The Affinity Laws are used to adjust pump performance according to the relative
speed factor setting. For more information, see Pump Theory on page B-789.
VSPs with APEXAPEX can be used in conjunction with the VSP model to
estimate an unknown relative speed setting sufficient to maintain an operating
objective. APEX uses an explicit algorithm to solve for unknown parameters
directly (Boulos and Wood, 1990). This technique has proven to be powerful,
robust, and computationally efficient for estimation of network parameters and
has been improved to allow use for steady state and extended period simulations.
To use APEX for estimating relative speed factors, the control node and control
level setting for the pump must be selected and the pump curve and operating
range for the pump must be defined. The following paragraphs provide guidelines
for performing these tasks.
Control Node LocationThe location of the control node is an important
consideration that affects pump operating efficiency, pressure maintenance perfor-
mance, and, in rare instances, the stability of the parameter estimation calculation.
The algorithm has been designed to allow multiple VSPs to operate within one
pressure zone of a network; however, the pump and control node pairs should be
decoupled from one another. In other words, a control node should be located such
that only the pump it controls influences it. If the pressure zone of the model
contains a tank or reservoir (hydraulic boundary conditions), consider making the
boundary condition the control node as opposed to selecting a pressure junction
near the boundary. This will eliminate the possibility of specifying a set of
hydraulic conditions that are impossible to maintain, and thus reduce the possi-
bility of computational failure.
Setting the Target HeadThe control node target head is the constant elevation
of the hydraulic grade line (HGL) that the VSP will attempt to maintain. The
target head at the control node must be within the physical limitations of the VSP
as it has been defined (pump curve and maximum speed setting). If the target head
is greater then the maximum head, the pump can generate at the demanded flow
rate the pump will automatically revert to fixed speed operation at the maximum
relative speed setting, and the target head will not be maintained.
Tip: Navigating to the target head settingsThe VSP target head for
junction nodes can be set on the VSP tab of the Pump dialog
box, and for tanks on the Section tab of the Tank dialog box by
adjusting the initial level.
Setting the Maximum Relative Speed FactorFor flexible operation, a vari-
able speed drive and pump should be configured such that it can efficiently
operate over a range of speeds to satisfy the pressure and flow requirements it will
be subject to. The value selected for the maximum relative speed factor depends
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-837
on the normal operating range of the drive motor. To set the proper maximum
value, you must determine the drive motors normal operating speed and
maximum operating speed (the maximum speed at which the drive motor
normally operates, not the speed at which the drive catastrophically fails). The
relative speed factor is defined as the quotient of the current operating speed and
the normal operating speed. Thus the maximum relative speed factor is the
maximum operating speed of the drive divided by the normal operating speed. For
example, a maximum relative speed factor of 2.0 means that the maximum speed
is two times the normal operating speed, and a maximum relative speed factor of
1.0 means that the maximum operating speed is equal to the normal operating
speed.
Defining the Pump CurveIn order to determine the relative speed factor using
APEX, the pump curve must be smooth and continuously differentiable; thus a
one point or three point power function curve definition must be used. For best
results, the curve should be defined for the normal operating speed of the pump
(corresponding to a relative speed factor equal to 1.0, regardless of the maximum
speed setting).
Variable speed pump theory includes:
VSP Interactions with Simple and Logical Controls on page B-837
Performing Advanced Analyses on page B-838
References on page B-839
B.8.1 VSP Interactions with Simple and Logical Controls
The VSP model and APEX have been designed to fully integrate with the simple and
rule based control framework within WaterCAD. You must keep in mind that the defi-
nition of controls requires that the state (On, Off, Fixed Speed Override) and speed
setting of a VSP be properly managed during the simulation. Therefore, the interac-
tions between VSPs and controls can be rather complex. We have tried to the extent
possible to simplify these interactions while maintaining the power and flexibility to
model real world behaviors. The paragraphs that follow describe guidelines for
defining simple and logical controls with VSPs.
Pattern based VSPsThe pattern of relative speed factors specified for a VSP
takes precedence over all simple and logical control commands. Therefore, the
use of controls with pattern based VSPs is not recommended. Rather, the pattern
of relative speed factors should be defined such that control objectives are implic-
itly met.
VSPs with APEXA VSP can be switched into any one of three different states.
When the VSP is On, the APEX will estimate the relative speed sufficient to
maintain a constant pressure head at the control node. When the VSP is Off, the
relative speed factor and flow through the pump are set to zero, and the pressure
Variable Speed Pump Theory
B-838 WaterCAD Users Manual
head at the control node is a function of the prevailing network boundary and
demand conditions. When the control state of a VSP is Fixed Speed Override, the
pump will operate at the maximum speed setting and the target head will no
longer be maintained. The Temporarily Closed state for a VSP indicates that the
check valve (CV) within the pump has closed in response to prevailing hydraulic
conditions, and that the target head cannot be maintained. The VSP control node
can be specified at any junction node or tank in a network model. As described
below, however, the behavior of simple and logical controls depends on the type
of control node selected.
Junction NodesWhen the VSP control node type selected is a junction node,
the VSP will behave according to some automatic behaviors in addition to the
controls defined for the pump. If the head at the control node is above the target
head, the pump state will automatically switch to Off. If the head at the control
node is less then the target head, the pump state will automatically switch to On.
The VSP will automatically switch into and out of the Fixed Speed Override and
Temporarily Closed states in order to maintain the fixed head at the control node
and prevent reverse flow through the pump. Additional controls can be added to
model more complex use cases.
TanksWhen the VSP control node is a tank, you must manage the state of the
pump through control definitions, allowing for flexible modeling of the complex
control behaviors that may be desired for tanks. If a VSP has a state of On, the
pump will maintain the current level of the tank. For example, at the beginning of
a simulation if a VSP has status of on, it will maintain the initial level of the tank.
As the simulation progresses and the pump happens to turn off, temporarily close,
or go into fixed speed override, the level in the tank will be determined in
response to the hydraulic conditions prevailing in the network. When the VSP
turns on again, it will maintain the current level of the tank, not the initial level.
Thus control statements must be written that dictate what state the pump should
switch to depending on the level in the tank. A pump station with a VSP and a
fixed-speed pump operating in a coordinated fashion can be used to model tank
drain and fill operations.
B.8.2 Performing Advanced Analyses
The VSP model is fully integrated with the energy cost manager for easy estimation of
pump operating costs. When comparing the energy efficiency of fixed speed and vari-
able speed pumps, however, it is important to bear in mind that the pumps are not
maintaining the same pressures in the network. The performance of the pumps should
be compared in such a way that takes this difference into account; otherwise the
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-839
comparison is of little value. For example, consider a comparison between a VSP and
a fixed-speed pump is prepared, but the target head at the control node is greater than
the head maintained there by the fixed speed pump. The VSP energy efficiency
numbers will be disappointing because the VSP is maintaining higher pressures.
The concept of a minimum acceptable head (or pressure) can be useful when evalu-
ating the performance of fixed speed and variable speed pumps. Both pumps should
be sized and operated such that the pressure is equal to, or greater than, the minimum
acceptable head. In this way, the heads maintained by the respective pumps can be
used to define equivalency between the respective designs. When the comparison is
thoughtfully designed and conducted, it is likely that the energy efficiency improve-
ments possible with VSPs will come to light more clearly.
B.8.3 References
Lingireddy, S. and D.J. Wood, Improved Operation of Water Distribution Systems
Using Variable Speed Pumps, Journal of Energy Engineering, ASCE, 124(3) 90-103,
1998.
Boulos, P. F. and D. J. Wood, Explicit Calculation of Pipe-Network Parameters,
Journal of Hydraulic Engineering, ASCE, 116(11) 1329-1344, 1987.
B.9 Hydraulic Equivalency Theory
This section outlines the rules that Skelebrator uses for creating equivalent pipes from
parallel or series pipes.
These equations can be solved for equivalent diameter or roughness (C, n or k). With
the Darcy-Weisbach equation, the equations are solved only for D because there are
situations where the roughness can be negative. Both solutions are presented. In
general, there will be one pipe that is the dominant pipe, and the properties of that pipe
will be used when a decision must be made. There will be some default rule for
picking the dominant pipe, but you will be able to override it.
You will not use equivalent lengths because you want to preserve the system geom-
etry. For pipes in series, you will add the lengths of the two pipes while for pipes in
parallel. You will use the length of the dominant pipe, as follows:
L
r
= L
1
+ L
2
B.9.1 Principles
The equations derived below are based on the following principles. The equations
below are for two pipes, but can be extended to n pipes.
Hydraulic Equivalency Theory
B-840 WaterCAD Users Manual
For pipes in series:
Q
r
= Q
1
+ Q
2
where Q = flow, r refers to the resulting pipe, and 1 and 2 refer to the pipes being
removed.
h
r
= h
1
+ h
2
For pipes in parallel:
Q
r
= Q
1
+ Q
2
and
h
r
= h
1
+ h
2
As long as the units are consistent, then any appropriate units can be used. For
example, if the diameters are in feet, then the resulting diameter will be in feet.
B.9.2 Hazen-Williams Equation
K depends on the units but cancels out in equivalent pipe calculations.
Series Pipes
For series pipes, the length is based sum of the lengths.
Solved for C:
Solved for D:
h
KL
D
4.87
-------------
Q
C
----
% "
& #
1.85
=
C
r
L
r
0.54
D
r
2.63
-------------
L
i
D
i
4.87
C
i
1.85
----------------------------
'
% "
$ !
& #
0.54
------------------------------------------------------- =
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-841
Parallel Pipes
Solved for C:
Solved for D:
B.9.3 Mannings Equation
Series Pipes
Solved for n:
Solved for D:
D
r
L
r
0.205
C
r
0.38
---------------
L
i
D
i
4.87
C
i
1.85
------------------------------
'
% "
$ !
& #
0.205
----------------------------------------------------------- =
C
r
L
r
0.54
D
r
2.63
-------------
C
i
D
i
2.63
L
i
0.54
-------------------
'
=
D
r
L
r
0.54
C
r
------------
C
i
D
i
2.63
L
i
0.54
-------------------
'
% "
$ !
$ !
& #
0.38
=
h
KL nQ ( )
2
D
5.33
----------------------- =
n
r
D
r
2.66
L
r
0.5
-------------
L
i
n
i
2
D
i
5.33
-------------
'
% "
$ !
$ !
& #
0.5
=
Hydraulic Equivalency Theory
B-842 WaterCAD Users Manual
Parallel Pipes
Solved for n:
Solved for D:
B.9.4 Darcy-Weisbach Equation
It is the roughness, knot fthat is a property of the pipe. While f behaves well, the
roughness can take on negative values in the parallel pipe case. Therefore, only solu-
tions for D will be developed.
D
r
L
r
n
r
2
L
i
n
r
2
D
i
5.33
-------------
'
------------------------
% "
$ !
$ !
$ !
$ !
$ !
$ !
& #
0.188
=
n
r
D
r
2.66
L
r
0.5
-------------
D
i
2.66
L
i
0.5
n
-------------
'
------------------------ =
D
r
L
r
0.5
n
D
i
2.66
L
i
0.5
n
-------------
'
% "
$ !
$ !
& #
0.376
=
h
KLfQ
2
D
5
----------------- =
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-843
The other problem with the Darcy-Weisbach equation is that D and f are not uniquely
related and depend on the Reynolds number, which is a function of velocity. So the
question that must be first answered is, Which value of f should be used in the equa-
tions? This is especially tricky when the individual pipes have different value of k.
First, a velocity of 1 m/s will be used as a reference velocity to calculate Reynolds
number for the individual pipes. Second, an iterative solution must be used to solve
for D. That is:
1. Pick a D and k based on the dominant pipe.
2. Calculate f for the resultant pipe using Swamee-Jain formula.
3. Use that f for fr in the equations below.
4. Check if Dr is close enough to D used to calculate f.
5. Repeat until convergence.
The Swamee-Jain equation is
where
must be selected so that the units cancel. Typical values are 1.00e-6 m
2
/s or 1.088e-
5 ft.
2
/sec.
Series Pipes
f
1.325
k
3.7D
------------
5.74
Re
0.9
------------- +
% "
& #
ln
2
--------------------------------------------------- =
Re
VD
-------- =
D
r
L
r
f
f
L
i
f
i
D
i
5
---------
'
--------------------
% "
$ !
$ !
$ !
$ !
$ !
& #
0.2
=
Hydraulic Equivalency Theory
B-844 WaterCAD Users Manual
Parallel Pipes
Check Valves
Most pipes will not have check valves and the resulting valves will not. For series
pipes, if any pipe has a check valve, then the resulting pipe will have a check valve.
For parallel pipes, if both pipes have check valves, then the resulting pipe will have a
check valve.
The degenerative case is when one of the parallel pipes has a check valve. This should
not happen in terms of good engineering. If it does, the parallel pipes should not be
combined and a warning message should be issued.
Minor Losses
For pipes in series, the minor loss coefficients should be added. The differences in
diameter between the original pipe and the resulting pipe should be negligible. You
should be given the option to ignore minor losses in series pipes.
For pipes in parallel, you should be given the option to ignore minor losses, not skele-
tonize pipes with significant minor losses (e.g., if total Km > 100) or account for them
as a change in diameter.
One possible short heuristic for handling minor losses in parallel pipes is to realize
that you are splitting the minor loss over two pipes. If the pipes are roughly the same
length, roughness, and diameter, then the minor loss coefficient will be cut approxi-
mately in half. I worked through the math for coming up with an equivalent minor loss
coefficient and its a mess. Using half the minor loss coefficient isnt exactly correct,
but it pretty much accounts for things.
Numerical Check
To check the equations, Ill run through examples of each. I will solve for head loss in
each pipe individually and then combine to see how the head loss in the equivalent
pipe compares for series pipes and for parallel, Ill see how the flow compares. Ill
stick with the SI units (i.e., flow in m
3
/s, D, L and h in m).
Series
Use Q = 1 m
3
/s, and solve for head loss. Pipe 1 is the dominant pipe.
D
r
L
r
f
r
D
i
2.5
L
i
f
i
( )
0.5
--------------------
'
% "
$ !
$ !
& #
2
% "
$ !
$ !
& #
0.2
=
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-845
Parallel
Use head loss = 1 m and solve for Q.
Table B-7: Comparison between the Sum of the Headlosses from the
Two Pipes and the Headloss from the Equivalent Pipe
Pipe 1 Pipe 2
Resulting,
solve for D
Resulting,
solve for
C,n
Length 100 80 180 180
Diameter 1 0.75 0.88
0.75k,
0.855n
C 100 120 100 71
k 0.002 0.0015 0.002 X
n 0.013 0.012 0.013 0.0197
h (Hazen) 0.21 0.49 0.72 0.72
h (Manning) 0.17 0.55 0.72 0.72
h (Darcy) 0.20 0.58 0.77 X
Table B-8: Comparison between the Sum of the Flows from the Two
Pipes and the Flow from the Equivalent Pipe
Pipe 1 Pipe 2
Resulting,
solve for D
Resulting,
solve for
C,n
Length 100 80 100 100
Diameter 1 0.75 0.88 1.18n, 1.21k
C 100 120 100 163
k 0.002 0.0015 0.002 X
Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory
B-846 WaterCAD Users Manual
B.10 Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory
Thiessen polygon generation comprises two methods:
Nave Method
Plane Sweep Method
B.10.1 Nave Method
A Thiessen polygon of a site, also called a Voronoi region, is the set of points that are
closer to the site than to any of the other sites.
Let P = {p
1
, p
2
,p
n
} be the set of sites, and V = {v(p
1
), v(p
2
),v(p
n
)} represent the
Voronoi regions or Thiessen polygons for P
i
,
which is the intersection of all of the half
planes defined by the perpendicular bisectors of p
i
and the other sites. Thus, a nave
method for constructing Thiessen Polygons can be formulated as follows:
n 0.013 0.012 0.013 0.0083
Q (Hazen) 2.31 1.47 3.74 3.77
Q (Manning) 2.40 1.35 3.72 3.75
Q (Darcy) 2.26 1.31 3.55 X
Table B-8: Comparison between the Sum of the Flows from the Two
Pipes and the Flow from the Equivalent Pipe (Contd)
Pipe 1 Pipe 2
Resulting,
solve for D
Resulting,
solve for
C,n
WaterCAD Theory
WaterCAD Users Manual B-847
Step 1 For each i such that i = 1, 2,, n, generate n - 1 half planes H(p
i
,p
j
), 1 </= j </
= n, i <> j, and construct their common intersection v(p
i
).
Step 2 Report V = {v(p
1
), v(p
2
),v(p
n
)} as the output and stop.
This nave procedure is, however, very inefficient for generating Thiessen polygons.
The computation time increases exponentially as the number of sites increases. There
are many other more competent methods for constructing a Thiessen polygon.
B.10.2 Plane Sweep Method
The plane sweep technique is a fundamental method for solving two-dimensional
geometric problems. It works with a special line called a sweepline, a vertical line
sweeping the plane from left to right. It hits objects one by one as the sweepline
moves. Whenever it crosses an object, a portion of the problem is solved. Therefore, it
enables a two-dimensional problem to be solved in a sequence of one-dimension
processing. Sweep plane technique provides a conceptually simple and efficient algo-
rithm. Steven Fortune (1986; 1987) has developed a sweepline algorithm for
constructing Thiessen polygons. This algorithm has been implemented in the Water-
GEMS Thiessen Polygon Generator. The detailed working algorithm is given as
follows:
1. Q <------- P.
2. Choose and delete the left-most point, say p
i
from Q.
3. L <------- the list consisting of a single region (V(p
i
).
4. While Q is not empty, repeat Steps 1-3.
5. If w is a site, say w = p
i
, do:
a. Find region (V(p
i
) on L containing p
i
.
b. Replace (V(p
i
) on L by the sequence ((V(p
j
), h
-
(pi, pj), ((V(p
i
)), h
+
(pi, pj),
(V(p
j
).
c. Add to Q the intersection of h
-
(pi, pj) with the intermediate lower half hyper-
bola on L, and the intersection of h
+
(pi, pj) with the immediate upper half
hyperbola on L.
6. If w is an intersection, say w = (q
t
), do:
a. Replace sub-sequence (h
(p
i
, p
j
), (V(p
i
)), h
(p
i
, p
k
)) on L by h = h
-
(p
i
, p
k
) or
h = h
+
(p
i
, p
k
) appropriately.
b. Delete from Q any intersection of h
(p
i
, p
j
) or h
(p
i
, p
k
) with others.
Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory
B-848 WaterCAD Users Manual
c. Add to Q any intersection of h with its immediate upper half hyperbola and its
immediate lower half parabola on L.
d. Mark (q
t
) as a Voronai vertex incident to h
(p
i
, p
j
), h
(p
i
, p
k
), and h.
7. Repeat all half hyperbolas ever listed on L, all the Voronai vertices marked in the
preceding step, and the incidence relations among them.
The sweepline algorithm is an efficient technique for constructing a Thiessen polygon.
The computation time required for the worst case is O(nlog n). It produces a far more
competent method than the nave method and provides satisfactory performance for
generating Thiessen polygons for a large number of points.
WaterCAD Users Manual C-849
C
Appendix
Scenario Management
Guide
Bentley Systems scenario management feature can dramatically increase your
productivity in the What If? areas of modeling, including calibration, operations
analysis, and planning.
By investing a little time now to understand scenario management, you can avoid
unnecessary editing and data duplication. Take advantage of scenario management to
get a lot more out of your model, with much less work and expense.
In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), auto-
mated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of What
If? conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files
and separate results.
Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it
can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
The Scenario/Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of
data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.
With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a
new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inherit-
ance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and auto-
matically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as
projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of
true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a
collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the
difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore
them.
About this Guide
C-850 WaterCAD Users Manual
C.1 About this Guide
The depth of scenario management as implemented by Bentley Systems is probably
far beyond what you have ever seen before. With that in mind, this guide is intended
as an introduction to the philosophy and terminology upon which scenario manage-
ment is based.
This is not intended as a step-by-step guide to using the software. If you are a moder-
ately experienced Windows software user, you should have no difficulty learning and
exploring the scenario management interface.
Excellent tutorials and context-sensitive online help are also available within the soft-
ware itself. These learning tools will prove to be of tremendous assistance to you for
all aspects of the software, and should certainly not be ignored if you are having diffi-
culty. For more information, just click the Help button, which is available from
anywhere within the program. In addition, contact Bentley Systems information on
the different training services it offers.
C.2 Before Bentley SystemsDistributed
Scenarios
Let us begin by understanding the approaches that have historically been used to
attempt What If? analyses. Traditionally, there have only been two possible ways of
analyzing the effects of change on a software model:
Change the model, recalculate, and review the results
Create a copy of the model, edit that copy, calculate, and review the results
Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system, the
data duplication, editing, and re-editing becomes very time-consuming and error-
prone as the size of the system and the number of possible conditions increase. Addi-
tionally, comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation, because all output
must be stored in physically separate data files.
Scenario Management Guide
WaterCAD Users Manual C-851
Figure C-1: Before Bentley SystemsDistributed Scenarios
C.3 With Bentley SystemsSelf-Contained
Scenarios
Effective scenario management tools need to meet these objectives:
Minimize the number of project files the modeler needs to maintain (one, ideally)
Maximize the usefulness of scenarios through easy access to things such as input
and output data, and direct comparisons
Maximize the number of scenarios you can simulate by mixing and matching data
from existing scenarios (data reuse)
Minimize the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions
that have a lot in common
The Scenario Cycle
C-852 WaterCAD Users Manual
The scenario management feature developed by Bentley Systems successfully meets
all of these objectives. A single project file enables you to generate an unlimited
number of What If? conditions, edit only the data that needs to be changed, and
quickly generate direct comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios.
C.4 The Scenario Cycle
The process of working with scenarios is similar to the process of manually copying
and editing data, but without the disadvantages of data duplication and troublesome
file management. This process allows you to cycle through any number of changes to
the model, without fear of overwriting critical data or duplicating important informa-
tion. Of course, it is possible to directly change data for any scenario, but an audit trail
of scenarios can be useful for retracing the steps of a calibration series or for under-
standing a group of master plan updates.
Figure C-2: With Bentley SystemsSelf-Contained Scenarios
Scenario Management Guide
WaterCAD Users Manual C-853
C.5 Scenario Anatomy: Attributes and
Alternatives
Before we explore scenario management further, a few key terms should be defined:
AttributeAn attribute is a fundamental property of an object, and is often a
single numeric quantity. For example, the attributes of a pipe include diameter,
length, and roughness.
AlternativeAn alternative holds a family of related attributes so pieces of data
that you are most likely to change together are grouped for easy referencing and
editing. For example, a physical properties alternative groups physical data for the
networks elements, such as elevations, sizes, and roughness coefficients.
ScenarioA scenario has a list of referenced alternatives (which hold the
attributes), and combines these alternatives to form an overall set of system condi-
tions that can be analyzed. This referencing of alternatives enables you to easily
generate system conditions that mix and match groups of data that have been
previously created. Note that scenarios do not actually hold any attribute data
the referenced alternatives do.
C.6 A Familiar Parallel
Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first, anyone who has
eaten at a restaurant should be able to relate fairly easily. A meal (scenario) is
comprised of several courses (alternatives), which might include a salad, an entre,
and a dessert. Each course has its own attributes. For example, the entre may have a
meat, a vegetable, and a starch. Examining the choices, we could present a menu as in
the following figure:
Figure C-3: A Restaurant Meal Scenario
Scenario Behavior: Inheritance
C-854 WaterCAD Users Manual
The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal (combina-
tion of courses) that could be ordered. They can just assemble any meal based on what
the customer orders for each alternative course. Salad 1, Entre 1, and Dessert 2 might
then be combined to define a complete meal.
Generalizing this concept, we see that any scenario references one alternative from
each category to create a big picture that can be analyzed. Note that different types of
alternatives may have different numbers and types of attributes, and any category can
have an unlimited number of alternatives to choose from.
Figure C-4: Generic Scenario Anatomy
C.7 Scenario Behavior: Inheritance
The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives (groups of data) meets one of the
basic goals of scenario management: maximizing the number of scenarios you can
develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives. Two other primary goals have
also been addressed: a single project file is used, and easy access to input data and
calculated results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical
interface.
But what about the other objective: minimizing the amount of data that needs to be
duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot of common input? Surely an entire set
of pipe diameters should not be re-specified if only one or two change?
The solution is a familiar concept to most people: inheritance.
In the natural world, a child inherits characteristics from a parent. This may include
such traits as eye-color, hair color, and bone structure. There are two significant differ-
ences between the genetic inheritance that most of us know and the way inheritance is
implemented in software:
Scenario Management Guide
WaterCAD Users Manual C-855
C.7.1 Overriding Inheritance
Overriding inheritance is the software equivalent of cosmetics. A child can override
inherited characteristics at any time by specifying a new value for that characteristic.
These overriding values do not affect the parent, and are therefore considered local to
the child. Local values can also be removed at any time, reverting the characteristic to
its inherited state. The child has no choice in the value of his inherited attributes, only
in local attributes.
For example, suppose a child has inherited the attribute of blue eyes from his parent.
Now the child puts on a pair of green-tinted contact lenses to hide his natural eye
color. When the contact lenses are on, we say his natural eye color is overridden
locally, and his eye color is green. When the child removes the tinted lenses, his eye
color instantly reverts to blue, as inherited from his parent.
C.7.2 Dynamic Inheritance
Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world. When a parents
characteristic is changed, existing children also reflect the change. Using the eye-color
example, this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye color from blue to
brown, and the childrens eyes instantly inheriting the brown color also. Of course, if
the child has already overridden a characteristic locally, as with the green lenses, his
eyes will remain green until the lenses are removed. At this point, his eye color will
revert to the inherited color, now brown.
This dynamic inheritance has remarkable benefits for applying wide-scale changes to
a model, fixing an error, and so on. If rippling changes are not desired, the child can
override all of the parents values, or a copy of the parent can be made instead of a
child.
C.8 When Are Values Local versus Inherited?
Any changes that are made to the model belong to the currently active scenario and
the alternatives that it references. If the alternatives happen to have children, those
children will also inherit the changes unless they have specifically overridden that
attribute. The following figure demonstrates the effects of a change to a mid-level
alternative. Inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black
text.
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance
C-856 WaterCAD Users Manual
Figure C-5: A Mid-level Hierarchy Alternative Change
C.9 Minimizing Effort through Attribute
Inheritance
Inheritance has an application every time you hear the phrase, just like x except for
y. Rather than specifying all of the data from x again to form this new condition, we
can create a child from x and change y appropriately. Now we have both conditions,
with no duplicated effort.
We can even apply this inheritance to our restaurant analogy as follows. Inherited
values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text.
Note: Salad 3 could inherit from Salad 2, if we prefer: Salad 3 is just
like Salad 2, except for the dressing.
Salad 2 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing.
Salad 3 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing.
Note: If the vegetable of the day changes (say from green beans to
peas), only Entre 1 needs to be updated, and the other entres
will automatically inherit the vegetable attribute of Peas
instead of Green Beans.
Scenario Management Guide
WaterCAD Users Manual C-857
Entre 2 is just like Entre 1, except for the meat and the starch.
Entre 3 is just like Entre 2, except for the meat.
Note: Dessert 3 has nothing in common with the other desserts, so it
can be created as a root or base alternative. It does not inherit
its attribute data from any other alternative.
Dessert 2 is just like Dessert 1, except for the topping.
C.10 Minimizing Effort through Scenario
Inheritance
Just as a child alternative can inherit attributes from its parent, a child scenario can
inherit which alternatives it references from its parent. This is essentially still the
phrase just like x except for y, but on a larger scale.
Carrying through on our meal example, consider a situation where you go out to
dinner with three friends. The first friend places his order, and the second friend orders
the same thing except for the dessert. The third friend orders something totally
different, and you order the same meal as hers except for the salad.
The four meal scenarios could then be presented as follows (inherited values are
shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text):
Meal 2 is just like Meal 1, except for the dessert. The salad and entre alterna-
tives are inherited from Meal 1.
Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2. A totally new base or root is created.
Meal 4 is just like Meal 3, except for the salad. The entre and dessert alterna-
tives are inherited from Meal 3.
A Water Distribution Example
C-858 WaterCAD Users Manual
C.11 A Water Distribution Example
Let us consider a fairly simple water distribution system: a single reservoir supplies
water by gravity to three junction nodes.
Figure C-6: Example Water Distribution System
Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial
settings, operational controls, water quality, and fire flow, we are going to focus on the
two most commonly changed sets of alternatives: demands and physical properties.
Within these alternatives, we are going to concentrate on junction baseline demands
and pipe diameters.
C.12 Building the Model (Average Day
Conditions)
During model construction, probably only one alternative from each category is going
to be considered. This model is built with average demand calculations and prelimi-
nary pipe diameter estimates. At this point we can name our scenario and alternatives,
and the hierarchies to look like the following (showing only the items of interest):
Scenario Management Guide
WaterCAD Users Manual C-859
C.13 Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum
Day Conditions)
In our example, the local planning board also requires analysis of maximum day
demands, so a new demand alternative is required. No variation in demand is expected
at J-2, which is an industrial site. As a result, the new demand alternative can inherit J-
2s demand from Average Day while the other two demands are overridden.
Now we can create a child scenario from Average Day that inherits the physical alter-
native, but overrides the selected demand alternative. As a result, we get the following
scenario hierarchy:
Since no physical data (pipe diameters) have been changed, the physical alternative
hierarchy remains the same as before.
C.14 Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour
Conditions)
Based on pressure requirements, the system is adequate to supply maximum day
demands. Another local regulation requires analysis of peak hour demands, with
slightly lower allowable pressures. Since the peak hour demands also share the indus-
trial load from the Average Day condition, Peak Hour can be inherited from Average
Day. In this instance, Peak Hour could inherit just as easily from Maximum Day.
Correcting an Error
C-860 WaterCAD Users Manual
Another scenario is also created to reference these new demands, as shown below:
Note again that we did not change any physical data, so the physical alternatives
remain the same.
C.15 Correcting an Error
This analysis results in acceptable pressures, until it is discovered that the industrial
demand is not actually 500 gpmit is 1500 gpm. Because of the inheritance within
the demand alternatives, however, only the Average Day demand for J-2 needs to be
updated. The changes will ripple through to the children. After the single change is
made, the demand hierarchy is as follows:
Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections.
The three scenarios can now be calculated as a batch to update the results.
When these results are reviewed, it is determined that the system does not have the
ability to adequately supply the system as it was originally thought. The pressure at J-
2 is too low under peak hour demand conditions.
C.16 Analyzing Improvement Suggestions
To counter the headloss from the increased demand load, two possible improvements
are suggested:
Scenario Management Guide
WaterCAD Users Manual C-861
A much larger diameter is proposed for P-1 (the pipe from the reservoir). This
physical alternative is created as a child of the Preliminary Pipes alternative,
inheriting all the diameters except P-1s, which is overridden.
Slightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes. Since there are no commonal-
ities between this recommendation and either of the other physical alternatives,
this can be created as a base (root) alternative.
These changes are then incorporated to arrive at the following hierarchies:
This time, the demand alternative hierarchy remains the same since no demands were
changed. The two new scenarios (Peak, Big P-1, Peak, All Big Pipes) can be batch run
to provide results for these proposed improvements.
Next, features like Scenario Comparison Annotation (from the Scenario Control
Center) and comparison Graphs (from the element editor dialog boxes) can be used to
directly determine which proposal results in the most improved pressures.
C.17 Finalizing the Project
It is decided that enlarging P-1 is the optimum solution, so new scenarios are created
to check the results for average day and maximum day demands. Notice that this step
does not require handling any new data. All of the information we want to model is
present in the alternatives we already have!
Conclusion
C-862 WaterCAD Users Manual
Also note that it would be equally effective in this case to inherit the Avg. Day, Big P-
1 scenario from Avg. Day (changing the physical alternative) or to inherit from Peak,
Big P-1 (changing the demand alternative). Likewise, Max. Day, Big P-1 could inherit
from either Max. Day or Peak, Big P-1.
Neither the demand nor physical alternative hierarchies were changed in order to run
the last set of scenarios, so they remain as they were.
C.18 Conclusion
These are the fundamental concepts behind the architecture of Bentley Systems
scenario management. To learn more about actually using scenario management in
Bentley Systems software, start by running the scenario management tutorial from the
Help menu or from within the Scenario Control Center itself. Then load one of the
SAMPLE projects and explore the scenarios defined there. For context-sensitive help,
press F1 or the Help button any time there is a screen or field that puzzles you.
Bentley Systems scenario management feature gives you a powerful tool for
modeling real-world engineering scenarios when analyzing system response to
different demands, reviewing the impacts of future growth, and iterating to find the
least expensive design. That means you will be able to finish your projects faster,
spend less money, and improve your bottom line.
WaterCAD Users Manual D-863
D
Appendix
Capital Cost
Estimating
Capital cost estimating includes:
Capital Cost Estimating Basics on page D-863
Unit Cost Functions on page D-868
Building Cost Scenarios on page D-876
Viewing Cost Results on page D-877
Assigning Costs to Model Elements on page D-881
D.1 Capital Cost Estimating Basics
The Cost Manager in WaterGEMS, WaterCAD, StormCAD, and SewerCAD is a tool
for tracking the costs associated with a water distribution, storm sewer, or sanitary
sewer construction project. It is set up to mimic the way that a typical engineer would
track the costs of a capital improvement project during a planning study. In order to
compute the cost of a particular Scenario, you must supply the model with the
following information:
Elements included in costingThe first step is to select the elements from the
model that you want to include in a given Cost Scenario. This set of elements may
include all the elements in the model if, for instance, you are modeling a new
subdivision, or a subset of the elements if you are expanding an existing system.
Unit CostsThe second level of data is the costs associated with each element.
The costs for each element are broken down into two types, construction and non-
construction. Construction costs are specified on a per unit basis where the unit
can be either an item (e.g., $/hydrant) or a length unit (e.g., $/ft. or $/m). Most unit
costs are constants, but unit costs for pipe elements and gravity structures can also
be specified as a function of diameter or some other property of the element using
a unit cost function. A unit cost function defines the relationship between the unit
cost for an element and some attribute of that element. Non-construction costs can
be specified as either a percentage of the total construction costs or as a lump sum
amount.
Capital Cost Estimating Basics
D-864 WaterCAD Users Manual
QuantitiesThe third level of information is the quantity of each item (e.g.,
number of service lines, length of pipe, number of valves) associated with a given
element. In the case of pipes, you need not specify the length, as the default value
for the quantity is the length of the pipe segment.
AdjustmentsFinally, you can enter the adjustments that should be made to the
total costs computed for the elements in a Scenario (i.e., project). You can specify
these project level cost adjustments as a lump sum or as a percentage of the total
cost.
Capital cost estimating basics includes:
Element Cost Data versus Cost Manager on page D-864
Navigating within the Cost Manager on page D-864
Entering Data for Multiple Elements on page D-866.
D.1.1 Element Cost Data versus Cost Manager
The early sections of this appendix describe how to handle cost data for each
element. Entering the cost data for individual elements does not involve the
use of the Cost Manager portion of the program. The Cost Manager is used to
sum the costs of the elements and prepare project cost reports. The Cost Manager is
accessed by clicking the Cost Manager button, or by selecting Analysis > Compute
Costs. Costs for individual elements can be calculated without entering the Cost
Manager.
D.1.2 Navigating within the Cost Manager
There are five selections within the Cost Manager:
Unit Cost FunctionsUse this selection to construct unit cost functions.
Cost AlternativesOpens the Cost Alternative dialog box where you can edit
the element cost data defined in the project.
Cost AdjustmentsThis selection lets you enter cost adjustments that pertain to
the overall Scenario, not just individual elements.
Active ScenariosYou can specify which Scenarios will appear in the Cost
Manager.
Cost ReportsView cost reports with varying levels of detail.
The Cost Manager also provides a way of viewing the calculated costs at user-selected
levels of detail.
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-865
Level of Detail
The cost analysis feature is extremely flexible with regard to the level of detail in
which you can develop cost estimates. At the simplest level, you may want to capture
all the costs of a pipe in a single $/ft. or $/m unit cost. At the other extreme, you may
break down the cost of a pipe into numerous cost items, including materials, installa-
tion, repaving, hydrants, services, valves, land, engineering, inspection, legal, permits,
and contribution to a capital clearing account, plus an explicit allowance for omissions
and contingencies. Either approach can be easily accommodated using the Cost
Manager.
Construction versus Overall Project Cost
It is important to understand which costs you are calculating, construction costs or
overall capital costs. For example, you must decide if the costs calculated are pure
construction costs, or if they include items such as inspection, design, land, easements,
etc. There is no single correct way to compute costs, but it is important to realize
which costs are included or not included in the totals, and to perform cost evaluations
in a consistent manner.
Indirect Costs by Element or by Project
Indirect costs such as design and inspection may be assigned to each element individ-
ually or to the project as a whole, depending on how you wish to account for the costs
in your estimate. For instance, if a pipeline project is made up of five pipe elements,
the inspection cost may be added into each element, or calculated after summing the
individual costs and added to the overall project cost.
Cost Functions versus Fixed Unit Cost
For pipes and gravity node structures, it is possible to specify unit costs as a function
of an attribute of the element. For instance, the unit cost of a pipe might be a function
of the diameter, or the cost per unit for a gravity structure could be a function of the
structure depth. By using a cost function, the unit cost for an element will be automat-
ically updated as the physical characteristics of the element change.
Scenarios versus Cost Alternatives
While cost data are stored in the Cost Alternatives, costs are calculated for individual
Scenarios. This distinction is necessary because element properties such as pipe diam-
eter and manhole depth are not stored with cost data, but rather with the systems
physical data. So, the cost must be based on a Scenario, which includes both a Cost
Alternative and a Physical Properties Alternative.
Capital Cost Estimating Basics
D-866 WaterCAD Users Manual
Multiple Scenarios
The cost data that you enter is stored in a Cost Alternative, so you can easily change
the cost data that is used from Scenario to Scenario. For instance, you may have
several phases of construction for which you wish to separately compute the associ-
ated costs. You can do this by creating two Cost Alternatives, one containing the cost
data for the elements in phase one, and another containing the costs for the elements in
phase two. By creating the appropriate Scenarios to reference these Alternatives, you
can quickly compute and compare the costs associated with each phase.
D.1.3 Entering Data for Multiple Elements
Thus far, data entry has been described for individual elements. However, in most
cases, unit costs are the same for a given type of item regardless of the element with
which it is associated. For example, a service line may cost $1200, and you want to
use that same unit price for all elements. You can define these costs by either using:
prototypes, globally editing the costs, or using unit cost functions.
Prototypes
If you know that you will be using the Cost Manager before you begin your project,
the Prototype feature allows you to easily establish default cost data by using the Cost
tab. For instance, if you know that all your pipes are going to have construction cost
items for material and installation, valves, and service connections, you can enter
these items into the construction cost table, along with their unit costs. Then, when
you have finished laying out your system, you can select the Pipe Editor and update
the appropriate quantity for each of these items.
For example, the pipe prototype may have an item labeled Service Connection with a
quantity of 0 and a unit cost of 750. Then, for each element, the labels and unit costs
will appear with the default values from the prototype, and you only need to specify
the quantity of each item.
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-867
Setting the Include in Cost Calculation Box
In the prototype shown above, cost data has been entered, but the box labeled Include
in Cost Calculation has not been checked. When new pipes are created in the graphical
editor, their cost data will default to the values shown here, but they will not be
selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. If you select Include in Cost Calculation in
the prototype, the program will calculate costs for every element subsequently entered
into the model. It may be necessary to use the Table Manager or Alternative Manager
to ensure that the model is only calculating costs for the elements that you want
included in the costing. For example, costs should not be calculated for existing pipes.
The Pressure Pipe tab in the Cost Alternative Editor below shows how you can specify
that only certain pipes are included in the cost calculation.
Unit Cost Functions
D-868 WaterCAD Users Manual
Entering Cost Items and Unit Prices Globally
If you have already entered a system for which you would like to compute the cost,
you can globally edit the cost data either through a FlexTable or the Cost Alternative
Editor. Once in the Cost Alternative Editor, select the alternative to be edited, and
choose the tab corresponding to the type of element to be edited. There, right-click the
Element Costs column heading and select Global Edit. In this way, it is possible to add
a global unit cost for hydrants or service lines. Then, within each element, you need
only enter the quantity of these items. If necessary, you can still override the unit cost
in an individual Element Editor or delete an item entirely.
Using Filters to Edit Only Some Elements
If you use FlexTables, you can easily select subsets of elements for applying different
default cost data. For instance, you may wish to apply a different unit cost function to
a material item and an installation item for pipes having different materials. In the
FlexTables, you can filter a table to view only the pipes that are made of ductile iron,
and then globally edit the cost data for these pipes. You can then repeat the process for
your PVC pipes. Combining element prototypes and the global editing capabilities
makes it easy for you to quickly enter large amounts of cost data and develop a plan-
ning-level estimate of the cost of your system.
D.2 Unit Cost Functions
Unit cost functions define a relationship between a unit cost and a certain property of
an element. For pipe elements, the unit cost would be in units of $/length and might be
related to the diameter of the pipe. In WaterCAD, pipes are the only elements for
which unit cost functions can be defined. However, in StormCAD and SewerCAD,
you can also define unit cost functions for gravity structures like inlets, junctions, and
manholes. Unit cost functions for gravity structures relate the cost of the element to
some property, such as structure depth. As with any function, unit cost functions can
give the relationship between cost ($/length or $/structure) and an element property
(diameter or structure depth) in either a tabular form or an equation.
Unit cost functions includes:
Form of Cost Functions on page D-869
Formula Cost Functions on page D-872
Tabular Cost FunctionsDefining Cost Tables on page D-874
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-869
D.2.1 Form of Cost Functions
Cost functions can be specified in formula (equation) or tabular (table) format as
shown below:
Formula Unit Cost Function
$/ft = 0.4 D1.5
Tabular Unit Cost Function
Where: D = Diameter (in.)
D (in.) 6 8 10 12 14 16
$/ft. 5.90 9.00 12.60 16.60 20.90 25.60
Unit Cost Functions
D-870 WaterCAD Users Manual
The two cost functions are essentially the same at the actual discrete diameters. The
method that you choose is strictly a matter of individual preference or dependent on
the data you have. Graphs of the formula and tabular unit cost functions given above
are shown below:
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-871
Multiple Cost Functions
Of course, not every pipe of a given size is going to have the same unit cost. Pipes laid
in new subdivisions in soil generally have lower costs than pipes laid in congested
downtown areas with a great deal of rock and extensive repaving. You might therefore
want to define several different cost functions corresponding to different pipes and
different conditions. Each of these cost functions should be given its own unique name
or label.
Some typical unit cost functions may be:
New roads
Cross country with rock
Downtown urban area
Old neighborhood
Boring under highway
A typical list of cost functions (in this case for pipes) is shown below. Note that you
can build a new cost function by adding it or by duplicating and editing an existing
function.
Unit Cost Functions
D-872 WaterCAD Users Manual
Assigning Cost Functions to Elements
Once the cost functions have been named and defined, you can assign them to any
number of construction cost items for each pipe being included in the cost calcula-
tions. This assignment can be made using the Pipe Editor, FlexTables, or the Cost
Alternative Editor.
Entering Cost Function Data
You can enter data to construct the cost functions by selecting Unit Cost Functions
from the Cost Manager, or by clicking the Ellipsis () button in the Advanced
Options dialog box located under the Cost tab of any element that supports cost func-
tions. The units of the independent variable will be the units of that variable elsewhere
in the model, while the units of the unit cost are $/ft. or $/m for pipe and $/unit for
non-pipes.
D.2.2 Formula Cost Functions
Formula cost functions includes:
Defining Cost Formulas on page D-873
Coefficients in Cost Formulas on page D-873
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-873
Defining Cost Formulas
When you decide to use a formula rather than a table to describe unit costs, you need
only enter four coefficients to describe the cost function, rather than an entire table of
values. With this method, adjusting the costs for a different cost function involves
changing only one or two of the coefficients of the equation rather than an entire table.
The general form of the cost function is:
$/ft = d + a (x-c)b
Where: x is the value of an element attribute such as diameter, rise, or
span (in length units such as inches and millimeters for
diameter and feet or meters for depth); and a, b, c, and d are
coefficients of the cost equation.
In general, typical ranges for the coefficients for pipe cost functions in $/ft. where
diameter (span) is expressed in inches are:
Coefficients in Cost Formulas
Costs are most dependent on b since it is an exponent. It indicates how sensitive costs
are to size. If costs are relatively independent of size, b is small, while if they vary
dramatically with size, b is larger. The coefficient d represents a minimal cost for
something like pavement restoration, which is independent of the size of the pipe. The
coefficient a is the best parameter to adjust when converting cost from one laying/
excavation condition to another.
The figure below shows the effects of the coefficients on the shape of the cost curve.
0.4 < a < 1.0
1.2 < b < 1.8
0.0 < c < 20
0.0 < d < 6
Unit Cost Functions
D-874 WaterCAD Users Manual
If you have few data points, it is best to set c and d to zero, b to 1.6, and see what value
of the a coefficient best fits the cost data. Try using a spreadsheet graph for this. Then,
adjust b to get the curvature of the cost curve, and c and d to get the correct x- and y-
axis intercepts.
D.2.3 Tabular Cost FunctionsDefining Cost Tables
Setting up a cost table involves typing in pairs of values in the Unit Cost Function
Editor dialog box. While the independent variables for the formula cost functions
were required to be numbers, the independent variables for tabular functions can be
numeric or text values, as shown below.
Note: In a circular gravity pipe, the rise and span both equal the
diameter.
Numeric Variables
Rise
Structure Depth
Structure Diameter
Pipe Diameter
Minor Loss Coefficient
Complex Pipe Elements
Text Variables
Section Size
Material Type
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-875
Sometimes a single pipe may actually have different unit costs along its length.
Consider a 500 foot pipe that has an 80 foot stream crossing part way along the pipe,
320 feet of cross country pipe, and 100 feet of pipe laid in an old neighborhood. There
are two ways to approach costing this kind of pipe element:
Set up three separate model elements (i.e., pipes), each with its own cost function.
This method is the most straightforward way, even though it increases the number
of pipes the hydraulic model must solve.
Or, set up one 500 foot pipe with the cost function for cross country pipe and add
the following: a cost item for the additional cost of the stream crossing with a
quantity of 80 feet and a unit price of, say, $20/ft., and a cost item for the addi-
tional cost of laying pipe in the old neighborhood with a quantity of 100 feet and a
unit price of $30/ft., where the $20 and $30 represents the incremental costs for
the more expensive pipe laying. The difficulty with this approach is that the add-
on cost is independent of pipe size. If the add-on costs are a function of pipe size,
new cost functions for those items can be defined.
Building Cost Scenarios
D-876 WaterCAD Users Manual
D.3 Building Cost Scenarios
Costs are calculated for Scenarios, which are made up of physical data, demands or
loads, initial settings, costs, and other Alternatives. The data used in the cost calcula-
tions is primarily found in the Cost Alternative, but pipe and manhole sizes are taken
from the Physical Alternative, and system adjustment data is entered in the Cost
Manager under Cost Adjustments on a Scenario basis. Values in the other Alterna-
tives, such as demands and water quality, have no impact on the cost calculations. The
relationship between sources of data for cost calculations is shown in the figure below.
D.3.1 Associating Costs with Scenarios
While cost data is entered in the Element Editors, FlexTables, and Cost Alternatives,
these costs must be associated with a Scenario. This is done in the Scenario Control
Center by selecting the Cost Alternative to be used with a Scenario. Each Scenario has
a cost associated with it, which means that there may be many Scenarios with the
same cost. This occurs when the Cost and Physical Alternatives are the same for a
particular Scenario even though the Scenarios may have a different demand alterative
or initial condition. However, you can control which Scenarios will appear in the Cost
Manager.
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-877
D.3.2 Application
For example, consider a pipe on Jones Street that is assigned a cost function in a Cost
Alternative that is based on the diameter of the pipe. In Physical Properties Alternative
1, the pipe is given a diameter of 12 inches; in Physical Properties Alternative 2, it is
given a diameter of 16 inches. When Physical Properties Alternative 1 is combined in
a Scenario with the Cost Alternative, it will generate a cost for the 12-inch Jones
Street pipe, and when Physical Properties Alternative 2 is combined with the Cost
Alternative, it will generate a cost for the 16-inch.
Using Cost Alternatives to Segregate Multiple Projects
Cost Alternatives can also be used to separate costs into distinct projects. A Cost
Alternative identifies which elements are included in the cost calculation and
summary.
For example, you may have ten elements, such as nine pipes and a pump station, that
have costs calculated for them in the model. Seven of the pipes will be installed on the
north side of town in a single project, while two pipes and a pump station will be
installed in the south side under a different project. When defining the Cost Alterna-
tive, you set up one Cost Alternative with the seven north side pipes, and another Cost
Alternative with the two south side pipes and the pump station. Checking the Include
in Cost Calculation box in the Cost Alternative Editor under the Cost Manager deter-
mines which elements are part of the cost analysis for each Scenario.
D.4 Viewing Cost Results
You can view cost results on the screen, by exporting them to spreadsheets and other
software, and by printing them for use in reports. These reported costs can be given on
an element-by-element basis in the element dialog boxes, aggregated by pipes and
nodes in FlexTables, and on a project basis in the Cost Manager. The default display
units on cost are dollars ($) with no decimal places, although they can be changed to
thousands of dollars (k$), and the display precision can be adjusted.
Viewing cost results includes:
Active Scenarios on page D-878
Use of Cost FlexTables on page D-878
Individual Element Costs on page D-879
Node and Pipe Cost Tables on page D-879
Cost Scenario Tables on page D-879
Viewing Cost Results
D-878 WaterCAD Users Manual
D.4.1 Active Scenarios
The Cost Manager can calculate costs for every Scenario created in the Scenario
Control Center. However, some Scenarios may share the same Cost Alternative and
Physical Alternative, and differ only in the loading (demand) or initial conditions. In
these cases, the costs will be the same for the different Scenarios. You may therefore
want to view the costs for only a few of the available Scenarios. This can be done by
selecting Active Scenarios in the Cost Manager and checking the appropriate boxes.
Only those Scenarios that are selected as active in the Cost Manager will have costs
calculated for them.
D.4.2 Use of Cost FlexTables
The cost reports are formatted as FlexTables, so the columns can be adjusted and
display properties changed. The tables can also be exported to a tab delimited or
comma delimited file, or copied to the Windows Clipboard and pasted into other soft-
ware. The actual values displayed in the cells, not the formulas, are copied, so the
numerical values should not be adjusted once they are exported. That is, if the unit
cost or quantity is changed, the totals will not automatically update in the spreadsheet.
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-879
D.4.3 Individual Element Costs
For any element, costs can be viewed under the Cost tab of the element dialog box. If
there are more than three construction or non-construction costs, not all will be visible
at once. The costs can be viewed in a report like the one shown below by selecting
Report > Cost Report. To obtain a printout, select Print Preview and Print.
D.4.4 Node and Pipe Cost Tables
Just as the model contains some standard pipe and node tables, they also contain stan-
dard cost tables. These can be viewed from the Tabular Reports dialog box by
selecting Node Cost Report or Pipe Cost Report. In this view, it is possible to sort or
filter elements and use all the functionality of FlexTables to customize the look of the
table. The table can also be exported, copied, and printed. You can filter out elements
not included in the cost calculation by selecting Options > Filter > Custom.
D.4.5 Cost Scenario Tables
The costs can be viewed for an entire Scenario (project) in the Cost Manager itself.
The costs are presented in a tree structure such that you can expand or collapse various
branches of the tree to suit the level of detail desired.
More attractive tables are available by selecting Cost Reports. There are four levels of
detail available, as shown in the examples below:
Detailed tables show all unit costs and quantities.
Viewing Cost Results
D-880 WaterCAD Users Manual
Element Summary gives construction and non-construction costs for each element.
Project Summary gives totals for each type of element (e.g., Pipes, Tanks, etc.).
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-881
Pipe Costs gives the total length and cost for the pipes included in the cost analysis.
D.5 Assigning Costs to Model Elements
Assigning costs to model elements includes:
Construction versus Non-Construction Costs on page D-881
Cost Considerations for Different Elements on page D-882
Pipe Costs on page D-882
Node Costs on page D-884
Pump Station Costs on page D-887
Non-Construction Costs on page D-888
D.5.1 Construction versus Non-Construction Costs
The costs for each type of element are divided into two typesconstruction and non-
construction. The definition of each type of cost depends to a certain extent on you.
However, in general, the difference between the two types of costs is that construction
costs are based on a unit cost multiplied by a quantity, while non-construction costs
are specified as either a lump sum or as a percentage of the total construction costs.
The method of specifying non-construction costs is identical for every element. There
are slightly different options for specifying construction costs, depending on the type
of element to which you are assigning the cost. These nuances will be explained in
more detail in the sections that follow.
Assigning Costs to Model Elements
D-882 WaterCAD Users Manual
D.5.2 Cost Considerations for Different Elements
While cost management for the various elements shares most features, different types
of elements have some special behaviors. The four distinct categories are pipes, nodes
with cost functions, nodes without cost functions, and pump stations. Each type is
described in more detail in the corresponding topics.
D.5.3 Pipe Costs
Pipe costs includes:
Cost per Item versus Cost per Length on page D-882
Items with Cost per Length on page D-883
Unit Cost Functions for Pipes on page D-883
Cost per Item versus Cost per Length
The construction costs for pipes are entered into the construction cost table portion of
the Cost tab for the element. The table can contain any number of construction cost
items. You can specify each pipe construction cost item as either a cost per item or a
cost per length. If you specify the cost on a per item basis, then the total construction
cost is the cost per item multiplied by the quantity or number of objects. You indicate
the type of cost in the Unit column by selecting:
Each, if the costs are calculated per item
Any length unit, if the costs are calculated per length
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-883
Items with Cost per Length
If a length unit (e.g., ft. or m) is selected in the Unit column, the number in the quan-
tity column is the length by which the unit cost is to be multiplied. The default value in
the quantity field is the length of the pipe used in the hydraulic calculations. However,
if that particular unit cost only applies to a portion of the pipe, you can enter another
value by deselecting Set Quantity Equal to Pipe Length in the Advanced Options
dialog box for each cost item.
Unit Cost Functions for Pipes
The Cost Manager allows you to specify the unit cost as a function of a pipe attribute
using a unit cost function. The unit cost function relates the cost per unit length to a
pipe property such as diameter. If you specify a unit cost function for a construction
cost item, then the program will calculate the unit cost for that item. Creating unit cost
functions is described later.
EXAMPLE:
Consider 650 feet of a 10-inch diameter pipe with the following cost data:
And with the following unit costs and quantities:
Material and installation $55/ft. (calculated based on the above table)
7 service connections at $650 each
Omission and contingency at 15% of construction cost
Inspection services at 5% of construction cost
Utility Easement at $350
The Cost tab for this pipe would appear as follows:
Table D-1: Unit Cost as a Function
of Diameter
Diameter (in) Unit Cost ($/ft.)
8 45
10 55
12 60
Assigning Costs to Model Elements
D-884 WaterCAD Users Manual
Each pipe can have as many construction cost items as you wish, which means
that any number of unit cost functions can be used for a single pipe. For instance,
you could have unit cost functions for materials, excavation, or resurfacing. The
advantage of specifying the costs in terms of unit cost functions is that as the
physical characteristics of the pipe change, the cost for the element is automati-
cally updated.
D.5.4 Node Costs
Node costs includes:
Types of Nodes by Cost on page D-884
Cost Items for Nodes on page D-885
Types of Nodes by Cost
In terms of assigning construction costs, nodal elements can be broken down into two
categories: those that support unit cost functions and those that do not support unit
cost functions. For the most part, the construction cost items for these two categories
of nodal elements are specified in a very similar fashion. The first category includes
the gravity structures: manholes, inlets, and junctions. The second category consists of
the remaining nodal elements: outlets, pressure junctions, pumps, valves, tanks, and
reservoirs.
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-885
Cost Items for Nodes
The construction cost items for nodal elements consist of a label, quantity, unit, and
unit cost. The unit field contains a user-defined string and is primarily used for book-
keeping, since it does not affect the total cost of the item. The total cost for the
construction cost item is the quantity multiplied by the unit cost, which are parameters
defined by you.
For elements that support unit cost functions (manholes, inlets, and junctions), the
function can be defined in the Cost Manager and assigned to the construction cost
item. As with pipes, if a unit cost function is assigned to a construction cost item, then
the unit cost is computed based on some attribute. The difference is that for pipes the
unit cost function computes a cost per length (e.g., ft. or m), while for nodal elements
the unit cost function computes a cost for the item (e.g., structure). So if a unit cost
function is assigned to a construction cost item, the quantity will default to 1, and the
unit will default to each. A quick way to determine if an element supports cost func-
tions is to look at the element dialog box. If it is possible to select the Advanced
button, then you can assign a cost function to that element. It is in the Advanced
Options dialog box that cost functions can be assigned to items, as described later in
this document.
EXAMPLE: NODE WITHOUT A COST FUNCTION
The construction cost of a tank, a type of element that does not support unit cost
functions, may consist of the following items:
1 steel tank at $250000
600 ft. of fencing at $15/ft.
Site clearing and grading at $20000
1 SCADA system and radio transmitter at $20000
The Cost tab for this item is shown below:
Assigning Costs to Model Elements
D-886 WaterCAD Users Manual
EXAMPLE: NODE WITH A COST FUNCTION
For an inlet, you could use a unit cost function so that the construction costs for
the element are updated as the design is changed. Consider an inlet with the
following cost data.
1 subsurface structure 8-ft. deep at $3500 (calculated from the unit cost func-
tion)
1 surface inlet at $2000
The Cost tab for this item would appear as shown below:
Table D-2: Unit Cost Function of Structure Depth
Depth (ft.) Cost of Subsurface Structure ($)
6 3000
8 3500
10 4000
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-887
D.5.5 Pump Station Costs
Pump stations are a special case of nodal elements. In terms of the hydraulic model, a
pump station with three pumps makes up three hydraulic elements. However, in terms
of cost estimating, a pump station is a single entity. There are two ways to address this
situation. You can either apportion the costs evenly between the three elements or
aggregate the cost for the entire pump station on a single pump. From a reporting and
management perspective, it often makes the most sense to assign all the costs to a
single pump as illustrated below:
3 pumps at $12000 each
3 pump installations at $4000 each
9 gate valves installed at $2500 each
3 check valves at $690 each
1 pump station structure at $80000
1 SCADA system with sensors and radio at $25000
Engineering and inspection at 15% of construction
Allowance for contingencies @ 5% of construction
Land for pumping station at $20000
Assigning Costs to Model Elements
D-888 WaterCAD Users Manual
The sum of all these costs is the total cost for the element and would show up only in
the selected pump. The other two pumps at the station would have zero cost. In the
screen capture below, note that only three items are shown in the table, but the table
can be scrolled to show the remaining items.
D.5.6 Non-Construction Costs
There are numerous indirect costs that are applied to construction projects. The termi-
nology describing these costs varies depending on local conventions, whether a public
or private utility is involved, and whether construction is being done with force
account labor or outside contractors. There are numerous items that can be included in
these indirect costs, such as:
Design and bidding
Construction phase engineering services
Inspection
Utility overhead
Capital clearing account
Administration
Legal
Permits
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-889
Allowance for interest on funds used during construction
Insurance
You are able to include these costs in the following ways:
With each element as a lump sum.
With each element as a percentage.
For the overall Scenario as a lump sum.
For the overall Scenario as a percentage of construction costs.
For the overall Scenario as a percentage of both construction and non-construction
costs (% of total cost).
As a factor applied to the overall project (multiplier).
Non-construction costs include:
Omissions and Contingencies on page D-889
Land, Easement, and Right-of-Way Costs on page D-889
Specifying Non-Construction Costs on page D-890
Omissions and Contingencies
Usually, cost estimators make an allowance for unforeseen items that come up during
projects, sometimes referred to as Omissions and Contingencies (O&C). These costs
are usually high when the project is being formulated initially (25%) and get smaller
(5%) as the scope and details of the project are worked out.
It is important not to count the allowance for O&C twice by including an allowance on
an element-by-element basis, and then another allowance for the project as a whole.
Land, Easement, and Right-of-Way Costs
Many projects involve procurement of land, easements, or rights-of-way. These costs
are usually not a function of element size, and so can be handled on an element by-
element basis as a lump sum or as a cost per foot or acre multiplied by the number of
feet or acres. If the land costs are not going to be accounted for element-by-element,
but rather by a single land purchase for the entire project, a lump sum cost adjustment
should be made to the appropriate Scenario.
Assigning Costs to Model Elements
D-890 WaterCAD Users Manual
Specifying Non-Construction Costs
Non-construction cost items for all types of elements are computed in the same
manner, and can be specified as either a lump sum or as a percentage of the total
construction costs. For instance, you may wish to make allowances for omissions and
contingencies on an element-by-element basis. You can do this by assigning a non-
construction cost item to every element that is 15% of the total construction cost of the
element.
The dialog boxes and reports below illustrate how the construction and non-construc-
tion costs for the following elements will appear in Cost tab of the Element Editor
dialog box and in the cost report for each element.
Pipe (using values from a previous example):
650 feet of 10-inch diameter pipe at $55/ft.
7 service connections at $650 each
Omission and contingency at 15% of construction
Inspection Services at 5% of construction
Utility easement at $350
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-891
Tank:
1 steel tank at $250000
600 ft. of fencing at $15/ft.
Site clearing and grading at $20000
1 SCADA system and radio transmitter at $20000
Engineering and inspection at 12% of construction
2 acres of land at $50000/acre
Assigning Costs to Model Elements
D-892 WaterCAD Users Manual
Inlet (using values from a previous example):
1 surface inlet at $2000
1 subsurface structure 8-ft. deep at $3500
Engineering and inspection at 25% of construction cost
Capital Cost Estimating
WaterCAD Users Manual D-893
Assigning Costs to Model Elements
D-894 WaterCAD Users Manual
WaterCAD Users Manual E-895
E
Appendix
Haestad Methods
Bentley Systems offers software solutions to civil engineers throughout the world for
analyzing, modeling, and designing all sorts of hydrologic and hydraulic systems,
from municipal water and sewer systems to stormwater ponds, open channels, and
more. With point-and-click data entry, flexible units, and report-quality output,
Haestad Methods is the ultimate source for your modeling needs.
In addition to the ability to run in Stand-Alone mode with a CAD-like interface, some
of our productsWaterCAD, WaterCAD, StormCAD and SewerCADcan be totally
integrated within AutoCAD. These programs also share numerous powerful features,
such as scenario management, unlimited undo/redo, customizable tables for editing
and reporting, customizable GIS, database and spreadsheet connection, and annota-
tion.
Be sure to contact us or visit our Web site at http://www.haestad.com to find out about
our latest software, books, training, and open houses.
E.1 Software
Haestad Methods software includes:
WaterGEMS
WaterCAD
SewerCAD
StormCAD
PondPack
FlowMaster
CulvertMaster
WaterSafe
PumpMaster
Software
E-896 WaterCAD Users Manual
E.1.1 WaterGEMS
WaterGEMS brings the concept of water modeling and GIS integration to the next
level. It is the only water distribution modeling software that provides full, completely
seamless integration with GIS applications. Now the combined functionality of
WaterCAD and GIS can be utilized simultaneously, synthesizing the distinct advan-
tages of each application to create a modeling tool with an unprecedented level of
freedom, power, efficiency, and usability.
You can design, create, display, edit, run, and map, water models from within the GIS
environment, and view the results of the simulations as native GIS maps or with tradi-
tional Bentley Systems modeling tools. Further, you can use WaterObjects to
customize WaterGEMS to meet your specific needs. These abilities, in conjunction
with the cross-product functionality provided by the core Unified Data and Object
Model architecture, provide a powerful cutting-edge solution for your modeling
projects.
WaterGEMS works within your choice of environments: ArcView, ArcEdit, ArcInfo,
AutoCAD, or the WaterGEMS Modeler interface.
E.1.2 WaterCAD
WaterCAD is the definitive model for complex pressurized pipe networks, such as
municipal water distribution systems. You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of
functions, including steady-state and extended-period simulations of pressure
networks with pumps, tanks, control valves, and more.
WaterCAD abilities also extend into public safety and long-term planning issues, with
extensive water quality features, including: automated fire protection analyses,
comprehensive scenario management, skeletonization, calibration, cost analysis, and
enterprise-wide data sharing faculties. Further, you can use WaterObjects to customize
WaterCAD to meet your specific needs.
WaterCAD is available with your choice of a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an
AutoCAD integrated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.
Haestad Methods
WaterCAD Users Manual E-897
E.1.3 SewerCAD
SewerCAD is a powerful design and analysis tool for modeling sanitary sewage
collection and pumping systems. With SewerCAD, you can develop and compute
sanitary loads, tracking and combining loads from dry-weather and wet-weather
sources. You can also simulate the hydraulic response of the entire system (gravity
collection and pressure force mains), observe the effects of overflows and diversions,
and even automatically design selected portions of the system. Output covers every-
thing from customizable tables and detailed reports to plan and profile sheets.
SewerCAD can be run in a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an AutoCAD inte-
grated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.
E.1.4 StormCAD
StormCAD is a highly-efficient model for the design and analysis of storm sewer
collection systems. From graphical layout and intelligent network connectivity to flex-
ible reports and profiles, StormCAD covers all aspects of storm sewer modeling.
Surface inlet networks are independent of pipe connectivity, and inlet hydraulics
conform to FHWA HEC-22 methodologies. Gradually varied flow algorithms and a
variety of popular junction loss methods are the foundation of StormCADs robust
gravity piping computations, which handle everything from surcharged pipes and
diversions to hydraulic jumps.
StormCAD is available with your choice of a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an
AutoCAD integrated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.
E.1.5 PondPack
PondPack is a comprehensive, Windows-based hydrologic modeling program that
analyzes a tremendous range of situations, from simple sites to complex networked
watersheds. PondPack analyzes pre- and postdeveloped watershed conditions, and
estimates required storage ponds. PondPack performs interconnected pond routing,
and also computes outlet rating curves with tailwater effects, multiple outfalls, pond
infiltration, and pond detention times.
PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories, and automatically
creates section and page numbers, tables of contents, and indexes. You can quickly
create an executive summary for an entire watershed, or build an elaborate drainage
report showing any or all report items. Graphical displays, such as watershed
diagrams, rainfall curves, and hydrographs are fully compatible with other Windows
software, such as AutoCAD.
Software
E-898 WaterCAD Users Manual
E.1.6 FlowMaster
FlowMaster is efficient software for the design and analysis of a wide variety of
hydraulic elements, such as pressure pipes, open channels, weirs, orifices, and inlets.
FlowMasters Hydraulics Toolbox can create rating tables and performance curves for
any variables, using popular friction methods. Inlet calculations follow the latest
FHWA guidelines, and irregular section roughness can be weighted based on any
popular techniques.
E.1.7 CulvertMaster
CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert
hydraulics, from single barrel crossings to complex multi-barrel culverts with
roadway overtopping. CulvertMaster computations use HDS No. 5 methodologies,
and allow you to solve for whatever hydraulic variables you dont know, such as
culvert size, peak discharge, and headwater elevation. Output capabilities include
comprehensive detailed reports, rating tables, and performance curves.
E.1.8 WaterSafe
WaterSafe is an add-on module for WaterCAD and WaterCAD. It allows you to run
multiple constituent, trace, and age analyses, and it also incorporates previously
unavailable statistical results. Enhanced reporting and graphing capabilities improve
your ability to compare, examine and predict the effects of various water quality
scenarios.
E.1.9 PumpMaster
PumpMaster is software service for the selection of pumps from pump manufacturer
catalogs provided through three different solutions: a stand-alone application, an
online catalog, and a programmable pump library for use within Haestad Method
products. Features include: Automated selection of pumps based on a basic criterion
Haestad Methods
WaterCAD Users Manual E-899
(duty point) or more elaborate parameters (application, pump type, speed, etc), Simul-
taneous access to catalogs from multiple pump manufacturers, and Enhanced work
flow and design capabilities for complex pump stations, such as variable speed
pumping or analyzing arrangements of identical and multiple size pumps.
E.2 Haestad Press
Haestad Press provides civil engineering professionals with
affordable, quality reference and textbooks dedicated to the
practical application of engineering theory to hydraulics and
hydrology. Haestad Press publications include:
References and Textbooks: Authored by industry-recognized experts, Haestad
Press offers a complete line of reference books for
use in both academic and professional settings.
Technical Journals: With an eye towards computer technology, journals
like Current Methods address the latest innovations
in water resources modeling and practical modeling
case studies, as well as offering credit towards
certification.
Independent Papers: Haestad Press also provides funding for engineers to
write case studies of their projects, for potential
publication in a variety of industry journals and
magazines.
E.3 Training and Certification
Haestad Methods Continuing Education depart-
ment has rightfully earned a reputation for excel-
lence among hydraulic modelers, because of both
the high quality of the educational experience and
the friendly and professional environment that is
provided at locations throughout the world. These
training programs are famous for efficiently and
effectively teaching engineers how to apply
hydraulic theory and state-of-the-art software to
real-world design situations.
Modelers can become certified in a variety of water-related fields, through an assort-
ment of teaching methods including:
JumpStart Seminars
Internet Resources
E-900 WaterCAD Users Manual
Comprehensive Workshops
Publication-Based Programs
To obtain more information about Haestad Methods certification programs, or to see
upcoming events in a city near you, visit http://www.haestad.com.
E.3.1 Accreditations
Haestad Methods has achieved the highest levels of accreditation from both the Inter-
national Association for Continuing Education and Training (IACET), and the Profes-
sional Development Registry for Engineers and Surveyors (PDRES). In addition to
Haestad Methods own prestigious certifications, these endorsements enable modelers
to earn Continuing Education Units (CEUs) and Professional Development Hours
(PDHs) for their satisfactory participation in various training and educational
programs.
E.4 Internet Resources
In addition to modeling software, continuing education, and publications, Haestad
Methods also provides Internet-based tools to help engineers manage their account
information, manage their projects, and manage their sanity.
Use the Globe button to access the Haestad Methods knowledge base and
instant software updates for Bentley Select subscribers, etc.
E.4.1 Instant Account Management
Now you can go online to manage your own account information, such as to conve-
niently maintain your products, customize your communication settings, or indicate
your areas of interest. Just visit the accounts section at http://www.haestad.com.
E.4.2 CivilProjects.com
CivilProjects.com is a special Internet service for
posting and locating Requests for Proposal (RFPs). The
database is updated daily with postings from around the
world, and there are extensive search capabilities that
allow you to find exactly what you are looking for.
Haestad Methods
WaterCAD Users Manual E-901
E.4.3 CivilQuiz.com
CivilQuiz.com is a great way to treat yourself to some fun with a
quick online engineering challenge, and maybe win a laptop or
other prizes along the way. You can even submit your own ques-
tions to stump future CivilQuiz players!
E.4.4 Haestad Engineering Forums
The WaterTalk, SewerTalk, and StormTalk online forums will keep you up-to-
date with the latest tips and tricks in hydraulic and hydrologic modeling. Post your
engineering questions and share your unique modeling experiences with a global audi-
ence of thousands of professionals. For more information, visit http://
www.haestad.com and click the links to use the forums.
Internet Resources
E-902 WaterCAD Users Manual
WaterCAD Users Manual F-903
F
Appendix
Glossary
Age: An analysis for the age of water determines how long the
water has been in the system, and is a general water
quality indicator.
Available Fire Flow: Amount of flow available at a node for fire protection
while maintaining all fire flow pressure constraints.
Base Elevation & Level: Elevation from which all tank levels are measured. For
example, a tank level of two meters represents a water
surface elevation two meters above the base elevation.
Boundary Node: Node with a known hydraulic grade. It may be static
(unchanging with time), such as a reservoir, or dynamic
(changes with time), such as a tank. Every pipe network
must contain at least one boundary node. In order to
compute the hydraulic grade at the other nodes in the
network, they must be reachable from a boundary.
Bulk Reaction Coefficient: Coefficient used to define how rapidly a constituent
grows or decays over time. It is expressed in units of 1/
time, for first-order reactions.
Calc. Min. System Pressure: Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the
system during fire flow withdrawal at a node.
Calc. Min. Zone Pressure: Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the same
zone as the node where fire flow withdrawal occurs.
Calc. Residual Pressure: Calculated pressure at the junction node where the fire
flow withdrawal occurs.
Calculation Unready: An element that does not have all the required
information for performing an analysis is considered to
be calculation unready.
C-Coefficient: Roughness coefficient used in the Hazen-Williams
Equation.
F-904 WaterCAD Users Manual
Check Valve: Prevents water from flowing backwards through the pipe.
In other words, water can only flow from the From Node
to the To Node.
Closed/Inactive Status: You can control the status of a valve to be either inactive
or closed. Inactive means that the valve will act like an
open pipe where flow can occur in either direction, and
the headloss across the valve will be calculated using the
valves minor loss factor. Closed means that no flow will
occur through the valve.
Constituent: Any substance, such as chlorine or fluoride, for which the
growth or decay can be adequately described through the
use of a bulk reaction coefficient and a wall reaction
coefficient.
Context Menu: A shortcut menu opened by right-clicking a project
element or data entry field. Commands on the context
menu are specific to the current state of the selected item.
Control Status: A pressure pipe can be either Open or Closed. Open
means that flow occurs in the pipe, and Closed means
that no flow occurs in the pipe.
Conveyance Element: A pipe or channel used to transport water.
Coordinates: Distances perpendicular to a set of reference axes. Some
areas may have predefined coordinate systems, while
other coordinate systems may be arbitrary. Coordinates
may be presented as X and Y values or may be defined as
Northing and Easting values, depending on individual
preferences.
Cross Section Type: Tanks can have either a constant area cross section or a
variable area cross section. The cross section of a tank
with a constant area is the same throughout the depth.
The cross section of a tank with a variable area varies
throughout the depth.
Crosshair: The cursor that looks like a plus sign (+).
Current Storage Volume: The volume of water currently stored in a tank. It
includes both the hydraulically active volume and the
hydraulically inactive volume.
CV: Check valve
Database Connections: A connection represented by a group of database links.
There may be a single linked external file within a
connection, or there may be several external file links
within a single connection.
Dataset: A dataset is a WaterCAD project.
Glossary
WaterCAD Users Manual F-905
DBMS: An acronym that stands for Database Management
System. These systems can be relational (RDBMS) or
non-relational.
DEM: Digital elevation model
Demand: Represents the total demand from an individual junction
for the current time period. It is based on the information
from the Demand tab of the Junction Editor.
Design Point: Point at which a pump was originally intended to operate,
and is typically the best efficiency point (BEP) of the
pump. At discharges above or below this point, the pump
is not operating under optimum conditions.
Diameter: Refers to a pipe or valves inside diameter. It is the
distance between two internal points directly opposite
each other.
Discharge: Volumetric rate of flow given in units of length
3
/time.
DLG: Digital line graph
Double-Click: To click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Drag: To hold down one of the mouse buttons while you move
the mouse.
Element: An object such as a tank, junction node, or pipe in a
drawing.
Elevation: The distance from a datum plane to the center of the
element. Elevations are often referenced with mean sea
level as the datum elevation.
Energy Grade Line (EGL): Sum of datum (base elevation), elevation, velocity head,
and pressure head at a section.
EPS: Extended Period Simulation
Extended Edit Button: A small button with an ellipsis () as the label.
Extended edit buttons are located next to drop-down
choice lists, and provide further editing for the associated
choice list items.
External Files: Any file outside of this program that can be linked. These
include database files (such as FoxPro, Dbase or
Paradox) and spreadsheets (such as Excel or Lotus).
Throughout the documentation, all of these file types will
be referred to as databases or external files
interchangeably.
F-906 WaterCAD Users Manual
Extrapolate: To infer a value based on other known values, with the
desired value lying outside the known range. Often based
upon extending the slope of the line connecting the
previous known values to the desired point. See also:
interpolate.
Feature Class: 1. A classification describing the format of geographic
features and supporting data in a coverage. Coverage
feature classes for representing geographic features
include point, arc, node, route-system, route, section,
polygon and region. One or more coverage features are
used to model geographic features; for example, arcs and
nodes can be used to model linear features such as street
centerlines. The tic, annotation, link, and boundary
feature classes provide supporting data for coverage data
management and viewing.
2. The conceptual representation of a geographic feature.
When referring to geographic features, feature classes
include point, line, area, and surface.
Feature Dataset: A feature dataset is a collection of feature classes that
share the same spatial reference.
Field Links: Define the actual mapping between model element
attributes and columns within each database table.
File Extension: The period and three characters, typically, at the end of a
filename. A file extension usually identifies the kind of
information the file contains. For example, files you
create in AutoCAD have the extension *.DWG.
Fire Flow Upper Limit: The maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a
withdrawal location. This is a user-specified practical
limit that will prevent this program from computing
unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as
primary system mains, which have large diameters and
high service pressures. Remember that a systems ability
to deliver fire flows is ultimately limited by the size of
the hydrant opening and service line, as well as the
number of hydrants available to combat a fire at a
specific location.
Flow: Represents the calculated value of the pipe, valve, or
pump discharge at the given time.
From Node: Represents the pipes starting node. Positive flow rates
are in the direction of from towards to. Negative flow
rates are in the opposite direction.
From Pipe: The pipe that connects to the upstream side of a valve or
pump.
Glossary
WaterCAD Users Manual F-907
GA: Genetic algorithm
Generations: The maximum value for genetic algorithm generations is
determined by the Maximum Era Number and Era
Generation Number you set in the GA Parameters. The
actual number of generations that get calculated depend
on the Stopping Criteria you set.
Geodatabase: Short for geographic database, a geodatabase stores
spatial and descriptive data in an efficient manner.
Geodatabases are the standard file format for ArcGIS v8
and later.
Headloss: Represents the energy lost due to friction and minor
losses. The headloss field displays the pipe, valve, or
pumps total headloss at the given time.
Headloss Gradient: Presents the headloss in the pipe as a slope, or gradient.
This allows you to more accurately compare headlosses
for pipes of different lengths.
Hydraulic Grade: Elevation to which water would rise under zero pressure.
For open surfaces, such as reservoirs and tanks, this is
equal to the water surface elevation. The hydraulic grade
field presents the hydraulic grade for the element at the
current time period as calculated based on the system
flow rates and head changes.
Hydraulic Grade Setting: The constraint to which a valve regulates, expressed in
units of head (Length). Depending on the type of valve, it
may refer to either the upstream or downstream hydraulic
grade or the headloss across the valve.
Inactive Volume: The volume of water below the minimum elevation of the
tank. This volume of water is always present, even when
the tank reaches its minimum elevation and closes itself
off from the system. Therefore, it is hydraulically
inactive. It is primarily used for water quality
calculations.
Inflow & Outflow: An inflow is a flow into a node from the system, while an
outflow is a flow from the node into the system. A
negative outflow is the same as a positive inflow, and a
negative inflow is the same as a positive outflow.
Inheritance: Refers to the parent-child relationships used by scenarios
and alternatives. Just as in the natural world, inheritance
is used to refer to the situation where an entity receives
something from its parent. For example, we speak of a
child inheriting blue eyes from a parent. Unlike in the
F-908 WaterCAD Users Manual
natural world, inheritance in scenarios and alternatives is
dynamic. If the parents attribute changes, the childs
attribute automatically changes at the same time, unless
the value is explicitly changed in a child.
Initial Settings: Sets the status of an element for a steady-state analysis or
the first time step in an extended period simulation. The
initial settings for a pipe, pump, or valve can be set using
the elemental dialog boxes or a table.
Initial Water Quality: Represents the starting conditions at a node for age, trace,
or constituent concentration. The initial value will be
slightly different depending on the analysis type.
Interpolate: Estimating a value between two known values assuming
a linear relationship. See also: extrapolate.
Invert: Lowest point of a pipe opening. Sometimes referred to as
the flow line.
Label: The unique name by which an element will be referenced
in reports, error messages, and tables.
Length: Represents the distance on a pipe from the From Node to
the To Node, according to the scaled length of the pipe.
To enter an overriding length, click the User Defined
Length field and type in your desired length value.
LIDAR: Light Detection and Ranging
Mannings Coefficient: Roughness coefficient used in Mannings Formula.
Material: The selection of a pipes construction material. This
material will be used to determine a default value for the
pipes roughness.
Maximum Elevation: The highest allowable water surface elevation in a tank.
If the tank fills above this point, it will automatically shut
off from the system.
Max. Extended Operating Point:The absolute maximum discharge at which a pump
can operate, with zero head being added to the system.
This value may be computed by the program or entered
manually.
Maximum Operating Point: The highest discharge for which a pump is actually
intended to run. At discharges above this point, the pump
may behave unpredictably, or its performance may
decline rapidly.
Messages: The section that contains information generated during
the calculation of the model, such as warnings, errors,
and status updates.
Glossary
WaterCAD Users Manual F-909
Messages Light: A light that appears on the Tab of the Messages sheet.
The light will be red if errors occurred during the
analysis, yellow if there are warnings or cautions, and
green if there are no warnings or errors.
Metadata: Additional information (aside from tabular and spatial
data) that makes the data useful. Includes characteristics
and information that are required to use the data but are
not contained within the data itself.
Minimum Elevation: The lowest allowable water surface elevation in a tank. If
the tank drains below this point, it will automatically shut
off from the system.
Minimum System Junction: The junction where the calculated minimum system
pressure occurs.
Minimum System Pressure: The minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the
entire system as result of fire flow withdrawal. If the
pressure at a node anywhere in the system falls below
this constraint while withdrawing fire flow, fire flow will
not be satisfied. A fire flow analysis may be configured
to ignore this constraint.
Minimum Zone Junction: The junction where the calculated minimum zone
pressure occurs.
Minimum Zone Pressure: The minimum pressure to maintain at all junction nodes
within a Zone. The model determines the available fire
flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall
below this target pressure. Each junction has a zone
associated with it, which can be specified in the
junctions input data. If you do not want a junction node
to be analyzed as part of another junction nodes fire flow
analysis, move it to another Zone.
Minor Loss: The field that presents the total minor loss K value for a
pipe or valve. If an element has more than one minor
loss, each can be entered individually by clicking the
Ellipsis () button.
Modeler/Stand-Alone: The Haestad Methods software environment, and not the
AutoCAD one.
Mouse Buttons: The left mouse button is the primary button for selecting
or activating commands. The right mouse button is used
to activate shortcut context menus and help. Note that the
mouse button functions can be redefined using the
Windows Control Panel. If your mouse is equipped with
a mouse wheel, you can use it for various panning and
zooming functions.
F-910 WaterCAD Users Manual
Needed Fire Flow: The flow rate required at a junction to satisfy fire flow
demands.
Network Element: An element that forms part of the network model.
Annotation elements, such as polylines, borders, and text,
are not network elements.
Number: The number of parallel conveyance elements in a model.
Notes: The field that allows you to enter text relevant to the
model. It may include a description of an element, a
summary of your data sources, or any other information
of interest.
ODBC: Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) is a standard
programming interface developed by Microsoft for
accessing data in relational and non-relational database
management systems (DBMS).
On/Off Status: The status of a pump can be either on or off. On means
that flow will occur in the downstream direction, and the
pump will add head to the system according to its
characteristic curve. Off means that no flow will occur,
and no head will be added.
Open/Closed Status: The status of a pipe can be either open or closed. Open
means that flow can occur in either direction. Closed
means that no flow will occur through the pipe.
PBV: Pressure breaker valve (see Valve Theory on page B-
792)
Percent Full: The ratio of the current storage volume to the total
storage volume, multiplied by 100.
Pipe Status: Indicates whether the pipe is open or closed. As input,
this determines how the pipe begins the simulation. As
output, it shows the calculated status of the pipe at the
given time.
Polyline: A composite element that consists of a series of line
segments. Each line segment begins and ends at a vertex.
A vertex may be another element such as a junction, tank,
or pump.
Power: Represents the water horsepower of a pump. This is the
horsepower that is actually transferred from the pump
into the water. Depending on the pumps efficiency, the
actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary.
Pressure: The field that displays the pressure for the current time
period.
Glossary
WaterCAD Users Manual F-911
Pressure Setting: The constraint to which a valve regulates, expressed in
units of pressure (Force per Length). Depending on the
type of valve, it may refer to either the upstream or
downstream pressure or the pressure drop.
PRV: Pressure reducing valve (see Valve Theory on page B-
792)
PSV: Pressure sustaining valves (see Valve Theory on
page B-792)
Menu: A menu of available commands or actions you can
perform. Access menus from the menu bar at the top of
the main program window.
Pump Status: A pump can have two different status conditions: On,
which is normal operation, or Off, which is no flow under
any condition.
RDBMS: An acronym that stands for Relational Database
Management System.
Relate: A temporary connection between table records using a
common item shared by both tables. Each record in one
table is connected to those records in the other table that
share the same value for the common item.
Relational Database: A database in which the data is structured in such a way
as to associate tables according to attributes that are
shared by the tables.
Relational Join: The process of merging two attribute tables using a
common item.
Relative Speed Factor: Defines the characteristics of a pump relative to the speed
for which the pump curve was entered, in accordance
with the affinity laws. A speed factor of 1.00 would
indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the
original pump curve.
Residual Pressure: The minimum residual pressure to occur at a junction
node. The program determines the amount of fire flow
available such that the residual pressure at a junction
node does not fall below this target pressure.
Reynolds Number: Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces. A high
Reynolds number indicates turbulent flow, while a low
number indicates laminar flow.
Roughness: A measure of a pipes resistance to flow. Pipes of
different ages, construction material, and workmanship
may have different roughness values.
F-912 WaterCAD Users Manual
Roughness Coefficient: A value used to represent the resistance of a conveyance
element to flow. In the Mannings equation, this value is
inversely proportional to flow. The smaller the roughness
coefficient, the greater the flow.
Satisfies Fire Flow: A true or false statement indicating whether this junction
node meets the fire flow constraints. A check mark in the
box means the Fire Flow Constraints were satisfied for
that node. If there is no check mark, the Fire Flow
Constraints were NOT satisfied.
Schema: A diagrammatic representation; an outline or model.
Essentially, a schema represents the number of tables, the
columns they contain, the data types of the columns, and
any relationships between the tables.
Select: The process of adding one or more elements to an active
selection set.
Selection Set: The active group of selected elements. A selection set
allows editing or an action, such as move or delete, to be
performed on a group of elements.
Shape: The cross-sectional geometric form of a conveyance
element (i.e., circular, box, arch, etc.).
Shapefile: A file format that stores spatial and attribute data for the
spatial features within the dataset. A shapefile consists of
a main file, an index file, and a dBASE table. Shapefiles
were the standard file storage format for ArcView 3.x and
earlier.
Shutoff Point: The point at which a pump will have zero discharge.
Typically the maximum head point on a pump curve.
Size: Inside diameter of a pipe section for a circular pipe.
Spatial Reference: The spatial reference for a feature class describes its
coordinate system (for example, geographic, UTM, and
State Plane), its spatial domain, and its precision. The
spatial domain is best described as the allowable
coordinate range for x, y coordinates, m- (measure)
values, and z-values. The precision describes the number
of system units per one unit of measure. A spatial
reference with a precision of 1 will store integer values,
while a precision of 1000 will store three decimal places.
Stand-Alone/Modeler: The Haestad Methods software environment, and not the
AutoCAD one.
Starting Elevation: The value that is used as the beginning condition for an
extended period simulation.
Glossary
WaterCAD Users Manual F-913
Status Pane: The area at the bottom of the window used for displaying
status information.
Storage Node: Special type of node where a free water surface exists,
and the hydraulic head is the elevation of the water
surface above sea level.
Table Links: A table link must be created for every database table or
spreadsheet worksheet that is to be linked to the current
model. Any number of Table Links may reference the
same database file.
TCV: Throttle control valve (see Valve Theory on page B-
792)
To Node: Represents a pipes ending node. Positive flow rates are
in the direction of from towards to. Negative flow rates
are in the opposite direction.
To Pipe: The pipe that connects to the downstream side of a valve
or pump.
Total Active Volume: The volume of water between minimum elevation and
maximum elevation of a tank. This is an input value for
variable area tanks.
Total Storage Volume: The holding capacity of a tank. It is the sum of the
maximum hydraulically active storage volume and the
hydraulically inactive storage volume.
Total Needed Fire Flow: If you choose to add the fire flow to the baseline demand,
the Total Needed Fire Flow is equal to the Needed Fire
Flow plus the baseline demand. If you choose not to add
the fire flow to the baseline demand, the Total Needed
Fire Flow is equal to the Needed Fire Flow.
Trace (Source Ident.): Determines what percentage of water at any given point
originated at a chosen tank, reservoir, or junction.
Trials: The maximum value for genetic algorithm trials is
determined by what you set for Stopping Criteria. Note
that you can set a number larger than (Maximum Era
Number)*(Era Generation Number)*(Population Size),
but calculations beyond that number (for this example,
the value is 45,000) are less likely to produce significant
improvements in optimization.
Valve Status: A valve can have several different status conditions:
Closed (no flow under any condition), Active (throttling,
opening, or closing dependent on system pressures and
flows), and Inactive (wide open, with no regulation).
F-914 WaterCAD Users Manual
Velocity: The field that displays the calculated value for a pipe,
valve, or pump velocity at a given time. It is found by
dividing the elements flow rate by its cross-sectional
area.
Vertex: An element in a topological network.
Wall Reaction Coefficient: Defines the rate at which a substance reacts with the wall
of a pipe, and is expressed in units of length/time.
WaterCAD Datastore: The relational database that WaterCAD uses to store
model data. Each WaterCAD project uses two main files
for data storage, the datastore (.MDB) and the WaterCAD
specific data (.WCD).
WaterObjects: The object model used by WaterCAD, which allows for
the extension and customization of the core software
functions.
Water Quality: The field that displays the water quality for the current
time period.
Water Quality Analysis: An analysis that can be one of three types: Age, Trace, or
Constituent.
WaterCAD Users Manual G-915
G
Appendix
References
Benedict, R. P., Fundamentals of Pipe Flow, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York,
1980.
Brater, Ernest F. and Horace W. King, Handbook of Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, New York, 1976.
Cesario, A. Lee, Modeling, Analysis, and Design of Water Distribution Systems,
AWWA, 1995.
Clark, R. M., W. M. Grayman, R. M. Males, and A. F. Hess, Modeling Contaminant
propagation in Drinking Water Distribution Systems, Journal of Environmental
Engineering, ASCE, New York, 1993.
Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering, Fifth Edition, Waterbury, Connect-
icut, Haestad Press, 2002.
CulvertMaster Users Guide, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Methods, 2000.
Essential Hydraulics and Hydrology, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Press, 1998.
FlowMaster PE Version 6.1 Users Guide, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Methods,
2000.
Males R. M., W. M. Grayman and R. M. Clark, Modeling Water Quality in Distribu-
tion System, Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management, ASCE, New
York, 1988.
Practical Guide to Hydraulics and Hydrology, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Press,
1997.
Roberson, John A., John J. Cassidy, and Hanif M. Chaudhry, Hydraulic Engineering,
Houghton Mifflin Company, Massachusetts, 1988.
Roberson, John A. and Clayton T. Crowe, Engineering Fluid Mechanics 4th Edition,
Houghton Mifflin Company, Massachusetts, 1990.
G-916 WaterCAD Users Manual
Rossman, Lewis A., EPANet Users Manual (AWWA Workshop Edition), Risk Reduc-
tion Engineering Laboratory, Office of Research and Development, USEPA, Ohio,
1993.
Rossman, Lewis A. et al., Numerical Methods for Modeling Water Quality in Distri-
bution Systems: A Comparison, Journal of Water Resources Planning and Manage-
ment, ASCE, New York, 1996.
Rossman, Lewis A., R. M. Clark, and W. M. Grayman, Modeling Chlorine Residuals
in Drinking-water Distribution Systems, Journal of Environmental Engineering,
ASCE, New York, 1994.
Sanks, Robert L., Pumping Station Design, Butterworth-Heinemann, Inc., Stoneham,
Massachusetts, 1989.
Streeter, Victor L. and Wylie, E. Benjamin, Fluid Mechanics, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, New York, 1985.
Todini, E. and S. Pilati, A Gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks,
Computer Applications in Water Supply, Volume 1 - Systems Analysis and Simulation,
ed. Bryan Coulbeck and Chun-Hou Orr, Research Studies Press Ltd., Letchworth,
Hertfordshire, England.
Walski, Thomas M., Water System Modeling Using CYBERNET, Waterbury, Connect-
icut, Haestad Methods, 1993.
Zipparro, Vincent J. and Hasen Hans, Davis Handbook of Applied Hydraulics,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1993.
WaterCAD Users Guide Index-917
Index
Symbols
.BAK 555
.MDB 555
.PDF 2
A
abbreviated labels 335
about dialog box 24
accuracy 386
action
rehabilitation 527
actions tab 398
activation 24
active scenario 67
active scenarios 864
active topology 347, 348, 413
active topology alternative 347
address
See contacting Haestad Methods. 30
adjustments
demand 479
advanced options 310
advective transport in pipes 799
aerial view 259
affinity laws 790
age 903
alternative 352
analysis 383
alternative 342, 343
alternatives 102, 339, 340, 366, 853, 854
child 340
editor 343, 359
inheritance 855, 856
manager 341
merge 340
analysis
constituent 384
fire flow 379, 380
hydraulic 371, 372, 373, 780, 781
options 374
toolbar 67
trace 385
water age 383
water quality 383, 384, 385
analysis results report 56, 564
animated pump curve 571
animation options 68, 571, 582, 732
annotation 125, 126, 127, 557, 558
comparison wizard 616
multipliers 238
size 766
annotation wizard 558
Application Maintenance dialog box 25
apply minor losses 713
ArcGIS system requirements 12
assigning costs to model elements 881
attribute
annotation 558
inheritance 856
auto prompting 234
AutoCAD 669
command line 41
commands 678
drawing synchronization 673
DXF 667, 668
element scale 676
entities 678
exporting DXF file 667
importing DXF files 668
importing WaterCAD 685
importing WaterCAD DXF files 667
multiple sessions 226
proxies 685
rebuild figure labels 673
undo/redo 680
AutoCAD mode 32, 669
graphical layout 670
project files 673
toolbars 671
Autodesk 669
B
Index-918 WaterCAD Users Guide
automated skeletonization 687
auto-refresh 71
B
backflow preventer 378
background drawing 667
background DXF (AutoCAD) 667
background layer 36
base 470
base alternative 340, 343
base elevation 903
base scenarios 358, 360
batch run 358, 362, 706
bends
adding to a pipe 769
in AutoCAD 677
benefit 531, 532, 553
cost versus benefit 553
design objectives 532
maximize 546
Pareto 551, 553
pressure 536, 537
total 548
versus cost 551
benefit function 819, 822, 823
dimensionless pressure benefit 823
unitized 824
benefit type 532
benefits
pressure 823
Bentley SELECT 25
Bentley Systems
program update 25
Bentley Water 227
Bernoulli equation 782
bibliography 915
blocks (AutoCAD mode) 661, 667
borders 619
boundary conditions 538
boundary node 903
brake power 832
branch collapsing
See Skelebrator. 690
branch trimming 690, 693, 710
build number 24
building cost scenarios 876
bulk flow reactions 801
bulk reaction 630
coefficient 903
buttons
online help topic navigation 63
C
C coefficient 795, 904
calculation 367, 368, 385
options 385
problem summary report 566
results status 71
unready 903
calibration 375, 469
calibration adjustment groups dialog 486
calibration export to scenario dialog 475
calibration field data observation dialog 481
calibration field data set dialog 478
calibration field data sets dialog 480
calibration group selection dialog 253
calibration groups 486
calibration manager 469
calibration options 488, 489
calibration options formulae 492
calibration results statistics 477
calibration solutions 474
calibrations 474
capital 863, 865
cost 495
cost manager 496, 497
cost warnings report 512
unit cost function 505
capital cost alternative 357
capital cost estimating overview 863
capital cost reports 509
certification 899
change pipe width 677
characteristic curve
pump 790
pumps 789, 790
check data 376
check valve 792, 904
chemical analysis 384
Chezys equation 794, 797
child 342, 343, 470, 856
alternative 340
scenario 358, 857
Cholesky 788
C
WaterCAD Users Guide Index-919
CivilProjects.com 900
CivilQuiz.com 901
ClientCare 29
clipboard
copy table 338
copy to 69
coefficient 912
roughness 912
coefficients
engineers reference 809
Colebrook-White
equation 794
typical values 810
collapsing branch
See Skelebrator. 690
color coding 114, 127, 128, 561, 562, 619, 766,
767
column
allow duplicate 329
change units 766
heading 335
table customization 334
command line (AutoCAD Only) 41
commands (AutoCAD mode) 678
common user access 233
compare scenarios 617
composite logical action dialog 409
composite logical condition dialog 405
composite minor loss 278
concentration 384
concentration limit 630
conditions tab 397
configuration 232
conjugate gradient method 788
connection 633, 634, 635
database 640
editing 639
hiding 646
management 636
shapefile 650
sharing 646
synchronization 673, 674
connectivity tolerance 664
conservation
of mass & energy 783
consider pressure benefit 537
constant horsepower pump 791
constant power pump 284, 791
constituent 630, 904
alternative 352, 354
analysis 384
baseline load 348, 352
library 630
pattern 353
source 352, 367
constituents
reactions 801
construction costs 309
construction costs table 309
contacting Haestad Methods
e-mail 30
fax 30
hours 30
mail 30
sales 29
technical support 29
telephone 30
context menu 904
contour 599, 600, 601
plan view 568
smoothing 601
contour labeling 602
control 299, 300
status 904
valve 792
controls tab 396
copy to clipboard 69
Darwin Designer 548
table 338
cost 495, 496, 831, 834, 835, 863, 864, 865, 866
alternative 357
analysis 495, 496
design 548
manager 496
new pipe 523
rehabilitation 523, 548
total 548
unit cost function 505
cost adjustments 864
cost alternatives 864
cost function 885
cost manager 864
button section 497
center pane 498
left pane 498
cost reports 864
cost tab 307
cost warnings report 512
D
Index-920 WaterCAD Users Guide
cost-benefit trade-off 819
costs
globally editing 866
new pipe 523
creating a new logical control 393
creating scenarios 762
crosshair
location 70
CUA 233
CulvertMaster 898
cursor location 70
curve
pump 284, 285, 287, 789, 790, 791
curved pipes 769
custom AutoCAD entities 678
custom extended
pump 791
custom sort 332
customize
database 636, 637
drawing 237, 239, 672
labels 335
libraries 625
tables 334
cut probability 491
D
daily energy cost summary section 315
Darcy Weisbach
Colebrook-White equation 794
equation 795, 796
roughness values 810
Darwin 469
Darwin calibration 472
Darwin Calibrator 469
Darwin Calibrator methodology 814
Darwin Calibrator troubleshooting tips 763
Darwin Designer 513
cost-benefit trade-off 819
graphing 548
how to 513
least cost 819
maximum benefit 819
report 548
Darwin Designer genetic algorithm 819
Darwin Designer methodology 819
Darwin Designer theory 819
Darwin manager 469
data
check 376
entry 73, 316, 856, 857
organization 339
validation 376
data scrubbing 690, 692
database 633, 634, 635
export 637, 638, 639
import 637, 638, 639
ODBC 643, 644, 645
synchronization options 641
table link editor 641
database connection 633, 640
editor 639
example 647
manager 636
ODBC 645
standard 637, 638, 639
dead-end pipes 690
decay
second order 802
simple first order 802
default 316
delete
elements 254, 676
table 326
delete selection set 256
demand 294
alternative 348, 349
graph 572
multipliers 390
demand adjustments 479
demand import dialog box 296
demand management 424
demand multiplier 535
design constraints 824
design costs 522
design event 517
adding 519
design event editor 533
design event name 518
design events 542
design group 519
adding 520
editing 520
name 520
design groups 542, 548
design option group 519
E
WaterCAD Users Guide Index-921
design point 284, 791
design run 540
computing 546
design studies 513
design study 514
design type tab 531
design variables
Darwin Designer 820
designer data verification summary 556
detailed report 564
diffusivity 630
dimensionless benefit 532, 823
dimensionless pressure benefit 823
discharge 378, 905
dispersion 799
display precision 245
display tips 765
change units in a column 766
color code elements 766
control element/label sizing 766
dissolved substance in pipes 799
dominant pipe criteria 711, 715
downstream elements selection 270
drafting 254, 618
drag 905
drawing 253
options 231, 237
pane 34, 35
preview 666
review 262, 263, 662
scale 237
setup (AutoCAD mode) 672
synchronization (AutoCAD mode) 673
DWG 223, 673
DXF 667
exporting from WaterCAD 667
import 667, 668
properties 37
dynamic attributes 567
dynamic inheritance 854, 855
E
edit elements 677
editable 356
editable table columns 330, 331
editing elements 253, 767
efficiency
pump 832
efficiency settings section 314
efficiency summary section 316
EGL 783
element 269, 270, 676
annotation 557
deleting 254, 676
editing 45, 46, 71, 270, 676
find 257
labeling 267, 767
modify 676
morphing 250
moving 254, 679
numbering 265, 767
scale (AutoCAD mode) 45, 676
search 257
selection 251, 252, 255, 266
type 250
visibility 239
element detailed cost report 510
element properties 675
element selector
Darwin Designer 550
elevation 903, 905, 909
base 903
input mode 236
maximum 909
minimum 347
spot 603
e-mail 30
e-mail address 30
energy 831, 833, 834, 835
conservation 783, 784
equation 782
grade line 783, 905
pricing 358
principle 781
energy cost alternative 357, 358
energy cost manager 500
energy cost theory 831
energy pricing editor 504
energy pricing manager 503
energy tab 313
engineering forums 901
engineering library 625, 627
constituent 630
editor 627
liquid 629
manager 626
F
Index-922 WaterCAD Users Guide
material 627, 628
minor loss 628, 629
enhanced pressure contours 602
enter key behavior 232, 233
entering data for multiple elements 866
entering fire flow test results 482
entities
change into pipe 681
in AutoCAD 678
to pipes 681
entity conversion 681
EPANET
import 747
EPS 372
analysis 372, 373
equally distributed 694, 712
equations 779
equivalent pipe method 711, 715
era generations number 490
error messages 376
results report 368
error.log 30
ESRI 633, 634, 658
export shapefile 655
import shapefile 652
shapefile connection 650
estimate 906, 909
example projects 28
lessons 73
tutorials 28
Excel 424
exclamation point in circle 188
existing loads 694
exit WaterCAD 45
explode elements (AutoCAD mode) 679
export 44, 420
database 636, 637, 638, 639
DXF 667
profiles in AutoCAD 615
shapefile 655, 656, 657
shapefile link editor 656
spot elevations 748
table to ASCII 338
export to scenario 547, 554
exporting a submodel 227
extended edit button 906
extended period analysis 372
lesson 2 93
external files 906
extrapolate 906
F
F1 2
factor
relative speed 285
favorites 61
fax 30
field
links 643, 906
share 321
field data import 483
file format update 555
file management 223
filter tables 333
find element 257
find logical action dialog 411
find logical condition dialog 411
find logical control dialog 410
find row 330
fire flow 305, 306, 482
alternative 354, 355, 356
analysis 379, 380
input 306, 307
results 307, 380
theory 379
fire flow dialog 383
fire flow upper limit 909
fire hydrants 753
fire hydrants as flow emitters 756
first order
saturation growth 802
simple decay 802
fitness 474, 548
fitness tolerance 472
fitness type 488, 489
fitting loss coefficients 798, 813
fittings library 628
FlexTables 323, 868
FlexUnits 244, 245
table 246
flow 909
arrow visibility 239
flow constraints 537, 549
flow control valve 792
flow emitters 378, 756
flow per fitness point 488
G
WaterCAD Users Guide Index-923
FlowMaster 898
footer 567
format 245
user data 318, 319
formulas 809
forums 901
friction method theory 235
from node 909
from pipe 909
function editor
Darwin Designer 531
function manager
Darwin Designer 529
G
GA 469, 817, 818, 828, 829
Gaussian elimination method 789
general purpose valve 346, 351
general status information 70
general tab 630
genetic algorithm
Darwin Designer 819
genetic algorithms 469, 818, 828, 829, 830
calibration tips 476
methodology 814
optimized calibration 471, 818
optimized calibration advanced options 490
global edit 331
global options 232, 233, 234
global settings 223
glossary 27
GO button 377
GPV 346, 351
GPV valve data 420
grade line
energy 783
hydraulic 783
gradient algorithm 785
derivation 785
graph dialog box
Darwin Designer 551
graph setup 573
graphic annotation 52, 618
graphical editor 247
graphical layout
AutoCAD 670
Stand-Alone 247
graphically 253
groundwater well 750
group name
rehabilitation 522
grouping elements 251
selection sets 255
H
Haestad forums 901
Haestad Methods
about us 895
accreditations 900
certification 899
continuing education 899
e-mail addresses 30
program update 25
publications 899
software 895
training 899
Web site 30
Haestad Methods Knowledge Base 762
Haestad Press 899
Haestad.Gems.ImportExportUtilities.exe 421
Haestad.log 30
HAMMER 415
hard disk 11
Hazen-Williams equation 795
coefficients 812
roughness values 811
head 378
head per fitness point 488
head-discharge points 293
header 567
headloss 909
coefficient 629
headloss gradient 909
help 73
button 57
menu 57
tutorial 28
tutorials 28
See also online help.
HGL 783, 909
input mode 236
HGL setting 909
hide button 58
hide results 547
I
Index-924 WaterCAD Users Guide
horse power (pump) 284
how to
use Darwin Designer 513
hydrant curve 570
hydrants 753
hydrants as flow emitters 756
hydraulic analysis 372
hydraulic equivalency 695
hydraulic grade 909
hydraulic grade line 783
hydraulic grade setting 909
hydraulically close tanks 753
hydropneumatic tank 750
I
impeller 790
Import
WaterCAD 685
import 43, 44, 227, 420
command 225
Cybernet 740, 741, 742, 743, 745, 746
database 637
database and shapefile data created in v3 748
DXF files into AutoCAD 667, 668
EPANET 747
KYPIPE 747
polyline to pipe 43
shapefile link editor 654
spot elevations 748
submodels 43
WaterCAD 43, 44, 45, 685
import/export tips 740
importing demands 295
importing patterns 390
inactive elements 334
inactive pipes 556
inactive volume 909
importing from EPANET 747
include active topology 334
include in cost calculation 308
independent papers 899
index 59
inflow 909
inheritance 854, 855, 909
dynamic 855
overriding 855
initial settings 909
alternative 349
initial water quality 909
input 253
data 269
modes 236
quick view 268
insert
elements 250
nodes 250
intermediate node removal 691
interpolate 909
inventory 565
invert 909
J
junction condition editor 718
junction-pressure constraint 825
justification 567
K
K coefficients 628, 813
kinematic viscosity 629
knowledge base 762
knowledgebase 25
KYPIPE 747
KYPIPE import 747
L
label 909
abbreviate 335
elements 266, 267, 767
rebuilding (AutoCAD mode) 673
sizing 766
visibility 239
Lagrangian transport algorithm 805
laws
affinity 790
conservation of mass and energy 783
layer 239, 666, 675
layout 75, 76, 77, 78
AutoCAD 670
network 248
pipe using entity 681
M
WaterCAD Users Guide Index-925
least cost 819
legend 53, 618, 619
quick view 268
length 909
level 903
mode 236
Levenberg-Marquardt method 792
library
constituent 630
editor 627
engineering 625, 627
liquid 629
manager 626
material 627
minor loss 628
light 909
messages 909
line 619
linear system equation solver 788
linear theory method 785
link color coding 561, 766
liquid 236
library 629, 630
load boundary conditions 540
load distribution strategy 710, 712
local
units 336
local units 336
log files 30
logical 300
logical control 299, 300, 301
dialog box 399
manager 395
set alternative 351
set editor 413
sets dialog 412
logical control:
See operational controls alternative.
logical controls
operation 395
overview 391
loop retaining sensitivity 709
loop-based algorithms 785
losses
friction 235, 676, 787, 795
minor 789, 793, 798
M
mail 30
manager 343
Mannings coefficient 909
Mannings equation 797
roughness values 809
typical values 812
manual calibration 473
manual fire flow scenarios 381
manual fire flow scenarios dialog 382
manual selection 542, 543, 545
manual skeletonization 698, 705
mass conservation 783
material 909
library 627
material editor
Darwin Designer 526
maximize benefit 532
maximum
era number 490
extended operating point 284, 909
increment 471
number of removal levels 714
number of trimming levels 710
operating point 284, 909
trials 472
maximum benefit 819
maximum trials 545
memory 749
menu 39, 41, 52
context 904
shortcut keys 40
toolbars 39, 40
merge 226, 227, 342, 343
alternatives 341, 342
merge
alternatives 340
submodel 226
merging pipes by 713
merging pipes of the same diameter 713
messages 311, 909
light 909
metric 245
microstation 667
minimize cost 532
minimum
allowed value 246
increment 471
N
Index-926 WaterCAD Users Guide
system junction 909
system pressure 903
zone pressure 903
minor loss element 344, 346
minor loss strategy 715
minor losses 789, 793, 798
fitting 813
properties 628
mix units in a tabular report 336
mode
AutoCAD 32
input 236
scaled 237
schematic 237
Stand-Alone 32
Stand-Alone/AutoCAD 32
model 269, 270, 371
modeler definition 909
modeling fire hydrants as flow emitters 756
modeling tips 749, 758
modeling variable speed pumps 758
morphing elements 250
motor
pump 831, 832, 837
mouse tips 768
move
elements 254, 679
labels 679
moving element labels and annotation 268
multi segmented polyline 768
multi-objective trade-off 532
multiple 378, 761
pump curve 791, 792
units 336, 337
multiple point pump 791
multiple sessions 226
multipliers 238
mutation probability 490
N
Named Views 260
native AutoCAD entities converting 661, 681
network hydraulics theory 780
network walking algorithm 698
new base 470
new calibration 470, 471
new child 470
new logical action dialog 407
new logical condition dialog 400
new multiple design groups 519
new pipe cost 523
Darwin Designer 821
new pipe costs 523
See also design option groups
nodal demand vector 786
node 903, 909
boundary 903
color coding 561, 766
from 909
node costs 884
non-construction costs 889, 890
non-continuable protection violation 749
non-convergence 372
non-improvement generations 472, 545
northing/easting mode 236
notation
scientific 245
number
of digits after decimal point 244
Reynolds 911
O
objective type 531
ODBC 643
online book 2
See also .PDF.
online forums 901
online help 57
favorites tab 61
index tab 59
navigation buttons 63
previous/next buttons 63
related topics 59, 62
search tab 60
showing contents 58
topics 62
using 58
open database connectivity 643
operating point 286
operating range section 297
operational alternative 351
operational controls alternative 351
optimized calibration 472
options 69
P
WaterCAD Users Guide Index-927
calculation 385
design run 545
drawing 237
global 232
graph 621, 622, 623
project 235
options groups tab 522
Oracle 230
organize data 339
orphaning of pipes 692
out of memory 749
outflow 909
output 557
quickview 268
tables 323
override defaults 537, 538
override scenario demand alternative 535
overview 469, 500
P
parallel 378, 761
parallel pipes 751
modeling 751
removal 696, 714
parallel pumps 752
parent 343
parent alternative 341, 342
parent scenario 358, 361, 364, 365
Pareto optimal defined 553
pareto plot 551
pattern 387
demand 389, 390
demand multipliers 389
extended period analysis 373, 390
pattern editor 389
pattern graph 572
time steps 389
peak demand summary section 315
physical alternative 344
physical alternative editor for GPVs 346
physical properties 344
pipe 271, 909
adding vertices 769
advective transport 799
align text with pipe 239
condition editor 717
diameter 713
dissolved substance 799
fittings 628
from 909
layout using entity 681
length 909
length rounding 235, 236
material 909
merging 691
merging same diameters 713
parallel 751
splitting 250
text 239
tool 53, 249
pipe controls 420
pipe cost
adding 524
editing 524
pipe costs 882
report 512
pipe count
design group 520
rehabilitation 522
pipe option group 525
adding 526
pipe size usage plot 551
pipe-size constraint 824
plan view reports 566
plot
Darwin Designer 548
polyline
conversion problem 666
polyline to pipe conversion 661
wizard 663
population size 490
power 285, 287
brake 832
water 831
precision display 245, 246
predefined reports 563
preserve network integrity 708
pressure
head 782, 783
mode 236
pressure benefit
coefficient 532
exponent 532
pressure benefits
Darwin Designer 823
pressure breaker valve 792
Q
Index-928 WaterCAD Users Guide
pressure constraints 536, 549
pressure improvement 824
pressure sustaining valve 792
pressurized tank 750
preview 621
skeletonization 703
print 42, 45, 69
preview 69
preview window 621
setup 42
table 338
problem solving 739
processor 11
profile 56, 604
plot 615
setup 614
program maintenance 25
project
example 28
files 223, 224, 225, 673
options 231, 235
settings 223
summary 42, 232
title 231, 232
project detailed cost report 511
project element summary cost report 511
project summary cost report 511
ProjectWise 42
proportional to coalesced pipe attributes 694
proportional to dominant criteria 712
proportional to existing load 712
protected elements manager 707
prototype 316, 866
prototypes 269
proxies 685
pump 273, 274, 752
affinity laws 789
constant horsepower 791
curve 284, 287, 789, 790, 791, 792
custom extended 791
definition 284
efficiency 288, 832
groundwater well 750
head definition 285
impeller 790
importing from EPANET 747
initial condition 285
initial settings 349
motor 831, 832, 837
multiple point 791
operating point 286, 789, 790, 791
parallel 752
power 284
series 752
static head 790
static lift 789
theory 789
three point 791, 837
type 791
variable speed 790
pump controls 420
pump curve 285
pump definitions 420
pump efficiency section 314
pump station costs 887
pumps 378, 761
789
Q
quick attribute selector 40
quick edit window 50
quick selection set dialog 414
R
RAM 11
random seed 490
reaction rates tab 631
reactions
bulk flow 801
read-only 356
rebuild figure labels 673
recent files 42
red circle 188
redefine WaterCAD blocks 667
redo 45, 46, 47, 65, 680
reference
engineers 809
references 915
references and textbooks 899
refresh 71
registration 24, 57
regulating valves 793
rehab groups 544, 549
rehabilitation action 527
S
WaterCAD Users Guide Index-929
rehabilitation cost 523
adding 526
editing 526
rehabilitation group 521
adding 520
editing 520
rehabilitation option group
defining 526
rehabilitation pipe cost
Darwin Designer 821
relabel elements 264
relabel operations 265
related topics 59
defined 62
relative speed factor 285, 911
remove
columns 328
elements 254
remove orphaned nodes 709
removing color coding from labels imported
from pre-v3.5 files 767
repaint 71
report
Darwin Designer 548
reports 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 557, 567
analysis results 564
detailed 563, 564
menu 56
plan view 566
predefined 563
project inventory 565
scenario 565
tabular 565
representative scenario 517
reservoirs 273
residual pressure 911
resize to fit 548
results 557
Darwin Designer 546
getting results from Darwin Designer 546
review drawing 262
Reynolds number 911
rotate labels (AutoCAD mode) 239, 676
roughness
Chezys equation 794
coefficient 627, 628, 809
Colebrook-White equation 794
Darcy-Weisbach equation 795
Hazen-Williams equation 795
Mannings equation 797
roughness height 794, 796, 810
roughness values 809
Colebrook-White 810
Darcy-Weisbach 810
Hazen-Williams 811
Mannings 809
typical 812
rounding 245
pipe length 236
RPBP valves 275
rule based 300, 301, 395
running the model 377
S
sales 29
sample projects 28
saturation growth
first order 802
save 42, 43, 45, 65
as 42, 43, 44, 45
as drawing *.DWG 674
SCADA 885
scale 237
elements (AutoCAD mode) 676
scaled mode 237
scenario 56, 358, 362, 616, 617, 854
alternatives 102, 103, 105, 106, 107, 110,
366
analysis toolbar 67
base 358
batch run 362
calculation 367
child 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 854
comparison 108, 110, 616
editor 359
inheritance 854, 855, 857
lesson 3 102
management 339
results 368, 369
selection 359
summary report 565
scenario control center 360
scenario dataset wizard 241
scenario management 48, 102, 339, 360, 361,
849
example 858
S
Index-930 WaterCAD Users Guide
schema
Darwin Designer 555
format 555
schema definition 912
schematic mode 237
scientific notation 246
scrubbing
See Skelebrator. 690
search for elements 257
second order
decay 802
second-order decay 802
section 297
select 52, 253
by selection set 255
element types 652
elements 46, 47, 48, 251, 252
field links 643
layer 675
text style 675
select from drawing 253
selection 253
selection set 256
dialog box 256, 487
general 255
manager 49, 255
selection set dialog 487
selection tool 52
series pipe merging
See Skelebrator. 691
series pipe removal 691, 694, 711
series pumps 752
set field options 244, 556
setup 232, 672
drawing options 237
project options 235
prototypes 316
SewerCAD 897
SewerGEMS 2005
system requirements 11
SewerTalk 901
shapefile 648, 649, 650, 651, 652, 653, 654
format 658
properties 37
shapefile connection 648, 649, 650, 652, 653,
654
editor 649
example 658
export example 657
export wizard 655
import example 654
import wizard 652
link wizard 651
manager 648
wizard 648, 649
shapefile connections
sharing between projects 658
share fields 321
shortcut keys 39, 40
show button 58
show results 547
shutoff point 284
simple 300
simple control dialog box 300
simple first-order decay 802
simple logical action dialog 407
simple logical condition dialog 401
simultaneous path adjustment method 785
single element selection dialog 252
size elements (AutoCAD) 676
Skelebrator 692
batch run 706
branch trimming 693, 710
conditions and tolerances 716
data scrubbing 692
junction condition editor 718
manual skeletonization 705
parallel pipes removal 696, 714
pipe condition editor 717
protected elements manager 707
recommended practices 719
series pipe removal 694, 711
skeletonization
preview 703
skeletonization manager 700
skeletonization preview 697
troubleshooting 719
using 699
what it does 698
skeletonization 687
branch trimming 690
data scrubbing 690
example 688
manager 700
network walking algorithm 698
series pipe removal 691
Skelebrator 692
techniques 689
T
WaterCAD Users Guide Index-931
See also Skelebrator.
skeletonization preview 703
smoothing contours 601
snap menu (AutoCAD mode) 680
software
upgrades 25
solutions 474, 475
solutions to keep 546
solutions to modeling problems 749
sort
custom 332
tables 332
source
tracing 385
sparse matrix 785, 788, 789
speed 378, 761
splice probability 491
splitting pipes 250
spot elevations 603, 748
stand-alone definition 912
Stand-Alone mode 32
standard database import/export 637
standard extended pump 791
static head
pump 790
static lift
pump 789
station 378, 761
status 70, 71
bar 39, 70, 71
log 623
statuses
initial settings 909
steady state analysis 372
sticky tools 234
Stieltjes 788
stopping criteria 545
storage volume 909
active 913
inactive 909
StormCAD 897
StormTalk 901
stretch 254
submodel 226
submodel import 226
suggestions 30
support 29
addresses 30
hours 30
Swamee and Jain equation 796
symbol
size multiplier 238
visibility 239
visibility (AutoCAD mode) 672
synchronize 649
database links 636
options 641
via ODBC 645
synchronize (AutoCAD mode) 673
synchronized units 336
system
international 233, 245
system cost adjustments table 498
system head curve dialog 569
system operating point 789
system requirements 11
for ArcGIS 12
T
table 323, 329
change units 335
copy to clipboard 338
customization 334
editing 325
export to ASCII file 338
filtering 333, 334
FlexUnits 246
manager 324
mixing units 336
navigation 330
print 338
print preview 338
properties 327
setup 326
type 327
tabular 56
tabular report 323
tabular report window 569
tank 272
curve 572
hydraulically close 753
hydropneumatic 750
importing from EPANET 747
mixing model 353
pressurized 750
tank cross sections 420
U
Index-932 WaterCAD Users Guide
technical journals 899
technical support 29
text 679
style 675
text height 238
FAQ 766
multiplier 238
theory 779, 835
network hydraulics 781
valve 792
three point pump 791, 837
throttle control valve 792
time condition 301
T-intersections 664
title
project 231, 232
tolerance 264
tool pane 64, 232
toolbar 40, 671
analysis 67, 68
and shortcut keys 39
buttons 64
top feed/bottom gravity discharge tank 755
top solutions 546
topics
online help 62
topology 376, 785
total active volume 913
total benefit 548
total cost 548
totalizing flow meters 568
trace
alternative 354
trace alternative 354
trace analysis 385
training 899
transient 415
transport algorithm 805
transport in pipes 799
TRex 682
TRex terrain extractor 682
trimming
See Skelebrator. 690
troubleshooting
Darwin Designer 556
knowledge database 25
tutorials 28, 57, 73
lessons 73
two-component second-order decay 802
type coercion 634
U
U.S. customary units 233, 245
undo 45, 46, 71
undo/redo operations in AutoCAD 680
unit conversion 634
unit cost 505
data table 508
function formula 508
function manager 506
table coefficients 509
unit cost functions 864, 868, 870, 871
unit system 233, 246
unit system status 70
unitized average pressure 824
unitized benefit 532
unitized pressure benefit 824
units 233, 246, 556, 766
change in a column 766
local 336
synchronized 336
update file format 513, 555
updates 57
updating via the Web 25
upgrade 25
upstream node demand proportion 712
usage 628
use 50/50 split 715
use equivalent pipes 711, 715
use ignore minor losses 715
use skip pipe if minor loss > max 715
user data 316, 317
alternative 357
user data extensions 415
user defined time series 574
user memos 311
user-data extension, zone manager 269
user-defined ratio 694, 712
user-defined time steps 574
using Skelebrator 699
V
validation 376
valve 275, 276, 904
W
WaterCAD Users Guide Index-933
characteristics 291
check 904
importing from EPANET 747
theory 792
valves
RPBP 275
Variable 378, 761
variable frequency drive 311, 758, 835
variable frequency drives 831
variable speed pump 835
curve equations 790
efficiency 833
theory 835
VSP tab 311
See also VSP.
variable speed pumps 790, 833
velocity
head 783
verification report 556
verification summary 556
version number 24
vertices
adding to a pipe 769
VFD 311, 758, 831, 835
view
menu 50
tabular 323
viewing cost results 877
visibility of symbols 239, 672
volume 909
inactive 909
total active 913
VSP 311, 378, 759, 760, 761, 831, 836, 837,
838, 839
VSPs 378, 761
W
walk 615
pipe and node 615
selection 616
wall reaction 630
warning
Darwin Designer 188
water main 753
water power 831
water quality
analysis options 386
water quality theory 799
WaterCAD 896
custom AutoCAD entities 678
elements 269
main window 33
theory 779
WaterCAD engineering library modules 626
WaterCAD in AutoCAD 669
files 673
WaterGEMS 896
WaterTalk 901
WCD file 223, 224, 225, 673
Web site 30
Web updates 25
welcome dialog 57, 232, 233
well 750
groundwater 750
well groundwater 751
white 356
white table columns 330
wizards 558, 655
annotation comparison 616, 617
polyline to pipe 661, 663
project setup 231
shapefile connection 648, 649
shapefile link 651
workshops 28
World Wide Web
See Web. 25
X
X - Y mode 236
X coordinate 236
Y
Y coordinate 236
yellow 356
Z
zone 322
manager 322
zoom 50, 65, 66, 257, 258
Zoom Next 258
Z
Index-934 WaterCAD Users Guide
Zoom to Selection 258